WO2013077051A1 - Wireless base station, communication system, communication control method and communication control program - Google Patents

Wireless base station, communication system, communication control method and communication control program Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2013077051A1
WO2013077051A1 PCT/JP2012/071715 JP2012071715W WO2013077051A1 WO 2013077051 A1 WO2013077051 A1 WO 2013077051A1 JP 2012071715 W JP2012071715 W JP 2012071715W WO 2013077051 A1 WO2013077051 A1 WO 2013077051A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
base station
radio base
radio
station apparatus
handover
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2012/071715
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
村上憲一
山本剛史
岡田洋侍
山本裕嗣
田中義三
Original Assignee
住友電気工業株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2012092630A external-priority patent/JP5263563B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2012092629A external-priority patent/JP6111529B2/en
Application filed by 住友電気工業株式会社 filed Critical 住友電気工業株式会社
Publication of WO2013077051A1 publication Critical patent/WO2013077051A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/24Reselection being triggered by specific parameters
    • H04W36/30Reselection being triggered by specific parameters by measured or perceived connection quality data
    • H04W36/302Reselection being triggered by specific parameters by measured or perceived connection quality data due to low signal strength

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a radio base station apparatus, a communication system, a communication control method, and a communication control program, and in particular, a radio base station apparatus in a communication system in which a radio terminal apparatus can communicate with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation.
  • the present invention relates to a communication system, a communication control method, and a communication control program.
  • a communication service is provided by a radio base station apparatus (hereinafter also referred to as a macro base station) that forms an area in which a cell having a radius of several hundred meters to several tens of kilometers, that is, a radio terminal apparatus can communicate. It was.
  • a radio base station apparatus hereinafter also referred to as a macro base station
  • the radius of the femto cell formed by this small base station (hereinafter also referred to as a femto base station) is as small as about 10 meters, so the femto base station is the macro cell formed by the macro base station. It may be used in places such as indoors and underground malls where it is out of service area and it is difficult to install macro base stations.
  • femto base stations since many femto base stations are installed in a specific area, it is difficult to connect the femto base stations directly to the core network. For this reason, it is conceivable that a large number of femto base stations installed in a specific area are once connected to a gateway device such as a HeNB-GW, and the femto base station and the core network are connected via the HeNB-GW.
  • a gateway device such as a HeNB-GW
  • a pico base station that forms a pico cell with a radius of 100 to 200 meters, for example, has been developed based on a macro base station.
  • Non-Patent Document 1 In a heterogeneous network that is a communication system in which such femto base stations, pico base stations, and macro base stations are mixed, for example, a plurality of femto cells or pico cells are formed in a macro cell. For this reason, handover of a radio terminal device is likely to occur, and the situation of handover is complicated, so that an inappropriate handover operation is performed such as the timing of handover being too early or too late (For example, see 3GPP TR 36.902 V9.3.1 2011.3 (Non-Patent Document 1)).
  • Non-Patent Document 1 When an inappropriate handover operation as described in Non-Patent Document 1 is performed, various problems such as communication interruption and increase in communication traffic occur in the communication system. A technique for suppressing such an inappropriate handover operation and constructing a good communication system is desired.
  • the present invention has been made to solve the above-described problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a radio base station apparatus capable of stabilizing communication by appropriately controlling a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus, A communication system, a communication control method, and a communication control program are provided.
  • a radio base station apparatus transmits a radio signal to / from a radio terminal apparatus in a communication system in which the radio terminal apparatus can communicate with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation.
  • a radio base station apparatus for transmitting and receiving, a received power information acquisition unit for acquiring received power information indicating a measurement result of received power of a radio signal from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus, and the reception
  • a reception quality information acquisition unit for acquiring reception quality information that is updated at a shorter cycle than the power information and indicates reception quality of a radio signal from its own radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus, and acquisition of the reception quality information Based on the reception quality information acquired by the mobile station, the handover operation from the radio base station apparatus to another radio base station apparatus by the radio terminal apparatus
  • a handover operation determination unit for determining whether to perform.
  • the configuration using the reception quality information whose update cycle is shorter than the reception power information makes it possible to follow a sudden change in the radio wave environment.
  • the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late.
  • Generation of “Late HO” can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to quickly execute the handover operation to the neighboring base station and prevent the radio link between the radio terminal device and the radio base station device from being disconnected. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
  • the handover operation determination unit performs the handover operation based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit and the reception power information acquired by the reception power information acquisition unit. Determine whether to execute.
  • the configuration using the received power information in addition to the reception quality information for determining the execution of the handover operation makes it possible to grasp the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device in more detail and more appropriately determine the execution of the handover operation.
  • the radio base station apparatus further includes a condition setting unit for changing a reception power information creation condition based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit. Prepare.
  • condition setting unit detects deterioration of the reception quality from the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit, the condition setting unit shortens the update period of the reception power information.
  • the update timing of the received power information can be advanced according to the deterioration of the reception quality of the wireless terminal device, so that the information for determining the execution of the handover operation follows the sudden change in the radio wave environment. Can be acquired quickly.
  • the reception power information is generated when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the condition setting unit receives the reception power information from the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit.
  • the start condition is set so that the creation of the received power information is started earlier.
  • the handover operation determination unit determines to execute the handover operation when the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit satisfies a predetermined condition, and the wireless terminal device A handover operation from its own radio base station apparatus to a predetermined radio base station apparatus is executed.
  • a handover operation can be quickly performed without requesting the wireless terminal device to change a reception power information creation condition. Can do.
  • the handover operation determining unit determines to which radio base station apparatus the handover operation is to be executed based on the received power information acquired by the received power information acquiring unit.
  • the handover operation determination unit determines to execute the handover operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and sets the predetermined condition based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit To do.
  • the handover operation determining unit determines to execute the handover operation when the received power information acquired by the received power information acquiring unit satisfies a predetermined condition, and the received quality information acquiring unit The predetermined condition is adjusted on the basis of the reception quality information acquired by the above.
  • the handover operation can be quickly executed without waiting for timing.
  • the handover operation determination unit includes the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit, the reception power information acquired by the reception power information acquisition unit, and the reception quality information. It is determined whether or not to execute the handover operation based on at least one of the time elapsed since the update and the time elapsed since the reception power information was updated.
  • the configuration in which the update elapsed time of the information indicating the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device is used for determination of execution of the handover operation can suppress erroneous determination due to old information and perform execution determination of the handover operation more appropriately.
  • the handover operation determination unit performs the handover operation based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit and the reception power information acquired by the reception power information acquisition unit. It is determined whether or not to execute, and the weight of the reception quality information in determining whether or not to execute the handover operation is adjusted based on the reception power information.
  • the value of the reception quality information can be appropriately evaluated based on the reception power information, so that the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device can be grasped more accurately and the execution determination of the handover operation can be performed more appropriately. be able to.
  • the handover operation determining unit determines whether or not to execute the handover operation based on the reception quality information for a plurality of times.
  • a radio base station apparatus is a radio base station apparatus that communicates with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses in a communication system that can communicate with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation.
  • a radio base station apparatus that transmits and receives signals and operates according to a communication protocol having a plurality of layers, and in accordance with a first layer of the plurality of layers, a radio signal measurement result from the radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus
  • a first measurement information acquisition unit for acquiring first measurement information based on the second base layer and a second layer lower than the first layer among the plurality of layers, from the radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus
  • a second measurement information acquisition unit for acquiring second measurement information based on a measurement result of the radio signal; and the second measurement information acquired by the second measurement information acquisition unit.
  • Based on the measurement information, and a handover operation determination unit for determining whether to perform the handover operation from the radio terminal apparatus own radio base station apparatus according to another radio base station apparatus.
  • the configuration for performing the handover operation execution determination using lower layer information can reduce the acquisition time of the information for determining the handover operation execution. And appropriate execution judgment becomes possible. That is, since it becomes possible to follow a sudden change in the radio wave environment, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late. As a result, the handover operation to the neighboring base station can be quickly executed, and the radio link between the radio terminal device and the radio base station device can be prevented from being disconnected. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
  • the first layer is an RRC (Radio Resource Control) layer specified by 3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project), and the second layer is a MAC (Media Access Control) specified by 3GPP. Control) layer and / or PHY (Physical) layer.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MAC Media Access Control
  • PHY Physical
  • the radio base station apparatus further requests the other radio base station apparatus to perform a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus from its own radio base station apparatus to another radio base station apparatus.
  • a handover request unit for performing the handover operation from the own radio base station apparatus to the other radio base station apparatus to the radio terminal apparatus.
  • a handover instructing unit for giving an instruction to perform communication, and the handover instructing unit receives the response, and a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied If not, the provision of the instruction to the wireless terminal device is stopped or suspended.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed prior to the determination of the execution of the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. it can. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be further suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed.
  • the handover request unit makes the request to the plurality of other radio base station devices.
  • the radio terminal apparatus related to the peripheral base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal apparatus after completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain peripheral base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent communication between the apparatus and the radio base station apparatus from being interrupted.
  • the handover operation preparation process with other neighboring base stations is completed, so the handover operation is performed. It is possible to prevent repeated transmission and reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation cancellation process, and to reduce the load on the communication system.
  • the handover instruction unit receives the response, selects a handover destination radio base station device from the other radio base station devices corresponding to the response, and transmits the response to the radio terminal device.
  • An instruction to perform the handover operation is given to the handover destination radio base station apparatus.
  • the amount of information is larger than when a plurality of radio base station apparatuses are presented in the instruction.
  • the instruction content can be simplified.
  • the handover instruction unit acquires a measurement result of received power in the radio terminal device of a radio signal transmitted from the other radio base station device corresponding to the response.
  • the handover destination radio base station apparatus is selected based on the measurement result.
  • the handover instruction unit excludes the other radio base station apparatus corresponding to the measurement result that cannot be acquired for a predetermined period from the handover destination candidates.
  • a radio base station apparatus that is far away from the radio terminal apparatus to such an extent that the radio terminal apparatus cannot measure received power can be excluded from handover destination candidates.
  • An appropriate radio base station apparatus can be selected.
  • the handover instruction unit receives the response and transmits information indicating the other radio base station device corresponding to the response as a handover destination candidate to the radio terminal device.
  • the configuration in which the radio terminal device selects the handover destination radio base station device, the handover destination radio base station device according to the latest radio wave environment as compared with the case where the handover source radio base station device selects Can be selected.
  • the handover instruction unit receives information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the radio terminal apparatus, and transmits the information to the handover destination radio base station apparatus indicated by the received information. Transmit predetermined information.
  • the handover instruction unit sends the other radio base station apparatus other than the handover destination radio base station apparatus among the other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to the response to the other radio base station apparatus.
  • a request to cancel the handover operation is transmitted.
  • the radio terminal apparatus In the case of moving in the direction approaching, the radio base station apparatus to be canceled may be an optimal handover destination. In this case, it is necessary to perform the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus to be canceled again.
  • the radio base station apparatus performs the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus other than the radio base station apparatus selected as the handover destination as the handover operation preparation process of the radio terminal apparatus. Stop after completion. As a result, even when the wireless terminal device moves and the radio wave state changes before the handover operation is completed, and the handover operation to another neighboring base station is performed, the preparation process for the handover operation is performed again. There is no need.
  • the radio base station apparatus is further updated at a cycle shorter than reception power information indicating a measurement result of a reception power of a radio signal from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus, and the radio terminal apparatus
  • a reception quality information acquisition unit for acquiring reception quality information indicating reception quality of a radio signal from its own radio base station apparatus in the terminal device, wherein the handover request unit is acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit
  • the reception quality deterioration is detected from the reception quality information, it is determined whether or not to make the request to the plurality of other radio base station apparatuses.
  • the configuration using the CQI report whose update cycle is shorter than the received power information makes it possible to follow a sudden change in the radio wave environment, so that the preparation process for the handover operation to the neighboring base stations can be performed quickly. Further, disconnection of the wireless link between the wireless terminal device and the wireless base station device can be further prevented.
  • the radio base station apparatus is further updated at a cycle shorter than reception power information indicating a measurement result of a radio signal reception power from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus, and the radio terminal apparatus
  • a reception quality information acquisition unit for acquiring reception quality information indicating reception quality of a radio signal from its own radio base station device in the terminal device, wherein the handover instruction unit receives the response and then receives the reception quality
  • the handover destination radio base station apparatus is selected.
  • the configuration using the CQI report having a shorter update cycle than the received power information makes it possible to follow a sudden change in the radio wave environment. It is possible to further prevent disconnection of the radio link between the terminal device and the radio base station device.
  • the radio base station apparatus further includes a reception power information acquisition unit for acquiring the reception power information, and the handover instruction unit receives the reception quality information by the reception quality information acquisition unit.
  • the handover destination radio base station apparatus is selected based on the measurement result indicated by the latest received power information among the received power information acquired by the received power information acquisition unit prior to acquisition.
  • the handover instruction unit detects the deterioration of the reception quality from the reception quality information, it is possible to quickly select the handover destination radio base station apparatus. it can.
  • a communication system for managing a plurality of radio base station devices for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal device and one or a plurality of the radio base station devices.
  • a communication system comprising a plurality of communication control devices, wherein the radio base station device transmits a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from itself to another radio base station device to a corresponding communication control device.
  • the corresponding communication control apparatus when the other radio base station apparatus to be handed over indicated by the handover request is not a management target of the other communication control apparatus, manages the other radio base station apparatus.
  • the other communication control apparatus transmits the received handover request to the other radio base station apparatus, and the other radio base station apparatus transmits the handover request to the other radio base station apparatus.
  • the response to the handover request is received from the corresponding communication control apparatus, and the corresponding communication control apparatus receives the response from the other communication control apparatus and transmits the handover request source.
  • a handover instruction is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus, and the radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction and indicates a measurement result of a reception power of a radio signal from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus It is updated at a shorter cycle than the received power information, acquires reception quality information indicating the reception quality of the radio signal from itself in the wireless terminal device, and based on the acquired reception quality information, between the wireless terminal device It is determined whether or not a predetermined execution condition relating to the communication quality of the wireless terminal device is satisfied. If the execution condition is not satisfied, the wireless terminal device To cancel the grant of instructions for performing the handover operation, or to hold against.
  • the radio base station apparatus transmits the handover request to the corresponding communication control apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied.
  • the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation.
  • the time required for the handover operation can be greatly shortened by performing transmission / reception of information necessary for switching the communication control device in advance as a preparation process for the handover operation.
  • the corresponding communication control apparatus receives the handover request indicating a plurality of the other radio base station apparatuses as handover destinations from the radio base station apparatus, and indicates the handover request. It is determined whether each of the other radio base station devices is a management target of the other radio base station device, and if it is not a management target of the self, the handover request is sent to another communication control device that manages the other radio base station device. Send.
  • the radio terminal apparatus related to the peripheral base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal apparatus after completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain peripheral base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent communication between the apparatus and the radio base station apparatus from being interrupted.
  • the handover operation preparation process with other neighboring base stations is completed, so the handover operation is performed. It is possible to prevent repeated transmission and reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation cancellation process, and to reduce the load on the communication system.
  • a communication system for managing a plurality of radio base station apparatuses for transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from a radio terminal apparatus, and one or more radio base station apparatuses.
  • the communication control device is connected between the one or a plurality of the radio base station devices and the higher level network, transmits communication data received from the radio terminal device via the radio base station device to the higher level network, and
  • a communication system comprising a plurality of gateway devices for transmitting communication data received from a higher-level network to the wireless terminal device via the wireless base station device, wherein the wireless base station device transmits another wireless base station from itself
  • a handover request for performing a handover operation of the wireless terminal device to a station device is transmitted to the communication control device, and the communication control device
  • a communication path that enables relaying of the communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device transmitted from the upper network and the communication data transmitted from the wireless terminal device to the upper network is created, and in response to the communication path creation request
  • a communication path creation response is transmitted to the communication control device, and the communication control device
  • the handover request is transmitted to the other radio base station device, and when a response to the handover request is received from the other radio base station device, the radio base station that is the transmission source of the handover request Than the received power information indicating the measurement result of the received power of the radio signal from each radio base station device in the radio terminal device.
  • the reception quality information that is updated in a short period and indicates the reception quality of the radio signal from itself in the wireless terminal device is acquired, and a predetermined communication quality with the wireless terminal device is acquired based on the acquired reception quality information. Whether or not the execution condition is satisfied, and if the execution condition is not satisfied, The giving of the instruction to perform the handover operation is stopped or suspended.
  • the gateway apparatus connected between the handover source radio base station apparatus and the higher level network, and the gateway apparatus connected between the handover destination radio base station apparatus and the higher level network are provided. Even if they are different, the handover operation preparation process can be completed prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. Can do. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
  • the radio base station apparatus transmits the handover request to the communication control apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied,
  • the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation.
  • the time required for the handover operation can be greatly shortened by performing transmission / reception of information necessary for switching the gateway device in advance as a preparation process for the handover operation.
  • the communication control device receives the handover request indicating a plurality of other radio base station devices as handover destinations from the radio base station device, and the other indicated by the handover request.
  • the communication path creation request is transmitted to the gateway device that is determined to be different.
  • the radio terminal apparatus related to the peripheral base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal apparatus after completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain peripheral base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent communication between the apparatus and the radio base station apparatus from being interrupted.
  • the handover operation preparation process with other neighboring base stations is completed, so the handover operation is performed. It is possible to prevent repeated transmission and reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation cancellation process, and to reduce the load on the communication system.
  • a communication control method is a communication system capable of communicating with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus, and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus.
  • a communication control method in a radio base station apparatus for obtaining received power information indicating a measurement result of received power of a radio signal from each radio base station apparatus in a radio terminal apparatus, and from the received power information Is also updated with a short cycle, and the wireless terminal device obtains reception quality information indicating the reception quality of the radio signal from its own wireless base station device in the wireless terminal device, and the wireless terminal device based on the received reception quality information Determining whether or not to perform a handover operation from its own radio base station apparatus to another radio base station apparatus.
  • the configuration using the reception quality information whose update cycle is shorter than the reception power information makes it possible to follow a sudden change in the radio wave environment.
  • the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late.
  • Generation of “Late HO” can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to quickly execute the handover operation to the neighboring base station and prevent the radio link between the radio terminal device and the radio base station device from being disconnected. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
  • a communication control method is for managing a plurality of radio base station devices for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal device and one or a plurality of the radio base station devices.
  • a communication control method in a communication system comprising a plurality of communication control devices, wherein the radio base station device responds to a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from itself to another radio base station device.
  • the reception quality information indicating the reception quality of the radio signal from itself in the radio terminal device is updated at a shorter cycle than the reception power information indicating the measurement result of the reception power of the radio signal from each radio base station device in the terminal device.
  • a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality with the wireless terminal device is And judges whether or not a Tasa, when the execution condition is not satisfied, and a step of either abort or suspend application of instructions for performing the handover operation for the wireless terminal.
  • a communication control method is for managing a plurality of radio base station devices for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal device and one or a plurality of the radio base station devices.
  • the communication control device is connected between one or a plurality of the radio base station devices and the upper network, and transmits communication data received from the radio terminal device via the radio base station device to the upper network
  • a communication control method in a communication system comprising a plurality of gateway devices for transmitting communication data received from the upper network to the wireless terminal device via the wireless base station device, wherein the wireless base station device A handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from the mobile station to another radio base station device is transmitted to the communication control device
  • a step of transmitting a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus that is the transmission source of the handover request; and the radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction, and each radio base station in the radio terminal apparatus A step of acquiring reception quality information indicating a reception quality of a radio signal from itself in the wireless terminal device, updated at a shorter cycle than reception power information indicating a measurement result of reception power of a radio signal from the device; Based on the reception quality information, a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality with the wireless terminal device is satisfied. And if the execution condition is not satisfied, the step of stopping or holding the instruction to perform the handover operation on the wireless terminal device is included.
  • the gateway apparatus connected between the handover source radio base station apparatus and the higher level network, and the gateway apparatus connected between the handover destination radio base station apparatus and the higher level network are provided. Even if they are different, the handover operation preparation process can be completed prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. Can do. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
  • a communication control program transmits / receives a radio signal to / from a radio terminal device in a communication system in which the radio terminal device can communicate with a plurality of radio base station devices by performing a handover operation.
  • a communication control program used in a radio base station apparatus for obtaining received power information indicating a measurement result of a received power of a radio signal from each radio base station apparatus in a radio terminal apparatus in a computer; Based on the acquired reception quality information, a step of obtaining reception quality information that is updated in a cycle shorter than the reception power information and indicates reception quality of a radio signal from its own radio base station device in the radio terminal device; The handover operation from the wireless base station device to another wireless base station device by the wireless terminal device is performed. Is a program for executing the steps of determining whether to.
  • the configuration using the reception quality information whose update cycle is shorter than the reception power information makes it possible to follow a sudden change in the radio wave environment.
  • the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late.
  • Generation of “Late HO” can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to quickly execute the handover operation to the neighboring base station and prevent the radio link between the radio terminal device and the radio base station device from being disconnected. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
  • a communication control program manages a plurality of radio base station devices for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal device and one or a plurality of the radio base station devices.
  • a communication control program manages a plurality of radio base station devices for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal device and one or a plurality of the radio base station devices.
  • the communication control device is connected between one or a plurality of the radio base station devices and the upper network, and transmits communication data received from the radio terminal device via the radio base station device to the upper network,
  • a communication control program used in a communication system comprising a plurality of gateway devices for transmitting communication data received from the upper network to the wireless terminal device via the wireless base station device, the computer comprising the wireless base station A station device performs a handover operation of the wireless terminal device from itself to another wireless base station device.
  • a gateway apparatus connected between the radio base station apparatus and the higher-level network; and the other handover destination indicated by the handover request.
  • a communication path creation request is connected between the other wireless base station device and the upper network.
  • the gateway device Transmitting to the gateway device; and when the gateway device receives the communication path creation request, the communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device transmitted from the upper network and the upper network transmitted from the wireless terminal device Create a communication path that can relay communication data to Transmitting a communication route creation response to the communication control device to the communication control device, and when the communication control device receives the communication route creation response, transmits the handover request to the other radio base station device, and
  • the gateway apparatus connected between the handover source radio base station apparatus and the higher level network, and the gateway apparatus connected between the handover destination radio base station apparatus and the higher level network are provided. Even if they are different, the handover operation preparation process can be completed prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. Can do. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation where an inappropriate handover operation (Too Late HO) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of an improper handover operation (Too Late HO) and its detection process in the radio
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation in which an inappropriate handover operation (Too Early HO) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation in which an inappropriate handover operation (Too Early HO) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of the improper handover operation (Too Early HO) and its detection process in the radio
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation in which an inappropriate handover operation (HO to Wong Cell) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an event A2 in which a wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an event A3 in which a wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows event A4 which a radio
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an event A5 in which a wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the timing control of the hand-over operation by adjustment of hysteresis HS in the radio
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating timing control of a handover operation by adjusting an offset OST in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the radio base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation when it is assumed that the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention performs a handover operation execution determination using only received power information.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining whether to perform a handover operation of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the hand-over operation
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining whether to perform a handover operation of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the hand-over operation
  • FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the sum of the handover failure probability shown in FIG. 48 and the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO” shown in FIG. 49.
  • a sequence of a handover operation in a situation where a condition for executing the handover operation is satisfied In the radio communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention, a sequence of a handover operation in a situation where a condition for executing the handover operation is not satisfied. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the radio
  • a sequence of a handover operation in a situation where a condition for executing the handover operation is not satisfied is a figure for demonstrating an example of the condition where two or more radio base station apparatuses which are candidates for a handover destination exist.
  • FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an exemplary sequence of a handover operation in the situation shown in FIG. 61. It is a figure for demonstrating the subject in an example of the condition where there exist multiple radio base station apparatuses which are candidates for a handover destination.
  • FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an exemplary sequence of a handover operation in the situation shown in FIG. 63.
  • wireless communications system which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention
  • a handover operation sequence when the handover source radio base station apparatus selects a handover destination.
  • the radio base station apparatus notifies the radio terminal apparatus of information about the cell and the neighboring cell that it forms, that is, the frequency of the radio signal and the ID (identification) of the neighboring cell.
  • the wireless terminal device detects and measures neighboring cells based on information notified from the wireless base station device.
  • the wireless terminal device starts moving to the neighboring cell based on the measurement result.
  • “movement” of the wireless terminal device means not only handover but also through which cell the wireless terminal device in an idle state starts communication in the future, that is, when a call or data communication is started. This means selecting whether to perform communication.
  • the destination of the wireless terminal device is determined by the wireless base station device or the higher-level device in the core network. For example, when the wireless terminal device is not communicating with the wireless base station device, the wireless terminal device determines the destination of the wireless terminal device.
  • handover means that a radio base station apparatus that is a communication partner of a radio terminal apparatus during a call or data communication is switched.
  • the wireless terminal device is located in a cell means that the wireless terminal device selects a wireless base station device forming the cell as a communication destination and can communicate with the wireless base station device. This means that communication is in progress.
  • a femto base station is a customer premises apparatus that connects a wireless terminal device connected via a wireless interface to a mobile communication carrier network using an IP backhaul.
  • the femto base station in the closed access mode provides a service only to related CSG (Closed Subscriber Group) members.
  • the hybrid mode femto base station also provides services to the associated CSG members and CSG non-members.
  • the femto base station in the open access mode operates as a normal base station.
  • Such a 3GPP definition may also be applied to the wireless communication system according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the macro base station and the pico base station are radio base station devices that are under the control of the operator and that can communicate with the radio base station device that has contracted with the operator. Further, it is considered that the macro base station and the pico base station are basically not turned off.
  • the femto base station is a radio base station apparatus that is mainly installed in an individual or corporate building and may move or be turned off depending on user circumstances.
  • the femto base station operates in an access mode of open / hybrid / closed.
  • the closed access mode only registered members (terminals) can be connected.
  • the service is provided only to registered members.
  • the hybrid mode the service is provided to both registered members and unregistered members, that is, non-members.
  • the open access mode the same operation as that of the macro base station and the pico base station is performed.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the radio communication system is a mobile communication system that complies with LTE (Long Term Evolution) standardized by, for example, 3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project), and includes radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • 3GPP Third Generation Partnership Project
  • FIG. 1 two radio base station apparatuses are representatively shown, but a larger number of radio base station apparatuses may be provided.
  • Radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B are, for example, femto base stations, pico base stations, or macro base stations.
  • the wireless base station device 101A can communicate with the wireless terminal device 202 by forming a cell CA and transmitting / receiving a wireless signal to / from the wireless terminal device 202 existing in the cell CA.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CB and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CB.
  • the direction from the wireless terminal device to the core network is referred to as an uplink direction
  • the direction from the core network to the wireless terminal device is referred to as a downlink direction.
  • the radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus in the radio communication system read and execute a program including the following sequences and steps in each flowchart from a memory (not shown).
  • This program can be installed externally.
  • the installed program is distributed in a state stored in a recording medium, for example.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA and is in communication with the wireless base station device 101A, and moves to an overlapping area of the cell CA and the cell CB. To do.
  • radio base station apparatus 101A sets a frequency to be measured by radio terminal apparatus 202 in communication with itself and another radio base station apparatus that transmits a radio signal of the frequency. (Step S1).
  • the wireless base station device 101A sends a measurement start request (Measurement Configuration) to the wireless terminal device 202 to cause the wireless terminal device 202 to measure the reception level of the wireless signal transmitted from the set other wireless base station device.
  • This measurement start request includes neighboring cell information, that is, the cell ID of the radio base station apparatus to be measured. Further, the measurement start request includes the transmission frequency of each radio base station device (step S2).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives the measurement start request from the wireless base station device 101A and starts the power measurement process (Measurement), that is, the wireless indicated by the measurement start request at the frequency indicated by the received measurement start request.
  • the received power of the radio signal transmitted from the base station apparatus is measured (step S3).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (Measurement Report) indicating the measurement result of the received power to the wireless base station device 101A.
  • a measurement result notification (Measurement Report) indicating the measurement result of the received power
  • the wireless terminal device 202 periodically measures the received power, when the communication state with the wireless base station device 101A deteriorates, and with other wireless base station devices other than the wireless base station device 101A When the state becomes better, a measurement result notification is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S4).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID based on the measurement result notification received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and stores it in a storage unit (not shown) (step S5).
  • the wireless base station device 101A determines whether or not the wireless terminal device 202 should be handed over. For example, the radio base station apparatus 101B is determined as a handover destination with reference to the information (step S6).
  • the radio base station device 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station device 101B to the higher-level device (step S7).
  • the host apparatus receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A and transmits the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S8).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the higher-level apparatus and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the higher-level apparatus (Step S9).
  • the higher-level device receives a handover response from the radio base station device 101B and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station device 101A (step S10).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover instruction from the host apparatus and transmits an RRC (Radio Resource Control) connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S11).
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the wireless base station device 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status and the like to the higher-level device (step S12).
  • the host device receives the status notification from the radio base station device 101A and transmits the status notification indicating the communication content with the radio terminal device 202 to the radio base station device 101B (step S13).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B ( Step S14).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the higher-level apparatus (step S15).
  • the host device receives a handover completion notification from the radio base station device 101B and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station device 101A (step S16).
  • the wireless base station device 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the higher-level device, releases the information related to the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the higher-level device (step S17).
  • a radio base station apparatus communicating with the radio terminal apparatus 202 or a handover source radio base station apparatus is also referred to as a serving base station, and a handover destination radio base station apparatus is also referred to as a neighboring base station.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation where an inappropriate handover operation (Too Late HO) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of an inappropriate handover operation (Too Late HO) and its detection processing sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • “Too Late HO” refers to the following cases, for example. That is, before handover starts or during handover processing, a radio link failure (RLF) occurs in the handover source radio base station apparatus, and a radio base station other than the handover source radio base station apparatus. This is a case where connection re-establishment of the wireless terminal device 202 to the device has occurred.
  • RLF radio link failure
  • the detection method of “Too Late HO” is as follows, for example. That is, when the radio terminal device 202 reestablishes the radio link to the radio base station device 101B after causing the RLF for the radio base station device 101A, the radio base station device 101B notifies the radio base station device 101A of the RLF. Send. Thereby, the radio base station apparatus 101A detects “Too Late HO”.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA and is communicating with the wireless base station device 101A.
  • radio terminal apparatus 202 measures the received power of a radio signal transmitted from each radio base station apparatus, and wirelessly sends a measurement result notification indicating the measured result of the received power. It transmits to base station apparatus 101A (step S51).
  • the wireless base station device 101A determines whether or not the wireless terminal device 202 should be handed over.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A refers to the neighboring cell information and determines, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination (step S52).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface that is an inter-base station interface (step S53).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101A via the X2 interface (step S54).
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 is out of service area of the cell CA, and Move to within the cell CB (step S55).
  • step S56 Due to the movement of the wireless terminal device 202, the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (step S56) for instructing the handover transmitted from the wireless base station device 101A does not reach the wireless terminal device 202, and RLF is generated (step S56). S57).
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 searches for a neighboring radio base station apparatus by measuring the reception power of the radio signal and reconnects to the searched radio base station apparatus 101B.
  • a connection re-establishment request (RRC Connection Reestablishment Request) is transmitted (step S58).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection re-establishment request from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits an RRC connection re-establishment response to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S59). Thereby, an RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection re-establishment completion notification (RRC Connection Reestablishment Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B (step S60).
  • RRC Connection Reestablishment Complete RRC Connection Reestablishment Complete
  • This RRC connection re-establishment completion notification includes a parameter “rlf-InfoAvailable”, for example.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 sets this parameter and transmits an RRC connection re-establishment completion notification.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B recognizes that an RLF has occurred in the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B transmits a terminal information request (UE Information Request) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 in order to acquire detailed information of the RLF (step S61).
  • UE Information Request terminal information request
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives the terminal information request from the wireless base station device 101B, and transmits a terminal information response (UE Information Response) including the RLF report to the wireless base station device 101B (step S62).
  • the RLF report includes the PCI (Physical Cell ID) of the radio base station apparatus in which the RLF has occurred, the PCI and ECGI (E-UTRAN Cell Global Identifier) of the radio base station apparatus in which the RRC connection has been reestablished, and the own radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • C-RNTI Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier
  • the PCI of the RLF occurrence is the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101A
  • the PCI and ECGI of the RRC connection re-establishment occurrence are the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101B
  • the C-RNTI is assigned by the radio base station apparatus 101A ID.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B recognizes that RLF has occurred in the radio base station apparatus 101A by referring to the PCI of the RLF report received from the radio terminal apparatus 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B transmits an RLF notification (RLF INDICATION) including the contents of the RLF report to the radio base station apparatus 101A via the X2 interface in order to notify that it is “Too Late HO” ( Step S63).
  • RLF INDICATION an RLF notification including the contents of the RLF report to the radio base station apparatus 101A via the X2 interface in order to notify that it is “Too Late HO”
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A recognizes that “Too Late HO” has occurred to the cell CB by referring to the PCI, ECGI, and C-RNTI of the RLF notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101B. (Step S64).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A executes a handover operation optimization process so as to suppress the occurrence of “Too Late HO” in the cell CB (step S65).
  • FIG. 5 and 6 are diagrams illustrating an example of a situation in which an inappropriate handover operation (Too Early HO) has occurred in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • cell CB formed by radio base station apparatus 101B includes cell CB1 including the installation area of radio base station apparatus 101B, and radio base station apparatus 101B formed in cell CA.
  • the cell CB2 does not include an installation area.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an inappropriate handover operation (Too Early HO) and its detection processing sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • “Too Early HO” refers to the following cases, for example. That is, after the wireless terminal device 202 has successfully connected to the handover destination wireless base station device, RLF occurs in a short time, and the wireless terminal device 202 is reconnected to the handover source wireless base station device. This is the case when establishment occurs.
  • the detection method of “Too Early HO” is as follows, for example. That is, when the handover destination radio base station apparatus 101B receives an RLF report from the handover source radio base station apparatus 101A, the handover to the radio terminal apparatus 202 itself is performed within a predetermined time from the reception timing. When the terminal information release instruction upon completion of the transmission is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A, the radio base station apparatus 101A is notified that “Too Early HO”.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B uses a timer to measure the predetermined time. As a result, when the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF report, whether the RLF has occurred due to its own “Too Late HO” or whether the RLF has occurred due to the “Too Early HO” of the radio base station apparatus 101A. Can be determined.
  • radio terminal apparatus 202 moves into cell CB2 from a state where it is located in cell CA and is communicating with radio base station apparatus 101A (step S70). .
  • radio terminal apparatus 202 measures the reception power of a radio signal transmitted from a radio base station apparatus, and sends a measurement result notification indicating the measurement result of the measured reception power to radio base station. It transmits to station apparatus 101A (Source eNB, Serving eNB) (step S71).
  • station apparatus 101A Source eNB, Serving eNB
  • the wireless base station device 101A determines whether or not the wireless terminal device 202 should be handed over.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A refers to the neighboring cell information and determines, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination (step S72).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface that is an interface between base stations (step S73).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101A via the X2 interface (step S74).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S75).
  • RRC Connection Reconfiguration RRC Connection Reconfiguration
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B. (Step S76).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S77).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B starts a timer in order to measure the stay time in the cell CB of the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S78).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and releases information (UE Context) on the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S79).
  • step S80 the handover of the wireless terminal device 202 from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B is completed (step S80).
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 moves outside the cell CB and within the cell CA (step S81).
  • step S83 since the wireless terminal device 202 cannot communicate with the wireless base station device 101B, RLF occurs (step S83).
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 searches for a neighboring radio base station apparatus by measuring the reception power of the radio signal and reconnects to the searched radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • a connection re-establishment request (RRC Connection Reestablishment Request) is transmitted (step S84).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A since the radio base station apparatus 101A has released and does not hold the information (UE Context) regarding the radio terminal apparatus 202, the radio base station apparatus 101A can accept the RRC connection re-establishment request from the radio terminal apparatus 202. If it is not possible (step S85), an RRC connection re-establishment rejection is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S86).
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 when receiving the RRC connection re-establishment rejection from the radio base station apparatus 101A, the radio terminal apparatus 202 starts a normal connection procedure with the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S87).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection request to the wireless base station device 101A (step S88).
  • the wireless base station device 101A receives the RRC connection request from the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits RRC connection information (RRC Connection Setup) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S89).
  • RRC connection information RRC Connection Setup
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives the RRC connection information from the wireless base station device 101A, and transmits an RRC connection completion notification (RRC Connection Setup Complete) (step S90).
  • the wireless base station device 101A receives the RRC connection completion notification from the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits security information (Security Mode Command) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S91).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives security information from the wireless base station device 101A, and transmits a security completion notification (Security Mode Complete) to the wireless base station device 101A (step S92).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S93).
  • RRC Connection Reconfiguration RRC Connection Reconfiguration
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101A. (Step S94).
  • the RRC connection completion notification and the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification include, for example, a parameter “rlf-InfoAvailable”.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 sets this parameter and transmits an RRC connection completion notification and an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A recognizes that an RLF has occurred in the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the wireless base station device 101A transmits a terminal information request (UE Information Request) to the wireless terminal device 202 in order to acquire detailed information of the RLF (step S95).
  • UE Information Request terminal information request
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives the terminal information request from the wireless base station device 101A, and transmits a terminal information response (UE Information Response) including the RLF report to the wireless base station device 101A (step S96).
  • the RLF report includes the PCI of the radio base station apparatus in which the RLF has occurred, the PCI and ECGI of the radio base station apparatus in which the RRC connection re-establishment has occurred, and the C-RNTI of the own radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the PCI of the RLF occurrence is the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101B
  • the PCI and ECGI of the RRC connection re-establishment are the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101A
  • the C-RNTI is assigned by the radio base station apparatus 101B ID.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A recognizes that RLF has occurred in the radio base station apparatus 101B by referring to the PCI of the RLF report received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and performs “Too Late HO” to the cell CA. "Is generated (step S97).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RLF notification (RLF INDICATION) including the content of the RLF report to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface in order to notify that it is “Too Late HO”. (Step S98).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B checks the timer that has been started. If the timer is operating, that is, a predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was started. If not, it is determined not to be “Too Late HO” to the cell CA but to “Too Early HO” to the cell CB.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A and the timer is not operating, that is, when the predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was started, the cell CA It is determined that it is “Too Late HO”.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B determines that it is “Too Early HO” to the cell CB (step S99), it transmits a handover report to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S100).
  • This handover report includes, for example, a parameter “Handover Report Type”.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B notifies the radio base station apparatus 101A of “Too Early HO” by setting this parameter to a predetermined value.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover report from the radio base station apparatus 101B, recognizes that “Too Early HO” has occurred to the cell CB (step S101), and “Too Early HO”.
  • the optimization process of the handover operation is executed so as to suppress the occurrence of (step S102).
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation where an inappropriate handover operation (HO to Wong Cell) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the wireless communication system further includes a wireless base station device 101 ⁇ / b> C as compared with the wireless communication system illustrated in FIG. 1.
  • Radio base station apparatus 101C is, for example, a femto base station, a pico base station, or a macro base station.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101C can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CC and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CC.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of an inappropriate handover operation (HO to Wong Cell) and its detection processing sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • HO to Wong Cell refers to the following cases, for example. That is, after the wireless terminal device 202 has successfully connected to the handover destination wireless base station device, RLF occurs in a short time, and wireless communication is performed with respect to wireless base station devices other than the handover source and handover destination wireless base station devices. This is a case where the connection re-establishment of the terminal device 202 occurs.
  • the detection method of “HO to Wong Cell” is as follows. That is, when the radio base station apparatus 101B that is the handover destination receives the RLF report from the radio base station apparatus 101C other than the radio base station apparatus 101A that is the handover source, the radio terminal is traced back from the reception timing within a predetermined time. When the terminal information release instruction due to the completion of the handover of the apparatus 202 to itself is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A, the radio base station apparatus 101A is notified that “HO to Wong Cell”.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B uses a timer to measure the predetermined time. Thereby, when the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF report, whether the RLF has occurred due to its own “Too Late HO” or whether the RLF has occurred due to the “HO to Wong Cell” of the radio base station apparatus 101A. Can be determined.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 when the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA and is communicating with the wireless base station device 101A, the wireless terminal device 202 moves to the overlapping area of the virtual cell CBV and the cell CA ( Assume step S110).
  • the virtual cell CBV is a virtual cell expanded from the cell CB in accordance with the offset OST that is a parameter in order to promote handover from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio base station apparatus 101B.
  • the offset OST is a parameter held by the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • radio terminal apparatus 202 measures the received power of a radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus, and sends a measurement result notification indicating the measured result of the received power to radio base station. Transmit to the station apparatus 101A (step S111).
  • the wireless base station device 101A determines whether or not the wireless terminal device 202 should be handed over.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A refers to the neighboring cell information and determines, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination (step S112).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface that is an interface between base stations (step S113).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101A via the X2 interface (step S114).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S115).
  • RRC Connection Reconfiguration RRC Connection Reconfiguration
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B. (Step S116).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S117).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B starts a timer in order to measure the staying time in the cell CB of the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S118).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and releases information (UE Context) on the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S119).
  • step S120 the handover of the wireless terminal device 202 from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B is completed (step S120).
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 moves out of the cell CB and into the virtual cell CBV and the cell CC (step S121).
  • the radio terminal device 202 has a large interference of radio signals transmitted from the radio base station device 101C (Other eNB), and cannot communicate with the radio base station device 101B, so that RLF occurs (step S123). .
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 searches for nearby radio base station apparatuses by measuring the reception power of radio signals or the like. In this case, since the reception power of the radio signal from the radio base station apparatus 101C is maximized, the radio terminal apparatus 202 receives an RRC connection re-establishment request (RRC Connection) in order to reconnect to the searched radio base station apparatus 101C. Reestablishment Request) is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S124).
  • RRC Connection RRC Connection
  • the wireless base station device 101C since the wireless base station device 101C does not hold information (UE Context) regarding the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101C cannot accept the RRC connection re-establishment request from the wireless terminal device 202 (step S125). ), RRC connection re-establishment rejection is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S126).
  • UE Context information regarding the wireless terminal device 202
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 receives an RRC connection re-establishment rejection from the radio base station apparatus 101C, and starts a normal connection procedure with the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S127).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection request to the wireless base station device 101C (step S128).
  • the wireless base station device 101C receives the RRC connection request from the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits RRC connection information (RRC Connection Setup) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S129).
  • RRC connection information RRC Connection Setup
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives RRC connection information from the wireless base station device 101C, and transmits an RRC connection completion notification (RRC Connection Setup Complete) (step S130).
  • the wireless base station device 101C receives the RRC connection completion notification from the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits security information (Security Mode Command) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S131).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives security information from the wireless base station device 101C, and transmits a security completion notification (Security Mode Complete) to the wireless base station device 101C (step S132).
  • the wireless base station device 101C transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S133).
  • RRC Connection Reconfiguration RRC Connection Reconfiguration
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101C. (Step S134).
  • the RRC connection completion notification and the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification include, for example, a parameter “rlf-InfoAvailable”.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 sets this parameter and transmits an RRC connection completion notification and an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification. Thereby, the radio base station apparatus 101C recognizes that an RLF has occurred in the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the wireless base station device 101C transmits a terminal information request (UE Information Request) to the wireless terminal device 202 in order to acquire detailed information of the RLF (step S135).
  • UE Information Request terminal information request
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives a terminal information request from the wireless base station device 101C, and transmits a terminal information response (UE Information Response) including an RLF report to the wireless base station device 101C (step S136).
  • the RLF report includes the PCI of the radio base station apparatus in which the RLF has occurred, the PCI and ECGI of the radio base station apparatus in which the RRC connection re-establishment has occurred, and the C-RNTI of the own radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the PCI of the RLF occurrence is the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101B
  • the PCI and ECGI of the RRC connection re-establishment are the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101C
  • the C-RNTI is assigned by the radio base station apparatus 101B ID.
  • the wireless base station device 101C recognizes that RLF has occurred in the wireless base station device 101B by referring to the PCI of the RLF report received from the wireless terminal device 202, and performs “Too Late HO” to the cell CC. "Is generated (step S137).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101C transmits an RLF notification (RLF INDICATION) including the content of the RLF report to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface in order to notify that it is “Too Late HO”. (Step S138).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B checks the timer that has been started. If the timer is operating, that is, a predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was started. If not, it is determined that it is not “Too Late HO” to the cell CC, and further, the RLF notification is received from the radio base station device 101C other than the radio base station device 101A. It is determined that it is not “Too Early HO” but “HO to Wron Cell” to the cell CB.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B When the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF notification from the radio base station apparatus 101C and the timer is not operating, that is, when the predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was started, the cell CC It is determined that it is “Too Late HO”.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B determines that it is “HO to Wong Cell” to the cell CB (step S139), it transmits a handover report to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S140).
  • This handover report includes, for example, a parameter “Handover Report Type”.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B notifies the radio base station apparatus 101A of “HO to Wong Cell” by setting this parameter to a predetermined value.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover report from the radio base station apparatus 101B, recognizes that “HO to Wong Cell” has occurred to the cell CB (step S141), and performs “HO to Wong”.
  • the optimization process of the handover operation is executed so that the occurrence of “Cell” is suppressed (step S142).
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a reception quality simulation result of the wireless terminal device in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 shows an RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication) of the wireless terminal device 202 for 100 seconds until the wireless terminal device 202 passes near the pico base station at a speed of 30 km per hour and passes near the macro base station.
  • RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication
  • graphs G1 and G3 indicate RSSIs of radio signals transmitted from the macro base station
  • graphs G2 and G4 indicate RSSIs of radio signals transmitted from the pico base station.
  • the graphs G1 and G2 take into account the temporal change in the received power of the radio signal in the radio terminal device 202 caused by shadowing, that is, the relative position change between the radio terminal device 202 and other objects. Simulation results, and graphs G3 and G4 are simulation results that do not consider shadowing.
  • the ideal position for handover of the wireless terminal device 202 from the pico base station to the macro base station is the vicinity of the intersection of the graph, that is, the position where the movement time is about 17 seconds.
  • Y MRO (X)
  • Y is, for example, the occurrence frequency of “Too Late HO”, “Too Early HO” “Occurrence frequency”, “HO to Wong Cell” occurrence frequency, “Ping Pong HO” unnecessary handover occurrence frequency, etc.
  • the radio terminal device 202 connects to the radio base station device This is the frequency of occurrence of handover immediately after being performed.
  • X is a parameter for power measurement processing (Measurement), hysteresis HS: 0 dB to +15 dB, TTT (Time to Trigger): 0 ms to 5120 ms, or offset OST (Cell Individual Offset): ⁇ 24 dB to +24 dB It is.
  • X is a parameter for cell reselection processing.
  • hysteresis HS and TTT can be set for each event described later, and offset OST can be set for each serving cell formed by the serving base station and each neighboring cell.
  • the wireless base station device determines handover when receiving a measurement result notification (Measurement Report). That is, the transmission timing of the measurement result notification corresponds to the handover timing.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an event A1 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the horizontal axis is time
  • the vertical axis is the reception power or SINR of the radio signal in the wireless terminal device 202
  • the SVC is the reception power or SINR of the serving cell, that is, the reception power of the radio signal transmitted by the serving base station or SINR.
  • hysteresis HS is set in a positive or negative direction with respect to threshold value Th.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transitions to the report on state (timing T1).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T2).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T3).
  • timing T4 the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T4).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 performs a power measurement process periodically, for example, regardless of the transition between the report-on state and the report-off state, and transmits the latest measurement result as a measurement result notification. Further, for example, radio terminal apparatus 202 performs transition between the report-on state and the report-off state independently for each of received power and SINR. That is, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification if a condition is satisfied for one of the received power and SINR.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an event A2 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
  • hysteresis HS is set in a positive or negative direction with respect to threshold value Th.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transitions to the report on state (timing T11).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification when TTT elapses from timing T11 in a state where the condition that the received power or SINR is smaller than (Th + HS) is satisfied (timing T12).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T13).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T14).
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an event A3 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the horizontal axis is time
  • the vertical axis is the reception power or SINR of the radio signal in the wireless terminal device 202
  • SVC is the reception power or SINR of the serving cell
  • NBC is the reception power or SINR of the neighboring cell, that is, This is the reception power or SINR of a radio signal transmitted by a neighboring base station.
  • offset OST1 is set in the positive direction with respect to the reception power or SINR of the serving cell, and hysteresis HS is set in the positive and negative directions. Also, the offset OST2 is set in the positive direction with respect to the reception power or SINR of the neighboring cells.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transitions to the report-on state when ⁇ (reception power or SINR of neighboring cells) + OST2 ⁇ becomes larger than ⁇ (reception power or SINR of the serving cell) + OST1 + HS ⁇ (timing T21).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 performs the processing from the timing T21 to the TTT in a state where ⁇ (neighboring cell received power or SINR) + OST2 ⁇ is larger than ⁇ (serving cell received power or SINR) + OST1-HS ⁇ .
  • a measurement result notification is transmitted (timing T22).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T23).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T24).
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an event A4 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
  • the offset OST is set in the positive direction with respect to the reception power or SINR of the neighboring cells, and the hysteresis HS is set in the positive and negative directions with respect to the threshold Th.
  • Wireless terminal apparatus 202 transitions to a report-on state when ⁇ (reception power or SINR of neighboring cells) + OST ⁇ is greater than (Th + HS) (timing T31).
  • wireless terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification when TTT elapses from timing T31 while the condition that ⁇ (reception power or SINR of the neighboring cell) + OST ⁇ is larger than (Th ⁇ HS) is satisfied. (Timing T32).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T33).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T34).
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an event A5 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
  • the offset OST is set in the positive direction with respect to the reception power or SINR of the neighboring cell, and the hysteresis HS1 is set in the positive and negative direction with respect to the threshold Th1.
  • Hysteresis HS2 is set in the positive and negative directions with respect to Th2.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transitions to the report on state. (Timing T41).
  • Radio terminal 202 satisfies the condition that the reception power or SINR of the serving cell is smaller than (Th1 + HS1) and ⁇ (reception power or SINR of the neighboring cell) + OST ⁇ is larger than (Th2-HS2).
  • TTT elapses from timing T41 in a state where it is in a state, a measurement result notification is transmitted (timing T42).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T43).
  • the timing of the handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202 can be controlled by adjusting the parameters described in the events A1 to A5, that is, the hysteresis HS, TTT, and the offset OST.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram showing handover operation timing control by adjusting the hysteresis HS in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 16 shows the case of event A3.
  • hysteresis HS when hysteresis HS is set to zero, a transition is made to the report on state at timing T51, a measurement result notification is transmitted at timing T53, and a transition to the report off state is made at timing T55.
  • the state transits to the report-on state at timing T52 after timing T51, the measurement result notification is transmitted at timing T54 after timing T53, and timing T55. At a later timing T56, the state transits to the report off state.
  • the transmission timing of the measurement result notification that is, the timing of the handover operation can be delayed.
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram showing timing control of the handover operation by adjusting the TTT in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 17 shows the case of event A3.
  • the transmission timing of the measurement result notification that is, the timing of the handover operation can be delayed.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram showing handover operation timing control by adjusting the offset OST in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 18 shows the case of event A3.
  • the state transits to the report on state at timing T72 after timing T71, the measurement result notification is transmitted at timing T74 after timing T73, and timing T76. Transition to the report-off state at an earlier timing T75.
  • the transmission timing of the measurement result notification that is, the timing of the handover operation can be delayed. Further, the transition from the report off state to the report on state is delayed, and the transition from the report on state to the report off state is accelerated.
  • the timing of the handover operation is delayed by increasing the hysteresis HS, increasing the TTT, or decreasing the offset OST. That is, since the time for which the wireless terminal device 202 is connected to the serving base station becomes longer, the occurrence frequency of “Too Early HO”, “HO to Wong Cell” and “Ping Pong HO” is reduced, and “Too Late HO” The frequency of occurrence will increase.
  • the handover timing can be adjusted by adjusting any of the parameters, but these effects differ depending on the topography including interference, the moving speed of the wireless terminal device, and the like.
  • Adjusting the hysteresis HS and the offset OST corresponds to adjusting the position where the handover is performed by virtually increasing or decreasing the cell. For example, by increasing the hysteresis HS of the serving cell, the received power of the radio signal is increased and the handover to another cell is difficult to be performed. Also, by setting the offset OST of the neighboring cell to a negative value, the received power of the radio signal from the neighboring cell appears to be small, and handover to another cell is difficult to be performed.
  • the hysteresis HS and the offset OST are parameters that are not easily influenced by the moving speed of the wireless terminal device.
  • an offset OST is set for each neighboring cell, and the event At least one of A1 to A5 is set, and hysteresis HS and TTT corresponding to the set event are set.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 includes an antenna 91, a circulator 92, a radio reception unit 93, a radio transmission unit 94, a signal processing unit 95, and a control unit 98.
  • the signal processing unit 95 includes a reception signal processing unit 96 and a transmission signal processing unit 97.
  • the signal processing unit 95 and the control unit 98 are realized by a CPU (Central Processing Unit) or a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).
  • the circulator 92 outputs the radio signal from the radio terminal device 202 received by the antenna 91 to the radio reception unit 93 and outputs the radio signal received from the radio transmission unit 94 to the antenna 91.
  • the radio reception unit 93 converts the frequency of the radio signal received from the circulator 92 into a baseband signal or IF (Intermediate Frequency) signal, converts the frequency-converted signal into a digital signal, and outputs the digital signal to the reception signal processing unit 96.
  • IF Intermediate Frequency
  • the reception signal processing unit 96 performs signal processing such as despreading in the CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) system on the digital signal received from the wireless reception unit 93, and performs part or all of the digital signal after this signal processing.
  • the data is converted into a predetermined frame format and transmitted to the core network side.
  • the transmission signal processing unit 97 uses IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) in the OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex) method for communication data obtained by converting communication data received from the core network side into a predetermined frame format or communication data generated by itself.
  • IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
  • OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex
  • the wireless transmission unit 94 converts the digital signal received from the transmission signal processing unit 97 into an analog signal, converts the frequency of the converted analog signal into a wireless signal, and outputs the converted signal to the circulator 92.
  • the control unit 98 exchanges various types of information with each unit and the core network in the radio base station apparatus 101.
  • the radio base station apparatus uses power measurement processing (Measurement) for determining whether to perform a handover operation.
  • This power measurement process corresponds to RRC of the layer 3 stack in 3GPP, for example.
  • Period Measurement Period Measurement
  • Event Triggered Measurement Event Triggered Measurement
  • the reporting period of the periodic power measurement process can be set from 120 milliseconds to 60 minutes, and the reporting period of the event activation power measurement process can be set from 0 to 5120 milliseconds, but “TS36.508” And as described as a recommended value in “TS36.523”, the shortest time of the measurement result reporting period is 256 milliseconds of event A1, and is not so short.
  • the radio wave environment may deteriorate before the next measurement result notification arrives from the wireless terminal device to the wireless base station device, and the wireless link between the wireless terminal device and the wireless base station device may be disconnected.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of the handover operation when it is assumed that the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention performs the handover operation using only the received power information.
  • the horizontal axis represents time, and the vertical axis represents radio wave intensity.
  • SVC is the radio field intensity of the serving cell, that is, the received power of the radio signal transmitted by the serving base station in the radio terminal apparatus 202
  • NBC is the radio field intensity of the surrounding cell, that is, the received power of the radio signal transmitted by the peripheral base station in the radio terminal apparatus 202. It is.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 receives the received power information, that is, the measurement result notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 at timings T81 to T83 and T86, respectively.
  • radio base station apparatus 101 when the radio field intensity of the serving cell and the radio field intensity of the surrounding cell change as indicated by solid lines, radio base station apparatus 101 has the radio field intensity of the peripheral cell larger than the radio field intensity of the serving cell. Received power information indicating the state is acquired at timing T86. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 performs a handover operation to the neighboring base station by the radio terminal apparatus 202 based on the acquired received power information.
  • the radio wave intensity of the serving cell and the radio wave intensity of the surrounding cells change as shown by the solid line.
  • the radio wave environment in one or both of the serving cell and the neighboring cell is rapidly deteriorated, the handover operation is not in time, and the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101 are connected at the timing T85 before the timing T86. Wireless link may be disconnected.
  • the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention solves the above problem by the following configuration.
  • the radio base station apparatus in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, information updated at a cycle shorter than the received power information, for example, 3QPP, CQI (Channel The combined use of a Quality Indication report reduces the possibility of a radio link being disconnected.
  • the CQI report corresponds to MAC (Medium Access Control) or PHY (Physical Layer) of the layer 2 stack.
  • the CQI report does not directly notify the current radio wave condition in each cell, but is a value expressed in 16 levels from 0 to 15 by the following formula using SINR.
  • CQI min (max (round ((SINR [dB] +8) /1.892), 0), 15)
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a control unit in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • control unit 98 includes reception power information acquisition unit (first measurement information acquisition unit) 11, reception quality information acquisition unit (second measurement information acquisition unit) 12, handover operation determination unit 13, The condition setting unit 14 is included.
  • the reception power information acquisition unit 11 acquires reception power information indicating measurement results of reception power of radio signals from the radio base station apparatuses 101 in the radio terminal apparatus 202, that is, measurement result notification.
  • the reception quality information acquisition unit 12 is updated at a cycle shorter than the reception power information, and acquires reception quality information, that is, a CQI report indicating the reception quality of the radio signal from the radio base station apparatus 101 in the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the handover operation determination unit 13 Based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12, the handover operation determination unit 13 performs a handover operation from the radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus 101 by the radio terminal apparatus 202. Judge whether to do. For example, the handover operation determination unit 13 determines whether or not to execute the handover operation based on the reception power information acquired by the reception power information acquisition unit 11 in addition to the reception quality information.
  • the condition setting unit 14 changes various conditions of the event activation power measurement process, that is, various generation conditions of the reception power information, based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12.
  • the components surrounded by broken lines in FIG. 21, that is, the condition setting unit 14 are not essential components in the present invention. Even if the radio base station apparatus 101 does not include this component, it is possible to achieve the object of the present invention to stabilize communication by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of the handover operation based on the execution determination of the handover operation of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
  • the power measurement process is complemented by the CQI report, and the execution of the handover operation is prompted before the radio link is disconnected.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 causes the radio terminal apparatus 202 to perform a CQI report creation process having a report period shorter than that of the power measurement process in addition to the power measurement process.
  • radio base station apparatus 101 instructs radio terminal apparatus 202 to transmit a CQI report at timing T83, and detects deterioration of the radio wave environment based on the contents of the CQI report received from radio terminal apparatus 202. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101 refers to the CQI report and grasps how much the reception quality of the radio terminal apparatus 202 is deteriorated due to the interference that the serving cell receives from the neighboring cells.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether or not the radio terminal apparatus 202 can communicate in the serving cell, and determines that it is difficult to continue communication. A handover operation to a neighboring cell is executed.
  • the handover operation is not in time in FIG. 20, and the radio link between the radio terminal apparatus 202 and the radio base station apparatus 101 is The handover operation can be executed at timing T84 before timing T85 at which disconnection has occurred.
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of the handover operation when the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention determines execution of the handover operation by one-stage power measurement processing. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 receives received power information from the radio terminal apparatus 202 at timings T102, T103, and T105, respectively.
  • radio base station apparatus 101 uses an event activation power measurement process as a power measurement process for determining execution of a handover operation.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 starts the CQI report creation process in the radio terminal apparatus 202 at the stage where the radio terminal apparatus 202 starts the event activation power measurement process, and monitors the received power information and the CQI report. To monitor.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start the event activation power measurement process at timing T101, and similarly starts the CQI report creation process at timing T101. To instruct. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202 together with the received power information.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 is not limited to the configuration in which the CQI report generation process is started at the start timing T101 of the event activation power measurement process, but the timing T103 and the like, for example, when the radio wave environment of the serving cell has deteriorated to some extent, At the stage where the radio wave environment of the surrounding cells has improved, or both of these conditions are satisfied, the wireless terminal device 202 may be instructed to start creating a CQI report.
  • FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation when the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention determines execution of a handover operation by a two-stage power measurement process. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 receives received power information from the radio terminal apparatus 202 at timings T112 and T115, respectively.
  • radio base station apparatus 101 performs periodic monitoring using the first power measurement process until the radio wave environment of the serving cell deteriorates to some extent, and then performs a handover operation execution determination. Switch to the second power measurement process.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 sets the first power measurement process as a periodic power measurement process and the second power measurement process as an event activation power measurement process.
  • an event corresponding to this event activation power measurement process for example, event A3 or A5 is preferable.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 uses the CQI report together with the execution of the periodic power measurement process. Thereby, the activation of the event activation power measurement process and the condition setting are flexibly executed according to a sudden change in the radio wave environment.
  • the wireless base station device 101 when the wireless terminal device 202 starts the periodic power measurement process, the wireless base station device 101 also causes the wireless terminal device 202 to start a CQI report creation process, monitors received power information, and displays a CQI report. Monitor.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start the periodic measurement process at timing T111, for example, along with establishment of a communication connection with the radio terminal apparatus 202, Similarly, at timing T111, an instruction is given to start the CQI report creation process. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202 together with the received power information.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment has deteriorated from the CQI report. Detecting and instructing the wireless terminal device 202 to transmit received power information by event activation power measurement processing. Radio base station apparatus 101 may further set the transition condition to the report-on state of the event activation power measurement process, the report cycle, and the like based on the CQI report received at timing T113. The wireless terminal device 202 starts the event activation power measurement process at timing T114.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 performs a handover operation to the neighboring base stations based on the received power information received from the radio terminal apparatus 202 at timing T115.
  • the first power measurement process is a periodic power measurement process
  • the second power measurement process is an event activation power measurement process.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and other combinations may be used.
  • the first power measurement process and the second power measurement process may be an event activation power measurement process
  • the first power measurement process is a periodic power measurement process
  • the second power measurement process is an event activation power.
  • the measurement process may be performed, and the first power measurement process and the second power measurement process may be a periodic power measurement process.
  • the same applies to the event type, and the event type to be used is not limited.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 may be configured to perform a handover operation by three or more stages of power measurement processing.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 uses the CQI report to flexibly start the next-stage power measurement process and set conditions. It is possible.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation based on the content of the CQI report by the radio base station device according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 receives the received power information from the radio terminal apparatus 202 at timings T122 and T123, respectively.
  • radio base station apparatus 101 instructs radio terminal apparatus 202 to start the event activation power measurement process at timing T121. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors received power information transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 starts the CQI report creation process. To the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202 together with the received power information.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 at time T124 when the radio field strength of the neighboring cell becomes larger than the radio field strength of the serving cell and the difference between the radio field strength of the neighboring cell and the radio field strength of the serving cell becomes large. Then, the deterioration of the radio wave environment is detected from the CQI report, and before the wireless link between the wireless terminal device and the wireless base station device 101 is disconnected, a handover operation to the neighboring base station is executed.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 uses the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction. It is necessary to notify the wireless terminal device 202 of the change.
  • the above change may not be in time.
  • the handover operation determining unit 13 determines to execute the handover operation when the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquiring unit 12 satisfies a predetermined condition, and the radio terminal apparatus 202 The handover operation from its own radio base station apparatus to another predetermined radio base station apparatus is executed.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 uses the blind handover defined by 3GPP to execute a forced handover operation to a cell having the best condition among neighboring cells at timing T124.
  • the handover operation determining unit 13 determines which radio base station apparatus the handover operation is to be executed based on the received power information acquired by the received power information acquiring unit 11.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to execute not only the measurement of the serving cell but also the measurement of the neighboring cells in the power measurement process.
  • the event type to be used is preferably event A3 or A5 that requires measurement of neighboring cells. Note that events A1 and A2, which may be measured only for the serving cell, may be used, but in this case, it is necessary to perform measurement of the serving cell and the neighboring cells in the periodic power measurement process.
  • FIG. 26 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining whether to perform a handover operation of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start the event activation power measurement process (step S161).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start generating reception quality information, that is, a CQI report (step S162).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 acquires reception quality information from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and determines whether or not to perform a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 based on the acquired reception quality information (step) S163).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines to execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202
  • the radio base station that is the handover destination of the radio terminal apparatus 202 based on the received power information acquired in the past A device is selected (step S164).
  • the condition setting unit 14 changes the event activation power measurement processing condition, that is, the reception power information creation condition, based on the CQI report.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 can easily execute a handover operation by changing the reporting period, that is, TTT, and the reporting start condition, that is, changing the offset OST or hysteresis HS, for the event activation power measurement process that is being performed. Create a situation.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation based on the content of the CQI report by the radio base station device according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 receives the received power information from the radio terminal apparatus 202 at timings T132, T133, and T136, respectively.
  • radio base station apparatus 101 instructs radio terminal apparatus 202 to start the event activation power measurement process at timing T131. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors received power information transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 starts the CQI report creation process. To the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202 together with the received power information.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 Detects the deterioration of the radio wave environment from the CQI report, and instructs the wireless terminal device 202 to reduce the event activation power measurement processing condition, for example, TTT to 1 ⁇ 4.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 detects further deterioration of the radio wave environment from the received power information, Before the wireless link between the wireless terminal device and the wireless base station device 101 is disconnected, a handover operation to the neighboring base station is executed.
  • FIG. 28 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining whether to perform a handover operation of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start the event activation power measurement process (step S171).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start generating reception quality information, that is, a CQI report (step S172).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 acquires reception quality information from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and changes a condition for generating reception power information by the radio terminal apparatus 202 based on the acquired reception quality information.
  • the information update cycle is shortened (step S173).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether or not to execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 based on the acquired received power information (step S174).
  • the condition setting unit 14 detects the deterioration of the reception quality, that is, the deterioration of the radio wave environment in the wireless terminal device 202, from the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12, the start of generation of the reception power information is accelerated.
  • the configuration may be such that reception power information creation start conditions are set.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 detects the deterioration of the radio wave environment from the CQI report, and instead of decreasing the TTT as a condition for the event activation power measurement process, The wireless terminal apparatus 202 is instructed to decrease the offset OST1 or increase the offset OST2.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 advances the activation timing of the event activation power measurement process, that is, the switching timing to the event activation power measurement process, based on the CQI report.
  • the handover operation can be executed before the radio link is disconnected by advancing the timing of starting the final-stage power measurement process. Become.
  • the condition setting unit 14 receives the reception quality information from the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12 in a state in which reception quality information is generated in the first period, for example, a periodic power measurement process is performed.
  • the reception power information creation conditions are changed as follows. That is, the condition setting unit 14 sets the reception power information creation condition as a process for creating reception quality information in a second cycle shorter than the first cycle when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, for example, event activation power. Change to creation conditions for measurement processing.
  • the combination of the power measurement processes need not be particularly limited, but here, as described above, the two stages of the periodic power measurement process and the event activation power measurement process that are considered to be more commonly used. The method will be described.
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation based on the content of the CQI report by the radio base station device according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 receives received power information from the radio terminal apparatus 202 at timings T142 and T143, respectively.
  • radio base station apparatus 101 for example, establishes a communication connection with radio terminal apparatus 202, so that radio terminal apparatus 202 starts periodic power measurement processing at timing T ⁇ b> 141. Instruct. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors received power information transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 activates an event from the periodic power measurement process when the radio field intensity of the neighboring cell becomes larger than a predetermined threshold value than the radio field intensity of the serving cell.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 is instructed to switch to the power measurement process.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 starts the CQI report creation process. To the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202 together with the received power information.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 at time T144 when the radio field intensity of the surrounding cell becomes larger than the radio field intensity of the serving cell and the difference between the radio field intensity of the peripheral cell and the radio wave intensity of the serving cell becomes large.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 is instructed to detect the deterioration of the radio wave environment from the CQI report and start the event activation power measurement process. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors received power information transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 detects further deterioration of the radio wave environment from the received power information, A handover operation to a neighboring base station is executed.
  • the start of the event activation power measurement process is instructed early before the timing T146 when the start of the event activation power measurement process is instructed by the received power information of the periodic power measurement process.
  • a handover operation to the neighboring base station is performed before the wireless link between the base station devices 101 is disconnected.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 not only instructs switching to the event activation power measurement process at timing T144, but also normally sets the conditions for the event activation power measurement process, such as hysteresis HS and offset OST, according to the radio wave environment. You may change to a different value.
  • FIG. 30 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining whether to perform a handover operation of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start a periodic power measurement process (step S191).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start generating reception quality information, that is, a CQI report (step S192).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 acquires reception quality information from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start an event activation power measurement process based on the acquired reception quality information. That is, switching from the periodic power measurement process to the event activation power measurement process is instructed (step S193).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 may simply be configured to additionally start the event activation power measurement process. That is, as described above, the wireless terminal device 202 may be configured to transmit a measurement result by the periodic power measurement process as a measurement result notification in the event activation power measurement process.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether or not to execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 based on the acquired received power information (step S194).
  • the handover operation determining unit 13 determines that the wireless terminal device 202 has its own power when the received power information acquired by the received power information acquiring unit 11 satisfies a predetermined condition. It is determined that a handover operation from the radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus 101 is executed. Then, the handover operation determination unit 13 adjusts the predetermined condition based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 creates a situation where the handover operation is easily performed by adding the content of the CQI report to the measurement result of the event activation power measurement process.
  • FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation based on the content of the CQI report by the radio base station device according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 receives received power information from the radio terminal apparatus 202 at timings T152 and T153, respectively.
  • radio base station apparatus 101 instructs radio terminal apparatus 202 to start the event activation power measurement process at timing T151. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors received power information transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines the radio wave environment from the received power information.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 is instructed to detect and start the CQI report creation process.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202 together with the received power information.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 calculates a conditional expression for determining execution of a handover operation based on the received CQI report. That is, radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether or not to execute the handover operation using a conditional expression in which the content of the received power information acquired at timing T153 is added to the content of the CQI report acquired after timing T153. To do.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 satisfies the conditional expression at timing T154 when the radio wave intensity of the surrounding cell becomes larger than the radio wave intensity of the serving cell and the difference between the radio wave intensity of the peripheral cell and the radio wave intensity of the serving cell becomes large. Therefore, the handover operation to the neighboring base station is executed.
  • the handover operation to the neighboring base station is executed before the timing T155 at which the execution determination of the handover operation is scheduled based on the received power information of the event activation power measurement process, and the wireless terminal device and the wireless base station device 101 are Can be prevented from being disconnected.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 considers the contents of the CQI report, for example, using the following conditional expression without changing the event activation power measurement processing conditions. Thereby, execution of the handover operation can be prompted. (Receiving power of serving cell + offset OST of serving cell + hysteresis HS of serving cell + ⁇ ⁇ (CQI report value ⁇ )) ⁇ (received power of neighboring cell + offset OST of neighboring cell)
  • ⁇ and ⁇ are positive integers, for example. That is, in this conditional expression, the larger the value of the CQI report, the better the radio environment of the serving cell is evaluated, and the more difficult the handover operation is performed.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 may adjust ⁇ and ⁇ based on, for example, the number of times that “Too Late HO” has occurred from its own radio base station apparatus to another radio base station apparatus.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 corrects the conditional expression for the transition to the report-on state at the event A3 using the CQI report value.
  • this conditional expression is an expression used in the wireless terminal device 202.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 is not limited to the configuration in which the conditional expression defined for each event is corrected by the CQI report value, and the condition determination may be performed by the CQI report value alone, or two or more times. The condition determination may be performed based on a combination of CQI report values. That is, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the handover operation determining unit 13 determines that the wireless terminal device 202 performs a handover operation from its own wireless base station device 101 to another wireless base station device 101, and receives the reception quality information The predetermined condition is set based on the reception quality information acquired by the acquisition unit 12.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 may incorporate two or more CQI report values into a conditional expression defined for each event.
  • FIG. 32 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining whether to perform a handover operation of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start the event activation power measurement process (step S181).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start generating reception quality information, that is, a CQI report (step S182).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 obtains a conditional expression for determining whether to perform the handover operation based on the acquired reception quality information and the acquired latest received power information, that is, the last acquired received power information (step S183). ).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether or not to execute a handover operation from the obtained conditional expression (step S184).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether or not to perform the handover operation using only the value of the CQI report. More specifically, the handover operation determination unit 13 in the radio base station apparatus 101 performs another radio transmission from its own radio base station apparatus 101 by the radio terminal apparatus 202 based on the CQI report acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12. It is determined whether or not a handover operation to the base station apparatus 101 is to be executed.
  • FIG. 33 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining deterioration of the radio wave environment by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the invention.
  • radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report transmitted from radio terminal apparatus 202. If the value of CQI report is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (NO in step S201), radio base station apparatus 101 It is determined that the radio wave environment of the terminal device 202 has not deteriorated, and the CQI report is continuously monitored.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has deteriorated, and is described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the handover operation is executed and the event activation power measurement processing condition is changed. For example, if it is determined that the handover operation is to be performed, the radio base station apparatus 101 selects a predetermined radio base station apparatus such as a neighboring base station or macro base station having the highest received power in the received power information as a handover destination. (Step S202).
  • a predetermined radio base station apparatus such as a neighboring base station or macro base station having the highest received power in the received power information as a handover destination.
  • the handover operation determining unit 13 evaluates the sum of the SIR and the value of the CQI report, and determines the deterioration of the radio wave environment.
  • FIG. 34 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining deterioration of the radio wave environment by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the invention.
  • radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report and received power information transmitted from radio terminal apparatus 202, and evaluates the sum of the SIR and the value of the CQI report according to the following determination formula. Determine the deterioration of the radio wave environment. ⁇ ⁇ SIR + B ⁇ CQI ⁇ threshold
  • a and B are arbitrary values.
  • the determination formula is a function of the reception power of the serving cell, the reception power of the target cell, and the CQI.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has not deteriorated, and continuously monitors the CQI report and the received power information. .
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has deteriorated. For example, as described with reference to FIGS. The execution of the operation and the condition change of the event activation power measurement process are performed. For example, if it is determined that the handover operation is to be performed, the radio base station apparatus 101 selects a predetermined radio base station apparatus such as a neighboring base station or macro base station having the highest received power in the received power information as a handover destination. (Step S212).
  • a predetermined radio base station apparatus such as a neighboring base station or macro base station having the highest received power in the received power information as a handover destination.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether to perform the handover operation based on the CQI report, the received power information, and the update elapsed time. That is, the handover operation determination unit 13 receives the CQI report acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12, the reception power information acquired by the reception power information acquisition unit 11, the time elapsed since the CQI report was updated, and the reception Whether or not to execute the handover operation is determined based on at least one of the time elapsed since the power information was updated.
  • FIG. 35 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining deterioration of the radio wave environment by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the invention.
  • radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report and received power information transmitted from radio terminal apparatus 202, measures the update elapsed time of the CQI report and received power information, and According to the determination formula, the sum of the SIR and the value of the CQI report is evaluated to determine deterioration of the radio wave environment.
  • T_MR SIR + B (T_CQI) ⁇ CQI ⁇ threshold
  • a and B are arbitrary values.
  • the determination formula is a function of the reception power of the serving cell, the reception power of the target cell, the CQI, and the update elapsed time.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 adjusts A according to the elapsed time T_MR from the timing when the received power information was last updated, and also according to the elapsed time T_CQI from the timing when the CQI report was last updated. Adjust B. Specifically, the radio base station apparatus 101 sets the weight of old information small in the above determination formula. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101 sets A smaller as the elapsed time T_MR is larger, and sets B smaller as the elapsed time T_CQI is larger.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has not deteriorated, and continuously monitors the CQI report and the received power information. .
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has deteriorated. For example, as described with reference to FIGS. The execution of the operation and the condition change of the event activation power measurement process are performed. For example, if it is determined that the handover operation is to be performed, the radio base station apparatus 101 selects a predetermined radio base station apparatus such as a neighboring base station or macro base station having the highest received power in the received power information as a handover destination. (Step S222).
  • a predetermined radio base station apparatus such as a neighboring base station or macro base station having the highest received power in the received power information as a handover destination.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 changes the weight of the CQI report based on the received power of the serving cell. That is, the handover operation determining unit 13 determines whether to execute the handover operation based on the CQI report acquired by the reception quality information acquiring unit 12 and the received power information acquired by the received power information acquiring unit 11.
  • the weight of the CQI report that is, the degree of contribution in determining whether to perform the handover operation is adjusted based on the received power information.
  • FIG. 36 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining deterioration of the radio wave environment by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the invention.
  • radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report and received power information transmitted from radio terminal apparatus 202, and evaluates the sum of the SIR and the value of the CQI report according to the following determination formula. Determine the deterioration of the radio wave environment.
  • a and B are arbitrary values.
  • the determination formula is a function of the reception power of the serving cell, the reception power of the target cell, and the CQI.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 adjusts A and B according to the received power of the serving cell in the received power information.
  • the cause of the poor reception quality indicated by the CQI report is, for example, when the interference power from the neighboring base station, that is, the reception power of the neighboring cell is large, and when the signal power from the serving base station, that is, the reception power of the serving cell is small. These are considered.
  • the interference power from the neighboring base station is large, the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 can be improved by performing a handover operation to the neighboring base station.
  • the signal power from the serving base station is small, even if the handover operation to the neighboring base station is executed, the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 is not improved, and there is a possibility that the useless handover operation will occur.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 increases A when the received power of the serving cell is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold in the function A, or the received power of the serving cell is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold in the function B. In this case, by reducing B, the weight of CQI in the above judgment formula is reduced.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has not deteriorated, and continuously monitors the CQI report and the received power information. .
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has deteriorated. For example, as described with reference to FIGS. The execution of the operation and the condition change of the event activation power measurement process are performed. For example, if it is determined that the handover operation is to be performed, the radio base station apparatus 101 selects a predetermined radio base station apparatus such as a neighboring base station or macro base station having the highest received power in the received power information as a handover destination. (Step S232).
  • a predetermined radio base station apparatus such as a neighboring base station or macro base station having the highest received power in the received power information as a handover destination.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 changes the weight of the CQI report based on the received power of the serving cell. That is, the handover operation determining unit 13 determines whether to execute the handover operation based on the CQI report acquired by the reception quality information acquiring unit 12 and the received power information acquired by the received power information acquiring unit 11.
  • the weight of the CQI report that is, the degree of contribution in determining whether or not to execute the handover operation is adjusted based on the received power information, for example, based on the number of radio base station apparatuses that are candidates for the handover destination.
  • FIG. 37 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining deterioration of the radio wave environment by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the invention.
  • radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report and received power information transmitted from radio terminal apparatus 202, and evaluates the sum of the SIR and the value of the CQI report according to the following determination formula. Determine the deterioration of the radio wave environment.
  • A number of measured base stations
  • received power of serving cell ⁇ received power of target cell
  • B number of measured base stations
  • a and B are arbitrary values.
  • the determination formula is a function of reception power of the serving cell, reception power of the target cell, CQI function, and number of base stations.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 adjusts A and B according to the number of peripheral base stations to be measured in the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the reception quality indicated by the CQI report is poor. Even if the handover operation to the target base station is executed, there is a possibility that the handover operation to the peripheral base station other than the target base station should actually be executed. That is, there is a possibility that “HO to Wong Cell” occurs.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 uses not only the reception power of the serving cell and the reception power of the target cell, but also the reception power information as a whole, so that the number of handover destination candidate base stations, that is, the number of measurement target peripheral base stations If there are many, the weight of CQI in the above judgment formula is reduced.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 increases A when the number of neighboring base stations to be measured is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold in the function A, or the number of neighboring base stations to be measured in the B function.
  • B is reduced to reduce the weight of CQI in the determination formula.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 may use the number of neighboring base stations whose received power is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold in the received power information, instead of the number of neighboring base stations to be measured in the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has not deteriorated, and continuously monitors the CQI report and the received power information. .
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has deteriorated. For example, as described with reference to FIGS. The execution of the operation and the condition change of the event activation power measurement process are performed. For example, if it is determined that the handover operation is to be performed, the radio base station apparatus 101 selects a predetermined radio base station apparatus such as a neighboring base station or macro base station having the highest received power in the received power information as a handover destination. (Step S242).
  • a predetermined radio base station apparatus such as a neighboring base station or macro base station having the highest received power in the received power information as a handover destination.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether to perform a handover operation based on statistical data of CQI reports for a plurality of times. That is, the handover operation determining unit 13 determines whether or not to execute the handover operation based on a plurality of CQI reports.
  • FIG. 38 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining deterioration of the radio wave environment by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the invention.
  • radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report transmitted from radio terminal apparatus 202, performs statistical processing such as average processing on the CQI report values for a plurality of times, and performs CQI report values. To determine the deterioration of the radio wave environment.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines deterioration of the radio wave environment, for example, according to the following determination formula. ⁇ CQI (t) ⁇ threshold
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 is not limited to the above determination formula, and may use difference information ⁇ CQI (t + 1) ⁇ CQI (t) ⁇ , for example.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has not deteriorated, and continues to monitor the CQI report.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has deteriorated. For example, as described with reference to FIGS. The execution of the operation and the condition change of the event activation power measurement process are performed. For example, if it is determined that the handover operation is to be performed, the radio base station apparatus 101 selects a predetermined radio base station apparatus such as a neighboring base station or macro base station having the highest received power in the received power information as a handover destination. (Step S252).
  • a predetermined radio base station apparatus such as a neighboring base station or macro base station having the highest received power in the received power information as a handover destination.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether to perform the handover operation based on a plurality of CQI reports indicating reception quality acquired at different times. Thereby, it is possible to suppress erroneous determination due to instantaneous deterioration of the transmission path characteristics.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 may be configured to determine the deterioration of the radio wave environment by combining the evaluation methods described with reference to FIGS. For example, the value after statistical processing of the CQI report described with reference to FIG. 38 can be used for each determination formula shown in FIGS.
  • FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a correspondence between the reception power information and the CQI report and each layer in the communication protocol by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • radio base station apparatus 101 has, for example, an RRC layer, a PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) layer, an RLC (Radio Link Control) layer, a MAC layer, a PHY layer, and an RF (Radio Frequency) layer. Operates according to the communication protocol.
  • RRC layer is the highest layer and the RF layer is the lowest layer.
  • the reception power information acquisition unit 11 acquires reception power information, that is, a measurement result notification according to the RRC layer among the above layers.
  • the reception quality information acquisition unit 12 acquires a CQI report according to at least one of the MAC layer and the PHY layer lower than the RRC layer among the above layers.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 communicates with the radio terminal apparatus 202 in each of the RRC layer, the PDCP layer, the RLC layer, the MAC layer, the PHY layer, and the RF layer as indicated by an arrow R1. Messages such as requests and responses are exchanged between them.
  • the CQI report corresponds to at least one of the MAC layer and the PHY layer. For this reason, for example, when the CQI report corresponds to the MAC layer, the radio base station apparatus 101 makes a request, a response, etc. Exchange messages.
  • the CQI report does not require time for the acquisition process compared to the received power information, and the radio base station apparatus 101 can acquire the CQI report in a short cycle.
  • Non-Patent Document 1 By the way, when an inappropriate handover operation as described in Non-Patent Document 1 is performed, various problems such as communication disconnection and increase in communication traffic occur in the communication system.
  • the received power information acquisition unit 11 performs the measurement result of the received power of the radio signal from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus 202. Is received.
  • the reception quality information acquisition unit 12 is updated at a cycle shorter than the reception power information, and acquires reception quality information indicating the reception quality of the radio signal from its own radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus 202. Then, based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12, the handover operation determination unit 13 executes a handover operation from the own radio base station device to another radio base station device by the radio terminal device 202. Judge whether to do.
  • the configuration using the CQI report whose update cycle is shorter than the received power information can follow a rapid change in the radio wave environment, so that, for example, the occurrence of “Too Late HO” can be suppressed. . That is, it is possible to quickly execute the handover operation to the neighboring base station and prevent the radio link between the radio terminal device and the radio base station device from being disconnected.
  • the handover operation determination unit 13 is acquired by the reception quality information and reception power information acquisition unit 11 acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12. Based on the received power information, it is determined whether or not the wireless terminal device 202 performs a handover operation from its own wireless base station device to another wireless base station device.
  • the configuration using the received power information in addition to the CQI report for determination of execution of the handover operation makes it possible to grasp the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 in more detail and more appropriately determine whether to execute the handover operation. .
  • condition setting unit 14 changes the reception power information creation condition based on the reception quality information acquired by reception quality information acquisition unit 12. To do.
  • reception power information creation conditions are quickly and appropriately set according to the reception quality of the wireless terminal device 202, and more appropriate reception power information is acquired as information for determining whether to perform a handover operation. Can do.
  • condition setting section 14 when condition setting section 14 detects reception quality deterioration from reception quality information acquired by reception quality information acquisition section 12, reception power information Reduce the update cycle.
  • the update timing of the received power information can be advanced according to the deterioration of the reception quality of the wireless terminal device 202. Therefore, the information for determining whether to execute the handover operation can follow the rapid change in the radio wave environment. And can get quickly.
  • reception power information starts to be created when a predetermined start condition is satisfied.
  • the condition setting unit 14 detects deterioration of reception quality from the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12, the condition setting unit 14 sets the start condition so that the generation of the reception power information is started earlier.
  • reception power information can be created early in response to reception quality degradation of the wireless terminal device 202, so that information for determining whether to perform a handover operation can be changed rapidly. Can be quickly acquired by following.
  • the handover operation determining unit 13 performs the handover operation when the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquiring unit 12 satisfies a predetermined condition.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 performs a handover operation from its own wireless base station device to a predetermined wireless base station device.
  • the handover operation is quickly performed without requesting the wireless terminal device 202 to change the reception power information creation condition. be able to.
  • the handover operation determining unit 13 is acquired by the received power information acquiring unit 11 to which radio base station apparatus the handover operation is to be executed. It is determined based on the received power information.
  • the handover operation determining unit 13 performs a radio terminal station 202 to another radio base station from its own radio base station apparatus when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is determined that a handover operation to the device is executed. The handover operation determination unit 13 sets the predetermined condition based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12.
  • the handover operation determining unit 13 is configured such that when the received power information acquired by the received power information acquiring unit 11 satisfies a predetermined condition, It is determined that a handover operation from its own radio base station apparatus to another radio base station apparatus is executed by 202. Then, the handover operation determination unit 13 adjusts the predetermined condition based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12.
  • the handover operation can be quickly executed without waiting for the above timing.
  • the handover operation determining unit 13 is acquired by the CQI report acquired by the received quality information acquiring unit 12 and the received power information acquiring unit 11. Whether or not to execute the handover operation is determined based on the received power information and at least one of the time elapsed since the CQI report was updated and the time elapsed since the received power information was updated.
  • the configuration in which the update elapsed time of the information indicating the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 is used for determination of execution of the handover operation can suppress erroneous determination due to old information and more appropriately perform execution determination of the handover operation. it can.
  • the handover operation determination unit 13 receives the CQI report acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12 and the reception power information acquisition unit 11. Whether or not to execute the handover operation is determined based on the power information, and the weight of the CQI report in determining whether or not to execute the handover operation is adjusted based on the received power information.
  • the value of the CQI report can be appropriately evaluated based on the received power information. Therefore, the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 can be grasped more accurately and the execution determination of the handover operation can be performed more appropriately. be able to.
  • the handover operation determining unit 13 determines whether or not to execute the handover operation based on the CQI reports for a plurality of times.
  • the received power information acquisition unit 11 acquires received power information according to the first layer among a plurality of layers in the communication protocol.
  • the reception quality information acquisition unit 12 acquires reception quality information according to a second layer lower than the first layer among the plurality of layers.
  • the configuration for performing the handover operation execution determination using lower layer information can reduce the acquisition time of the information for determining the handover operation execution. And appropriate execution judgment becomes possible. That is, since it becomes possible to follow a sudden change in the radio wave environment, for example, the occurrence of “Too Late HO” can be suppressed. As a result, the handover operation to the neighboring base station can be quickly executed, and the radio link between the radio terminal device and the radio base station device can be prevented from being disconnected. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
  • the radio base station apparatus is not limited to the configuration for acquiring the reception quality information and the reception power information, and shows the measurement results of radio signals from one or a plurality of radio base station apparatuses in the radio terminal apparatus. Any configuration that acquires information may be used.
  • the received power information corresponds to the RRC layer specified by 3GPP
  • the reception quality information is at least of the MAC layer and the PHY layer specified by 3GPP. Corresponds to one.
  • the radio base station apparatus is configured to receive the reception quality information and the reception power information from the radio terminal apparatus 202, but is not limited thereto.
  • the radio base station apparatus may be configured to acquire reception quality information and reception power information indirectly from the radio terminal apparatus 202 via another apparatus, or reception quality created by an apparatus other than the radio terminal apparatus 202
  • the configuration may be such that information and received power information are acquired.
  • the present embodiment relates to a radio base station apparatus to which control for reducing the time required for the handover operation is added as compared with the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment.
  • the contents other than those described below are the same as those of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment.
  • the radio base station apparatus optimizes the handover operation by adjusting parameters such as hysteresis HS, offset OST, and TTT as described above.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates an example of the sequence of the handover operation in the radio communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • a preparation process on the core network side that is, the wireless base station device 101A
  • the wireless base station device 101A Consider a preparation period T101 until various information is exchanged between the host apparatus and the radio base station apparatus 101B, and then the radio base station apparatus 101A performs a process of transmitting an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • “Too Late HO” may occur.
  • the preparation process on the core network side information is often transmitted and received via a general communication line. Therefore, it takes a long time to complete the preparation process, and the preparation period T101 is significantly increased. there is a possibility.
  • FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a control unit in the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • control unit 98 includes a handover request unit 21, a handover instruction unit 22, a handover condition adjustment unit 23, a handover information acquisition unit 24, and a terminal measurement result acquisition unit 25.
  • the terminal measurement result acquisition unit 25 acquires the measurement result notification from the wireless terminal device 202, obtains the communication quality between the wireless base station device 101 and the wireless terminal device 202 from the acquired measurement result notification, and determines the communication quality.
  • the handover request unit 21 and the handover instruction unit 22 are notified.
  • the handover request unit 21 makes a request for performing a handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202 from its own wireless base station device 101 to another wireless base station device to other wireless base station devices, that is, makes a handover request to other wireless base station devices. Transmit to the radio base station apparatus. For example, the handover request unit 21 makes the request to another radio base station apparatus when a predetermined handover preparation condition regarding communication quality between the radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to perform a handover operation from its own radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus. That is, an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202.
  • the handover instructing unit 22 receives the above response, and if the handover execution condition regarding the communication quality between its own radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio terminal apparatus 202 is not satisfied, Cancel or suspend giving instructions. For example, when a predetermined handover execution condition is not satisfied, the handover instruction unit 22 does not give the instruction to the wireless terminal device 202 and notifies other wireless base station devices that the handover operation is to be stopped. To do.
  • FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation sequence in the wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA and is in communication with the wireless base station device 101A, and moves to an overlapping area of the cell CA and the cell CB. To do.
  • radio base station apparatus 101A sets a frequency to be measured by radio terminal apparatus 202 in communication with itself and another radio base station apparatus that transmits a radio signal of the frequency. (Step S301).
  • the wireless base station device 101A transmits to the wireless terminal device 202 a measurement start request for causing the wireless terminal device 202 to measure the reception level of the wireless signal transmitted from the other wireless base station device that has been set.
  • This measurement start request includes neighboring cell information, that is, the cell ID of the radio base station apparatus to be measured. Further, the measurement start request includes the transmission frequency of each radio base station device (step S302).
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 receives the measurement start request from the radio base station apparatus 101A and starts power measurement processing, that is, the radio base station apparatus indicated by the measurement start request at the frequency indicated by the received measurement start request.
  • the received power of the radio signal transmitted from is measured (step S303).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating the measurement result of the received power to the wireless base station device 101A.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 periodically measures the received power, when the communication state with the wireless base station device 101A deteriorates, and with other wireless base station devices other than the wireless base station device 101A When the state becomes better, a measurement result notification is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S304).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID based on the measurement result notification received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and stores it in a storage unit (not shown) (step S305).
  • the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that a handover preparation process should be performed, and refers to neighboring cell information, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B is determined as the handover destination (step S306).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the higher-level apparatus (step S307).
  • the host device receives the handover request from the radio base station device 101A and transmits the handover request to the radio base station device 101B (step S308).
  • the radio base station device 101B receives the handover request from the higher-level device and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the higher-level device (step S309).
  • the host device receives a handover response from the radio base station device 101B, and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station device 101A (step S310).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S311).
  • the wireless base station device 101A based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. In this way, the radio base station apparatus 101A updates the communication quality every time it receives a measurement result notification (step S312).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A when the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover instruction from the host apparatus and the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A should execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 (Step S313).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S314).
  • the radio base station device 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status to the higher-level device (step S315).
  • the host device receives the status notification from the radio base station device 101A, and transmits a status notification indicating the communication content with the radio terminal device 202 to the radio base station device 101B (step S316).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification to the wireless base station device 101B (step S317).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the higher-level apparatus (step S318).
  • the host device receives a handover completion notification from the radio base station device 101B and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station device 101A (step S319).
  • the wireless base station device 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the higher-level device, releases information related to the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the higher-level device (step S320).
  • FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an exemplary sequence of a handover operation in the wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 42 shows an example of a sequence for canceling the handover operation. The case assumed in FIG. 42 is the same as FIG.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover instruction from the host apparatus, and executes the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 when the finally acquired communication quality does not satisfy the predetermined handover execution condition. It is determined that the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed should be stopped (step S343).
  • the radio base station device 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the higher-level device (step S344).
  • the handover instructing unit 22 when the handover instructing unit 22 notifies the radio base station apparatus 101B that the handover operation has been stopped, the communication quality between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the radio terminal apparatus 202 is subject to the condition. Notify the upper apparatus and the radio base station apparatus 101B that it is not satisfied.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A sets a flag indicating that the handover operation is canceled due to the communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the handover cancellation notification, and transmits the flag to the host apparatus and the radio base station apparatus 101B. To do.
  • the host apparatus and the radio base station apparatus 101B can distinguish from an event in which the handover operation is stopped due to, for example, an error in parameter setting regarding the handover operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing such as new parameter setting processing from occurring in the higher-level device and the radio base station device 101B, and to appropriately release various resources reserved for the handover operation.
  • the host apparatus receives the handover cancellation notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and performs handover cancellation processing such as erasure of stored information for the handover operation corresponding to the handover cancellation notification, if necessary, and the radio base station apparatus
  • the handover stop notification is transmitted to 101B (step S345).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover cancellation notification, and performs handover cancellation processing such as erasure of stored information for the handover operation corresponding to the handover cancellation notification (step S346).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 uses the conditional expression of event A3 to Set the preparation conditions. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines execution of the handover operation when the following expression is satisfied. (Receiving power of serving cell + offset OST1 of serving cell + hysteresis HS) ⁇ (received power of neighboring cell + offset OST2 of neighboring cell)
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 determines the start of preparation for handover operation when the following expression is satisfied.
  • the control value P is a value of zero or more.
  • the handover preparation condition is a condition where it is less necessary to perform a handover operation from the radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus by the radio terminal apparatus 202 as compared with the handover execution condition.
  • the latest communication quality grasped at the time of receiving the handover instruction from the higher-level apparatus is deteriorated by the amount corresponding to the control value P or more compared with the time when the preparation process for the handover operation is started. In this case, it is determined that a handover operation should be executed.
  • the preparatory process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the criterion for determining whether to execute the handover operation. It becomes possible to quickly execute a handover operation in response to an environmental change.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A performs the handover operation when the latest communication quality grasped at the time of receiving the handover instruction from the host apparatus is better than when the preparation process for the handover operation is started. It is determined that should be stopped. That is, when the control value P is set to zero, the handover operation that is no longer necessary due to the improvement of the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 can be appropriately stopped.
  • the handover condition adjusting unit 23 can adjust the difference between the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition and the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition.
  • the handover information acquisition unit 24 acquires the number of times that the handover instruction unit 22 has notified other wireless base station devices that the handover operation has been stopped.
  • the handover condition adjusting unit 23 adjusts the communication quality difference based on the number of times acquired by the handover information acquiring unit 24.
  • the handover information acquisition unit 24 acquires the number of times that the handover operation from the wireless base station device 101 to another wireless base station device by the wireless terminal device 202 is inappropriate.
  • the handover condition adjusting unit 23 adjusts the communication quality difference based on the number of times acquired by the handover information acquiring unit 24.
  • the handover condition adjusting unit 23 adjusts the control value P according to the following equation.
  • W1 and W2 are weighting coefficients, and are a positive value and a negative value, respectively.
  • P W1 ⁇ “Too Late HO” number of times + W2 ⁇ number of times of useless preparation processing (number of times of handover operation cancellation)
  • the number of times described above is not limited to the number of times for one other wireless base station device in a certain wireless base station device, but may be the total number of times for a plurality of other wireless base station devices.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 may use, for example, the value of the CQI report as the communication quality.
  • the CQI report does not directly notify the current radio wave condition in each cell, but is a value expressed in 16 levels from 0 to 15 by the following formula using SINR.
  • CQI min (max (round ((SINR [dB] +8) /1.892), 0), 15)
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 may be configured to wait until the communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition after receiving a response from another radio base station apparatus to the handover request. That is, in radio base station apparatus 101, handover instruction unit 22 receives a response from another radio base station apparatus and waits until the handover execution condition is satisfied when the handover execution condition is not satisfied. Then, when the handover execution condition is satisfied, the handover instruction unit 22 instructs the wireless terminal device 202 to perform a handover operation. On the other hand, if a predetermined handover suspension condition related to communication quality is satisfied before the handover execution condition is satisfied, the handover instruction unit 22 does not give a handover operation instruction to the wireless terminal device 202 and performs the handover operation. Notify other radio base station apparatus to cancel.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 based on a measurement result notification that arrives periodically, for example, from the radio terminal apparatus 202 after completion of the handover operation preparation process.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 is instructed to perform a handover operation.
  • FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an exemplary sequence of a handover operation in the wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The case assumed in FIG. 43 is the same as FIG.
  • steps S361 to S370 are the same as the operations in steps S301 to S310 shown in FIG. 41, so detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S371).
  • the wireless base station device 101A based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. In this way, the radio base station apparatus 101A updates the communication quality every time it receives a measurement result notification (step S372).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover instruction from the host apparatus and waits until the communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition or handover cancellation condition (step S373).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed (step S374).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S375).
  • FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an exemplary sequence of a handover operation in the wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 44 shows an example of a sequence for canceling the handover operation. The case assumed in FIG. 44 is the same as FIG.
  • steps S401 to S413 are the same as the operations in steps S361 to S373 shown in FIG. 43, so detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the radio base station device 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal device 202, and cancels the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that it should be (step S414).
  • the wireless base station device 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the higher-level device (step S415).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A sets a flag indicating that the handover operation is canceled due to the communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the handover cancellation notification, and sends it to the host apparatus. Send.
  • the higher-level apparatus receives the handover cancellation notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and performs handover cancellation processing such as erasure of retained information for the handover operation corresponding to the handover cancellation notification, if necessary,
  • the handover cancellation notice is transmitted to the base station apparatus 101B (step S416).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover cancellation notification, and performs handover cancellation processing such as erasure of retained information for the handover operation corresponding to the handover cancellation notification (step S417).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101 sets a handover cancel condition using the conditional expression of event A3. To do. That is, in addition to the conditional expression for determining whether to execute the handover operation and determining whether to start preparation described with reference to the sequences shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether to cancel the handover operation when the following expression is satisfied. .
  • the control value Q is a positive value.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation should be stopped when the communication quality is improved by an amount corresponding to the control value Q or more compared to when the preparation process for the handover operation is started. That is, when the control value Q is set to a positive value, the handover operation can be appropriately stopped with respect to the improvement of the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202.
  • control value Q when the control value Q is set to zero, the handover preparation condition and the handover cancellation condition become equal, and the handover preparation process and the cancellation process are repeated. However, by setting the control value Q to a positive value, The occurrence of such an event can be prevented.
  • the handover cancel condition is not limited to a condition related to communication quality, and may be an elapsed time, for example.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A starts a timer before and after transmitting a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the host apparatus (step S407), To do. Then, when the timer started before the handover execution condition expires, the radio base station apparatus 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202, and cancels the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that it should be, and a handover stop notification is transmitted to the host device (step S414).
  • FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating an example of a breakdown of time required for the handover operation in the wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • the time required for the handover operation includes, for example, time T201 corresponding to the interval of power measurement processing in radio terminal apparatus 202, time T202 corresponding to TTT, preparation processing time T203 for handover operation, and handover This is the sum of the operation execution time, that is, the time T204 from when the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction is transmitted to when the handover completion notification is transmitted.
  • TTT is a period for the wireless terminal device 202 to transmit measurement result notifications at regular intervals after transition to the report-on state. For this reason, time T201 and time T202 may overlap.
  • FIG. 45 shows a case where the handover operation is performed based on the measurement result notification first transmitted by the wireless terminal device 202 after the transition to the report-on state in order to simplify the description.
  • the time T201 is 200 ms, for example, and 5 ms when using the CQI report.
  • the time T202 is, for example, 0 ms to 2000 ms.
  • the time T203 is, for example, 50 ms to 150 ms.
  • the time T204 is 40 ms, for example.
  • Time T201 and time T202 can be shortened by adjusting parameters such as hysteresis HS, offset OST, and TTT.
  • time T203 is ideally reduced to 0 ms by the configuration for performing the handover operation preparation process and the handover operation execution determination process as described above. Is possible.
  • Non-Patent Document 1 By the way, when an inappropriate handover operation as described in Non-Patent Document 1 is performed, various problems such as communication disconnection and increase in communication traffic occur in the communication system.
  • the handover request unit 21 performs handover of the radio terminal apparatus 202 from its own radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus.
  • a request for operation is made to another radio base station apparatus.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to perform a handover operation from its own radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus. give.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 responds to the wireless terminal device 202 when a predetermined handover execution condition regarding communication quality between the wireless base station device 101 and the wireless terminal device 202 is not satisfied. Cancel or hold the above instructions.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation, so that “Too Late HO” can be suppressed.
  • “Too Late HO” can be suppressed.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 receives the above response and performs a predetermined communication quality between the radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 is not instructed to perform the handover operation, and notifies the other wireless base station device that the handover operation is to be stopped.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 receives the response from the other radio base station apparatus and receives its own radio base station apparatus 101 and radio terminal apparatus 202. If a predetermined handover execution condition regarding the communication quality is not satisfied, the system waits until the handover execution condition is satisfied. Then, the handover instruction unit 22 gives a handover instruction to the wireless terminal device 202 when the handover execution condition is satisfied.
  • the handover operation is performed on the radio terminal apparatus 202. Since an instruction can be given, a handover operation can be executed at an optimal timing.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 waits until the handover execution condition is satisfied, and before the handover execution condition is satisfied, the handover stop condition regarding the communication quality is set. When the condition is satisfied, a handover instruction is not given to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and the other radio base station apparatus is notified that the handover operation is to be stopped.
  • the handover request unit 21 satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition regarding the communication quality between its own radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio terminal apparatus 202. In this case, a handover request is made to another radio base station apparatus.
  • the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation.
  • the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition is equivalent to the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition.
  • the radio environment of the wireless terminal device improves during the preparation period for the handover operation, and the handover operation that is no longer necessary can be stopped appropriately, thereby suppressing the execution of the unnecessary handover operation. can do.
  • the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition is equal to or better than the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition, and the handover is canceled.
  • the communication quality indicated by the condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition.
  • the radio environment of the wireless terminal device improves during the preparation period for the handover operation, and the handover operation that is no longer necessary can be stopped appropriately, thereby suppressing the execution of the unnecessary handover operation. can do.
  • the radio base station apparatus when the handover instruction unit 22 notifies other radio base station apparatuses of the suspension of the handover operation, the radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio base station apparatus The other radio base station apparatus is notified that the communication quality between the terminal apparatuses 202 does not satisfy the condition.
  • the other radio base station apparatus can distinguish from an event in which the handover operation is stopped due to, for example, an error in parameter setting related to the handover operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent occurrence of unnecessary processes such as new parameter setting processes in other radio base station apparatuses and appropriately release various resources reserved for the handover operation.
  • the handover condition adjustment unit 23 adjusts the difference between the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition and the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition.
  • Such a configuration makes it possible to adjust the frequency of inappropriate handover operations such as “Too Late HO” and the frequency of canceling handover operations, thereby realizing more appropriate handover operations.
  • the handover condition adjustment unit 23 is based on the number of times that the handover instruction unit 22 is notified of the cancellation of the handover operation to another radio base station apparatus. Adjust the communication quality difference.
  • Such a configuration makes it possible to appropriately adjust the frequency of inappropriate handover operations such as “Too Late HO” and the frequency of cancellation of handover operations from the viewpoint of the frequency of handover operation cancellation.
  • the handover information acquisition unit 24 performs a handover operation from the radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus by the radio terminal apparatus 202. Get the number of times it was inappropriate.
  • the handover condition adjusting unit 23 adjusts the communication quality difference based on the number of times acquired by the handover information acquiring unit 24.
  • the communication quality between the radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio terminal apparatus 202 includes the relationship between the reception power of the serving cell and the reception power of the neighboring cells, or the CQI.
  • the configuration uses report values, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not limited to the received power of the wireless terminal device 202, and any configuration that uses some index indicating communication quality between the wireless base station device and the wireless terminal device, such as an error rate of a pilot signal, may be used. Moreover, the structure using the conditional expression of events other than event A3 may be sufficient. Further, the communication quality is not limited to the downlink communication quality, and may be configured to use the uplink communication quality.
  • FIG. 46 is a diagram showing radio environment parameters in the radio communication system to be simulated.
  • the radio environment parameters of the radio communication system to be the subject of this simulation are “number of base stations / number of sectors”, “distance between base stations”, “path loss”, that is, radio transmitted by the radio base station apparatus.
  • the number of macro base stations in this wireless communication system is 19, the total number of sectors is 57, assuming that the macro base station has three sectors, the number of pico base stations is 1, and the pico base station Has one sector and the total number of sectors is one.
  • the distance between the macro base stations is 500 m, and the distance between the macro base station and the pico base station is 250 m.
  • the path loss for the macro base station is 15.3 + 37.6 ⁇ log 10 (d) [dB] where the distance between the macro base station and the wireless terminal device is d [m], and the path loss for the pico base station is pico
  • the distance between the base station and the wireless terminal device is 30.6 + 36.7 ⁇ log 10 (d) [dB] where d [m] is the distance.
  • the antenna gain of the macro base station is 15 dBi, and the antenna gain of the pico base station is 5 dBi.
  • the antenna gain of the wireless terminal device 202 is 0 dBi in both the macro base station and the pico base station.
  • the standard deviation of shadowing for the macro base station is 8 dB, and the standard deviation of shadowing for the pico base station is 10 dB.
  • the shadowing interphase distance for the macro base station is 25 m, and the shadowing interphase distance for the pico base station is 25 m.
  • the shadowing correlation value for a macro base station is 0.5 between cells and 1 between sectors, and the shadowing correlation value for a pico base station is 0.5 between cells.
  • the directivity pattern of the macro base station antenna is a three-dimensional pattern, and the pico base station antenna is omnidirectional.
  • the carrier frequency and band on the transmission side of the macro base station are 2.0 GHz and 10 MHz, respectively, and the carrier frequency and band on the transmission side of the pico base station are 2.0 GHz and 10 MHz, respectively.
  • the total transmission power of the macro base station is 46 dBm, and the total transmission power of the pico base station is 30 dBm.
  • the macro base station has one transmission antenna, the pico base station has one transmission antenna, and the wireless terminal device 202 has two reception antennas. Other parameters such as the minimum distance between the radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus conform to 3GPP TR 36.814.
  • FIG. 47 is a diagram showing parameters of power measurement processing (Measurement) in the wireless communication system to be simulated.
  • set 1 to set 5 are provided as profiles. In the order from set 1 to set 5, the timing of the handover operation is advanced, and in set 5, the timing of the handover operation is the earliest.
  • the parameters of the power measurement process are the terminal moving speed, the base station load factor, TTT, the offset OST of the event A3, the power measurement interval, that is, the measurement result notification update cycle, and the filtering coefficient ⁇ .
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives the received power M (t ⁇ 1) measured at time (t ⁇ 1), the received power M (t) measured at time t after time (t ⁇ 1), and the filtering coefficient ⁇ . From this, the received power MR (t) expressed by the following equation is calculated.
  • MR (t) (1-2 ⁇ ⁇ / 4 ) ⁇ MR (t ⁇ 1) + 2 ⁇ ⁇ / 4 ⁇ M (t)
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating the received power MR (t) to the wireless base station device.
  • the filtering coefficient ⁇ When the filtering coefficient ⁇ is increased, the past received power is reflected in the measurement result notification, so the timing of the handover operation is delayed. On the other hand, when the filtering coefficient ⁇ is reduced, the more recent received power is reflected in the measurement result notification, so that the timing of the handover operation is advanced.
  • the moving speed of the wireless terminal device 202 is 3 km, 30 km, 60 km, and 120 km per hour, and the base station load factor is 100%.
  • the TTT is 480 ms
  • the offset OST is 3 dB
  • the power measurement interval is 200 ms
  • the filtering coefficient ⁇ is 4.
  • the TTT is 160 ms
  • the offset OST is 3 dB
  • the power measurement interval is 200 ms
  • the filtering coefficient ⁇ is 4.
  • the TTT is 160 ms
  • the offset OST is 2 dB
  • the power measurement interval is 200 ms
  • the filtering coefficient ⁇ is 1.
  • TTT is 80 ms
  • the offset OST is 1 dB
  • the power measurement interval is 200 ms
  • the filtering coefficient ⁇ is 1.
  • TTT is 40 ms
  • offset OST is ⁇ 1 dB
  • power measurement interval is 200 ms
  • filtering coefficient ⁇ is 0.
  • the operation of performing the handover operation execution determination using the CQI report by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention is referred to as “HO determination by CQI”, and the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • the operation for completing the handover operation preparation process prior to the execution determination of the handover operation is referred to as “HO preparation shortening”.
  • the radio base station apparatus determines to execute the handover operation. Specifically, the radio base station apparatus executes a handover operation when the value of the CQI report becomes 1 or less.
  • the radio base station apparatus selects the radio base station apparatus with the highest received power as the handover destination in the newest measurement result notification.
  • the radio base station apparatus receives a CQI report from the radio terminal apparatus 202 once every 10 ms and a measurement result notification once every 200 ms.
  • the handover operation preparation processing time when the HO preparation shortening is performed is 10 ms
  • the handover operation preparation processing time when the HO preparation shortening is not performed is as shown in FIG. 2 without using the X2 interface. Assuming a handover operation using the S1 interface, it is 100 ms.
  • FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a simulation result of a handover failure probability.
  • the occurrence probability of handover failure is determined without the HO determination by CQI and the HO preparation is not shortened. It can be reduced in most cases.
  • the HO determination based on the CQI is performed and the HO preparation is not shortened, the HO determination based on the CQI is not performed, and the probability of occurrence of a handover failure (HOF) is greatly reduced as compared with the configuration in which the HO preparation is shortened. Can do.
  • the probability of occurrence of a handover failure can be further reduced as compared with the configuration in which the HO determination by CQI is performed and the HO preparation is not shortened. it can.
  • FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a simulation result of the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO”.
  • the probability of occurrence of “Ping Pong HO” is the configuration in which HO determination by CQI is not performed and HO preparation is not shortened. There is a slight increase in some areas. This is because handover failure (HOF) is avoided.
  • the “Ping Pong HO” in the set 1 and set 2 is compared with the configuration in which the HO determination by CQI is not performed and the HO preparation is not shortened.
  • the probability of occurrence has increased. This is due to avoiding handover failure (HOF).
  • the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO” is reduced by avoiding unnecessary handover operation.
  • the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO” is increased as compared with the configuration in which the HO determination is performed by CQI and the HO preparation is not shortened. This is because handover failure (HOF) is further avoided by shortening HO preparation.
  • FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the sum of the handover failure probability shown in FIG. 48 and the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO” shown in FIG.
  • the HO determination is not performed by CQI, the HO preparation is shortened, the HO determination is performed by CQI, the HO preparation is not shortened, the HO determination is performed by CQI, and the HO preparation is shortened.
  • the sum of the failure probability of handover and the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO” is reduced in most cases as compared with the configuration in which the HO determination by the CQI is not performed and the HO preparation is not shortened.
  • FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an improvement target by the radio base station apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 51 shows a breakdown of the elapsed time from when the radio wave environment in the target cell becomes better than that in the serving cell until the handover operation is actually completed.
  • the time required for the handover operation is, for example, a time T211 corresponding to an interval of power measurement processing in the wireless terminal device 202, a time T212 corresponding to TTT, a preparation time T213 for handover operation, and an execution time of the handover operation, that is, RRC This is the sum of the time T214 from when the connection reconfiguration instruction is transmitted to when the handover completion notification is transmitted.
  • TTT is a period for the wireless terminal device 202 to transmit measurement result notifications at regular intervals after transition to the report-on state. For this reason, time T211 and time T212 may overlap.
  • FIG. 51 shows a case where a handover operation is performed based on a measurement result notification first transmitted by the wireless terminal device 202 after the transition to the report-on state, for the sake of simplicity.
  • the time T211 is, for example, 200 ms, and is 5 ms at the shortest when the CQI report is used.
  • the time T212 is 40 ms to 1000 ms, for example.
  • the time T213 is, for example, 40 ms to 100 ms.
  • the time T214 is 50 ms, for example.
  • Improvement targets by the “HO judgment based on CQI” in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention are time T211 and time T212, and the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention
  • the target of improvement by “shortening HO preparation” is time T213.
  • the proportion of the time T213, which is the preparation processing time for the handover operation is about 10% to 20% of the whole.
  • the time T211 can be shortened, and thus the ratio of the time T213 is increased. If the HO preparation is shortened, the time T213 can be shortened to 10 ms, so that the probability of occurrence of a handover failure can be greatly improved particularly in the configuration combined with the HO determination by CQI.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation is performed after the execution of the handover operation is determined. For this reason, even if the HO preparation is shortened, the effect of reducing the occurrence of “Ping Pong HO”, that is, reducing the number of unnecessary handover operations is not directly obtained.
  • the radio base station apparatus As described above, it is confirmed from the simulation that the radio base station apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention appropriately controls the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus and stabilizes communication in the radio communication system. It was.
  • switching of MME is required in handover operation
  • switching of S-GW is required in handover operation
  • switching of MME and S-GW in handover operation.
  • the explanation is divided into cases where necessary.
  • FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • a radio communication system 401 is a mobile communication system according to LTE (Long Term Evolution) standardized by 3GPP, for example, and includes radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • a handover operation is performed in which the communication partner, that is, the communication connection destination is switched from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A corresponds to a serving base station
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B corresponds to a peripheral base station (also referred to as a target base station).
  • FIG. 52 representatively shows two radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B, but a larger number of radio base station apparatuses may be provided.
  • the wireless communication system 401 further includes an S-GW 161 (gateway device), MMEs 162A and 162B (communication control device), and a P-GW (Packet Data Network Gateway) 163 provided in the core network 301.
  • S-GW 161 gateway device
  • MMEs 162A and 162B communication control device
  • P-GW Packet Data Network Gateway
  • the wireless terminal device 202 establishes a communication connection with a server or the like in the IP network 302 (upper network) via the wireless base station devices 101A and 101B, the S-GW 161, and the P-GW 163, for example, an IP (Internet Protocol) packet.
  • Communication data including
  • the S-GW 161 is connected between the radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B and the IP network 302.
  • the S-GW 161 transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A and 101B to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and also received via the P-GW 163 from a server or the like in the IP network 302.
  • the transmitted communication data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A and 101B.
  • the MME 162A manages the wireless base station device 101A, the wireless terminal device 202, and the like in the wireless communication system 401.
  • the MME 162A transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the MME 162B manages the radio base station apparatus 101B and the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the radio communication system 401.
  • the MME 162B transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101B.
  • Radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B transmit and receive communication data to and from IP network 302 via S-GW 161 and P-GW 163.
  • the radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A and the MME 162A exchange various data via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line.
  • wireless base station apparatus 101B and MME 162B exchange various data via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by dotted lines. .
  • the MMEs 162A, 162B and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface which is a logical interface.
  • the S-GW 161 and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
  • the MME 162A and the MME 162B mutually exchange various information via the S10 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S10 interface which is a logical interface.
  • FIG. 53 is a sequence of handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for handover operation is satisfied in the wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • wireless terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating a measurement result of received power to wireless base station apparatus 101A.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 periodically measures the received power, when the communication state with the wireless base station device 101A deteriorates, and with other wireless base station devices other than the wireless base station device 101A When the state becomes better, a measurement result notification is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S421).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID and stores it in a storage unit (not shown). Then, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that a handover preparation process should be performed, and refers to neighboring cell information, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B is determined as the handover destination (step S422).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A that is a corresponding higher-level apparatus (step S423).
  • the MME 162A determines whether it is necessary to switch the MME based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162A determines whether or not the radio base station apparatus 101B indicated in the handover request is its management target (step S424).
  • the MME 162A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162B that manages the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S425).
  • the MME 162B determines whether it is necessary to switch the S-GW 161 based on the handover request received from the MME 162A.
  • the MME 162B includes an S-GW 161 connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW 161 connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Whether or not is different.
  • the S-GW 161 connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302 and the S-GW 161 connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302 are the same. Therefore, the MME 162B determines that there is no need to switch the S-GW 161 (step S426).
  • the MME 162B transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S427).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162B, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162B (step S428).
  • the MME 162B transfers the handover response received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S429).
  • the target packet that is a packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is accumulated in the wireless base station device 101A during the preparation period for the handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202, or the target packet is newly received from the S-GW 161.
  • data forwarding is performed in which the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B.
  • the MME 162A when the MME 162A receives the handover response from the MME 162B, the MME 162A sends a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path (hereinafter also referred to as a data forwarding path) to the S-GW 161. Transmit (step S430).
  • a logical path hereinafter also referred to as a data forwarding path
  • the S-GW 161 upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162A, the S-GW 161 establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161 establishes a logical path between radio base station apparatus 101A and radio base station apparatus 101B through itself. Then, the S-GW 161 transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162A (step S431).
  • the MME 162A transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet, which is a packet addressed to the radio terminal apparatus 202 that is stored in itself or newly received from the S-GW 161, to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161. (Step S432).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. If the communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed (step S433). Note that the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition described above is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S434).
  • RRC Connection Reconfiguration RRC Connection Reconfiguration
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status and the like to the MME 162A (step S435).
  • This state notification includes information such as the serial number of the packet for the radio base station apparatus 101B to process the transfer packet in data forwarding.
  • the MME 162A transfers the status notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162B (step S436).
  • the MME 162B transmits a status notification response to the status notification transferred from the MME 162A to the MME 162A (step S437).
  • the MME 162B transmits a status notification indicating the content of communication with the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101B (step S438).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B. (Step S439).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits the packet transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • radio base station apparatus 101B performs packet sequence control using the serial number or the like indicated by the status notification received from radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a packet to the wireless base station device 101B, and the wireless base station device 101B transmits the target packet to the S-GW 161.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162B (step S440).
  • This handover completion notification includes a path switching request to the S-GW 161.
  • the MME 162B transfers the handover completion notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S441).
  • the MME 162A transmits a handover completion notification response to the handover completion notification received from the MME 162B to the MME 162B (step S442).
  • the MME 162B transmits a bearer change request including the path switching request to the S-GW 161 (step S443).
  • the S-GW 161 receives the bearer change request from the MME 162B, and performs path switching processing. That is, the transmission destination of the target packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B. Switch to.
  • the S-GW 161 transmits a bearer change response including a path switching response to the bearer change request to the MME 162B (step S444).
  • the S-GW 161 transmits the target packet with the end marker attached to the radio base station apparatus 101A, ends the transmission of the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101A, and then transmits the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B. Start sending.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B suspends and accumulates transmission of the target packet from the S-GW 161 not via the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the wireless base station device 101A transfers the target packet with the end marker received from the S-GW 161 to the wireless base station device 101B via the S-GW 161.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the end of the target packet to be transferred to the radio base station apparatus 101B as the target packet with the end marker.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the target packet with the end marker from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and recognizes that the data forwarding to itself by the radio base station apparatus 101A has been completed.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B transmits all the target packets transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits the accumulated target packets from the S-GW 161 to the radio terminal apparatus 202. To start.
  • the MME 162A transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S445).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162A, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162A (step S446).
  • the MME 162A transmits a data forwarding path deletion request to the S-GW 161 (step S447).
  • the S-GW 161 deletes the data forwarding path and transmits a data forwarding path deletion response to the MME 162A (step S448).
  • FIG. 54 is a sequence of the handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for the handover operation is not satisfied in the radio communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • step S451 to step S462 is the same as the operation from step S421 to step S432 shown in FIG. 53, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. If the communication quality does not satisfy the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 and should stop the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that there is (step S463).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification for canceling the handover operation to the MME 162A (step S464).
  • the MME 162A transfers the handover cancellation notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162B (step S465).
  • the MME 162B transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S466).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162B, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162B (step S467).
  • the MME 162B transmits a handover stop response to the MME 162A (step S468).
  • the MME 162A transmits the handover stop response received from the MME 162B to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S469).
  • the MME 162A transmits a data forwarding path deletion request to the S-GW 161 (step S470).
  • the S-GW 161 deletes the data forwarding path, and transmits a data forwarding path deletion response to the MME 162A (step S471).
  • FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • radio communication system 402 is a mobile communication system according to LTE standardized by, for example, 3GPP, similar to radio communication system 401 shown in FIG. 52, and includes radio base station apparatus 101A and radio base station A station apparatus 101B.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 moves from a state where it is communicating with the wireless base station device 101A, and the communication partner, that is, the communication connection destination is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device. Assume that a handover operation is performed so as to switch to 101B.
  • the wireless communication system 402 further includes S-GWs 161A and 161B (gateway devices), an MME 162 (communication control device), and a P-GW 163 provided in the core network 301.
  • S-GWs 161A and 161B gateway devices
  • MME 162 communication control device
  • P-GW 163 provided in the core network 301.
  • the S-GW 161A is connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302.
  • the S-GW 161A transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101A to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and communication received from the server in the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163. Data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101A.
  • the S-GW 161B is connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302.
  • the S-GW 161B transmits the communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101B to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and the communication received via the P-GW 163 from a server or the like in the IP network 302. Data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101B.
  • the MME 162 manages the radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B and the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the radio communication system 402.
  • the MME 162 transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits / receives communication data to / from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161A and the P-GW 163.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B transmits / receives communication data to / from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161B and the P-GW 163.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A and the S-GW 161A exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B and the S-GW 161B exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
  • the radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B and the MME 162 exchange various data with each other via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line. .
  • the MME 162 and the S-GWs 161A and 161B exchange various pieces of information with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface, which is a logical interface.
  • the S-GWs 161A and 161B and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
  • FIG. 56 is a sequence of a handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for the handover operation is satisfied in the wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • step S481 to step S483 is the same as the operation from step S421 to step S423 shown in FIG. 53, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the MME 162 determines whether it is necessary to switch the MME 162 based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162 determines whether or not the radio base station apparatus 101B indicated in the handover request is its own management target. Here, since the radio base station apparatus 101B is a management target of the MME 162, the MME 162 determines that there is no need to switch the MME (step S484).
  • the MME 162 determines whether or not it is necessary to perform S-GW switching based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162 includes an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Whether or not is different (step S485).
  • the MME 162 includes an S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Because of the difference, the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus are configured so that downlink packets addressed to the radio terminal apparatus 202 from the upper network and uplink packets from the radio terminal apparatus 202 to the upper network can pass through the S-GW 161B.
  • the S-GW 161B is requested to create a communication path with the terminal 101B (step S486).
  • the S-GW 161B receives the communication path creation request from the MME 162, creates a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B passing through the S-GW 161B, and sends a communication path creation response to the MME 162. (Step S487).
  • the MME 162 transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S488).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162 (step S489).
  • the MME 162 when receiving a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, the MME 162 issues a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path (hereinafter also referred to as a data forwarding path).
  • the data is transmitted to the S-GW 161B (step S490).
  • the S-GW 161B upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161B establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161B establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and S-GW 161B, and a logical communication path between S-GW 161B and radio base station apparatus 101B. Then, the S-GW 161B transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S491).
  • the MME 162 transmits a communication path establishment request for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface to the S-GW 161A (step S492).
  • the S-GW 161A upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161A establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161A establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the S-GW 161A transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S493).
  • the MME 162 transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the base transceiver station 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface (step S494).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. If the communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed (step S495).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S496).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status and the like to the MME 162 (step S497).
  • This state notification includes information such as the serial number of the packet for the radio base station apparatus 101B to process the transfer packet in data forwarding.
  • the MME 162 transmits a status notification indicating communication contents and the like with the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101B (step S498).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification to the wireless base station device 101B (step S499).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits the packet transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • radio base station apparatus 101B performs packet sequence control using the serial number or the like indicated by the status notification received from radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a packet to the wireless base station device 101B, and the wireless base station device 101B transmits the target packet to the S-GW 161B.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162 (step S500).
  • This handover completion notification includes a path switching request for the S-GW 161B.
  • the MME 162 transmits a bearer change request including the above path switching request to the S-GW 161B (step S501).
  • the S-GW 161B receives the bearer change request from the MME 162, and performs path switching processing. That is, the transmission destination of the target packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B. Switch to.
  • the S-GW 161B transmits a bearer change response including a path switching response to the bearer change request to the MME 162 (step S502).
  • the S-GW 161A transmits the target packet with the end marker attached thereto to the radio base station apparatus 101A, terminates the transmission of the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B. Start sending.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B suspends and accumulates transmission of the target packet from the S-GW 161B not via the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet with the end marker received from the S-GW 161A to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the end of the target packet to be transferred to the radio base station apparatus 101B as the target packet with the end marker.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the target packet with the end marker from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and recognizes that the data forwarding to itself by the radio base station apparatus 101A has been completed.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B transmits all the target packets transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits the accumulated target packets from the S-GW 161B to the radio terminal apparatus 202. To start.
  • the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161A to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S503).
  • the MME 162 transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S504).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S505).
  • the S-GW 161A receives the communication path deletion request from the MME 162, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162 ( Step S506).
  • the MME 162 deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, that is, the data forwarding path, from the S-GW 161A. (Step S507).
  • the S-GW 161A deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and sends a data forwarding path deletion response to the MME 162. Transmit (step S508).
  • the MME 162 deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B and the logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, the deletion of the data forwarding path. -Request to GW 161B (step S509).
  • the S-GW 161B receives the data forwarding path deletion request, the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B and the logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B.
  • the communication path is deleted, and a data forwarding path deletion response is transmitted to the MME 162 (step S510).
  • FIG. 57 is a sequence of a handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for the handover operation is not satisfied in the wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • step S511 to step S524 is the same as the operation from step S481 to step S494 shown in FIG. 56, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. If the communication quality does not satisfy the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 and should stop the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that there is (step S525).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the MME 162 (step S526).
  • the MME 162 transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S527).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S528).
  • the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161B to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S529).
  • the S-GW 161B receives the communication path deletion request from the MME 162, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162 ( Step S530).
  • the MME 162 transmits a handover stop response to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S531).
  • step S532 to step S535 are executed. Since the operations from step S532 to step S535 are the same as the operations from step S507 to step S510 shown in FIG. 56, detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • radio communication system 403 is a mobile communication system that complies with LTE standardized by 3GPP, for example, similar to radio communication system 401 shown in FIG. A station apparatus 101B.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 moves from a state in which it is communicating with the wireless base station device 101A, and the communication partner, that is, the communication connection destination is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station. Assume that a handover operation is performed so as to switch to the apparatus 101B.
  • the wireless communication system 403 further includes S-GWs 161A and 161B (gateway devices), MMEs 162A and 162B (communication control devices), and a P-GW 163 provided in the core network 301.
  • S-GWs 161A and 161B gateway devices
  • MMEs 162A and 162B communication control devices
  • P-GW 163 provided in the core network 301.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits / receives communication data to / from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161A and the P-GW 163.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B transmits / receives communication data to / from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161B and the P-GW 163.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A and the S-GW 161A exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B and the S-GW 161B exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A and the MME 162A exchange various data via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B and the MME 162B exchange various kinds of information with each other via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line.
  • the MME 162A and the S-GW 161A exchange various data with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface which is a logical interface.
  • the MME 162B and the S-GW 161B exchange various data with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface which is a logical interface.
  • the S-GWs 161A and 161B and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
  • the MME 162A and the MME 162B mutually exchange various information via the S10 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S10 interface which is a logical interface.
  • FIG. 59 is a sequence of a handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for the handover operation is satisfied in the wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • step S541 to step S545 is the same as the operation from step S421 to step S425 shown in FIG. 53, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the MME 162B determines whether it is necessary to switch the S-GW based on the handover request received from the MME 162A. Specifically, the MME 162B includes an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Are different from each other (step S546).
  • the MME 162B includes an S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Because of the difference, the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B are configured so that downlink packets addressed to the radio terminal apparatus 202 from the higher level network and uplink packets from the radio terminal apparatus 202 to the higher level network can pass through the S-GW 161B. A request is made to the S-GW 161B to create a communication path between them (step S547).
  • the S-GW 161B receives a communication path creation request from the MME 162B, creates a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B passing through the S-GW 161B, and sends a communication path creation response to the MME 162B. (Step S548).
  • the MME 162B transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S549).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162B and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162B (step S550).
  • the MME 162B when receiving a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, the MME 162B issues a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path (hereinafter also referred to as a data forwarding path).
  • the data is transmitted to the S-GW 161B (step S551).
  • the S-GW 161B upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162B, the S-GW 161B establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161B establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and S-GW 161B, and a logical communication path between S-GW 161B and radio base station apparatus 101B. Then, the S-GW 161B transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162B (step S552).
  • the MME 162B transfers the handover response received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S553).
  • the MME 162A transmits a request for establishing a logical communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface to the S-GW 161A (step S554).
  • the S-GW 161A upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162A, the S-GW 161A establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161A establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the S-GW 161A transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162A (step S555).
  • the MME 162A transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the base transceiver station 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface (step S556).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. When the communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed (step S557).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S558).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status to the MME 162A (step S559).
  • This state notification includes information such as the serial number of the packet for the radio base station apparatus 101B to process the transfer packet in data forwarding.
  • the MME 162A transfers the status notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162B (step S560).
  • the MME 162B transmits a status notification response to the status notification transferred from the MME 162A to the MME 162A (step S561).
  • the MME 162B transmits a status notification indicating the communication contents and the like with the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101B (step S562).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B. (Step S563).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits the packet transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • radio base station apparatus 101B performs packet sequence control using the serial number or the like indicated by the status notification received from radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a packet to the wireless base station device 101B, and the wireless base station device 101B transmits the target packet to the S-GW 161B.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162B (step S564).
  • This handover completion notification includes a path switching request for the S-GW 161B.
  • the MME 162B transfers the handover completion notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S565).
  • the MME 162A transmits a handover completion notification response to the handover completion notification received from the MME 162B to the MME 162B (step S566).
  • the MME 162B transmits a bearer change request including the above path switching request to the S-GW 161B (step S567).
  • the S-GW 161B receives the bearer change request from the MME 162B, and performs a path, that is, a logical communication path switching process, that is, sets the transmission destination of the target packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101A To the radio base station apparatus 101B.
  • the S-GW 161B transmits a bearer change response including a path switching response to the bearer change request to the MME 162B (step S568).
  • the S-GW 161A transmits the target packet with the end marker attached thereto to the radio base station apparatus 101A, terminates the transmission of the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B. Start sending.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B suspends and accumulates transmission of the target packet from the S-GW 161B not via the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet with the end marker received from the S-GW 161A to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the end of the target packet to be transferred to the radio base station apparatus 101B as the target packet with the end marker.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the target packet with the end marker from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and recognizes that the data forwarding to itself by the radio base station apparatus 101A has been completed.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B transmits all the target packets transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits the accumulated target packets from the S-GW 161B to the radio terminal apparatus 202. To start.
  • the MME 162A requests the S-GW 161A to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S569).
  • the MME 162A transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S570).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162A, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162A (step S571).
  • the S-GW 161A receives a communication path deletion request from the MME 162A, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162A ( Step S572).
  • the MME 162A deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, that is, the data forwarding path, from the S-GW 161A. (Step S573).
  • the S-GW 161A deletes a logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and sends a data forwarding path deletion response to the MME 162A. Transmit (step S574).
  • the MME 162B deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B and the logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, the deletion of the data forwarding path. -Request to GW 161B (step S575).
  • the S-GW 161B receives the data forwarding path deletion request, the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B and the logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B.
  • the communication path is deleted, and a data forwarding path deletion response is transmitted to the MME 162B (step S576).
  • FIG. 60 is a sequence of the handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for the handover operation is not satisfied in the wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • step S581 to step S596 is the same as the operation from step S541 to step S556 shown in FIG. 59, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. If the communication quality does not satisfy the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 and should stop the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that there is (step S597).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the MME 162A (step S598).
  • the MME 162A transfers the handover cancellation notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162B (step S599).
  • the MME 162B transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S600).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162B, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162B (step S601).
  • the MME 162B requests the S-GW 161B to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S602).
  • the S-GW 161B receives the communication path deletion request from the MME 162B, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162B ( Step S603).
  • the MME 162B transmits a handover stop response to the MME 162A (step S604).
  • the MME 162A transmits the handover stop response received from the MME 162B to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S605).
  • step S606 to step S609 are executed. Since the operations from step S606 to step S609 are the same as the operations from step S573 to step S576 shown in FIG. 59, detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the value of the CQI report may be used as the communication quality between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the sequences shown in FIGS. 53, 54, 56, 57, 59, and 60.
  • Non-Patent Document 1 when an inappropriate handover operation as described in Non-Patent Document 1 is performed, various problems such as communication interruption and increase in communication traffic occur in the wireless communication system.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A issues a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 from itself to the radio base station apparatus 101B. It transmits to corresponding MME162A. Further, when the handover destination radio base station apparatus 101B indicated by the handover request is not the management target of the MME 162A, the MME 162A transmits the handover request to the MME 162B that manages the radio base station apparatus 101B. In addition, the MME 162B transmits the received handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B, and when receiving a response to the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101B, transmits a response to the MME 162A.
  • the MME 162A receives the response from the MME 162B, and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover instruction, determines whether or not a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied, and if the execution condition is not satisfied, The provision of an instruction for performing a handover operation to the wireless terminal device 202 is stopped or suspended.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation is completed prior to determining whether to perform the handover operation. Therefore, for example, “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device 202 is too late can be suppressed. Also, unlike when adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, the timing of handover by wireless terminal device 202 is too early to prevent an increase in the occurrence probability of “Too Early HO”. it can. That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good wireless communication system can be constructed. Therefore, the communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A issues a handover request when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied.
  • the communication quality transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101B and indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation.
  • the time required for the handover operation can be significantly shortened by performing transmission / reception of information necessary for switching the MME 162 in advance as a preparation process for the handover operation.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 from itself to the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162.
  • the MME 162 is configured when the S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the upper network is different from the S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the upper network. Transmits a communication path creation request to the S-GW 161B.
  • the S-GW 161B can relay communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 transmitted from the upper network and communication data transmitted from the wireless terminal device 202 to the upper network.
  • a route is created, and a communication route creation response to the communication route creation request is transmitted to the MME 162.
  • the MME 162 transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B, and when receiving a response to the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101B, transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied, and the execution condition is not satisfied. In this case, the provision of an instruction for performing a handover operation to the wireless terminal device 202 is stopped or suspended.
  • the S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the upper network is different from the S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the upper network.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed prior to the determination of the execution of the handover operation, for example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” in which the timing of the handover by the wireless terminal device 202 is too late. it can.
  • the timing of handover by wireless terminal device 202 is too early to prevent an increase in the occurrence probability of “Too Early HO”. it can. That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good wireless communication system can be constructed. Therefore, the communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A performs the handover request when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied. Is transmitted to the MME 162, and the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
  • the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation.
  • the time required for the handover operation can be significantly shortened by performing transmission / reception of information necessary for switching the S-GW 161 in advance as a preparation process for the handover operation.
  • FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining an example of a situation where there are a plurality of radio base station apparatuses that are handover destination candidates.
  • FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of a sequence of handover operations in the situation shown in FIG. is there.
  • radio base station apparatus 101A can communicate with radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming cell CA and transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in cell CA. It is.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CB and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CB.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101C can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CC and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CC.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA, moves to the overlapping area of the cell CA, the cell CB, and the cell CC after selecting the wireless base station device 101A as a communication connection destination. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A corresponds to a serving base station, the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C correspond to peripheral base stations, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C serve as handover destination candidates. Assume the case.
  • radio terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating a measurement result of received power to radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • This measurement result includes the measurement results of the received power of the radio signals transmitted from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C in the neighboring cells and the cell IDs of the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C (step S611).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID and stores it in a storage unit (not shown). Then, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover preparation process should be performed when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition.
  • the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101B and the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101C may both satisfy the handover preparation condition.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines, as a handover destination radio base station apparatus, that the communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is better among the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C that are candidates for the handover destination. Select (step S612).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A when the radio base station apparatus 101B is selected as a handover destination in step S612, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101A sends a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to an MME (Mobility Management Entity) 162 that is a higher-level apparatus. Transmit (step S613).
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • the MME 162 receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S614).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME (step S615).
  • the MME 162 receives the handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S616). As described above, the preparation process for the handover operation is completed (step S617).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S618).
  • the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, when the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition, the radio base station device 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal device 202 should be executed (step S619).
  • step S620 to step S626 are executed. Since the operations from step S620 to step S626 are the same as the operations from step S314 to step S320 shown in FIG. 41, detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining a problem in an example of a situation where there are a plurality of radio base station apparatuses that are handover destination candidates, and FIG. 64 shows an example of a sequence of a handover operation in the situation shown in FIG. FIG.
  • step S631 to step S638 are executed. Since the operations from step S631 to step S638 are the same as the operations from step S611 to step S618 shown in FIG. 62, detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 has entered the cell CC, and the communication quality between the wireless base station device 101B and the wireless terminal device 202 newly acquired by the wireless base station device 101A satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. Suppose that it does not meet.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 to the radio base station apparatus 101B should be stopped (step S639).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification for canceling the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162 (step S640). Then, the MME 162 receives the handover cancellation notification from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S641).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S642). Then, the MME 162 receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a handover stop response to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S643).
  • the wireless base station device 101A selects a handover destination wireless base station device based on the newly acquired measurement result.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101C is newly selected as the handover destination radio base station apparatus (step S644).
  • a handover operation preparation process (steps S645 to S649) is performed again. Since the operations from step S645 to step S649 are the same as the operations from step S613 to step S617 shown in FIG. 62, detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 related to the peripheral base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal apparatus 202 after the completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain peripheral base station. In such a case, the handover operation preparation process and the handover operation stop process are repeated.
  • radio terminal apparatus 202 is located in cell CA and selects radio base station apparatus 101A as a communication connection destination, cell CA. It is assumed that the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C satisfy the preparation conditions for the handover operation in a situation where the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C have moved to the overlapping area of the cell CB and the cell CC.
  • FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a wireless communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • radio communication system 404 is a mobile communication system according to LTE (Long Term Evolution) standardized by 3GPP, for example, and includes radio base station apparatus 101A. , 101B, 101C. In FIG. 65, three radio base station apparatuses are representatively shown, but a larger number of radio base station apparatuses may be provided.
  • the wireless communication system 404 further includes an S-GW (Serving Gateway) 161 (gateway device), an MME (Mobility Management Entity) 162 (communication control device) provided in the core network 301, and a P-GW (Packet Data Network). Gateway) 163.
  • S-GW Serving Gateway
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • P-GW Packet Data Network
  • the wireless terminal device 202 establishes a communication connection with a server or the like in the IP network 302 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C, the S-GW 161, and the P-GW 163, for example, an IP (Internet Protocol) packet. Send and receive communication data.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • the S-GW 161 is connected between the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C and the IP network 302.
  • the S-GW 161 transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and from the server in the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163.
  • the communication data received in (1) is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, 101C.
  • the MME 162 manages the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C, the radio terminal apparatus 202, and the like in the radio communication system 401.
  • the MME 162 transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C.
  • the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C transmit and receive communication data to and from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161 and the P-GW 163.
  • the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
  • the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C and the MME 162 transmit and receive communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, to each other via the S1-MME interface, as indicated by dotted lines. Communicate.
  • the MME 162 and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface which is a logical interface.
  • the S-GW 161 and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
  • radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C of the radio communication system 404 are all the same as the radio base station apparatus 101 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. That is, referring to FIG. 19, radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C include antenna 91, circulator 92, radio reception unit 93, radio transmission unit 94, signal processing unit 95, and control unit 98. including.
  • control unit 98 of each of the radio base station devices 101A, 101B, 101C of the radio communication system 404 is the same as the control unit 98 of the radio base station device according to the second embodiment of the present invention. That is, with reference to FIG. 40, the control unit 98 of the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C includes a handover request unit 21, a handover instruction unit 22, a handover condition adjustment unit 23, a handover information acquisition unit 24, And a terminal measurement result acquisition unit 25.
  • the handover request unit 21 transmits a handover request to a plurality of other radio base station devices. For example, the handover request unit 21 of the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that both the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C have a handover preparation condition between the radio terminal apparatus 202 and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C. A handover request is transmitted to.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 receives a response from another radio base station apparatus to the handover request, and selects a handover destination radio base station apparatus from other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to this response.
  • the handover request unit 21 of the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C can execute a handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 of the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C as handover destination candidates, and selects the handover destination radio base station from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C. Select a station device.
  • the handover instructing unit 22 acquires the measurement result of the received power in the radio terminal device 202 of the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station devices 101B and 101C, and based on this measurement result, the radio terminal device The radio base station apparatus with the better communication state with 202 is selected as the handover destination radio base station apparatus.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction for instructing a handover operation to the selected handover destination radio base station apparatus to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the handover instructing unit 22 receives the above response and executes handover related to the communication quality between its own radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C and the radio terminal apparatus 202. If the condition is not satisfied, the assignment of the instruction to the wireless terminal device 202 is stopped or suspended. For example, when a predetermined handover execution condition is not satisfied, the handover instruction unit 22 does not transmit an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and sends a handover cancellation notification to another radio base station apparatus. Send.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 can exclude other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to measurement results that cannot be acquired for a predetermined period from the handover destination candidates. is there.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 moves to a position away from the radio base station device 101C to such an extent that the received power with the radio base station device 101C cannot be measured.
  • the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202 within a predetermined period after the wireless base station device 101A receives the response indicates the communication state between the wireless base station device 101B and the wireless terminal device 202.
  • information related to the measurement result of the received power is included, information related to the measurement result of the received power indicating the communication state between the radio base station apparatus 101C and the radio terminal apparatus 202 may not be included.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 can remove the radio base station apparatus 101C from the handover destination candidates.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 notifies the other wireless base station devices other than the handover destination wireless base station device among other wireless base station devices corresponding to the response of the handover operation cancellation notification. Send.
  • the handover request unit 21 of the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C can execute a handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101A. It is assumed that a response indicating that there is a response and the handover instruction unit 22 selects the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination. In this case, when the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a notification indicating that the handover has been completed from the radio base station apparatus 101B, for example, via the higher-level apparatus, the handover instruction unit 22 of the radio base station apparatus 101A is a radio that is not the handover destination. A handover operation stop notification is transmitted to the base station apparatus 101C.
  • FIG. 66 is a sequence of the handover operation when the handover source radio base station apparatus selects the handover destination in the radio communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • wireless terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating a measurement result of received power to wireless base station apparatus 101A.
  • This measurement result notification includes the measurement result of the received power of the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C in the neighboring cells (step S651).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID and stores it in a storage unit (not shown). Then, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the preparation process for the handover operation should be performed when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition.
  • the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101B and the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101C may both satisfy the handover preparation condition.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the radio base station apparatus 101B and the radio base station apparatus 101C as handover destination candidates (step S652).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162 (step S653). Also, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101C to the MME 162 (step S654).
  • the MME 162 receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S655). Also, the MME 162 receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S656).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162 and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162 (step S657). Also, the radio base station apparatus 101C receives a handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162 (Step S658).
  • the MME 162 receives the handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a handover instruction with the radio base station apparatus 101B as the handover destination to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S659). Further, the MME 162 receives the handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101C, and transmits a handover instruction with the radio base station apparatus 101C as the handover destination to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S660). As described above, the preparation process for the handover operation to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C is completed (step S661).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S662).
  • the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed when the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines, for example, the one with the better communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C for which the handover operation preparation process has been completed. Select as a radio base station device. In the fourth embodiment, it is assumed that the radio base station apparatus 101B is selected (step S663).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction with the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S664).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status and the like to the MME 162 (step S665).
  • the MME 162 receives the status notification from the radio base station device 101A, and transmits a status notification indicating the communication contents and the like with the radio terminal device 202 to the radio base station device 101B (step S666).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification to the wireless base station device 101B (step S667).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162 (step S668).
  • the MME 162 receives the handover completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S669).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, and performs a handover operation to the radio base station apparatus other than the radio base station apparatus 101B selected as the handover destination, that is, the radio base station apparatus 101C.
  • a handover cancel notification for canceling is transmitted to the MME 162 (step S670).
  • the MME 162 receives the handover cancellation notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S671).
  • the wireless base station device 101C receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, releases information related to the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S672).
  • the MME 162 receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101C, and transmits a handover stop response to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S673).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover stop response from the MME 162, releases information regarding the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S674).
  • the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101B is completed (step S668), and after the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the MME 162 (step S669), the radio base station The apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the MME 162 (step S670).
  • the operation flow is not necessarily limited to this.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A sends a handover operation stop notification to the radio base station apparatus 101C before the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101B is completed. May be sent to. In this case, for example, the operations from step S670 to step S673 are performed before step S667.
  • the handover request unit 21 of the radio base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C sends a handover request to a plurality of other radio base station devices. Do it.
  • the radio terminal device 202 related to the neighboring base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal device 202 after the completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain neighboring base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent the communication between the device 202 and the radio base station device from being interrupted.
  • the handover operation preparation processing with other neighboring base stations is completed, so the handover operation It is possible to prevent the transmission / reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation stop process from being repeated, and to reduce the load on the wireless communication system.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 receives a handover response, and receives a handover destination radio from other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to this response.
  • a base station apparatus is selected, and an instruction to perform a handover operation to the handover destination radio base station apparatus is given to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the information is compared with the case where a plurality of radio base station apparatuses are presented in the instruction.
  • the amount can be reduced, and the contents of the instruction can be simplified.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 transmits a radio signal transmitted from another radio base station apparatus corresponding to this response.
  • a measurement result of the received power in the radio terminal device 202 is acquired, and a handover destination radio base station device is selected based on the measurement result.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 receives another radio base station apparatus corresponding to the measurement result that cannot be acquired for a predetermined period after receiving the handover response as the handover destination. Remove from the candidate.
  • a radio base station apparatus that is far away from the radio terminal apparatus 202 to such an extent that the radio terminal apparatus 202 cannot measure received power can be excluded from handover destination candidates.
  • a suitable radio base station apparatus can be selected.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 performs handover destination radio base station among other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to the handover response after the handover operation is completed.
  • a request for canceling the handover operation is transmitted to a radio base station apparatus other than the station apparatus.
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 may When moving in a direction approaching the apparatus, the radio base station apparatus to be canceled may be an optimal handover destination. In this case, it is necessary to perform the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus to be canceled again.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 in the wireless communication system 404 performs the handover operation to the wireless base station device other than the wireless base station device selected as the handover destination as described above. Stop after completion. As a result, even when the wireless terminal device 202 moves and the radio wave state changes before the handover operation is completed, and the handover operation to another neighboring base station is performed, the preparation process for the handover operation is performed again. There is no need to do it.
  • radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C of radio communication system 405 include antenna 91, circulator 92, radio receiver 93, and radio transmitter 94.
  • control unit 98 of the radio base station devices 101A, 101B, 101C of the radio communication system 405 is the same as the control unit 98 of the radio base station device according to the second embodiment of the present invention. That is, with reference to FIG. 40, the control unit 98 of the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C includes a handover request unit 21, a handover instruction unit 22, a handover condition adjustment unit 23, a handover information acquisition unit 24, Terminal measurement result acquisition unit 25.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 receives a response from another radio base station apparatus to the handover request, sets another radio base station apparatus corresponding to this response as a handover destination candidate, and indicates the radio base station apparatus that is the candidate Information is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202.
  • the handover request unit 21 of the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C can execute a handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 of the radio base station apparatus 101A instructs the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C to perform a handover operation using the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C as handover destination candidates.
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202.
  • FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating a comparative example of the message structure of the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction
  • FIG. 68 is transmitted from the handover request unit in the wireless communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the message structure of a RRC connection reconfiguration instruction
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A when the radio base station apparatus 101A selects the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination and transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202, the radio base station apparatus 101A Includes only the information of the radio base station apparatus 101B in the “Mobility Control Info” of the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (see “Info1” in FIG. 67).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A uses the “Mobility Control Info” in the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction.
  • the information ("Target Cell List") of a plurality of radio base station apparatuses is enumerated and transmitted to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (see "Info2" in FIG. 68).
  • wireless terminal apparatus 202 can grasp
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction and selects a handover destination wireless base station device.
  • the handover instructing unit 22 receives information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the radio terminal apparatus 202 and sends a status notification indicating the communication state of its own radio base station apparatus to the handover destination radio base station apparatus Send to.
  • FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a wireless terminal device of the wireless communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 of the wireless communication system 405 includes an antenna 31, a circulator 32, a receiving unit 33, a transmitting unit 34, and a signal processing unit 35.
  • the signal processing unit 35 includes a reception signal processing unit 36, a selection unit 37, and a communication control unit 38.
  • the circulator 32 outputs radio signals from the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C received at the antenna 31 to the reception unit 33, and outputs radio signals received from the transmission unit 34 to the antenna 31.
  • the receiving unit 33 outputs the radio signal received from the circulator 32 to the signal processing unit 35.
  • the received signal processing unit 36 performs various signal processing such as despreading in a CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) system on the radio signal output from the receiving unit 33.
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • the selection unit 37 determines whether the radio base station apparatus is a handover destination candidate. To select a handover destination radio base station apparatus.
  • the selection unit 37 of the wireless terminal device 202 acquires the measurement result of the received power in the wireless terminal device 202 of the wireless signal transmitted from the wireless base station devices 101B and 101C, and based on the measurement result Then, the radio base station apparatus with the better communication state with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is selected as the handover destination radio base station apparatus.
  • the communication control unit 38 uses an IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) or the like in the OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex) method for information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the selection unit 37 or information generated by itself. Various signal processing is performed, and the signal after this signal processing is output to the transmitter 34.
  • IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
  • OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex
  • the transmission unit 34 outputs the signal received from the communication control unit 38 to the circulator 32.
  • the transmission unit 34 transmits information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the selection unit 37, that is, a handover destination notification via the circulator 32 and the antenna 31, which is a communication connection destination of the radio terminal apparatus 202. Transmit to base station apparatus 101A.
  • FIG. 70 is a sequence of the handover operation when the radio terminal apparatus selects the handover destination in the radio communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • step S681 to step S692 operations from step S681 to step S692 are executed. Since the operations from step S681 to step S692 are the same as the operations from step S651 to step S662 shown in FIG. 66, detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, when the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed (step S693).
  • radio base station apparatus 101A issues an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to instruct radio terminal apparatus 202 to perform a handover operation to radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C determined as a handover destination candidate based on the measurement result notification. It transmits to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S694).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 receives the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction for instructing the handover operation from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station devices 101B and 101C, and the handover operation preparation process is completed.
  • a handover destination radio base station apparatus is selected from the existing radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C. In the fourth embodiment, it is assumed that the radio base station apparatus 101B is selected (step S695).
  • the radio terminal apparatus 202 transmits information indicating the selected handover destination radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, a handover destination notification to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S696).
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A receives information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus 101B selected by the radio terminal apparatus 202, and sends a status notification indicating the communication status of the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162. Send.
  • This state notification includes, for example, information indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B selected as the handover destination (step S697).
  • step S698 to step S706 are executed. Since the operations from step S698 to step S706 are the same as the operations from step S666 to step S674 shown in FIG. 66, detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the handover instructing unit 22 receives the handover response, and sends another radio base station apparatus corresponding to this response to the handover destination.
  • Information indicated as a candidate is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202.
  • the configuration in which the wireless terminal device 202 selects the handover destination wireless base station device makes it possible to select the handover destination wireless base station according to the latest radio wave environment as compared with the case where the handover source wireless base station device selects.
  • a device can be selected.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 receives and receives information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the radio terminal apparatus 202 Predetermined information is transmitted to the handover destination radio base station apparatus indicated by the information.
  • the handover source radio base station apparatus grasps the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits information necessary for the handover operation to the handover destination radio base station apparatus. Since it is transmitted to the apparatus, it is possible to transmit and receive information without waste.
  • Radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C of radio communication system 406 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention are all the same as radio base station apparatus 101 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. That is, referring to FIG. 19, radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C include antenna 91, circulator 92, radio reception unit 93, radio transmission unit 94, signal processing unit 95, and control unit 98. including.
  • FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a control unit in the radio base station apparatus according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • control unit 98 of radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C of radio communication system 404 includes received power information acquisition unit (first measurement information acquisition unit) 11 and reception quality information acquisition unit (first 2 measurement information acquisition unit) 12, handover operation determination unit 13, condition setting unit 14, handover request unit 21, handover instruction unit 22, handover condition adjustment unit 23, handover information acquisition unit 24, terminal measurement And a result acquisition unit 25.
  • the reception power information acquisition unit 11 acquires reception power information indicating measurement results of reception power of radio signals from the radio base station apparatuses 101 in the radio terminal apparatus 202, that is, measurement result notification.
  • the reception quality information acquisition unit 12 is updated at a cycle shorter than the reception power information, and acquires reception quality information, that is, a CQI report indicating the reception quality of the radio signal from the radio base station apparatus 101 in the radio terminal apparatus 202.
  • the handover request unit 21 makes a request for performing a handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202 from its own wireless base station device 101 to another wireless base station device to other wireless base station devices, that is, makes a handover request to other wireless base station devices. Transmit to the radio base station apparatus.
  • the handover request unit 21 acquires a CQI report from the reception quality information acquisition unit 12, and when the value of the CQI report is lower than a predetermined threshold, the cell CA formed by the handover request unit 21 receives interference from neighboring cells due to interference received from the neighboring cells. It is determined that the reception quality of the apparatus 202 has deteriorated.
  • a predetermined handover preparation condition regarding communication quality between the wireless base station device 101 and the wireless terminal device 202 is satisfied.
  • this handover preparation condition is satisfied, a handover request is made to another radio base station apparatus.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to perform a handover operation from its own radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus. That is, an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 acquires a CQI report from the reception quality information acquisition unit 12, and determines that the reception quality of the wireless terminal device 202 is degraded when the value of this CQI report is lower than a predetermined threshold. To do.
  • a predetermined handover execution condition regarding communication quality between the wireless base station device 101 and the wireless terminal device 202 is satisfied. If this handover execution condition is satisfied, the above instruction is given to another radio base station apparatus.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 cancels or holds the provision of the instruction to the wireless terminal device 202. For example, when a predetermined handover execution condition is not satisfied, the handover instruction unit 22 does not give the instruction to the wireless terminal device 202 and notifies other wireless base station devices that the handover operation is to be stopped. To do.
  • FIG. 72 is a sequence of a handover operation when the handover source radio base station apparatus selects a handover destination in the radio communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • radio terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating a measurement result of received power, that is, reception power information, to radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • This measurement result notification includes the measurement result of the received power of the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C in the neighboring cells (step S721).
  • the wireless terminal device 202 is updated to measurement results of the received power at a period shorter than shown to receive power information, the reception quality information i.e. CQI indicating reception quality of a radio signal from the radio base station apparatus 101A in a self
  • the report is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S722).
  • the wireless base station device 101A detects deterioration of the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 based on the value of the CQI report received from the wireless terminal device 202 (step S723). If the value of the received CQI report is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the reception quality of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has not deteriorated, and receives a measurement result notification (step S721). ) And CQI report reception (step S722) are repeated.
  • radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the reception quality of radio terminal apparatus 202 has deteriorated and should perform a handover operation preparation process. It is determined whether or not (step S724).
  • 101 A of radio base station apparatuses acquire the measurement information which shows the measurement result for every cell ID based on the measurement result notification received from the radio
  • the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101B and the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101C may both satisfy the handover preparation condition.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the radio base station apparatus 101B and the radio base station apparatus 101C as handover destination candidates.
  • step S725 to step S733 are executed. Since the operations from step S725 to step S733 are similar to the operations from step S653 to step S661 shown in FIG. 66, detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S734). Also, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new CQI report to the wireless base station device 101A (step S735).
  • the wireless base station device 101A detects deterioration of the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 based on the value of the CQI report newly received from the wireless terminal device 202 (step S736). Then, when the value of the newly received CQI report is lower than a predetermined threshold, radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the reception quality of radio terminal apparatus 202 has deteriorated and should perform a handover operation. It is determined whether or not (step S737).
  • 101 A of radio base station apparatuses newly acquire the communication quality between self and the said radio
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A newly receives a measurement result notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 after receiving the CQI report after completing the preparation for the handover operation (step S735) and before performing the handover operation execution determination. In this case, it is possible to determine whether to perform the handover operation based on the latest measurement result notification newly received.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A may make a handover operation execution decision based on the measurement result notification (step S721) received before making the handover operation preparation decision (step S724).
  • step S738 to step S748 are executed. Since the operations from step S738 to step S748 are the same as the operations from step S664 to step S674 shown in FIG. 66, detailed description will not be repeated here.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A performs the handover operation preparation determination and execution determination based on the measurement result notification received from the radio terminal apparatus 202 .
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A is not necessarily limited to such a form.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A may perform the preparation determination and the execution determination based on the CQI report value alone, or a combination of two or more CQI report values. The above preparation determination and execution determination may be performed.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the radio terminal apparatus 202 can communicate in the serving cell formed by itself based on the value of the CQI report, and it is difficult to continue the communication any more. When it is determined, it can be determined that a handover operation to the neighboring cell by the wireless terminal device 202 should be executed.
  • the handover request unit 21 detects the deterioration of the reception quality from the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12. In this case, it is determined whether or not a request for a handover operation is to be made to a plurality of other radio base station apparatuses.
  • the configuration using the CQI report whose update cycle is shorter than the received power information makes it possible to follow a sudden change in the radio wave environment, so that the preparation process for the handover operation to the neighboring base stations can be performed quickly. Further, disconnection of the wireless link between the wireless terminal device and the wireless base station device can be further prevented.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 receives the response to the handover request and then receives the reception quality from the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12. When the degradation of is detected, the handover destination radio base station apparatus is selected.
  • the configuration using the CQI report having a shorter update cycle than the received power information makes it possible to follow a sudden change in the radio wave environment. It is possible to further prevent disconnection of the radio link between the terminal device and the radio base station device.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 is received by the received power information acquisition unit 11 before the reception quality information acquisition unit 12 acquires the reception quality information.
  • a handover destination radio base station apparatus is selected based on the measurement result indicated in the latest received power information among the acquired received power information.
  • the handover instruction unit 22 when the handover instruction unit 22 detects the deterioration of the reception quality from the reception quality information, it is possible to quickly select the handover destination radio base station apparatus. it can.
  • ⁇ Fifth embodiment> In the above-described second embodiment, the case where the communication connection destination of the wireless terminal device 202 is switched from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B in the handover operation has been described. In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, a case will be described in which there are a plurality of switching destinations, that is, handover destination candidates, and a higher-level device in the core network is also switched. The contents other than those described below are the same as those of the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment.
  • the host device for example, MME (Mobility Management Entity) or S-GW (Serving Gateway) can be cited as in the second embodiment.
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • S-GW Serving Gateway
  • FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
  • a radio communication system 407 according to the fifth embodiment is a mobile communication system according to LTE (Long Term Evolution) standardized by 3GPP, for example, and includes radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C is provided.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • radio base station apparatus 101A forms cell CA, and transmits / receives radio signals to / from radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in cell CA. Communication with the wireless terminal device 202 is possible.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101B can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CB and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CB.
  • the radio base station apparatus 101C can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CC and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CC.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA, moves to the overlapping area of the cell CA, the cell CB, and the cell CC after selecting the wireless base station device 101A as a communication connection destination. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A corresponds to a serving base station, the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C correspond to peripheral base stations, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C serve as handover destination candidates. Assume the case.
  • the wireless communication system 407 further includes an S-GW 161 (gateway device), MME 162A, 162B, 162C (communication control device), and P-GW (Packet Data) provided in the core network 301.
  • S-GW 161 gateway device
  • MME 162A, 162B, 162C communication control device
  • P-GW Packet Data
  • Network Gateway 163.
  • the wireless terminal device 202 establishes a communication connection with a server or the like in the IP network 302 (upper network) via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C, the S-GW 161, and the P-GW 163. Protocol) Communication data including packets is transmitted and received.
  • the S-GW 161 is connected between the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C and the IP network 302.
  • the S-GW 161 transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and from the server in the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163.
  • the communication data received in (1) is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, 101C.
  • the MME 162A manages the wireless base station device 101A, the wireless terminal device 202, and the like in the wireless communication system 407.
  • the MME 162A transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101A.
  • the MME 162B manages the radio base station apparatus 101B and the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the radio communication system 407.
  • the MME 162B transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101B.
  • the MME 162C manages the radio base station apparatus 101C, the radio terminal apparatus 202, and the like in the radio communication system 407.
  • the MME 162C transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101C.
  • the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A wireless base station (101) is provided with: a reception power information acquisition unit (11) for acquiring reception power information representing the results of measuring the reception power of radio signals from wireless base stations in a wireless terminal (202); a reception quality information acquisition unit (12) for acquiring reception quality information that is updated in shorter cycles than the reception power information, and represents the reception quality of radio signals from the wireless base station (101) in the wireless terminal (202); and a handover operation determination unit (13) for determining, on the basis of the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit (12), whether or not a handover operation from the wireless station (101) to another wireless base station is to be executed by the wireless terminal (202).

Description

無線基地局装置、通信システム、通信制御方法および通信制御プログラムRadio base station apparatus, communication system, communication control method, and communication control program
 本発明は、無線基地局装置、通信システム、通信制御方法および通信制御プログラムに関し、特に、無線端末装置がハンドオーバ動作を行なうことにより複数の無線基地局装置と通信可能な通信システムにおける無線基地局装置、通信システム、通信制御方法および通信制御プログラムに関する。 The present invention relates to a radio base station apparatus, a communication system, a communication control method, and a communication control program, and in particular, a radio base station apparatus in a communication system in which a radio terminal apparatus can communicate with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation. The present invention relates to a communication system, a communication control method, and a communication control program.
 従来、移動通信システムでは、半径数百メートルから数十キロメートルのセルすなわち無線端末装置が通信可能なエリアを形成する無線基地局装置(以下、マクロ基地局とも称する。)による通信サービスが提供されてきた。 Conventionally, in a mobile communication system, a communication service is provided by a radio base station apparatus (hereinafter also referred to as a macro base station) that forms an area in which a cell having a radius of several hundred meters to several tens of kilometers, that is, a radio terminal apparatus can communicate. It was.
 近年、移動通信サービスの加入者数の劇的な増加およびデータ通信による通信トラヒック量の増大から、より半径の小さいセルを形成することによって加入者および通信トラヒックを分散し、また、一定レベルの通信速度をユーザへ安定して提供することが望まれている。また、ビルの超高層化に伴う不感地対策のため、企業フロア内および一般家庭内への無線基地局装置の設置も望まれている。 In recent years, due to a dramatic increase in the number of subscribers of mobile communication services and an increase in the amount of communication traffic due to data communication, subscribers and communication traffic are distributed by forming smaller radius cells, and a certain level of communication It is desirable to provide speed to users in a stable manner. In addition, in order to deal with dead zones associated with the increase in the number of buildings, it is desired to install radio base station devices on the corporate floor and in ordinary households.
 これらの要望と併せて、無線基地局装置で使用される種々のデバイスの処理能力が飛躍的に向上したことによって無線基地局装置の小型化が進み、このような小型化された基地局が注目を集めている。 Together with these demands, the processing capability of various devices used in the radio base station apparatus has been dramatically improved, and the miniaturization of the radio base station apparatus has progressed. Collecting.
 この小型基地局(以下、フェムト基地局とも称する。)が形成するフェムトセル(Femto Cell)の半径は10メートル前後と小さいため、フェムト基地局は、マクロ基地局が形成するマクロセル(Macro Cell)の圏外となりマクロ基地局の設置が困難な屋内および地下街等の場所で使用されることが考えられる。 The radius of the femto cell formed by this small base station (hereinafter also referred to as a femto base station) is as small as about 10 meters, so the femto base station is the macro cell formed by the macro base station. It may be used in places such as indoors and underground malls where it is out of service area and it is difficult to install macro base stations.
 また、フェムト基地局は特定のエリアに多数設置されることから、フェムト基地局を直接コアネットワークに接続することは難しい。このため、特定のエリアに設置された多数のフェムト基地局を一旦、HeNB-GW等のゲートウェイ装置に接続し、フェムト基地局とコアネットワークとをHeNB-GW経由で接続することが考えられる。 Also, since many femto base stations are installed in a specific area, it is difficult to connect the femto base stations directly to the core network. For this reason, it is conceivable that a large number of femto base stations installed in a specific area are once connected to a gateway device such as a HeNB-GW, and the femto base station and the core network are connected via the HeNB-GW.
 また、フェムト基地局に加えて、マクロ基地局をベースに、たとえば半径100メートルから200メートルのピコセルを形成するピコ基地局も開発されている。 In addition to the femto base station, a pico base station that forms a pico cell with a radius of 100 to 200 meters, for example, has been developed based on a macro base station.
 このようなフェムト基地局、ピコ基地局およびマクロ基地局が混在する通信システムであるヘテロジーニアスネットワークでは、たとえばマクロセル内に複数のフェムトセルまたはピコセルが形成される。このため、無線端末装置のハンドオーバが起こりやすくなり、また、ハンドオーバを行なう状況も複雑になることから、ハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎたり、あるいは遅すぎたりするなど、不適切なハンドオーバ動作が行なわれる場合がある(たとえば、3GPP TR 36.902 V9.3.1 2011.3(非特許文献1)参照)。 In a heterogeneous network that is a communication system in which such femto base stations, pico base stations, and macro base stations are mixed, for example, a plurality of femto cells or pico cells are formed in a macro cell. For this reason, handover of a radio terminal device is likely to occur, and the situation of handover is complicated, so that an inappropriate handover operation is performed such as the timing of handover being too early or too late (For example, see 3GPP TR 36.902 V9.3.1 2011.3 (Non-Patent Document 1)).
 非特許文献1に記載されるような不適切なハンドオーバ動作が行なわれると、通信システムにおいて、通信断および通信トラフィックの増大等、種々の問題が生じる。このような不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築する技術が望まれる。 When an inappropriate handover operation as described in Non-Patent Document 1 is performed, various problems such as communication interruption and increase in communication traffic occur in the communication system. A technique for suppressing such an inappropriate handover operation and constructing a good communication system is desired.
 この発明は、上述の課題を解決するためになされたもので、その目的は、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることが可能な無線基地局装置、通信システム、通信制御方法および通信制御プログラムを提供することである。 The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a radio base station apparatus capable of stabilizing communication by appropriately controlling a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus, A communication system, a communication control method, and a communication control program are provided.
 (1)この発明のある局面に係わる無線基地局装置は、無線端末装置がハンドオーバ動作を行なうことにより複数の無線基地局装置と通信可能な通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための無線基地局装置であって、無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報を取得するための受信電力情報取得部と、上記受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、上記無線端末装置における自己の無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得するための受信品質情報取得部と、上記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された上記受信品質情報に基づいて、上記無線端末装置による自己の無線基地局装置から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断するためのハンドオーバ動作判断部とを備える。 (1) A radio base station apparatus according to an aspect of the present invention transmits a radio signal to / from a radio terminal apparatus in a communication system in which the radio terminal apparatus can communicate with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation. A radio base station apparatus for transmitting and receiving, a received power information acquisition unit for acquiring received power information indicating a measurement result of received power of a radio signal from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus, and the reception A reception quality information acquisition unit for acquiring reception quality information that is updated at a shorter cycle than the power information and indicates reception quality of a radio signal from its own radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus, and acquisition of the reception quality information Based on the reception quality information acquired by the mobile station, the handover operation from the radio base station apparatus to another radio base station apparatus by the radio terminal apparatus And a handover operation determination unit for determining whether to perform.
 このように、受信電力情報よりも更新周期の短い受信品質情報を用いる構成により、急激な電波環境の変化に追従することが可能となるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”の発生を抑制することができる。すなわち、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を迅速に実行し、無線端末装置および無線基地局装置間の無線リンクが切断されることを防ぐことができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 As described above, the configuration using the reception quality information whose update cycle is shorter than the reception power information makes it possible to follow a sudden change in the radio wave environment. For example, the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late. Generation of “Late HO” can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to quickly execute the handover operation to the neighboring base station and prevent the radio link between the radio terminal device and the radio base station device from being disconnected. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 (2)好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ動作判断部は、上記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された上記受信品質情報および上記受信電力情報取得部によって取得された上記受信電力情報に基づいて、上記ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する。 (2) Preferably, the handover operation determination unit performs the handover operation based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit and the reception power information acquired by the reception power information acquisition unit. Determine whether to execute.
 このように、受信品質情報に加えて受信電力情報をハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に用いる構成により、無線端末装置の電波環境をより詳細に把握し、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断をより適切に行なうことができる。 As described above, the configuration using the received power information in addition to the reception quality information for determining the execution of the handover operation makes it possible to grasp the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device in more detail and more appropriately determine the execution of the handover operation. .
 (3)より好ましくは、上記無線基地局装置は、さらに、上記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された上記受信品質情報に基づいて、上記受信電力情報の作成条件を変更するための条件設定部を備える。 (3) More preferably, the radio base station apparatus further includes a condition setting unit for changing a reception power information creation condition based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit. Prepare.
 このような構成により、無線端末装置の受信品質に応じて受信電力情報の作成条件を迅速かつ適切に設定し、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断のための情報としてより適切な受信電力情報を取得することができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly and appropriately set reception power information creation conditions according to the reception quality of the wireless terminal device, and to acquire more appropriate reception power information as information for determining whether to perform a handover operation. it can.
 (4)より好ましくは、上記条件設定部は、上記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された上記受信品質情報から上記受信品質の劣化を検知すると、上記受信電力情報の更新周期を短くする。 (4) More preferably, when the condition setting unit detects deterioration of the reception quality from the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit, the condition setting unit shortens the update period of the reception power information.
 このような構成により、無線端末装置の受信品質の劣化に応じて受信電力情報の更新タイミングを早めることができるため、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断のための情報を、急激な電波環境の変化に追従して迅速に取得することができる。 With such a configuration, the update timing of the received power information can be advanced according to the deterioration of the reception quality of the wireless terminal device, so that the information for determining the execution of the handover operation follows the sudden change in the radio wave environment. Can be acquired quickly.
 (5)より好ましくは、上記受信電力情報は、所定の開始条件が満たされるとその作成が開始され、上記条件設定部は、上記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された上記受信品質情報から上記受信品質の劣化を検知すると、上記受信電力情報の作成開始が早まるように上記開始条件を設定する。 (5) More preferably, the reception power information is generated when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the condition setting unit receives the reception power information from the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit. When the deterioration of quality is detected, the start condition is set so that the creation of the received power information is started earlier.
 このような構成により、無線端末装置の受信品質の劣化に応じて受信電力情報の作成を早期に開始することができるため、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断のための情報を、急激な電波環境の変化に追従して迅速に取得することができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to start the creation of received power information at an early stage in accordance with the degradation of the reception quality of the wireless terminal device, so that information for determining whether to perform a handover operation can be changed to a sudden change in radio wave environment. You can follow and get quickly.
 (6)好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ動作判断部は、上記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された上記受信品質情報が所定条件を満たす場合には、上記ハンドオーバ動作を実行すると判断し、上記無線端末装置による自己の無線基地局装置から所定の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を実行する。 (6) Preferably, the handover operation determination unit determines to execute the handover operation when the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit satisfies a predetermined condition, and the wireless terminal device A handover operation from its own radio base station apparatus to a predetermined radio base station apparatus is executed.
 このような構成により、受信品質情報によって無線端末装置の受信品質の劣化を検知した後、無線端末装置に対する受信電力情報の作成条件の変更要求等を行なうことなく、迅速にハンドオーバ動作を実行することができる。 With such a configuration, after detecting deterioration of the reception quality of the wireless terminal device based on the reception quality information, a handover operation can be quickly performed without requesting the wireless terminal device to change a reception power information creation condition. Can do.
 (7)より好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ動作判断部は、どの無線基地局装置への上記ハンドオーバ動作を実行するかを、上記受信電力情報取得部によって取得された上記受信電力情報に基づいて決定する。 (7) More preferably, the handover operation determining unit determines to which radio base station apparatus the handover operation is to be executed based on the received power information acquired by the received power information acquiring unit.
 このような構成により、無線端末装置の電波環境に応じてハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を適切に選択することができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately select the handover destination radio base station apparatus according to the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus.
 (8)好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ動作判断部は、所定条件を満たす場合に上記ハンドオーバ動作を実行すると判断し、上記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された上記受信品質情報に基づいて上記所定条件を設定する。 (8) Preferably, the handover operation determination unit determines to execute the handover operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and sets the predetermined condition based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit To do.
 このような構成により、無線端末装置の受信品質に応じてハンドオーバ動作の実行判断条件を迅速かつ適切に設定することができる。 With this configuration, it is possible to quickly and appropriately set the execution judgment condition for the handover operation according to the reception quality of the wireless terminal device.
 (9)より好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ動作判断部は、上記受信電力情報取得部によって取得された上記受信電力情報が所定条件を満たす場合に上記ハンドオーバ動作を実行すると判断し、上記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された上記受信品質情報に基づいて上記所定条件を調整する。 (9) More preferably, the handover operation determining unit determines to execute the handover operation when the received power information acquired by the received power information acquiring unit satisfies a predetermined condition, and the received quality information acquiring unit The predetermined condition is adjusted on the basis of the reception quality information acquired by the above.
 このような構成により、ある受信電力情報の内容からハンドオーバ動作を実行しないと判断した後、次に受信電力情報が更新されるタイミングまでに無線端末装置の電波環境が急激に劣化した場合でも、上記タイミングを待つことなくハンドオーバ動作を迅速に実行することができる。 With such a configuration, even if the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device is rapidly deteriorated by the timing when the received power information is updated next after determining that the handover operation is not performed from the content of certain received power information, The handover operation can be quickly executed without waiting for timing.
 (10)好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ動作判断部は、上記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された上記受信品質情報と、上記受信電力情報取得部によって取得された上記受信電力情報と、上記受信品質情報が更新されてから経過した時間および上記受信電力情報が更新されてから経過した時間の少なくとも一方とに基づいて、上記ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する。 (10) Preferably, the handover operation determination unit includes the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit, the reception power information acquired by the reception power information acquisition unit, and the reception quality information. It is determined whether or not to execute the handover operation based on at least one of the time elapsed since the update and the time elapsed since the reception power information was updated.
 このように、無線端末装置の電波環境を示す情報の更新経過時間をハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に用いる構成により、古い情報による誤判断を抑制し、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断をより適切に行なうことができる。 As described above, the configuration in which the update elapsed time of the information indicating the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device is used for determination of execution of the handover operation can suppress erroneous determination due to old information and perform execution determination of the handover operation more appropriately. .
 (11)好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ動作判断部は、上記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された上記受信品質情報および上記受信電力情報取得部によって取得された上記受信電力情報に基づいて、上記ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断し、上記ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かの判断における上記受信品質情報の重みを、上記受信電力情報に基づいて調整する。 (11) Preferably, the handover operation determination unit performs the handover operation based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit and the reception power information acquired by the reception power information acquisition unit. It is determined whether or not to execute, and the weight of the reception quality information in determining whether or not to execute the handover operation is adjusted based on the reception power information.
 このような構成により、受信電力情報に基づいて受信品質情報の値を適切に評価することができるため、無線端末装置の電波環境をより正確に把握し、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断をより適切に行なうことができる。 With such a configuration, the value of the reception quality information can be appropriately evaluated based on the reception power information, so that the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device can be grasped more accurately and the execution determination of the handover operation can be performed more appropriately. be able to.
 (12)好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ動作判断部は、複数回分の上記受信品質情報に基づいて、上記ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する。 (12) Preferably, the handover operation determining unit determines whether or not to execute the handover operation based on the reception quality information for a plurality of times.
 このような構成により、電波環境の瞬間的な変化に起因する誤判断を抑制し、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断をより適切に行なうことができる。 With this configuration, it is possible to suppress misjudgment due to instantaneous changes in the radio wave environment and more appropriately perform execution judgment of the handover operation.
 (13)またこの発明の別の局面に係わる無線基地局装置は、無線端末装置がハンドオーバ動作を行なうことにより複数の無線基地局装置と通信可能な通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信し、複数レイヤを有する通信プロトコルに従って動作する無線基地局装置であって、上記複数レイヤのうちの第1のレイヤに従い、無線端末装置における無線基地局装置からの無線信号の測定結果に基づく第1測定情報を取得するための第1測定情報取得部と、上記複数レイヤのうち、上記第1のレイヤよりも下位の第2のレイヤに従い、上記無線端末装置における無線基地局装置からの無線信号の測定結果に基づく第2測定情報を取得するための第2測定情報取得部と、上記第2測定情報取得部によって取得された上記第2測定情報に基づいて、上記無線端末装置による自己の無線基地局装置から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断するためのハンドオーバ動作判断部とを備える。 (13) A radio base station apparatus according to another aspect of the present invention is a radio base station apparatus that communicates with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses in a communication system that can communicate with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation. A radio base station apparatus that transmits and receives signals and operates according to a communication protocol having a plurality of layers, and in accordance with a first layer of the plurality of layers, a radio signal measurement result from the radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus A first measurement information acquisition unit for acquiring first measurement information based on the second base layer and a second layer lower than the first layer among the plurality of layers, from the radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus A second measurement information acquisition unit for acquiring second measurement information based on a measurement result of the radio signal; and the second measurement information acquired by the second measurement information acquisition unit. Based on the measurement information, and a handover operation determination unit for determining whether to perform the handover operation from the radio terminal apparatus own radio base station apparatus according to another radio base station apparatus.
 このように、通信プロトコルにおいて、よりレイヤの低い情報を用いてハンドオーバ動作の実行判断を行なう構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断のための情報の取得時間を短縮することができるため、ハンドオーバ動作の迅速かつ適切な実行判断が可能となる。すなわち、急激な電波環境の変化に追従することが可能となるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”の発生を抑制することができる。これにより、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を迅速に実行し、無線端末装置および無線基地局装置間の無線リンクが切断されることを防ぐことができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 Thus, in the communication protocol, the configuration for performing the handover operation execution determination using lower layer information can reduce the acquisition time of the information for determining the handover operation execution. And appropriate execution judgment becomes possible. That is, since it becomes possible to follow a sudden change in the radio wave environment, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late. As a result, the handover operation to the neighboring base station can be quickly executed, and the radio link between the radio terminal device and the radio base station device can be prevented from being disconnected. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 (14)好ましくは、上記第1のレイヤは、3GPP(Third Generation Partnership Project)で規定されたRRC(Radio Resource Control)レイヤであり、上記第2のレイヤは、3GPPで規定されたMAC(Media Access Control)レイヤおよびPHY(Physical)レイヤの少なくとも一方である。 (14) Preferably, the first layer is an RRC (Radio Resource Control) layer specified by 3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project), and the second layer is a MAC (Media Access Control) specified by 3GPP. Control) layer and / or PHY (Physical) layer.
 このような構成により、3GPPで規定された通信プロトコルに従って動作する無線基地局装置において、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることが可能となる。 With such a configuration, in a radio base station apparatus that operates in accordance with a communication protocol defined by 3GPP, it is possible to stabilize communication by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus.
 (15)好ましくは、上記無線基地局装置は、さらに、自己の無線基地局装置から他の無線基地局装置への無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行なう要求を上記他の無線基地局装置に対して行なうためのハンドオーバ要求部と、上記要求に対する上記他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けて、上記無線端末装置に対して自己の無線基地局装置から上記他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を行なう指示を与えるためのハンドオーバ指示部とを備え、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記応答を受けて、自己の無線基地局装置および上記無線端末装置間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされていない場合には、上記無線端末装置に対する上記指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する。 (15) Preferably, the radio base station apparatus further requests the other radio base station apparatus to perform a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus from its own radio base station apparatus to another radio base station apparatus. In response to a response from the other radio base station apparatus to the request and a handover request unit for performing the handover operation from the own radio base station apparatus to the other radio base station apparatus to the radio terminal apparatus A handover instructing unit for giving an instruction to perform communication, and the handover instructing unit receives the response, and a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality between the own radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied If not, the provision of the instruction to the wireless terminal device is stopped or suspended.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作をさらに抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築することができる。 With such a configuration, the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed prior to the determination of the execution of the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. it can. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be further suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed.
 (16)好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ要求部は、上記要求を複数の上記他の無線基地局装置に対して行う。 (16) Preferably, the handover request unit makes the request to the plurality of other radio base station devices.
 ある周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理の完了後に無線端末装置が移動することで、当該周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置の電波状況が悪化する場合が考えられる。このような場合でも、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了していることから、当該他の周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を短時間で行うことができるため、無線端末装置と無線基地局装置との間の通信が途切れることを防ぐことができる。 There may be a case where the radio terminal apparatus related to the peripheral base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal apparatus after completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain peripheral base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent communication between the apparatus and the radio base station apparatus from being interrupted.
 また、上記のように、周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置の電波状況が悪化した場合であっても、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了しているため、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理およびハンドオーバ動作の中止処理のための情報の送受信が繰り返されることを防ぎ、通信システムにおける負荷を軽減させることができる。 In addition, as described above, even when the radio wave condition of the wireless terminal device related to the neighboring base station deteriorates, the handover operation preparation process with other neighboring base stations is completed, so the handover operation is performed. It is possible to prevent repeated transmission and reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation cancellation process, and to reduce the load on the communication system.
 (17)好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記応答を受信して、上記応答に対応する上記他の無線基地局装置の中からハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択し、上記無線端末装置に対して上記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置への上記ハンドオーバ動作を行う指示を与える。 (17) Preferably, the handover instruction unit receives the response, selects a handover destination radio base station device from the other radio base station devices corresponding to the response, and transmits the response to the radio terminal device. An instruction to perform the handover operation is given to the handover destination radio base station apparatus.
 このように、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択したうえで無線端末装置に対してハンドオーバ動作の指示を与える構成により、当該指示内に複数の無線基地局装置を提示する場合と比べて情報量を少なくすることができ、当該指示内容を簡潔にすることができる。 In this way, by selecting a handover destination radio base station apparatus and giving an instruction for a handover operation to the radio terminal apparatus, the amount of information is larger than when a plurality of radio base station apparatuses are presented in the instruction. The instruction content can be simplified.
 また、好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記応答を受信した後、上記応答に対応する上記他の無線基地局装置から送信される無線信号の上記無線端末装置における受信電力の測定結果を取得して、上記測定結果に基づいて上記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。 In addition, preferably, after the handover instruction unit receives the response, the handover instruction unit acquires a measurement result of received power in the radio terminal device of a radio signal transmitted from the other radio base station device corresponding to the response. The handover destination radio base station apparatus is selected based on the measurement result.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の準備完了後の無線端末装置における電波環境に応じて、ハンドオーバ先として適切な無線基地局装置を選択することができる。 With this configuration, it is possible to select an appropriate radio base station apparatus as a handover destination according to the radio wave environment in the radio terminal apparatus after completion of preparation for the handover operation.
 また、好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記応答を受信した後、所定期間取得できない上記測定結果に対応する上記他の無線基地局装置を上記ハンドオーバ先の候補から外す。 Also preferably, after the response is received, the handover instruction unit excludes the other radio base station apparatus corresponding to the measurement result that cannot be acquired for a predetermined period from the handover destination candidates.
 このような構成により、たとえば、無線端末装置が受信電力を測定できない程度に当該無線端末装置との距離が離れてしまった無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先の候補から外すことができるため、ハンドオーバ先として適切な無線基地局装置を選択することができる。 With such a configuration, for example, a radio base station apparatus that is far away from the radio terminal apparatus to such an extent that the radio terminal apparatus cannot measure received power can be excluded from handover destination candidates. An appropriate radio base station apparatus can be selected.
 また、好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記応答を受信して、上記応答に対応する上記他の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先の候補として示す情報を上記無線端末装置へ送信する。 Also preferably, the handover instruction unit receives the response and transmits information indicating the other radio base station device corresponding to the response as a handover destination candidate to the radio terminal device.
 このように、無線端末装置にハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択させる構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置が選択する場合に比べて、最新の電波環境に応じてハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択することができる。 In this way, the configuration in which the radio terminal device selects the handover destination radio base station device, the handover destination radio base station device according to the latest radio wave environment as compared with the case where the handover source radio base station device selects Can be selected.
 また、好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記無線端末装置によって選択された上記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を示す情報を受信して、受信した上記情報の示す上記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置へ所定の情報を送信する。 Preferably, the handover instruction unit receives information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the radio terminal apparatus, and transmits the information to the handover destination radio base station apparatus indicated by the received information. Transmit predetermined information.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置が、無線端末装置により選択されたハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を把握したうえで、ハンドオーバ動作に必要な情報を当該ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置へ送信するので、無駄のない情報の送受信を行うことができる。 With such a configuration, after the handover source radio base station apparatus grasps the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the radio terminal apparatus, information necessary for the handover operation is transferred to the handover destination radio base station apparatus. Therefore, it is possible to transmit and receive information without waste.
 また、好ましくは、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記ハンドオーバ動作が完了した後、上記応答に対応する上記他の無線基地局装置のうちハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置以外の上記他の無線基地局装置へ上記ハンドオーバ動作の中止要求を送信する。 Preferably, after the handover operation is completed, the handover instruction unit sends the other radio base station apparatus other than the handover destination radio base station apparatus among the other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to the response to the other radio base station apparatus. A request to cancel the handover operation is transmitted.
 ここで、たとえば、ハンドオーバ先として選択された無線基地局装置以外の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作がハンドオーバ動作の完了前に中止された後、無線端末装置が、当該中止対象の無線基地局装置に近づく方向に移動する場合、当該中止対象の無線基地局装置が最適なハンドオーバ先となることがある。この場合、当該中止対象の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を再び行う必要がある。 Here, for example, after the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus other than the radio base station apparatus selected as the handover destination is canceled before the handover operation is completed, the radio terminal apparatus In the case of moving in the direction approaching, the radio base station apparatus to be canceled may be an optimal handover destination. In this case, it is necessary to perform the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus to be canceled again.
 これに対して、本発明に係る無線基地局装置は、上記のように、ハンドオーバ先として選択された無線基地局装置以外の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了した後に中止する。これにより、ハンドオーバ動作が完了するまでの間に無線端末装置が移動して電波状況が変わり、他の周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作が行われる場合であっても、再びハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行う必要がない。 On the other hand, as described above, the radio base station apparatus according to the present invention performs the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus other than the radio base station apparatus selected as the handover destination as the handover operation preparation process of the radio terminal apparatus. Stop after completion. As a result, even when the wireless terminal device moves and the radio wave state changes before the handover operation is completed, and the handover operation to another neighboring base station is performed, the preparation process for the handover operation is performed again. There is no need.
 (18)好ましくは、上記無線基地局装置は、さらに、上記無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、上記無線端末装置における自己の無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得するための受信品質情報取得部を備え、上記ハンドオーバ要求部は、上記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された上記受信品質情報から上記受信品質の劣化が検知された場合に、上記要求を複数の上記他の無線基地局装置に対して行うか否かを判断する。 (18) Preferably, the radio base station apparatus is further updated at a cycle shorter than reception power information indicating a measurement result of a reception power of a radio signal from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus, and the radio terminal apparatus A reception quality information acquisition unit for acquiring reception quality information indicating reception quality of a radio signal from its own radio base station apparatus in the terminal device, wherein the handover request unit is acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit When the reception quality deterioration is detected from the reception quality information, it is determined whether or not to make the request to the plurality of other radio base station apparatuses.
 このように、受信電力情報よりも更新周期の短いCQIレポートを用いる構成により、急激な電波環境の変化に追従することが可能となるため、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を迅速に行い、無線端末装置および無線基地局装置間の無線リンクが切断されることを一層防ぐことができる。 As described above, the configuration using the CQI report whose update cycle is shorter than the received power information makes it possible to follow a sudden change in the radio wave environment, so that the preparation process for the handover operation to the neighboring base stations can be performed quickly. Further, disconnection of the wireless link between the wireless terminal device and the wireless base station device can be further prevented.
 (19)好ましくは、上記無線基地局装置は、さらに、上記無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、上記無線端末装置における自己の無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得するための受信品質情報取得部を備え、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記応答を受信した後、上記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された上記受信品質情報から上記受信品質の劣化が検知された場合に、上記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。 (19) Preferably, the radio base station apparatus is further updated at a cycle shorter than reception power information indicating a measurement result of a radio signal reception power from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus, and the radio terminal apparatus A reception quality information acquisition unit for acquiring reception quality information indicating reception quality of a radio signal from its own radio base station device in the terminal device, wherein the handover instruction unit receives the response and then receives the reception quality When the reception quality deterioration is detected from the reception quality information acquired by the information acquisition unit, the handover destination radio base station apparatus is selected.
 このように、受信電力情報よりも更新周期の短いCQIレポートを用いる構成により、急激な電波環境の変化に追従することが可能となるため、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を迅速に実行し、無線端末装置および無線基地局装置間の無線リンクが切断されることを一層防ぐことができる。 As described above, the configuration using the CQI report having a shorter update cycle than the received power information makes it possible to follow a sudden change in the radio wave environment. It is possible to further prevent disconnection of the radio link between the terminal device and the radio base station device.
 (20)好ましくは、上記無線基地局装置は、さらに、上記受信電力情報を取得するための受信電力情報取得部を備え、上記ハンドオーバ指示部は、上記受信品質情報取得部によって上記受信品質情報が取得されるよりも前に上記受信電力情報取得部によって取得された上記受信電力情報のうち最新の受信電力情報に示される上記測定結果に基づいて上記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。 (20) Preferably, the radio base station apparatus further includes a reception power information acquisition unit for acquiring the reception power information, and the handover instruction unit receives the reception quality information by the reception quality information acquisition unit. The handover destination radio base station apparatus is selected based on the measurement result indicated by the latest received power information among the received power information acquired by the received power information acquisition unit prior to acquisition.
 このように、予め取得された受信電力情報が用いられる構成により、ハンドオーバ指示部が受信品質情報から受信品質の劣化を検知した場合には、迅速にハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択することができる。 As described above, with the configuration in which the received power information acquired in advance is used, when the handover instruction unit detects the deterioration of the reception quality from the reception quality information, it is possible to quickly select the handover destination radio base station apparatus. it can.
 (21)この発明のある局面に係わる通信システムは、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、1または複数の上記無線基地局装置を管理するための複数の通信制御装置とを備える通信システムであって、上記無線基地局装置は、自己から他の無線基地局装置への上記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を対応の通信制御装置へ送信し、上記対応の通信制御装置は、上記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の上記他の無線基地局装置が自己の管理対象でない場合には、上記他の無線基地局装置を管理する他の通信制御装置へ上記ハンドオーバ要求を送信し、上記他の通信制御装置は、受信した上記ハンドオーバ要求を上記他の無線基地局装置へ送信し、上記他の無線基地局装置から上記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると上記対応の通信制御装置へ上記応答を送信し、上記対応の通信制御装置は、上記他の通信制御装置から上記応答を受信して、上記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の上記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信し、上記無線基地局装置は、上記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、上記無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、上記無線端末装置における自己からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得し、取得した上記受信品質情報に基づいて、上記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、上記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、上記無線端末装置に対する上記ハンドオーバ動作を行なう指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する。 (21) A communication system according to an aspect of the present invention is provided for managing a plurality of radio base station devices for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal device and one or a plurality of the radio base station devices. A communication system comprising a plurality of communication control devices, wherein the radio base station device transmits a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from itself to another radio base station device to a corresponding communication control device The corresponding communication control apparatus, when the other radio base station apparatus to be handed over indicated by the handover request is not a management target of the other communication control apparatus, manages the other radio base station apparatus. The other communication control apparatus transmits the received handover request to the other radio base station apparatus, and the other radio base station apparatus transmits the handover request to the other radio base station apparatus. The response to the handover request is received from the corresponding communication control apparatus, and the corresponding communication control apparatus receives the response from the other communication control apparatus and transmits the handover request source. A handover instruction is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus, and the radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction and indicates a measurement result of a reception power of a radio signal from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus It is updated at a shorter cycle than the received power information, acquires reception quality information indicating the reception quality of the radio signal from itself in the wireless terminal device, and based on the acquired reception quality information, between the wireless terminal device It is determined whether or not a predetermined execution condition relating to the communication quality of the wireless terminal device is satisfied. If the execution condition is not satisfied, the wireless terminal device To cancel the grant of instructions for performing the handover operation, or to hold against.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置を管理する通信制御装置と、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を管理する通信制御装置とが異なる場合であっても、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築することができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 With such a configuration, even when the communication control apparatus that manages the handover source radio base station apparatus is different from the communication control apparatus that manages the handover destination radio base station apparatus, prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation. Since the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed, for example, “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late can be suppressed. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 また、好ましくは、上記通信システムにおいて、上記無線基地局装置は、上記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の準備条件が満たされる場合に、上記ハンドオーバ要求を上記対応の通信制御装置へ送信し、上記準備条件の示す通信品質は、上記実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 Preferably, in the communication system, the radio base station apparatus transmits the handover request to the corresponding communication control apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied. The communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の基準となる通信品質よりも緩やかな条件で前もってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行なうことができる。また、通信制御装置の切り替えのために必要な情報の送受信を、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理として前もって行うことにより、ハンドオーバ動作に要する時間を大幅に短縮することができる。 With such a configuration, the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation. In addition, the time required for the handover operation can be greatly shortened by performing transmission / reception of information necessary for switching the communication control device in advance as a preparation process for the handover operation.
 また、好ましくは、上記通信システムにおいて、上記対応の通信制御装置は、上記無線基地局装置からハンドオーバ先として複数の上記他の無線基地局装置を示す上記ハンドオーバ要求を受信し、上記ハンドオーバ要求の示す上記他の無線基地局装置ごとに自己の管理対象であるか否かを判断し、自己の管理対象でない場合には、上記他の無線基地局装置を管理する他の通信制御装置へ上記ハンドオーバ要求を送信する。 Preferably, in the communication system, the corresponding communication control apparatus receives the handover request indicating a plurality of the other radio base station apparatuses as handover destinations from the radio base station apparatus, and indicates the handover request. It is determined whether each of the other radio base station devices is a management target of the other radio base station device, and if it is not a management target of the self, the handover request is sent to another communication control device that manages the other radio base station device. Send.
 ある周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理の完了後に無線端末装置が移動することで、当該周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置の電波状況が悪化する場合が考えられる。このような場合でも、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了していることから、当該他の周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を短時間で行うことができるため、無線端末装置と無線基地局装置との間の通信が途切れることを防ぐことができる。 There may be a case where the radio terminal apparatus related to the peripheral base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal apparatus after completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain peripheral base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent communication between the apparatus and the radio base station apparatus from being interrupted.
 また、上記のように、周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置の電波状況が悪化した場合であっても、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了しているため、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理およびハンドオーバ動作の中止処理のための情報の送受信が繰り返されることを防ぎ、通信システムにおける負荷を軽減させることができる。 In addition, as described above, even when the radio wave condition of the wireless terminal device related to the neighboring base station deteriorates, the handover operation preparation process with other neighboring base stations is completed, so the handover operation is performed. It is possible to prevent repeated transmission and reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation cancellation process, and to reduce the load on the communication system.
 (22)この発明のある局面に係わる通信システムは、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、1または複数の上記無線基地局装置を管理するための通信制御装置と、1または複数の上記無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続され、上記無線基地局装置経由で上記無線端末装置から受信した通信データを上記上位ネットワークへ送信するとともに、上記上位ネットワークから受信した通信データを上記無線基地局装置経由で上記無線端末装置へ送信するための複数のゲートウェイ装置とを備える通信システムであって、上記無線基地局装置は、自己から他の無線基地局装置への上記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を上記通信制御装置へ送信し、上記通信制御装置は、上記無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、上記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の上記他の無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なる場合には、通信経路作成要求を上記他の無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されている上記ゲートウェイ装置へ送信し、上記ゲートウェイ装置は、上記通信経路作成要求を受信すると、上記上位ネットワークから送信される上記無線端末装置宛の通信データおよび上記無線端末装置から送信される上記上位ネットワークへの通信データを中継可能とする通信経路を作成し、上記通信経路作成要求に対する通信経路作成応答を上記通信制御装置へ送信し、上記通信制御装置は、上記通信経路作成応答を受信すると、上記他の無線基地局装置へ上記ハンドオーバ要求を送信し、上記他の無線基地局装置から上記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると、上記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の上記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信し、上記無線基地局装置は、上記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、上記無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、上記無線端末装置における自己からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得し、取得した上記受信品質情報に基づいて、上記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、上記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、上記無線端末装置に対する上記ハンドオーバ動作を行なう指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する。 (22) A communication system according to an aspect of the present invention is provided for managing a plurality of radio base station apparatuses for transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from a radio terminal apparatus, and one or more radio base station apparatuses. The communication control device is connected between the one or a plurality of the radio base station devices and the higher level network, transmits communication data received from the radio terminal device via the radio base station device to the higher level network, and A communication system comprising a plurality of gateway devices for transmitting communication data received from a higher-level network to the wireless terminal device via the wireless base station device, wherein the wireless base station device transmits another wireless base station from itself A handover request for performing a handover operation of the wireless terminal device to a station device is transmitted to the communication control device, and the communication control device A gateway device connected between the radio base station device and the upper network, and a gateway device connected between the other radio base station device at the handover destination indicated by the handover request and the upper network Are different from each other, the communication path creation request is transmitted to the gateway apparatus connected between the other radio base station apparatus and the upper network, and the gateway apparatus receives the communication path creation request. Then, a communication path that enables relaying of the communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device transmitted from the upper network and the communication data transmitted from the wireless terminal device to the upper network is created, and in response to the communication path creation request A communication path creation response is transmitted to the communication control device, and the communication control device Upon receiving a route creation response, the handover request is transmitted to the other radio base station device, and when a response to the handover request is received from the other radio base station device, the radio base station that is the transmission source of the handover request Than the received power information indicating the measurement result of the received power of the radio signal from each radio base station device in the radio terminal device. The reception quality information that is updated in a short period and indicates the reception quality of the radio signal from itself in the wireless terminal device is acquired, and a predetermined communication quality with the wireless terminal device is acquired based on the acquired reception quality information. Whether or not the execution condition is satisfied, and if the execution condition is not satisfied, The giving of the instruction to perform the handover operation is stopped or suspended.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なる場合であっても、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築することができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 With such a configuration, the gateway apparatus connected between the handover source radio base station apparatus and the higher level network, and the gateway apparatus connected between the handover destination radio base station apparatus and the higher level network are provided. Even if they are different, the handover operation preparation process can be completed prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. Can do. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 また、好ましくは、上記通信システムにおいて、上記無線基地局装置は、上記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の準備条件が満たされる場合に、上記ハンドオーバ要求を上記通信制御装置へ送信し、上記準備条件の示す通信品質は、上記実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 Preferably, in the communication system, the radio base station apparatus transmits the handover request to the communication control apparatus when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus is satisfied, The communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の基準となる通信品質よりも緩やかな条件で前もってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行なうことができる。また、ゲートウェイ装置の切り替えのために必要な情報の送受信を、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理として前もって行うことにより、ハンドオーバ動作に要する時間を大幅に短縮することができる。 With such a configuration, the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation. In addition, the time required for the handover operation can be greatly shortened by performing transmission / reception of information necessary for switching the gateway device in advance as a preparation process for the handover operation.
 また、好ましくは、上記通信システムにおいて、上記通信制御装置は、上記無線基地局装置からハンドオーバ先として複数の他の上記無線基地局装置を示す上記ハンドオーバ要求を受信し、上記ハンドオーバ要求の示す上記他の無線基地局装置ごとに、上記無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、上記他の無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なるか否かを判断し、異なると判断した上記ゲートウェイ装置へ上記通信経路作成要求を送信する。 Preferably, in the communication system, the communication control device receives the handover request indicating a plurality of other radio base station devices as handover destinations from the radio base station device, and the other indicated by the handover request. For each wireless base station device, a gateway device connected between the wireless base station device and the upper network, and a gateway device connected between the other wireless base station device and the upper network And the communication path creation request is transmitted to the gateway device that is determined to be different.
 ある周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理の完了後に無線端末装置が移動することで、当該周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置の電波状況が悪化する場合が考えられる。このような場合でも、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了していることから、当該他の周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を短時間で行うことができるため、無線端末装置と無線基地局装置との間の通信が途切れることを防ぐことができる。 There may be a case where the radio terminal apparatus related to the peripheral base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal apparatus after completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain peripheral base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent communication between the apparatus and the radio base station apparatus from being interrupted.
 また、上記のように、周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置の電波状況が悪化した場合であっても、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了しているため、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理およびハンドオーバ動作の中止処理のための情報の送受信が繰り返されることを防ぎ、通信システムにおける負荷を軽減させることができる。 In addition, as described above, even when the radio wave condition of the wireless terminal device related to the neighboring base station deteriorates, the handover operation preparation process with other neighboring base stations is completed, so the handover operation is performed. It is possible to prevent repeated transmission and reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation cancellation process, and to reduce the load on the communication system.
 (23)この発明のある局面に係わる通信制御方法は、無線端末装置がハンドオーバ動作を行なうことにより複数の無線基地局装置と通信可能な通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための無線基地局装置における通信制御方法であって、無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報を取得するステップと、上記受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、上記無線端末装置における自己の無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得するステップと、取得した上記受信品質情報に基づいて、上記無線端末装置による自己の無線基地局装置から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断するステップとを含む。 (23) A communication control method according to an aspect of the present invention is a communication system capable of communicating with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus, and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus. A communication control method in a radio base station apparatus for obtaining received power information indicating a measurement result of received power of a radio signal from each radio base station apparatus in a radio terminal apparatus, and from the received power information Is also updated with a short cycle, and the wireless terminal device obtains reception quality information indicating the reception quality of the radio signal from its own wireless base station device in the wireless terminal device, and the wireless terminal device based on the received reception quality information Determining whether or not to perform a handover operation from its own radio base station apparatus to another radio base station apparatus.
 このように、受信電力情報よりも更新周期の短い受信品質情報を用いる構成により、急激な電波環境の変化に追従することが可能となるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”の発生を抑制することができる。すなわち、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を迅速に実行し、無線端末装置および無線基地局装置間の無線リンクが切断されることを防ぐことができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 As described above, the configuration using the reception quality information whose update cycle is shorter than the reception power information makes it possible to follow a sudden change in the radio wave environment. For example, the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late. Generation of “Late HO” can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to quickly execute the handover operation to the neighboring base station and prevent the radio link between the radio terminal device and the radio base station device from being disconnected. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 (24)この発明のある局面に係わる通信制御方法は、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、1または複数の上記無線基地局装置を管理するための複数の通信制御装置とを備える通信システムにおける通信制御方法であって、上記無線基地局装置が、自己から他の無線基地局装置への上記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を対応の上記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、上記対応の通信制御装置が、上記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の上記他の無線基地局装置が自己の管理対象でない場合には、上記他の無線基地局装置を管理する他の通信制御装置へ上記ハンドオーバ要求を送信するステップと、上記他の通信制御装置が、受信した上記ハンドオーバ要求を上記他の無線基地局装置へ送信し、上記他の無線基地局装置から上記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると上記対応の通信制御装置へ上記応答を送信するステップと、上記対応の通信制御装置が、上記他の通信制御装置から上記応答を受信して、上記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の上記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信するステップと、上記無線基地局装置が、上記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、上記無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、上記無線端末装置における自己からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得するステップと、取得した上記受信品質情報に基づいて、上記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、上記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、上記無線端末装置に対する上記ハンドオーバ動作を行なうための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留するステップとを含む。 (24) A communication control method according to an aspect of the present invention is for managing a plurality of radio base station devices for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal device and one or a plurality of the radio base station devices. A communication control method in a communication system comprising a plurality of communication control devices, wherein the radio base station device responds to a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from itself to another radio base station device. The step of transmitting to the communication control device, and the corresponding communication control device, when the other radio base station device of the handover destination indicated by the handover request is not the management target of the other radio base station device A step of transmitting the handover request to another communication control device that manages the communication, and the other communication control device transmits the received handover request to the Transmitting the response to the corresponding communication control apparatus upon receiving a response to the handover request from the other radio base station apparatus, and the corresponding communication control apparatus Receiving the response from the communication control apparatus and transmitting a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus that is the transmission source of the handover request, and the radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction and The reception quality information indicating the reception quality of the radio signal from itself in the radio terminal device is updated at a shorter cycle than the reception power information indicating the measurement result of the reception power of the radio signal from each radio base station device in the terminal device. Based on the acquisition step and the acquired reception quality information, a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality with the wireless terminal device is And judges whether or not a Tasa, when the execution condition is not satisfied, and a step of either abort or suspend application of instructions for performing the handover operation for the wireless terminal.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置を管理する通信制御装置と、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を管理する通信制御装置とが異なる場合であっても、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築することができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 With such a configuration, even when the communication control apparatus that manages the handover source radio base station apparatus is different from the communication control apparatus that manages the handover destination radio base station apparatus, prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation. Since the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed, for example, “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late can be suppressed. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 (25)この発明のある局面に係わる通信制御方法は、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、1または複数の上記無線基地局装置を管理するための通信制御装置と、1または複数の上記無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続され、上記無線基地局装置経由で上記無線端末装置から受信した通信データを上記上位ネットワークへ送信するとともに、上記上位ネットワークから受信した通信データを上記無線基地局装置経由で上記無線端末装置へ送信するための複数のゲートウェイ装置とを備える通信システムにおける通信制御方法であって、上記無線基地局装置が、自己から他の無線基地局装置への上記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を上記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、上記通信制御装置が、上記無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、上記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の上記他の無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なる場合には、通信経路作成要求を上記他の無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されている上記ゲートウェイ装置へ送信するステップと、上記ゲートウェイ装置が、上記通信経路作成要求を受信すると、上記上位ネットワークから送信される上記無線端末装置宛の通信データおよび上記無線端末装置から送信される上記上位ネットワークへの通信データを中継可能とする通信経路を作成し、上記通信経路作成要求に対する通信経路作成応答を上記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、上記通信制御装置が、上記通信経路作成応答を受信すると、上記他の無線基地局装置へ上記ハンドオーバ要求を送信し、上記他の無線基地局装置から上記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると、上記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の上記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信するステップと、上記無線基地局装置が、上記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、上記無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、上記無線端末装置における自己からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得するステップと、取得した上記受信品質情報に基づいて、上記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、上記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、上記無線端末装置に対する上記ハンドオーバ動作を行なうための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留するステップとを含む。 (25) A communication control method according to an aspect of the present invention is for managing a plurality of radio base station devices for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal device and one or a plurality of the radio base station devices. The communication control device is connected between one or a plurality of the radio base station devices and the upper network, and transmits communication data received from the radio terminal device via the radio base station device to the upper network, A communication control method in a communication system comprising a plurality of gateway devices for transmitting communication data received from the upper network to the wireless terminal device via the wireless base station device, wherein the wireless base station device A handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from the mobile station to another radio base station device is transmitted to the communication control device A gateway device connected between the radio base station device and the upper network, the other radio base station device of the handover destination indicated by the handover request, and the upper network; If the gateway device connected between is different from the gateway device connected to the gateway device connected between the other radio base station device and the higher-level network, the communication path creation request, When the gateway device receives the communication path creation request, communication that enables relaying of the communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device transmitted from the upper network and the communication data transmitted from the wireless terminal device to the upper network Create a route and send a communication route creation response to the communication route creation request And when the communication control apparatus receives the communication path creation response, the handover request is transmitted to the other radio base station apparatus, and the other radio base station apparatus responds to the handover request. When receiving the response, a step of transmitting a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus that is the transmission source of the handover request; and the radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction, and each radio base station in the radio terminal apparatus A step of acquiring reception quality information indicating a reception quality of a radio signal from itself in the wireless terminal device, updated at a shorter cycle than reception power information indicating a measurement result of reception power of a radio signal from the device; Based on the reception quality information, a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality with the wireless terminal device is satisfied. And if the execution condition is not satisfied, the step of stopping or holding the instruction to perform the handover operation on the wireless terminal device is included.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なる場合であっても、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築することができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 With such a configuration, the gateway apparatus connected between the handover source radio base station apparatus and the higher level network, and the gateway apparatus connected between the handover destination radio base station apparatus and the higher level network are provided. Even if they are different, the handover operation preparation process can be completed prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. Can do. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 (26)この発明のある局面に係わる通信制御プログラムは、無線端末装置がハンドオーバ動作を行なうことにより複数の無線基地局装置と通信可能な通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための無線基地局装置において用いられる通信制御プログラムであって、コンピュータに、無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報を取得するステップと、上記受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、上記無線端末装置における自己の無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得するステップと、取得した上記受信品質情報に基づいて、上記無線端末装置による自己の無線基地局装置から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断するステップとを実行させるためのプログラムである。 (26) A communication control program according to an aspect of the present invention transmits / receives a radio signal to / from a radio terminal device in a communication system in which the radio terminal device can communicate with a plurality of radio base station devices by performing a handover operation. A communication control program used in a radio base station apparatus for obtaining received power information indicating a measurement result of a received power of a radio signal from each radio base station apparatus in a radio terminal apparatus in a computer; Based on the acquired reception quality information, a step of obtaining reception quality information that is updated in a cycle shorter than the reception power information and indicates reception quality of a radio signal from its own radio base station device in the radio terminal device; The handover operation from the wireless base station device to another wireless base station device by the wireless terminal device is performed. Is a program for executing the steps of determining whether to.
 このように、受信電力情報よりも更新周期の短い受信品質情報を用いる構成により、急激な電波環境の変化に追従することが可能となるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”の発生を抑制することができる。すなわち、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を迅速に実行し、無線端末装置および無線基地局装置間の無線リンクが切断されることを防ぐことができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 As described above, the configuration using the reception quality information whose update cycle is shorter than the reception power information makes it possible to follow a sudden change in the radio wave environment. For example, the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late. Generation of “Late HO” can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to quickly execute the handover operation to the neighboring base station and prevent the radio link between the radio terminal device and the radio base station device from being disconnected. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 (27)この発明のある局面に係わる通信制御プログラムは、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、1または複数の上記無線基地局装置を管理するための複数の通信制御装置とを備える通信システムにおいて用いられる通信制御プログラムであって、コンピュータに、上記無線基地局装置が、自己から他の無線基地局装置への上記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を対応の上記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、上記対応の通信制御装置が、上記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の上記他の無線基地局装置が自己の管理対象でない場合には、上記他の無線基地局装置を管理する他の通信制御装置へ上記ハンドオーバ要求を送信するステップと、上記他の通信制御装置が、受信した上記ハンドオーバ要求を上記他の無線基地局装置へ送信し、上記他の無線基地局装置から上記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると上記対応の通信制御装置へ上記応答を送信するステップと、上記対応の通信制御装置が、上記他の通信制御装置から上記応答を受信して、上記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の上記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信するステップと、上記無線基地局装置が、上記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、上記無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、上記無線端末装置における自己からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得するステップと、取得した上記受信品質情報に基づいて、上記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、上記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、上記無線端末装置に対する上記ハンドオーバ動作を行なうための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留するステップとを実行させるためのプログラムである。 (27) A communication control program according to an aspect of the present invention manages a plurality of radio base station devices for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal device and one or a plurality of the radio base station devices. A communication control program used in a communication system including a plurality of communication control devices, wherein the wireless base station device performs a handover operation of the wireless terminal device from itself to another wireless base station device in a computer A step of transmitting a handover request to the corresponding communication control apparatus; and the corresponding communication control apparatus, when the other radio base station apparatus of the handover destination indicated by the handover request is not a management target of the other Transmitting the handover request to another communication control apparatus that manages the radio base station apparatus, and the other communication control apparatus Transmitting the received handover request to the other radio base station apparatus, and receiving the response to the handover request from the other radio base station apparatus, transmitting the response to the corresponding communication control apparatus; A corresponding communication control apparatus receiving the response from the other communication control apparatus and transmitting a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus that is a transmission source of the handover request; and Receiving the handover instruction, the wireless terminal device updates the received power information indicating the measurement result of the received power of the wireless signal from each wireless base station device in the wireless terminal device, and updates the wireless signal from itself in the wireless terminal device. Acquiring reception quality information indicating the reception quality of the wireless terminal device, and based on the acquired reception quality information, It is determined whether or not a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality is satisfied, and if the execution condition is not satisfied, the provision of an instruction for performing the handover operation to the wireless terminal device is stopped Or a step for holding the program.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置を管理する通信制御装置と、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を管理する通信制御装置とが異なる場合であっても、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築することができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 With such a configuration, even when the communication control apparatus that manages the handover source radio base station apparatus is different from the communication control apparatus that manages the handover destination radio base station apparatus, prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation. Since the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed, for example, “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late can be suppressed. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 (28)この発明のある局面に係わる通信制御プログラムは、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、1または複数の上記無線基地局装置を管理するための通信制御装置と、1または複数の上記無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続され、上記無線基地局装置経由で上記無線端末装置から受信した通信データを上記上位ネットワークへ送信するとともに、上記上位ネットワークから受信した通信データを上記無線基地局装置経由で上記無線端末装置へ送信するための複数のゲートウェイ装置とを備える通信システムにおいて用いられる通信制御プログラムであって、コンピュータに、上記無線基地局装置が、自己から他の無線基地局装置への上記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を上記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、上記通信制御装置が、上記無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、上記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の上記他の無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なる場合には、通信経路作成要求を上記他の無線基地局装置と上記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されている上記ゲートウェイ装置へ送信するステップと、上記ゲートウェイ装置が、上記通信経路作成要求を受信すると、上記上位ネットワークから送信される上記無線端末装置宛の通信データおよび上記無線端末装置から送信される上記上位ネットワークへの通信データを中継可能とする通信経路を作成し、上記通信経路作成要求に対する通信経路作成応答を上記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、上記通信制御装置が、上記通信経路作成応答を受信すると、上記他の無線基地局装置へ上記ハンドオーバ要求を送信し、上記他の無線基地局装置から上記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると、上記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の上記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信するステップと、上記無線基地局装置が、上記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、上記無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、上記無線端末装置における自己からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得するステップと、取得した上記受信品質情報に基づいて、上記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、上記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、上記無線端末装置に対する上記ハンドオーバ動作を行なうための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留するステップとを実行させるためのプログラムである。 (28) A communication control program according to an aspect of the present invention manages a plurality of radio base station devices for transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from a radio terminal device and one or a plurality of the radio base station devices. The communication control device is connected between one or a plurality of the radio base station devices and the upper network, and transmits communication data received from the radio terminal device via the radio base station device to the upper network, A communication control program used in a communication system comprising a plurality of gateway devices for transmitting communication data received from the upper network to the wireless terminal device via the wireless base station device, the computer comprising the wireless base station A station device performs a handover operation of the wireless terminal device from itself to another wireless base station device. Transmitting an over request to the communication control apparatus; a gateway apparatus connected between the radio base station apparatus and the higher-level network; and the other handover destination indicated by the handover request. When the gateway device connected between the wireless base station device and the upper network is different, a communication path creation request is connected between the other wireless base station device and the upper network. Transmitting to the gateway device; and when the gateway device receives the communication path creation request, the communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device transmitted from the upper network and the upper network transmitted from the wireless terminal device Create a communication path that can relay communication data to Transmitting a communication route creation response to the communication control device to the communication control device, and when the communication control device receives the communication route creation response, transmits the handover request to the other radio base station device, and When receiving a response to the handover request from the radio base station apparatus, a step of transmitting a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus that is a transmission source of the handover request; and the radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction, Reception quality indicating the reception quality of the radio signal from itself in the radio terminal device, updated at a shorter cycle than the received power information indicating the measurement result of the radio signal reception power from each radio base station device in the radio terminal device A step of acquiring information, and a communication quality with the wireless terminal device based on the acquired reception quality information Whether or not a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, and if the execution condition is not satisfied, the provision of an instruction for performing the handover operation to the wireless terminal apparatus is stopped or suspended. Is a program for executing steps.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なる場合であっても、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築することができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 With such a configuration, the gateway apparatus connected between the handover source radio base station apparatus and the higher level network, and the gateway apparatus connected between the handover destination radio base station apparatus and the higher level network are provided. Even if they are different, the handover operation preparation process can be completed prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation. For example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too late, for example. Can do. Also, unlike the case of adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent an increase in the probability of occurrence of “Too Early HO” when the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device is too early. . That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 本発明によれば、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to stabilize the communication by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of the hand-over operation | movement in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(Too Late HO)が生じた状況の一例を示す図である。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation where an inappropriate handover operation (Too Late HO) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおける、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(Too Late HO)およびその検出処理のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of an improper handover operation (Too Late HO) and its detection process in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(Too Early HO)が生じた状況の一例を示す図である。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation in which an inappropriate handover operation (Too Early HO) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(Too Early HO)が生じた状況の一例を示す図である。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation in which an inappropriate handover operation (Too Early HO) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおける、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(Too Early HO)およびその検出処理のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of the improper handover operation (Too Early HO) and its detection process in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(HO to Wrong Cell)が生じた状況の一例を示す図である。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation in which an inappropriate handover operation (HO to Wong Cell) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおける、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(HO to Wrong Cell)およびその検出処理のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of the improper handover operation (HO to Wong Cell) and its detection process in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおける、無線端末装置の受信品質のシミュレーション結果を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the simulation result of the reception quality of the radio | wireless terminal apparatus in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA1を示す図である。In the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure which shows event A1 in which a radio | wireless terminal apparatus transmits a notification of a measurement result. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA2を示す図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an event A2 in which a wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA3を示す図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an event A3 in which a wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA4を示す図である。It is a figure which shows event A4 which a radio | wireless terminal apparatus transmits a measurement result notification in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA5を示す図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an event A5 in which a wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ヒステリシスHSの調整によるハンドオーバ動作のタイミング制御を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the timing control of the hand-over operation by adjustment of hysteresis HS in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、TTTの調整によるハンドオーバ動作のタイミング制御を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the timing control of the hand-over operation by adjustment of TTT in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、オフセットOSTの調整によるハンドオーバ動作のタイミング制御を示す図である。FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating timing control of a handover operation by adjusting an offset OST in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the radio base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置が受信電力情報のみを用いてハンドオーバ動作の実行判断を行なうと仮定した場合におけるハンドオーバ動作の一例を示す図である。FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation when it is assumed that the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention performs a handover operation execution determination using only received power information. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置における制御部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the control part in the radio base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置のハンドオーバ動作の実行判断による、ハンドオーバ動作の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the hand-over operation | movement by the execution determination of the hand-over operation of the radio base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置が一段階の電力測定処理によってハンドオーバ動作の実行を判断する場合における、ハンドオーバ動作の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a handover operation in case the radio base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention judges execution of a handover operation by the one-step power measurement process. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置が二段階の電力測定処理によってハンドオーバ動作の実行を判断する場合における、ハンドオーバ動作の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a handover operation in case the radio base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention judges execution of a handover operation by a two-step electric power measurement process. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による、CQIレポートの内容に基づくハンドオーバ動作の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the hand-over operation | movement based on the content of the CQI report by the radio base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置のハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。6 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining whether to perform a handover operation of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による、CQIレポートの内容に基づくハンドオーバ動作の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the hand-over operation | movement based on the content of the CQI report by the radio base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置のハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。6 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining whether to perform a handover operation of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による、CQIレポートの内容に基づくハンドオーバ動作の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the hand-over operation | movement based on the content of the CQI report by the radio base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置のハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。6 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining whether to perform a handover operation of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による、CQIレポートの内容に基づくハンドオーバ動作の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the hand-over operation | movement based on the content of the CQI report by the radio base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置のハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。6 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining whether to perform a handover operation of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による電波環境の劣化判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。It is the flowchart which defined an example of the procedure of radio wave environment degradation judgment by the wireless base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による電波環境の劣化判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。It is the flowchart which defined an example of the procedure of radio wave environment degradation judgment by the wireless base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による電波環境の劣化判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。It is the flowchart which defined an example of the procedure of radio wave environment degradation judgment by the wireless base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による電波環境の劣化判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。It is the flowchart which defined an example of the procedure of radio wave environment degradation judgment by the wireless base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による電波環境の劣化判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。It is the flowchart which defined an example of the procedure of radio wave environment degradation judgment by the wireless base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による電波環境の劣化判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。It is the flowchart which defined an example of the procedure of radio wave environment degradation judgment by the wireless base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による、受信電力情報およびCQIレポートと、通信プロトコルにおける各レイヤとの対応を示す図である。It is a figure which shows a response | compatibility with each layer in a communication protocol with the received power information and CQI report by the radio base station apparatus which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置における制御部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the control part in the radio base station apparatus which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of the hand-over operation | movement in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of the hand-over operation | movement in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of the hand-over operation | movement in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the sequence of the hand-over operation | movement in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいてハンドオーバ動作に要する時間の内訳の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the breakdown of the time which a hand-over operation | movement requires in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. シミュレーション対象の無線通信システムにおける無線環境パラメータを示す図である。It is a figure which shows the radio | wireless environment parameter in the radio | wireless communications system of simulation object. シミュレーション対象の無線通信システムにおける電力測定処理のパラメータを示す図である。It is a figure which shows the parameter of the electric power measurement process in the radio | wireless communications system of simulation object. ハンドオーバ失敗確率のシミュレーション結果を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the simulation result of a handover failure probability. ”Ping Pong HO”の発生確率のシミュレーション結果を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the simulation result of the generation | occurrence | production probability of "Ping Pong HO". 図48に示すハンドオーバ失敗確率、および図49に示す”Ping Pong HO”の発生確率の和を示す図である。FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the sum of the handover failure probability shown in FIG. 48 and the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO” shown in FIG. 49. 本発明の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による改善対象を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the improvement object by the radio base station apparatus which concerns on embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされる状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。In the radio communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention, a sequence of a handover operation in a situation where a condition for executing the handover operation is satisfied. 本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされない状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。In the radio communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention, a sequence of a handover operation in a situation where a condition for executing the handover operation is not satisfied. 本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされる状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。In the radio communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention, a sequence of a handover operation in a situation where a condition for executing the handover operation is satisfied. 本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされない状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。In the radio communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention, a sequence of a handover operation in a situation where a condition for executing the handover operation is not satisfied. 本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされる状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。In the radio communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention, a sequence of a handover operation in a situation where a condition for executing the handover operation is satisfied. 本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされない状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。In the radio communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention, a sequence of a handover operation in a situation where a condition for executing the handover operation is not satisfied. ハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置が複数存在する状況の一例を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the condition where two or more radio base station apparatuses which are candidates for a handover destination exist. 図61に示す状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an exemplary sequence of a handover operation in the situation shown in FIG. 61. ハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置が複数存在する状況の一例における課題を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the subject in an example of the condition where there exist multiple radio base station apparatuses which are candidates for a handover destination. 図63に示す状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an exemplary sequence of a handover operation in the situation shown in FIG. 63. 本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置がハンドオーバ先を選択する場合におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。In the radio communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, a handover operation sequence when the handover source radio base station apparatus selects a handover destination. RRCコネクション再構成指示のメッセージ構造の比較例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the comparative example of the message structure of a RRC connection reconfiguration | reconstruction instruction | indication. 本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ要求部から送信されるRRCコネクション再構成指示のメッセージ構造の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the message structure of the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction | indication transmitted from the handover request | requirement part in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの無線端末装置の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the radio | wireless terminal apparatus of the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置がハンドオーバ先を選択する場合におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。In the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention, it is a sequence of the hand-over operation | movement in case a radio | wireless terminal apparatus selects a hand-over destination. 本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置における制御部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the control part in the radio base station apparatus which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置がハンドオーバ先を選択する場合におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。In the radio communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, a handover operation sequence when the handover source radio base station apparatus selects a handover destination. 本発明の第5の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第5の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。It is a sequence of the hand-over operation | movement in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第5の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第5の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。It is a sequence of the hand-over operation | movement in the radio | wireless communications system which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention.
 以下、本発明の実施の形態について図面を用いて説明する。なお、図中同一または相当部分には同一符号を付してその説明は繰り返さない。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the drawings, the same or corresponding parts are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will not be repeated.
 無線基地局装置は、自らの形成するセルおよび周辺セルについての情報、すなわち無線信号の周波数および周辺セルのID(identification)等を無線端末装置に通知する。無線端末装置は、無線基地局装置から通知された情報に基づいて、周辺セルの検出および測定を行なう。無線端末装置は、この測定結果に基づいて、周辺セルへの移動を開始する。ここで、無線端末装置の「移動」とは、ハンドオーバを意味することに加えて、アイドル状態の無線端末装置が今後通信を開始する、すなわち通話またはデータ通信を開始する際にどのセルを介して通信を行なうかを選択することを意味する。 The radio base station apparatus notifies the radio terminal apparatus of information about the cell and the neighboring cell that it forms, that is, the frequency of the radio signal and the ID (identification) of the neighboring cell. The wireless terminal device detects and measures neighboring cells based on information notified from the wireless base station device. The wireless terminal device starts moving to the neighboring cell based on the measurement result. Here, “movement” of the wireless terminal device means not only handover but also through which cell the wireless terminal device in an idle state starts communication in the future, that is, when a call or data communication is started. This means selecting whether to perform communication.
 たとえば、無線端末装置が無線基地局装置と通信しているときには、無線端末装置の移動先は無線基地局装置またはコアネットワークにおける上位装置が決定する。また、たとえば、無線端末装置が無線基地局装置と通信していないときには、無線端末装置の移動先は無線端末装置が決定する。 For example, when the wireless terminal device is communicating with the wireless base station device, the destination of the wireless terminal device is determined by the wireless base station device or the higher-level device in the core network. For example, when the wireless terminal device is not communicating with the wireless base station device, the wireless terminal device determines the destination of the wireless terminal device.
 また、ハンドオーバとは、通話中またはデータ通信中の無線端末装置の通信相手となる無線基地局装置が切り替えられることを意味する。 In addition, handover means that a radio base station apparatus that is a communication partner of a radio terminal apparatus during a call or data communication is switched.
 また、無線端末装置がセルに在圏している、とは、無線端末装置が、当該セルを形成する無線基地局装置を通信先として選択し、かつ当該無線基地局装置と通信可能な状態または通信中である状態を意味する。 The wireless terminal device is located in a cell means that the wireless terminal device selects a wireless base station device forming the cell as a communication destination and can communicate with the wireless base station device. This means that communication is in progress.
 フェムトセルおよびアクセスモードは、3GPP(Third Generation Partnership Project) SPEC TS22.220において以下のように説明されている。すなわち、フェムト基地局は、無線インタフェースを介して接続されている無線端末装置を、IPバックホール(backhaul)を用いて、移動通信事業者網に接続する顧客構内装置である。 The femtocell and access mode are described in 3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project) SPEC TS 22.220 as follows. That is, a femto base station is a customer premises apparatus that connects a wireless terminal device connected via a wireless interface to a mobile communication carrier network using an IP backhaul.
 また、フェムトセルのアクセスモードにおいて、クローズドアクセスモードのフェムト基地局は、関連するCSG(Closed Subscriber Group)メンバーにのみサービスを提供する。また、ハイブリッドモードのフェムト基地局は、関連するCSGメンバーおよびCSGノンメンバーにサービスを提供する。また、オープンアクセスモードのフェムト基地局は、通常の基地局として動作する。 In addition, in the access mode of the femto cell, the femto base station in the closed access mode provides a service only to related CSG (Closed Subscriber Group) members. The hybrid mode femto base station also provides services to the associated CSG members and CSG non-members. The femto base station in the open access mode operates as a normal base station.
 本発明の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいても、このような3GPPの定義を適用してもよい。 Such a 3GPP definition may also be applied to the wireless communication system according to the embodiment of the present invention.
 また、上記定義と合わせて、あるいは別個に、以下のような定義を適用することも可能である。 Also, the following definitions can be applied together with the above definitions or separately.
 マクロ基地局およびピコ基地局は、事業者の管理下にあり、事業者と契約している無線基地局装置が通信可能な無線基地局装置である。また、マクロ基地局およびピコ基地局は、基本的に電源がオフになることはないと考えられる。 The macro base station and the pico base station are radio base station devices that are under the control of the operator and that can communicate with the radio base station device that has contracted with the operator. Further, it is considered that the macro base station and the pico base station are basically not turned off.
 また、フェムト基地局は、主に個人または法人の建物内に設置され、ユーザの事情により移動するまたは電源がオフとなる可能性がある無線基地局装置である。 Also, the femto base station is a radio base station apparatus that is mainly installed in an individual or corporate building and may move or be turned off depending on user circumstances.
 また、フェムト基地局は、オープン/ハイブリッド/クローズドのいずれかのアクセスモードで動作する。フェムト基地局は、クローズドアクセスモードで動作する場合には、登録済みのメンバー(端末)のみ接続可能となる。また、クローズドアクセスモードで動作する場合には、登録済みのメンバーにのみサービスを提供する。また、ハイブリッドモードで動作する場合には、登録済みのメンバー、および未登録のメンバーすなわちノンメンバーの両方にサービスを提供する。また、オープンアクセスモードで動作する場合には、マクロ基地局およびピコ基地局と同じ動作をする。 In addition, the femto base station operates in an access mode of open / hybrid / closed. When the femto base station operates in the closed access mode, only registered members (terminals) can be connected. When operating in the closed access mode, the service is provided only to registered members. When operating in the hybrid mode, the service is provided to both registered members and unregistered members, that is, non-members. When operating in the open access mode, the same operation as that of the macro base station and the pico base station is performed.
 <第1の実施の形態>
 [構成および基本動作]
 図1は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成を示す図である。
<First Embodiment>
[Configuration and basic operation]
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図1を参照して、無線通信システムは、たとえば3GPP(Third Generation Partnership Project)で規格化されたLTE(Long Term Evolution)に従う移動体通信システムであり、無線基地局装置101A,101Bを備える。図1では、2つの無線基地局装置を代表的に示しているが、さらに多数の無線基地局装置が設けられてもよい。 Referring to FIG. 1, the radio communication system is a mobile communication system that complies with LTE (Long Term Evolution) standardized by, for example, 3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project), and includes radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B. In FIG. 1, two radio base station apparatuses are representatively shown, but a larger number of radio base station apparatuses may be provided.
 無線基地局装置101A,101Bは、たとえばフェムト基地局、ピコ基地局またはマクロ基地局である。 Radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B are, for example, femto base stations, pico base stations, or macro base stations.
 無線基地局装置101Aは、セルCAを形成し、セルCA内に存在する無線端末装置202と無線信号を送受信することにより、当該無線端末装置202と通信することが可能である。無線基地局装置101Bは、セルCBを形成し、セルCB内に存在する無線端末装置202と無線信号を送受信することにより、当該無線端末装置202と通信することが可能である。 The wireless base station device 101A can communicate with the wireless terminal device 202 by forming a cell CA and transmitting / receiving a wireless signal to / from the wireless terminal device 202 existing in the cell CA. The radio base station apparatus 101B can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CB and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CB.
 ここで、無線端末装置からコアネットワークへの方向を上り方向と称し、コアネットワークから無線端末装置への方向を下り方向と称する。 Here, the direction from the wireless terminal device to the core network is referred to as an uplink direction, and the direction from the core network to the wireless terminal device is referred to as a downlink direction.
 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおける無線基地局装置および無線端末装置は、以下の各シーケンスおよび各フローチャートの各ステップを含むプログラムを図示しないメモリから読み出して実行する。このプログラムは、外部からインストールすることができる。このインストールされるプログラムは、たとえば記録媒体に格納された状態で流通する。 The radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus in the radio communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention read and execute a program including the following sequences and steps in each flowchart from a memory (not shown). This program can be installed externally. The installed program is distributed in a state stored in a recording medium, for example.
 図2は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。 FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 ここでは、図1に示すように、無線端末装置202が、セルCA内に位置し、無線基地局装置101Aと通信中である状態から、セルCAおよびセルCBの重複領域へ移動した場合を想定する。 Here, as shown in FIG. 1, it is assumed that the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA and is in communication with the wireless base station device 101A, and moves to an overlapping area of the cell CA and the cell CB. To do.
 図2を参照して、まず、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己と通信中の無線端末装置202の測定対象となる周波数と、当該周波数の無線信号を送信する他の無線基地局装置とを設定する(ステップS1)。 Referring to FIG. 2, first, radio base station apparatus 101A sets a frequency to be measured by radio terminal apparatus 202 in communication with itself and another radio base station apparatus that transmits a radio signal of the frequency. (Step S1).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、設定した他の無線基地局装置から送信される無線信号の受信レベルを無線端末装置202に測定させるための測定開始要求(Measurement Configuration)を無線端末装置202へ送信する。この測定開始要求には、周辺セル情報、すなわち測定対象となる無線基地局装置のセルIDが含まれる。また、この測定開始要求には、各無線基地局装置の送信周波数が含まれる(ステップS2)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A sends a measurement start request (Measurement Configuration) to the wireless terminal device 202 to cause the wireless terminal device 202 to measure the reception level of the wireless signal transmitted from the set other wireless base station device. Send. This measurement start request includes neighboring cell information, that is, the cell ID of the radio base station apparatus to be measured. Further, the measurement start request includes the transmission frequency of each radio base station device (step S2).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Aから測定開始要求を受信して、電力測定処理(Measurement)を開始する、すなわち受信した測定開始要求の示す周波数において、測定開始要求の示す無線基地局装置から送信される無線信号の受信電力を測定する(ステップS3)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 receives the measurement start request from the wireless base station device 101A and starts the power measurement process (Measurement), that is, the wireless indicated by the measurement start request at the frequency indicated by the received measurement start request. The received power of the radio signal transmitted from the base station apparatus is measured (step S3).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、この受信電力の測定結果を示す測定結果通知(Measurement Report)を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する。たとえば、無線端末装置202は、受信電力の測定を定期的に行ない、無線基地局装置101Aとの通信状態が悪くなった場合、および無線基地局装置101A以外の他の無線基地局装置との通信状態が良くなった場合に、測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS4)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (Measurement Report) indicating the measurement result of the received power to the wireless base station device 101A. For example, the wireless terminal device 202 periodically measures the received power, when the communication state with the wireless base station device 101A deteriorates, and with other wireless base station devices other than the wireless base station device 101A When the state becomes better, a measurement result notification is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S4).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、セルIDごとの測定結果を示す測定情報を取得し、図示しない記憶部に保存する(ステップS5)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID based on the measurement result notification received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and stores it in a storage unit (not shown) (step S5).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、当該無線端末装置202がハンドオーバすべきか否かを判断し、ハンドオーバすべきであると判断すると、周辺セル情報を参照してたとえば無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先として決定する(ステップS6)。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A determines whether or not the wireless terminal device 202 should be handed over. For example, the radio base station apparatus 101B is determined as a handover destination with reference to the information (step S6).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を上位装置へ送信する(ステップS7)。 Next, the radio base station device 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station device 101B to the higher-level device (step S7).
 次に、上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、無線基地局装置101Bへ当該ハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS8)。 Next, the host apparatus receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A and transmits the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S8).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、上位装置からハンドオーバ要求を受信して、上位装置へ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS9)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the higher-level apparatus and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the higher-level apparatus (Step S9).
 次に、上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する(ステップS10)。 Next, the higher-level device receives a handover response from the radio base station device 101B and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station device 101A (step S10).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置からハンドオーバ指示を受信して、無線端末装置202へRRC(Radio Resource Control)コネクション再構成指示(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)を送信する(ステップS11)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover instruction from the host apparatus and transmits an RRC (Radio Resource Control) connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S11).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置へ自己の通信状態等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS12)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status and the like to the higher-level device (step S12).
 次に、上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Aから状態通知を受信して、無線基地局装置101Bへ無線端末装置202との通信内容等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS13)。 Next, the host device receives the status notification from the radio base station device 101A and transmits the status notification indicating the communication content with the radio terminal device 202 to the radio base station device 101B (step S13).
 また、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101BへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete)を送信する(ステップS14)。 When the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B ( Step S14).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、上位装置へハンドオーバ完了通知を送信する(ステップS15)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the higher-level apparatus (step S15).
 次に、上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ完了通知を受信して、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS16)。 Next, the host device receives a handover completion notification from the radio base station device 101B and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station device 101A (step S16).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置から端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、上位装置へ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS17)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the higher-level device, releases the information related to the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the higher-level device (step S17).
 [不適切なハンドオーバ動作の例]
 以下、無線端末装置202と通信中の無線基地局装置またはハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置をサービング基地局とも称し、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を周辺基地局とも称する。
[Example of inappropriate handover operation]
Hereinafter, a radio base station apparatus communicating with the radio terminal apparatus 202 or a handover source radio base station apparatus is also referred to as a serving base station, and a handover destination radio base station apparatus is also referred to as a neighboring base station.
 図3は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(Too Late HO)が生じた状況の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation where an inappropriate handover operation (Too Late HO) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図4は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおける、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(Too Late HO)およびその検出処理のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。 FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of an inappropriate handover operation (Too Late HO) and its detection processing sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 ”Too Late HO”は、たとえば以下のような場合をいう。すなわち、ハンドオーバが始まる前、あるいはハンドオーバ処理の最中に、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置について無線リンク断(RLF:Radio Link Failure)が発生し、かつハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置以外の無線基地局装置に対する無線端末装置202の接続再確立が生じた場合である。 “Too Late HO” refers to the following cases, for example. That is, before handover starts or during handover processing, a radio link failure (RLF) occurs in the handover source radio base station apparatus, and a radio base station other than the handover source radio base station apparatus. This is a case where connection re-establishment of the wireless terminal device 202 to the device has occurred.
 ”Too Late HO”の検出方法は、たとえば以下のようになる。すなわち、無線端末装置202が無線基地局装置101AについてRLFを起こした後に無線基地局装置101Bに対して無線リンクを再確立した場合、無線基地局装置101Bが無線基地局装置101Aに対してRLF通知を送信する。これにより、無線基地局装置101Aは”Too Late HO”を検出する。 The detection method of “Too Late HO” is as follows, for example. That is, when the radio terminal device 202 reestablishes the radio link to the radio base station device 101B after causing the RLF for the radio base station device 101A, the radio base station device 101B notifies the radio base station device 101A of the RLF. Send. Thereby, the radio base station apparatus 101A detects “Too Late HO”.
 ここでは、図3に示すように、無線端末装置202は、セルCA内に位置し、無線基地局装置101Aと通信中である場合を想定する。 Here, as shown in FIG. 3, it is assumed that the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA and is communicating with the wireless base station device 101A.
 図3および図4を参照して、まず、無線端末装置202は、各無線基地局装置から送信される無線信号の受信電力を測定し、測定した受信電力の測定結果を示す測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS51)。 Referring to FIG. 3 and FIG. 4, first, radio terminal apparatus 202 measures the received power of a radio signal transmitted from each radio base station apparatus, and wirelessly sends a measurement result notification indicating the measured result of the received power. It transmits to base station apparatus 101A (step S51).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバを行なうべきか否かを判断する。無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバを行なうべきであると判断すると、周辺セル情報を参照してたとえば無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先として決定する(ステップS52)。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A determines whether or not the wireless terminal device 202 should be handed over. When it is determined that the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be handed over, the radio base station apparatus 101A refers to the neighboring cell information and determines, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination (step S52).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を、基地局間インタフェースであるX2インタフェース経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS53)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface that is an inter-base station interface (step S53).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aへ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答をX2インタフェース経由で送信する(ステップS54)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101A via the X2 interface (step S54).
 ここで、ネットワーク側のハンドオーバの準備中、すなわち無線基地局装置101Aおよび101Bが上記のようなハンドオーバのためのメッセージの送受信を行っている間に、無線端末装置202が、セルCAの圏外、かつセルCBの圏内に移動する(ステップS55)。 Here, while preparing for handover on the network side, that is, while the radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B are transmitting and receiving a message for handover as described above, the radio terminal apparatus 202 is out of service area of the cell CA, and Move to within the cell CB (step S55).
 この無線端末装置202の移動により、無線基地局装置101Aから送信されるハンドオーバを指示するためのRRCコネクション再構成指示(ステップS56)が無線端末装置202に届かなくなり、RLFが発生してしまう(ステップS57)。 Due to the movement of the wireless terminal device 202, the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (step S56) for instructing the handover transmitted from the wireless base station device 101A does not reach the wireless terminal device 202, and RLF is generated (step S56). S57).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、RLF発生を検出すると、無線信号の受信電力の測定等によって周辺の無線基地局装置の探索を行ない、探索した無線基地局装置101Bに再接続するために、RRCコネクション再確立要求(RRC Connection Reestablishment Request)を送信する(ステップS58)。 Next, when the radio terminal apparatus 202 detects the occurrence of RLF, the radio terminal apparatus 202 searches for a neighboring radio base station apparatus by measuring the reception power of the radio signal and reconnects to the searched radio base station apparatus 101B. A connection re-establishment request (RRC Connection Reestablishment Request) is transmitted (step S58).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再確立要求を受信して、RRCコネクション再確立応答を無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS59)。これにより、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立される。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection re-establishment request from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits an RRC connection re-establishment response to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S59). Thereby, an RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B.
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101BへRRCコネクション再確立完了通知(RRC Connection Reestablishment Complete)を送信する(ステップS60)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection re-establishment completion notification (RRC Connection Reestablishment Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B (step S60).
 このRRCコネクション再確立完了通知は、たとえば”rlf-InfoAvailable”というパラメータを含む。無線端末装置202は、このパラメータを設定してRRCコネクション再確立完了通知を送信する。これにより、無線基地局装置101Bは、当該無線端末装置202についてRLFの発生があったことを認識する。無線基地局装置101Bは、RLFの詳細な情報を取得するため、端末情報要求(UE Information Request)を無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS61)。 This RRC connection re-establishment completion notification includes a parameter “rlf-InfoAvailable”, for example. The wireless terminal device 202 sets this parameter and transmits an RRC connection re-establishment completion notification. Thereby, the radio base station apparatus 101B recognizes that an RLF has occurred in the radio terminal apparatus 202. The radio base station apparatus 101B transmits a terminal information request (UE Information Request) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 in order to acquire detailed information of the RLF (step S61).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Bから端末情報要求を受信して、RLFレポートを含む端末情報応答(UE Information Response)を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS62)。RLFレポートは、RLFの発生した無線基地局装置のPCI(Physical Cell ID)、RRCコネクション再確立の発生した無線基地局装置のPCIおよびECGI(E-UTRAN Cell Global Identifier)ならびに自己の無線端末装置202のC-RNTI(Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier)等を含む。ここでは、RLF発生のPCIは無線基地局装置101AのIDであり、RRCコネクション再確立発生のPCIおよびECGIは無線基地局装置101BのIDであり、C-RNTIは無線基地局装置101Aが付与したIDである。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 receives the terminal information request from the wireless base station device 101B, and transmits a terminal information response (UE Information Response) including the RLF report to the wireless base station device 101B (step S62). The RLF report includes the PCI (Physical Cell ID) of the radio base station apparatus in which the RLF has occurred, the PCI and ECGI (E-UTRAN Cell Global Identifier) of the radio base station apparatus in which the RRC connection has been reestablished, and the own radio terminal apparatus 202. C-RNTI (Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier), etc. Here, the PCI of the RLF occurrence is the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101A, the PCI and ECGI of the RRC connection re-establishment occurrence are the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101B, and the C-RNTI is assigned by the radio base station apparatus 101A ID.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202から受信したRLFレポートのPCIを参照することにより、無線基地局装置101AにおいてRLFが発生したことを認識する。そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、”Too Late HO”であることを通知するために、当該RLFレポートの内容を含むRLF通知(RLF INDICATION)をX2インタフェース経由で無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS63)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B recognizes that RLF has occurred in the radio base station apparatus 101A by referring to the PCI of the RLF report received from the radio terminal apparatus 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B transmits an RLF notification (RLF INDICATION) including the contents of the RLF report to the radio base station apparatus 101A via the X2 interface in order to notify that it is “Too Late HO” ( Step S63).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bから受信したRLF通知のPCI、ECGIおよびC-RNTIを参照することにより、セルCBへの”Too Late HO”が発生したことを認識する(ステップS64)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A recognizes that “Too Late HO” has occurred to the cell CB by referring to the PCI, ECGI, and C-RNTI of the RLF notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101B. (Step S64).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、セルCBへの”Too Late HO”の発生が抑制されるように、ハンドオーバ動作の最適化処理を実行する(ステップS65)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A executes a handover operation optimization process so as to suppress the occurrence of “Too Late HO” in the cell CB (step S65).
 図5および図6は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(Too Early HO)が生じた状況の一例を示す図である。 5 and 6 are diagrams illustrating an example of a situation in which an inappropriate handover operation (Too Early HO) has occurred in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図5および図6を参照して、無線基地局装置101Bの形成するセルCBは、無線基地局装置101Bの設置エリアを含むセルCB1と、セルCA内に形成された、無線基地局装置101Bの設置エリアを含まないセルCB2とで構成される。 5 and 6, cell CB formed by radio base station apparatus 101B includes cell CB1 including the installation area of radio base station apparatus 101B, and radio base station apparatus 101B formed in cell CA. The cell CB2 does not include an installation area.
 図7は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおける、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(Too Early HO)およびその検出処理のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。 FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an inappropriate handover operation (Too Early HO) and its detection processing sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 ”Too Early HO”は、たとえば以下のような場合をいう。すなわち、無線端末装置202がハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置に対する接続を成功した後、RLFが短時間で発生し、かつ、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置に対して、当該無線端末装置202の接続再確立が生じた場合である。 “Too Early HO” refers to the following cases, for example. That is, after the wireless terminal device 202 has successfully connected to the handover destination wireless base station device, RLF occurs in a short time, and the wireless terminal device 202 is reconnected to the handover source wireless base station device. This is the case when establishment occurs.
 ”Too Early HO”の検出方法は、たとえば以下のようになる。すなわち、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置101Bは、RLFレポートをハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置101Aから受信した場合において、当該受信タイミングからさかのぼって所定時間内に、当該無線端末装置202の自己へのハンドオーバの完了による端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信していたときに、”Too Early HO”である旨を無線基地局装置101Aに通知する。 The detection method of “Too Early HO” is as follows, for example. That is, when the handover destination radio base station apparatus 101B receives an RLF report from the handover source radio base station apparatus 101A, the handover to the radio terminal apparatus 202 itself is performed within a predetermined time from the reception timing. When the terminal information release instruction upon completion of the transmission is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A, the radio base station apparatus 101A is notified that “Too Early HO”.
 ここで、無線基地局装置101Bは、上記所定時間を計測するために、タイマを用いる。これにより、無線基地局装置101Bは、RLFレポートを受信した場合において、自己の”Too Late HO”によってRLFが発生したのか、無線基地局装置101Aの”Too Early HO”によってRLFが発生したのかを判別することができる。 Here, the radio base station apparatus 101B uses a timer to measure the predetermined time. As a result, when the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF report, whether the RLF has occurred due to its own “Too Late HO” or whether the RLF has occurred due to the “Too Early HO” of the radio base station apparatus 101A. Can be determined.
 ここでは、図5に示すように、無線端末装置202が、セルCA内に位置し、無線基地局装置101Aと通信中である状態から、セルCB2内へ移動した場合(ステップS70)を想定する。 Here, as shown in FIG. 5, a case is assumed in which radio terminal apparatus 202 moves into cell CB2 from a state where it is located in cell CA and is communicating with radio base station apparatus 101A (step S70). .
 図5~図7を参照して、まず、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置から送信される無線信号の受信電力を測定し、測定した受信電力の測定結果を示す測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101A(Source eNB,Serving eNB)へ送信する(ステップS71)。 5 to 7, first, radio terminal apparatus 202 measures the reception power of a radio signal transmitted from a radio base station apparatus, and sends a measurement result notification indicating the measurement result of the measured reception power to radio base station. It transmits to station apparatus 101A (Source eNB, Serving eNB) (step S71).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバを行なうべきか否かを判断する。無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバを行なうべきであると判断すると、周辺セル情報を参照してたとえば無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先として決定する(ステップS72)。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A determines whether or not the wireless terminal device 202 should be handed over. When determining that the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be handed over, the radio base station apparatus 101A refers to the neighboring cell information and determines, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination (step S72).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を、基地局間インタフェースであるX2インタフェース経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS73)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface that is an interface between base stations (step S73).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aへ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答をX2インタフェース経由で送信する(ステップS74)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101A via the X2 interface (step S74).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信して、無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)を送信する(ステップS75)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S75).
 次に、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、RRCコネクション再構成完了通知(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete)を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS76)。 Next, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B. (Step S76).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS77)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S77).
 また、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202のセルCBにおける滞在時間を計測するために、タイマをスタートさせる(ステップS78)。 Also, the radio base station apparatus 101B starts a timer in order to measure the stay time in the cell CB of the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S78).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bから端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報(UE Context)を解放する(ステップS79)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and releases information (UE Context) on the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S79).
 以上により、無線端末装置202の無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバが完了する(ステップS80)。 As described above, the handover of the wireless terminal device 202 from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B is completed (step S80).
 ここで、無線端末装置202が、測定結果通知(Measurement Report)を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する前に、セルCBの圏外かつセルCAの圏内に移動する(ステップS81)。 Here, before transmitting the measurement result notification (Measurement Report) to the radio base station apparatus 101B, the radio terminal apparatus 202 moves outside the cell CB and within the cell CA (step S81).
 そうすると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Bと通信できなくなることから、RLFが発生してしまう(ステップS83)。 Then, since the wireless terminal device 202 cannot communicate with the wireless base station device 101B, RLF occurs (step S83).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、RLF発生を検出すると、無線信号の受信電力の測定等によって周辺の無線基地局装置の探索を行ない、探索した無線基地局装置101Aに再接続するために、RRCコネクション再確立要求(RRC Connection Reestablishment Request)を送信する(ステップS84)。 Next, when the radio terminal apparatus 202 detects the occurrence of RLF, the radio terminal apparatus 202 searches for a neighboring radio base station apparatus by measuring the reception power of the radio signal and reconnects to the searched radio base station apparatus 101A. A connection re-establishment request (RRC Connection Reestablishment Request) is transmitted (step S84).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202に関する情報(UE Context)を解放済みであり、保持していないことから、当該無線端末装置202からのRRCコネクション再確立要求を受け入れることができず(ステップS85)、RRCコネクション再確立拒絶を当該無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS86)。 Next, since the radio base station apparatus 101A has released and does not hold the information (UE Context) regarding the radio terminal apparatus 202, the radio base station apparatus 101A can accept the RRC connection re-establishment request from the radio terminal apparatus 202. If it is not possible (step S85), an RRC connection re-establishment rejection is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S86).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、RRCコネクション再確立拒絶を無線基地局装置101Aから受信すると、無線基地局装置101Aと通常の接続手順をスタートさせる(ステップS87)。 Next, when receiving the RRC connection re-establishment rejection from the radio base station apparatus 101A, the radio terminal apparatus 202 starts a normal connection procedure with the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S87).
 すなわち、まず、無線端末装置202は、RRCコネクション要求(RRC Connection Request)を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS88)。 That is, first, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection request to the wireless base station device 101A (step S88).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション要求を受信して、RRCコネクション情報(RRC Connection Setup)を無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS89)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A receives the RRC connection request from the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits RRC connection information (RRC Connection Setup) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S89).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101AからRRCコネクション情報を受信して、RRCコネクション完了通知(RRC Connection Setup Complete)を送信する(ステップS90)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 receives the RRC connection information from the wireless base station device 101A, and transmits an RRC connection completion notification (RRC Connection Setup Complete) (step S90).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション完了通知を受信して、セキュリティ情報(Security Mode Command)を無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS91)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A receives the RRC connection completion notification from the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits security information (Security Mode Command) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S91).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Aからセキュリティ情報を受信して、セキュリティ完了通知(Security Mode Complete)を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS92)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 receives security information from the wireless base station device 101A, and transmits a security completion notification (Security Mode Complete) to the wireless base station device 101A (step S92).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)を送信する(ステップS93)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S93).
 次に、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101A間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101AへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete)を送信する(ステップS94)。 Next, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101A, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101A. (Step S94).
 ここで、RRCコネクション完了通知およびRRCコネクション再構成完了通知は、たとえば”rlf-InfoAvailable”というパラメータを含む。無線端末装置202は、このパラメータを設定してRRCコネクション完了通知およびRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を送信する。これにより、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202についてRLFの発生があったことを認識する。無線基地局装置101Aは、RLFの詳細な情報を取得するため、端末情報要求(UE Information Request)を無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS95)。 Here, the RRC connection completion notification and the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification include, for example, a parameter “rlf-InfoAvailable”. The wireless terminal device 202 sets this parameter and transmits an RRC connection completion notification and an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification. As a result, the radio base station apparatus 101A recognizes that an RLF has occurred in the radio terminal apparatus 202. The wireless base station device 101A transmits a terminal information request (UE Information Request) to the wireless terminal device 202 in order to acquire detailed information of the RLF (step S95).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Aから端末情報要求を受信して、RLFレポートを含む端末情報応答(UE Information Response)を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS96)。RLFレポートは、RLFの発生した無線基地局装置のPCI、RRCコネクション再確立の発生した無線基地局装置のPCIおよびECGIならびに自己の無線端末装置202のC-RNTIを含む。ここでは、RLF発生のPCIは無線基地局装置101BのIDであり、RRCコネクション再確立発生のPCIおよびECGIは無線基地局装置101AのIDであり、C-RNTIは無線基地局装置101Bが付与したIDである。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 receives the terminal information request from the wireless base station device 101A, and transmits a terminal information response (UE Information Response) including the RLF report to the wireless base station device 101A (step S96). The RLF report includes the PCI of the radio base station apparatus in which the RLF has occurred, the PCI and ECGI of the radio base station apparatus in which the RRC connection re-establishment has occurred, and the C-RNTI of the own radio terminal apparatus 202. Here, the PCI of the RLF occurrence is the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101B, the PCI and ECGI of the RRC connection re-establishment are the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101A, and the C-RNTI is assigned by the radio base station apparatus 101B ID.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信したRLFレポートのPCIを参照することにより、無線基地局装置101BにおいてRLFが発生しことを認識し、セルCAへの”Too Late HO”が発生したと判断する(ステップS97)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A recognizes that RLF has occurred in the radio base station apparatus 101B by referring to the PCI of the RLF report received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and performs “Too Late HO” to the cell CA. "Is generated (step S97).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、”Too Late HO”であることを通知するために、当該RLFレポートの内容を含むRLF通知(RLF INDICATION)をX2インタフェース経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS98)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RLF notification (RLF INDICATION) including the content of the RLF report to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface in order to notify that it is “Too Late HO”. (Step S98).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101AからRLF通知を受信すると、スタートさせておいたタイマを確認し、タイマが動作している場合、すなわちタイマをスタートさせてから所定時間経過していない場合には、セルCAへの”Too Late HO”ではなく、セルCBへの”Too Early HO”であると判断する。なお、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101AからRLF通知を受信したときにタイマが動作していない場合、すなわちタイマをスタートさせてから上記所定時間経過している場合には、セルCAへの”Too Late HO”であると判断する。 Next, when the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, the radio base station apparatus 101B checks the timer that has been started. If the timer is operating, that is, a predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was started. If not, it is determined not to be “Too Late HO” to the cell CA but to “Too Early HO” to the cell CB. When the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A and the timer is not operating, that is, when the predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was started, the cell CA It is determined that it is “Too Late HO”.
 無線基地局装置101Bは、セルCBへの”Too Early HO”であると判断すると(ステップS99)、ハンドオーバレポートを無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS100)。このハンドオーバレポートは、たとえば”Handover Report Type”というパラメータを含む。無線基地局装置101Bは、このパラメータを所定値に設定することにより、”Too Early HO”を無線基地局装置101Aに通知する。 When the radio base station apparatus 101B determines that it is “Too Early HO” to the cell CB (step S99), it transmits a handover report to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S100). This handover report includes, for example, a parameter “Handover Report Type”. The radio base station apparatus 101B notifies the radio base station apparatus 101A of “Too Early HO” by setting this parameter to a predetermined value.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bから当該ハンドオーバレポートを受信して、セルCBへの”Too Early HO”が発生したことを認識し(ステップS101)、”Too Early HO”の発生が抑制されるように、ハンドオーバ動作の最適化処理を実行する(ステップS102)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover report from the radio base station apparatus 101B, recognizes that “Too Early HO” has occurred to the cell CB (step S101), and “Too Early HO”. The optimization process of the handover operation is executed so as to suppress the occurrence of (step S102).
 図8は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(HO to Wrong Cell)が生じた状況の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of a situation where an inappropriate handover operation (HO to Wong Cell) occurs in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図8を参照して、無線通信システムは、図1に示す無線通信システムと比べて、さらに、無線基地局装置101Cを備える。無線基地局装置101Cは、たとえばフェムト基地局、ピコ基地局またはマクロ基地局である。 Referring to FIG. 8, the wireless communication system further includes a wireless base station device 101 </ b> C as compared with the wireless communication system illustrated in FIG. 1. Radio base station apparatus 101C is, for example, a femto base station, a pico base station, or a macro base station.
 無線基地局装置101Cは、セルCCを形成し、セルCC内に存在する無線端末装置202と無線信号を送受信することにより、当該無線端末装置202と通信することが可能である。 The radio base station apparatus 101C can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CC and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CC.
 図9は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおける、不適切なハンドオーバ動作(HO to Wrong Cell)およびその検出処理のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。 FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of an inappropriate handover operation (HO to Wong Cell) and its detection processing sequence in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 ”HO to Wrong Cell”は、たとえば以下のような場合をいう。すなわち、無線端末装置202がハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置との接続に成功した後、短時間でRLFが発生し、かつハンドオーバ元およびハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置以外の無線基地局装置に対する、無線端末装置202の接続再確立が生じた場合である。 “HO to Wong Cell” refers to the following cases, for example. That is, after the wireless terminal device 202 has successfully connected to the handover destination wireless base station device, RLF occurs in a short time, and wireless communication is performed with respect to wireless base station devices other than the handover source and handover destination wireless base station devices. This is a case where the connection re-establishment of the terminal device 202 occurs.
 ”HO to Wrong Cell”の検出方法は、たとえば以下のようになる。すなわち、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置101Bは、RLFレポートをハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置101A以外の無線基地局装置101Cから受信した場合において、当該受信タイミングからさかのぼって所定時間内に、当該無線端末装置202の自己へのハンドオーバの完了による端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信していたときに、”HO to Wrong Cell”である旨を無線基地局装置101Aに通知する。 For example, the detection method of “HO to Wong Cell” is as follows. That is, when the radio base station apparatus 101B that is the handover destination receives the RLF report from the radio base station apparatus 101C other than the radio base station apparatus 101A that is the handover source, the radio terminal is traced back from the reception timing within a predetermined time. When the terminal information release instruction due to the completion of the handover of the apparatus 202 to itself is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A, the radio base station apparatus 101A is notified that “HO to Wong Cell”.
 ここで、無線基地局装置101Bは、上記所定時間を計測するために、タイマを用いる。これにより、無線基地局装置101Bは、RLFレポートを受信した場合において、自己の”Too Late HO”によってRLFが発生したのか、無線基地局装置101Aの”HO to Wrong Cell”によってRLFが発生したのかを判別することができる。 Here, the radio base station apparatus 101B uses a timer to measure the predetermined time. Thereby, when the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF report, whether the RLF has occurred due to its own “Too Late HO” or whether the RLF has occurred due to the “HO to Wong Cell” of the radio base station apparatus 101A. Can be determined.
 ここでは、図8に示すように、無線端末装置202が、セルCA内に位置し、無線基地局装置101Aと通信中である状態から、仮想セルCBVおよびセルCAの重複領域へ移動した場合(ステップS110)を想定する。仮想セルCBVは、無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバを促進するために、パラメータであるオフセットOSTに従ってセルCBから拡大された仮想的なセルである。この場合、オフセットOSTは、無線基地局装置101Aの保持するパラメータである。 Here, as shown in FIG. 8, when the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA and is communicating with the wireless base station device 101A, the wireless terminal device 202 moves to the overlapping area of the virtual cell CBV and the cell CA ( Assume step S110). The virtual cell CBV is a virtual cell expanded from the cell CB in accordance with the offset OST that is a parameter in order to promote handover from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio base station apparatus 101B. In this case, the offset OST is a parameter held by the radio base station apparatus 101A.
 図8および図9を参照して、まず、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置から送信される無線信号の受信電力を測定し、測定した受信電力の測定結果を示す測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS111)。 Referring to FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, first, radio terminal apparatus 202 measures the received power of a radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus, and sends a measurement result notification indicating the measured result of the received power to radio base station. Transmit to the station apparatus 101A (step S111).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバを行なうべきか否かを判断する。無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバを行なうべきであると判断すると、周辺セル情報を参照してたとえば無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先として決定する(ステップS112)。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A determines whether or not the wireless terminal device 202 should be handed over. When it is determined that the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be handed over, the radio base station apparatus 101A refers to the neighboring cell information and determines, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination (step S112).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を、基地局間インタフェースであるX2インタフェース経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS113)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface that is an interface between base stations (step S113).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aへ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答をX2インタフェース経由で送信する(ステップS114)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101A via the X2 interface (step S114).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信して、無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)を送信する(ステップS115)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S115).
 次に、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、RRCコネクション再構成完了通知(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete)を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS116)。 Next, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B. (Step S116).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS117)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S117).
 また、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202のセルCBにおける滞在時間を計測するために、タイマをスタートさせる(ステップS118)。 Further, the radio base station apparatus 101B starts a timer in order to measure the staying time in the cell CB of the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S118).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bから端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報(UE Context)を解放する(ステップS119)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and releases information (UE Context) on the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S119).
 以上により、無線端末装置202の無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバが完了する(ステップS120)。 As described above, the handover of the wireless terminal device 202 from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B is completed (step S120).
 ここで、無線端末装置202が、測定結果通知(Measurement Report)を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する前に、セルCBの圏外、かつ仮想セルCBVおよびセルCCの圏内に移動する(ステップS121)。 Here, before transmitting the measurement result notification (Measurement Report) to the radio base station apparatus 101B, the radio terminal apparatus 202 moves out of the cell CB and into the virtual cell CBV and the cell CC (step S121).
 そうすると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101C(Other eNB)から送信される無線信号の干渉が大きく、無線基地局装置101Bと通信できなくなることから、RLFが発生してしまう(ステップS123)。 Then, the radio terminal device 202 has a large interference of radio signals transmitted from the radio base station device 101C (Other eNB), and cannot communicate with the radio base station device 101B, so that RLF occurs (step S123). .
 次に、無線端末装置202は、RLF発生を検出すると、無線信号の受信電力の測定等によって周辺の無線基地局装置の探索を行なう。この場合、無線基地局装置101Cからの無線信号の受信電力が最大となることから、無線端末装置202は、探索した無線基地局装置101Cに再接続するために、RRCコネクション再確立要求(RRC Connection Reestablishment Request)を無線基地局装置101Cへ送信する(ステップS124)。 Next, when the radio terminal apparatus 202 detects the occurrence of RLF, the radio terminal apparatus 202 searches for nearby radio base station apparatuses by measuring the reception power of radio signals or the like. In this case, since the reception power of the radio signal from the radio base station apparatus 101C is maximized, the radio terminal apparatus 202 receives an RRC connection re-establishment request (RRC Connection) in order to reconnect to the searched radio base station apparatus 101C. Reestablishment Request) is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S124).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、当該無線端末装置202に関する情報(UE Context)を保持していないことから、当該無線端末装置202からのRRCコネクション再確立要求を受け入れることができず(ステップS125)、RRCコネクション再確立拒絶を当該無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS126)。 Next, since the wireless base station device 101C does not hold information (UE Context) regarding the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101C cannot accept the RRC connection re-establishment request from the wireless terminal device 202 (step S125). ), RRC connection re-establishment rejection is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S126).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、RRCコネクション再確立拒絶を無線基地局装置101Cから受信して、無線基地局装置101Cと通常の接続手順をスタートさせる(ステップS127)。 Next, the radio terminal apparatus 202 receives an RRC connection re-establishment rejection from the radio base station apparatus 101C, and starts a normal connection procedure with the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S127).
 すなわち、まず、無線端末装置202は、RRCコネクション要求(RRC Connection Request)を無線基地局装置101Cへ送信する(ステップS128)。 That is, first, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection request to the wireless base station device 101C (step S128).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション要求を受信して、RRCコネクション情報(RRC Connection Setup)を無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS129)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101C receives the RRC connection request from the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits RRC connection information (RRC Connection Setup) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S129).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101CからRRCコネクション情報を受信して、RRCコネクション完了通知(RRC Connection Setup Complete)を送信する(ステップS130)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 receives RRC connection information from the wireless base station device 101C, and transmits an RRC connection completion notification (RRC Connection Setup Complete) (step S130).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション完了通知を受信して、セキュリティ情報(Security Mode Command)を無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS131)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101C receives the RRC connection completion notification from the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits security information (Security Mode Command) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S131).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Cからセキュリティ情報を受信して、セキュリティ完了通知(Security Mode Complete)を無線基地局装置101Cへ送信する(ステップS132)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 receives security information from the wireless base station device 101C, and transmits a security completion notification (Security Mode Complete) to the wireless base station device 101C (step S132).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)を送信する(ステップS133)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101C transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S133).
 次に、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101C間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101CへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete)を送信する(ステップS134)。 Next, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101C, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101C. (Step S134).
 ここで、RRCコネクション完了通知およびRRCコネクション再構成完了通知は、たとえば”rlf-InfoAvailable”というパラメータを含む。無線端末装置202は、このパラメータを設定してRRCコネクション完了通知およびRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を送信する。これにより、無線基地局装置101Cは、当該無線端末装置202についてRLFの発生があったことを認識する。無線基地局装置101Cは、RLFの詳細な情報を取得するため、端末情報要求(UE Information Request)を無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS135)。 Here, the RRC connection completion notification and the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification include, for example, a parameter “rlf-InfoAvailable”. The wireless terminal device 202 sets this parameter and transmits an RRC connection completion notification and an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification. Thereby, the radio base station apparatus 101C recognizes that an RLF has occurred in the radio terminal apparatus 202. The wireless base station device 101C transmits a terminal information request (UE Information Request) to the wireless terminal device 202 in order to acquire detailed information of the RLF (step S135).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Cから端末情報要求を受信して、RLFレポートを含む端末情報応答(UE Information Response)を無線基地局装置101Cへ送信する(ステップS136)。RLFレポートは、RLFの発生した無線基地局装置のPCI、RRCコネクション再確立の発生した無線基地局装置のPCIおよびECGIならびに自己の無線端末装置202のC-RNTIを含む。ここでは、RLF発生のPCIは無線基地局装置101BのIDであり、RRCコネクション再確立発生のPCIおよびECGIは無線基地局装置101CのIDであり、C-RNTIは無線基地局装置101Bが付与したIDである。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 receives a terminal information request from the wireless base station device 101C, and transmits a terminal information response (UE Information Response) including an RLF report to the wireless base station device 101C (step S136). The RLF report includes the PCI of the radio base station apparatus in which the RLF has occurred, the PCI and ECGI of the radio base station apparatus in which the RRC connection re-establishment has occurred, and the C-RNTI of the own radio terminal apparatus 202. Here, the PCI of the RLF occurrence is the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101B, the PCI and ECGI of the RRC connection re-establishment are the ID of the radio base station apparatus 101C, and the C-RNTI is assigned by the radio base station apparatus 101B ID.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、無線端末装置202から受信したRLFレポートのPCIを参照することにより、無線基地局装置101BにおいてRLFが発生しことを認識し、セルCCへの”Too Late HO”が発生したと判断する(ステップS137)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101C recognizes that RLF has occurred in the wireless base station device 101B by referring to the PCI of the RLF report received from the wireless terminal device 202, and performs “Too Late HO” to the cell CC. "Is generated (step S137).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、”Too Late HO”であることを通知するために、当該RLFレポートの内容を含むRLF通知(RLF INDICATION)をX2インタフェース経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS138)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101C transmits an RLF notification (RLF INDICATION) including the content of the RLF report to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the X2 interface in order to notify that it is “Too Late HO”. (Step S138).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101CからRLF通知を受信すると、スタートさせておいたタイマを確認し、タイマが動作している場合、すなわちタイマをスタートさせてから所定時間経過していない場合には、セルCCへの”Too Late HO”ではないと判断し、さらに、無線基地局装置101A以外の無線基地局装置101CからRLF通知を受信したことから、セルCBへの”Too Early HO”ではなく、セルCBへの”HO to Wrong Cell”であると判断する。なお、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101CからRLF通知を受信したときにタイマが動作していない場合、すなわちタイマをスタートさせてから上記所定時間経過している場合には、セルCCへの”Too Late HO”であると判断する。 Next, when the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF notification from the radio base station apparatus 101C, the radio base station apparatus 101B checks the timer that has been started. If the timer is operating, that is, a predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was started. If not, it is determined that it is not “Too Late HO” to the cell CC, and further, the RLF notification is received from the radio base station device 101C other than the radio base station device 101A. It is determined that it is not “Too Early HO” but “HO to Wron Cell” to the cell CB. When the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RLF notification from the radio base station apparatus 101C and the timer is not operating, that is, when the predetermined time has elapsed since the timer was started, the cell CC It is determined that it is “Too Late HO”.
 無線基地局装置101Bは、セルCBへの”HO to Wrong Cell”であると判断すると(ステップS139)、ハンドオーバレポートを無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS140)。このハンドオーバレポートは、たとえば”Handover Report Type”というパラメータを含む。無線基地局装置101Bは、このパラメータを所定値に設定することにより、”HO to Wrong Cell”を無線基地局装置101Aに通知する。 If the radio base station apparatus 101B determines that it is “HO to Wong Cell” to the cell CB (step S139), it transmits a handover report to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S140). This handover report includes, for example, a parameter “Handover Report Type”. The radio base station apparatus 101B notifies the radio base station apparatus 101A of “HO to Wong Cell” by setting this parameter to a predetermined value.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bから当該ハンドオーバレポートを受信して、セルCBへの”HO to Wrong Cell”が発生したことを認識し(ステップS141)、”HO to Wrong Cell”の発生が抑制されるように、ハンドオーバ動作の最適化処理を実行する(ステップS142)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover report from the radio base station apparatus 101B, recognizes that “HO to Wong Cell” has occurred to the cell CB (step S141), and performs “HO to Wong”. The optimization process of the handover operation is executed so that the occurrence of “Cell” is suppressed (step S142).
 以上のような”Too Late HO”、”Too Early HO”および”HO to Wrong Cell”の他に、不適切なハンドオーバ動作として”Ping Pong HO”がある。 In addition to “Too Late HO”, “Too Early HO”, and “HO to Wong Cell” as described above, there is “Ping Pong HO” as an inappropriate handover operation.
 これは、ある無線端末装置について、2つの無線基地局装置が互いに他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバを判断する場合である。この”Ping Pong HO”が発生すると、無線端末装置および無線基地局装置間の接続が切断されることはないが、当該無線端末装置についてはハンドオーバ動作のための処理が繰り返され、通話およびデータ通信を行なうことができなくなり、また、上位ネットワーク側の負荷が増大してしまう。 This is a case where two radio base station apparatuses determine a handover to another radio base station apparatus for a certain radio terminal apparatus. When this “Ping Pong HO” occurs, the connection between the wireless terminal device and the wireless base station device will not be cut off, but the processing for the handover operation is repeated for the wireless terminal device, and communication and data communication are performed. Cannot be performed, and the load on the upper network side increases.
 [ハンドオーバ動作の制御パラメータ]
 図10は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおける、無線端末装置の受信品質のシミュレーション結果を示す図である。
[Control parameters for handover operation]
FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a reception quality simulation result of the wireless terminal device in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図10は、無線端末装置202が、時速30kmでピコ基地局付近を通過し、マクロ基地局付近を通過するまでの100秒間における無線端末装置202のRSSI(Received Signal Strength Indication)を示している。 FIG. 10 shows an RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication) of the wireless terminal device 202 for 100 seconds until the wireless terminal device 202 passes near the pico base station at a speed of 30 km per hour and passes near the macro base station.
 図10において、グラフG1およびG3は、マクロ基地局から送信される無線信号のRSSIを示し、グラフG2およびG4は、ピコ基地局から送信される無線信号のRSSIを示している。また、グラフG1およびG2は、シャドウィング、すなわち無線端末装置202および他の物体間の相対的な位置変化に起因する、当該無線端末装置202における無線信号の受信電力の時間的な変化を考慮したシミュレーション結果であり、グラフG3およびG4は、シャドウィングを考慮しないシミュレーション結果である。 10, graphs G1 and G3 indicate RSSIs of radio signals transmitted from the macro base station, and graphs G2 and G4 indicate RSSIs of radio signals transmitted from the pico base station. The graphs G1 and G2 take into account the temporal change in the received power of the radio signal in the radio terminal device 202 caused by shadowing, that is, the relative position change between the radio terminal device 202 and other objects. Simulation results, and graphs G3 and G4 are simulation results that do not consider shadowing.
 図10を参照して、無線端末装置202のピコ基地局からマクロ基地局へのハンドオーバの理想位置は、グラフの交点付近すなわち移動時間が約17秒となる位置である。しかしながら、実際には、無線端末装置202の未来の通信環境を無線通信システムにおいて把握することは困難であるため、各種測定結果等に基づいてハンドオーバ動作のタイミングを調整することにより、ハンドオーバ動作の最適化を図ることが重要である。 Referring to FIG. 10, the ideal position for handover of the wireless terminal device 202 from the pico base station to the macro base station is the vicinity of the intersection of the graph, that is, the position where the movement time is about 17 seconds. However, in practice, it is difficult to grasp the future communication environment of the wireless terminal device 202 in the wireless communication system. Therefore, it is possible to optimize the handover operation by adjusting the timing of the handover operation based on various measurement results. It is important to make it easier.
 また、移動時間が15秒から20秒の期間では、各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の強弱が入り組んでいるため、たとえば”Too Early HO”または”Ping Pong HO”が発生しやすくなる。また、移動時間が20秒となるタイミング付近では、ピコ基地局からの無線信号の受信電力が急に小さくなり、マクロ基地局からの無線信号の受信電力が急に大きくなり、SINR(Signal to Interference-plus-Noise Ratio)が急激に悪化するため、”Too Late HO”が発生しやすくなる。 In addition, since the radio signal from each radio base station apparatus is intricate in the travel time of 15 to 20 seconds, for example, “Too Early HO” or “Ping Pong HO” is likely to occur. Also, near the timing when the travel time is 20 seconds, the reception power of the radio signal from the pico base station suddenly decreases, the reception power of the radio signal from the macro base station suddenly increases, and SINR (Signal to Interference) Since “-plus-Noise Ratio” deteriorates rapidly, “Too Late HO” is likely to occur.
 ここで、3GPPで規定されたハンドオーバの最適化を図るMRO(Mobility Robustness Optimization)の評価関数をY=MRO(X)とすると、Yは、たとえば”Too Late HO”の発生頻度、”Too Early HO”の発生頻度、”HO to Wrong Cell”の発生頻度、”Ping Pong HO”等の不必要なハンドオーバの発生頻度、またはRRCコネクション情報を送信した直後すなわち無線端末装置202が無線基地局装置に接続された直後のハンドオーバの発生頻度である。 Here, if the evaluation function of MRO (Mobility Robustness Optimization) that optimizes handover specified in 3GPP is Y = MRO (X), Y is, for example, the occurrence frequency of “Too Late HO”, “Too Early HO” “Occurrence frequency”, “HO to Wong Cell” occurrence frequency, “Ping Pong HO” unnecessary handover occurrence frequency, etc. Immediately after transmitting the RRC connection information, that is, the radio terminal device 202 connects to the radio base station device This is the frequency of occurrence of handover immediately after being performed.
 また、たとえば、Xは、電力測定処理(Measurement)用のパラメータであり、ヒステリシスHS:0dB~+15dB、TTT(Time to Trigger):0ms~5120ms、またはオフセットOST(Cell Individual Offset):-24dB~+24dBである。あるいは、Xは、セル再選択処理用のパラメータである。 In addition, for example, X is a parameter for power measurement processing (Measurement), hysteresis HS: 0 dB to +15 dB, TTT (Time to Trigger): 0 ms to 5120 ms, or offset OST (Cell Individual Offset): −24 dB to +24 dB It is. Alternatively, X is a parameter for cell reselection processing.
 たとえば、ヒステリシスHSおよびTTTは後述するイベントごとに設定可能であり、オフセットOSTはサービング基地局の形成するサービングセル、および周辺セルごとに設定可能である。 For example, hysteresis HS and TTT can be set for each event described later, and offset OST can be set for each serving cell formed by the serving base station and each neighboring cell.
 ここでは、無線基地局装置は、無線端末装置202の上り送信負荷を軽減するために、測定結果通知(Measurement Report)を受信するとハンドオーバの判断を行なうものとする。すなわち、測定結果通知の送信タイミングとハンドオーバのタイミングとが対応するものとする。 Here, it is assumed that, in order to reduce the uplink transmission load of the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device determines handover when receiving a measurement result notification (Measurement Report). That is, the transmission timing of the measurement result notification corresponds to the handover timing.
 以下、測定結果通知を送信する各種イベントと電力測定処理のパラメータとの関係について説明する。 Hereinafter, the relationship between various events for transmitting the measurement result notification and the parameters of the power measurement process will be described.
 図11は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA1を示す図である。図11において、横軸は時間であり、縦軸は無線端末装置202における無線信号の受信電力またはSINRであり、SVCはサービングセルの受信電力またはSINRすなわちサービング基地局が送信する無線信号の受信電力またはSINRである。 FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an event A1 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 11, the horizontal axis is time, the vertical axis is the reception power or SINR of the radio signal in the wireless terminal device 202, and the SVC is the reception power or SINR of the serving cell, that is, the reception power of the radio signal transmitted by the serving base station or SINR.
 図11を参照して、イベントA1では、閾値Thに対して正負の方向にヒステリシスHSが設定される。 Referring to FIG. 11, at event A1, hysteresis HS is set in a positive or negative direction with respect to threshold value Th.
 無線端末装置202は、サービングセルの受信電力またはSINRが(Th+HS)よりも大きくなると、レポートオン状態へ遷移する(タイミングT1)。 When the received power or SINR of the serving cell becomes larger than (Th + HS), the wireless terminal device 202 transitions to the report on state (timing T1).
 そして、無線端末装置202は、受信電力またはSINRが(Th-HS)よりも大きい、という条件が満たされた状態でタイミングT1からTTT経過すると、測定結果通知を送信する(タイミングT2)。 Then, when TTT elapses from timing T1 in a state where the condition that the received power or SINR is greater than (Th-HS) is satisfied, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T2).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、当該条件が満たされた状態でタイミングT2からTTT経過すると、測定結果通知を送信する(タイミングT3)。 Next, when TTT elapses from timing T2 in a state where the condition is satisfied, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T3).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、タイミングT3からTTT経過するまでに当該条件が満たされなくなると、測定結果通知を送信せず、レポートオフ状態へ遷移する(タイミングT4)。 Next, when the condition is not satisfied before TTT elapses from timing T3, the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T4).
 ここで、無線端末装置202は、レポートオン状態およびレポートオフ状態間の遷移とは無関係に、たとえば周期的に電力測定処理を行なっており、直近の測定結果を測定結果通知として送信する。また、たとえば、無線端末装置202は、受信電力およびSINRの各々について独立にレポートオン状態およびレポートオフ状態間の遷移を行なう。すなわち、無線端末装置202は、受信電力およびSINRの一方について条件を満たせば、測定結果通知を送信する。 Here, the wireless terminal device 202 performs a power measurement process periodically, for example, regardless of the transition between the report-on state and the report-off state, and transmits the latest measurement result as a measurement result notification. Further, for example, radio terminal apparatus 202 performs transition between the report-on state and the report-off state independently for each of received power and SINR. That is, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification if a condition is satisfied for one of the received power and SINR.
 図12は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA2を示す図である。図の見方は図11と同様である。 FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an event A2 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
 図12を参照して、イベントA2では、閾値Thに対して正負の方向にヒステリシスHSが設定される。 Referring to FIG. 12, at event A2, hysteresis HS is set in a positive or negative direction with respect to threshold value Th.
 無線端末装置202は、サービングセルの受信電力またはSINRが(Th-HS)よりも小さくなると、レポートオン状態へ遷移する(タイミングT11)。 When the received power or SINR of the serving cell becomes smaller than (Th-HS), the wireless terminal device 202 transitions to the report on state (timing T11).
 そして、無線端末装置202は、受信電力またはSINRが(Th+HS)よりも小さい、という条件が満たされた状態でタイミングT11からTTT経過すると、測定結果通知を送信する(タイミングT12)。 The wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification when TTT elapses from timing T11 in a state where the condition that the received power or SINR is smaller than (Th + HS) is satisfied (timing T12).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、当該条件が満たされた状態でタイミングT12からTTT経過すると、測定結果通知を送信する(タイミングT13)。 Next, when TTT has elapsed from timing T12 in a state where the condition is satisfied, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T13).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、タイミングT13からTTT経過するまでに当該条件が満たされなくなると、測定結果通知を送信せず、レポートオフ状態へ遷移する(タイミングT14)。 Next, when the condition is not satisfied before TTT elapses from timing T13, the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T14).
 図13は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA3を示す図である。図13において、横軸は時間であり、縦軸は無線端末装置202における無線信号の受信電力またはSINRであり、SVCはサービングセルの受信電力またはSINRであり、NBCは周辺セルの受信電力またはSINRすなわち周辺基地局が送信する無線信号の受信電力またはSINRである。 FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an event A3 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 13, the horizontal axis is time, the vertical axis is the reception power or SINR of the radio signal in the wireless terminal device 202, SVC is the reception power or SINR of the serving cell, and NBC is the reception power or SINR of the neighboring cell, that is, This is the reception power or SINR of a radio signal transmitted by a neighboring base station.
 図13を参照して、イベントA3では、サービングセルの受信電力またはSINRに対してオフセットOST1が正方向に設定されており、さらに、正負の方向にヒステリシスHSが設定される。また、周辺セルの受信電力またはSINRに対してオフセットOST2が正方向に設定される。 Referring to FIG. 13, at event A3, offset OST1 is set in the positive direction with respect to the reception power or SINR of the serving cell, and hysteresis HS is set in the positive and negative directions. Also, the offset OST2 is set in the positive direction with respect to the reception power or SINR of the neighboring cells.
 無線端末装置202は、{(周辺セルの受信電力またはSINR)+OST2}が{(サービングセルの受信電力またはSINR)+OST1+HS}よりも大きくなると、レポートオン状態へ遷移する(タイミングT21)。 The wireless terminal device 202 transitions to the report-on state when {(reception power or SINR of neighboring cells) + OST2} becomes larger than {(reception power or SINR of the serving cell) + OST1 + HS} (timing T21).
 そして、無線端末装置202は、{(周辺セルの受信電力またはSINR)+OST2}が{(サービングセルの受信電力またはSINR)+OST1-HS}よりも大きい、という条件が満たされた状態でタイミングT21からTTT経過すると、測定結果通知を送信する(タイミングT22)。 Then, the wireless terminal device 202 performs the processing from the timing T21 to the TTT in a state where {(neighboring cell received power or SINR) + OST2} is larger than {(serving cell received power or SINR) + OST1-HS}. When the time has elapsed, a measurement result notification is transmitted (timing T22).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、当該条件が満たされた状態でタイミングT22からTTT経過すると、測定結果通知を送信する(タイミングT23)。 Next, when TTT has elapsed from timing T22 in a state where the condition is satisfied, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T23).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、タイミングT23からTTT経過するまでに当該条件が満たされなくなると、測定結果通知を送信せず、レポートオフ状態へ遷移する(タイミングT24)。 Next, when the condition is not satisfied before TTT elapses from timing T23, the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T24).
 図14は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA4を示す図である。図の見方は図13と同様である。 FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an event A4 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
 図14を参照して、イベントA4では、周辺セルの受信電力またはSINRに対してオフセットOSTが正方向に設定されており、閾値Thに対して正負の方向にヒステリシスHSが設定される。 Referring to FIG. 14, at event A4, the offset OST is set in the positive direction with respect to the reception power or SINR of the neighboring cells, and the hysteresis HS is set in the positive and negative directions with respect to the threshold Th.
 無線端末装置202は、{(周辺セルの受信電力またはSINR)+OST}が(Th+HS)よりも大きくなると、レポートオン状態へ遷移する(タイミングT31)。 Wireless terminal apparatus 202 transitions to a report-on state when {(reception power or SINR of neighboring cells) + OST} is greater than (Th + HS) (timing T31).
 そして、無線端末装置202は、{(周辺セルの受信電力またはSINR)+OST}が(Th-HS)よりも大きい、という条件が満たされた状態でタイミングT31からTTT経過すると、測定結果通知を送信する(タイミングT32)。 Then, wireless terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification when TTT elapses from timing T31 while the condition that {(reception power or SINR of the neighboring cell) + OST} is larger than (Th−HS) is satisfied. (Timing T32).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、当該条件が満たされた状態でタイミングT32からTTT経過すると、測定結果通知を送信する(タイミングT33)。 Next, when TTT has elapsed from timing T32 in a state where the condition is satisfied, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification (timing T33).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、タイミングT33からTTT経過するまでに当該条件が満たされなくなると、測定結果通知を送信せず、レポートオフ状態へ遷移する(タイミングT34)。 Next, when the condition is not satisfied before TTT elapses from timing T33, the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T34).
 図15は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置が測定結果通知を送信するイベントA5を示す図である。図の見方は図13と同様である。 FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an event A5 in which the wireless terminal device transmits a measurement result notification in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
 図15を参照して、イベントA5では、周辺セルの受信電力またはSINRに対してオフセットOSTが正方向に設定されており、閾値Th1に対して正負の方向にヒステリシスHS1が設定されており、閾値Th2に対して正負の方向にヒステリシスHS2が設定される。 Referring to FIG. 15, at event A5, the offset OST is set in the positive direction with respect to the reception power or SINR of the neighboring cell, and the hysteresis HS1 is set in the positive and negative direction with respect to the threshold Th1. Hysteresis HS2 is set in the positive and negative directions with respect to Th2.
 無線端末装置202は、サービングセルの受信電力またはSINRが(Th1-HS1)よりも小さくなり、かつ{(周辺セルの受信電力またはSINR)+OST}が(Th2+HS2)よりも大きくなると、レポートオン状態へ遷移する(タイミングT41)。 When the received power or SINR of the serving cell becomes smaller than (Th1-HS1) and {(reception power or SINR of neighboring cells) + OST} becomes larger than (Th2 + HS2), the wireless terminal device 202 transitions to the report on state. (Timing T41).
 そして、無線端末装置202は、サービングセルの受信電力またはSINRが(Th1+HS1)よりも小さく、かつ{(周辺セルの受信電力またはSINR)+OST}が(Th2-HS2)よりも大きい、という条件が満たされた状態でタイミングT41からTTT経過すると、測定結果通知を送信する(タイミングT42)。 Radio terminal 202 satisfies the condition that the reception power or SINR of the serving cell is smaller than (Th1 + HS1) and {(reception power or SINR of the neighboring cell) + OST} is larger than (Th2-HS2). When TTT elapses from timing T41 in a state where it is in a state, a measurement result notification is transmitted (timing T42).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、タイミングT42からTTT経過するまでに当該条件が満たされなくなると、測定結果通知を送信せず、レポートオフ状態へ遷移する(タイミングT43)。 Next, when the condition is not satisfied before TTT elapses from timing T42, the wireless terminal device 202 does not transmit a measurement result notification and transitions to a report off state (timing T43).
 以上のように、イベントA1~A5で説明したパラメータ、すなわちヒステリシスHS、TTTおよびオフセットOSTを調整すれば、無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作のタイミングを制御することが可能である。 As described above, the timing of the handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202 can be controlled by adjusting the parameters described in the events A1 to A5, that is, the hysteresis HS, TTT, and the offset OST.
 図16は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ヒステリシスHSの調整によるハンドオーバ動作のタイミング制御を示す図である。図16は、イベントA3の場合を示す。 FIG. 16 is a diagram showing handover operation timing control by adjusting the hysteresis HS in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 16 shows the case of event A3.
 図16を参照して、ヒステリシスHSをゼロに設定した場合には、タイミングT51においてレポ-トオン状態へ遷移し、タイミングT53において測定結果通知が送信され、タイミングT55においてレポートオフ状態へ遷移する。 Referring to FIG. 16, when hysteresis HS is set to zero, a transition is made to the report on state at timing T51, a measurement result notification is transmitted at timing T53, and a transition to the report off state is made at timing T55.
 これに対して、ヒステリシスHSをゼロより大きく設定した場合には、タイミングT51より後のタイミングT52においてレポ-トオン状態へ遷移し、タイミングT53より後のタイミングT54において測定結果通知が送信され、タイミングT55より後のタイミングT56においてレポートオフ状態へ遷移する。 On the other hand, when the hysteresis HS is set larger than zero, the state transits to the report-on state at timing T52 after timing T51, the measurement result notification is transmitted at timing T54 after timing T53, and timing T55. At a later timing T56, the state transits to the report off state.
 すなわち、ヒステリシスHSを大きくすると、測定結果通知の送信タイミングすなわちハンドオーバ動作のタイミングを遅くすることができる。 That is, when the hysteresis HS is increased, the transmission timing of the measurement result notification, that is, the timing of the handover operation can be delayed.
 図17は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、TTTの調整によるハンドオーバ動作のタイミング制御を示す図である。図17は、イベントA3の場合を示す。 FIG. 17 is a diagram showing timing control of the handover operation by adjusting the TTT in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 shows the case of event A3.
 図17を参照して、TTTを小さく設定した場合には、タイミングT62において測定結果通知が送信される。 Referring to FIG. 17, when TTT is set to be small, a measurement result notification is transmitted at timing T62.
 これに対して、TTTを大きく設定した場合には、タイミングT61より後のタイミングT63において測定結果通知が送信される。 On the other hand, when TTT is set large, a measurement result notification is transmitted at timing T63 after timing T61.
 すなわち、TTTを大きくすると、測定結果通知の送信タイミングすなわちハンドオーバ動作のタイミングを遅くすることができる。 That is, when the TTT is increased, the transmission timing of the measurement result notification, that is, the timing of the handover operation can be delayed.
 図18は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、オフセットOSTの調整によるハンドオーバ動作のタイミング制御を示す図である。図18は、イベントA3の場合を示す。 FIG. 18 is a diagram showing handover operation timing control by adjusting the offset OST in the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 18 shows the case of event A3.
 図18を参照して、オフセットOSTをゼロに設定した場合には、タイミングT71においてレポ-トオン状態へ遷移し、タイミングT73において測定結果通知が送信され、タイミングT76においてレポートオフ状態へ遷移する。 Referring to FIG. 18, when the offset OST is set to zero, a transition is made to the report on state at timing T71, a measurement result notification is transmitted at timing T73, and a transition to the report off state is made at timing T76.
 これに対して、オフセットOSTをゼロより小さく設定した場合には、タイミングT71より後のタイミングT72においてレポ-トオン状態へ遷移し、タイミングT73より後のタイミングT74において測定結果通知が送信され、タイミングT76より前のタイミングT75においてレポートオフ状態へ遷移する。 On the other hand, when the offset OST is set to be smaller than zero, the state transits to the report on state at timing T72 after timing T71, the measurement result notification is transmitted at timing T74 after timing T73, and timing T76. Transition to the report-off state at an earlier timing T75.
 すなわち、オフセットOSTを小さくすると、測定結果通知の送信タイミングすなわちハンドオーバ動作のタイミングを遅くすることができる。また、レポートオフ状態からレポートオン状態への遷移が遅くなり、かつレポートオン状態からレポートオフ状態への遷移が早くなる。 That is, if the offset OST is reduced, the transmission timing of the measurement result notification, that is, the timing of the handover operation can be delayed. Further, the transition from the report off state to the report on state is delayed, and the transition from the report on state to the report off state is accelerated.
 以上のように、ヒステリシスHSを大きくするか、TTTを大きくするか、あるいはオフセットOSTを小さくすることにより、ハンドオーバ動作のタイミングが遅くなる。すなわち、無線端末装置202がサービング基地局に接続される時間が長くなることから、”Too Early HO”、”HO to Wrong Cell”および”Ping Pong HO”の発生頻度が減り、”Too Late HO”の発生頻度が増えることになる。 As described above, the timing of the handover operation is delayed by increasing the hysteresis HS, increasing the TTT, or decreasing the offset OST. That is, since the time for which the wireless terminal device 202 is connected to the serving base station becomes longer, the occurrence frequency of “Too Early HO”, “HO to Wong Cell” and “Ping Pong HO” is reduced, and “Too Late HO” The frequency of occurrence will increase.
 ここで、ヒステリシスHS、TTTおよびオフセットOSTを調整する効果の違いについて考察する。 Here, the difference in the effect of adjusting the hysteresis HS, TTT and offset OST will be considered.
 いずれのパラメータを調整しても、ハンドオーバのタイミングを調整することができるが、これらの効果は、干渉を含む地形、および無線端末装置の移動速度等によって異なる。 The handover timing can be adjusted by adjusting any of the parameters, but these effects differ depending on the topography including interference, the moving speed of the wireless terminal device, and the like.
 ヒステリシスHSおよびオフセットOSTを調整することは、セルを仮想的に大きくしたり小さくしたりして、ハンドオーバの行なわれる位置を調整することに相当する。たとえば、サービングセルのヒステリシスHSを大きくすることにより、無線信号の受信電力を大きく見せて、他セルへのハンドオーバが行なわれにくくする。また、周辺セルのオフセットOSTを負の値に設定することにより、周辺セルからの無線信号の受信電力を小さく見せて、他セルへのハンドオーバが行なわれにくくする。 Adjusting the hysteresis HS and the offset OST corresponds to adjusting the position where the handover is performed by virtually increasing or decreasing the cell. For example, by increasing the hysteresis HS of the serving cell, the received power of the radio signal is increased and the handover to another cell is difficult to be performed. Also, by setting the offset OST of the neighboring cell to a negative value, the received power of the radio signal from the neighboring cell appears to be small, and handover to another cell is difficult to be performed.
 また、ヒステリシスHSおよびオフセットOSTは、無線端末装置の移動速度による影響を受けにくいパラメータである。 Further, the hysteresis HS and the offset OST are parameters that are not easily influenced by the moving speed of the wireless terminal device.
 ここで、無線基地局装置から無線端末装置202へ送信される測定開始要求(Measurement Configuration)およびRRCコネクション再構成指示(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)には、たとえば、周辺セルごとにオフセットOSTが設定され、イベントA1~A5のうちの少なくとも1つが設定され、設定イベントに対応するヒステリシスHSおよびTTTが設定される。 Here, in the measurement start request (Measurement Configuration) and the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) transmitted from the radio base station apparatus to the radio terminal apparatus 202, for example, an offset OST is set for each neighboring cell, and the event At least one of A1 to A5 is set, and hysteresis HS and TTT corresponding to the set event are set.
 [無線基地局装置]
 図19は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置の構成を示す図である。
[Radio base station equipment]
FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図19を参照して、無線基地局装置101は、アンテナ91と、サーキュレータ92と、無線受信部93と、無線送信部94と、信号処理部95と、制御部98とを備える。信号処理部95は、受信信号処理部96と、送信信号処理部97とを含む。信号処理部95および制御部98は、CPU(Central Processing Unit)またはDSP(Digital Signal Processor)等によって実現される。 Referring to FIG. 19, the radio base station apparatus 101 includes an antenna 91, a circulator 92, a radio reception unit 93, a radio transmission unit 94, a signal processing unit 95, and a control unit 98. The signal processing unit 95 includes a reception signal processing unit 96 and a transmission signal processing unit 97. The signal processing unit 95 and the control unit 98 are realized by a CPU (Central Processing Unit) or a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).
 サーキュレータ92は、アンテナ91において受信された無線端末装置202からの無線信号を無線受信部93へ出力し、また、無線送信部94から受けた無線信号をアンテナ91へ出力する。 The circulator 92 outputs the radio signal from the radio terminal device 202 received by the antenna 91 to the radio reception unit 93 and outputs the radio signal received from the radio transmission unit 94 to the antenna 91.
 無線受信部93は、サーキュレータ92から受けた無線信号をベースバンド信号またはIF(Intermediate Frequency)信号に周波数変換し、この周波数変換した信号をデジタル信号に変換して受信信号処理部96へ出力する。 The radio reception unit 93 converts the frequency of the radio signal received from the circulator 92 into a baseband signal or IF (Intermediate Frequency) signal, converts the frequency-converted signal into a digital signal, and outputs the digital signal to the reception signal processing unit 96.
 受信信号処理部96は、無線受信部93から受けたデジタル信号に対してCDMA(Code Division Multiple Access)方式における逆拡散等の信号処理を行ない、この信号処理後のデジタル信号の一部または全部を所定のフレームフォーマットに変換してコアネットワーク側へ送信する。 The reception signal processing unit 96 performs signal processing such as despreading in the CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) system on the digital signal received from the wireless reception unit 93, and performs part or all of the digital signal after this signal processing. The data is converted into a predetermined frame format and transmitted to the core network side.
 送信信号処理部97は、コアネットワーク側から受信した通信データを所定のフレームフォーマットに変換した通信データまたは自ら生成した通信データに対してOFDM(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex)方式におけるIFFT(Inverse Fast Fourier Transform)等の信号処理を行ない、この信号処理後のデジタル信号を無線送信部94へ出力する。 The transmission signal processing unit 97 uses IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) in the OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex) method for communication data obtained by converting communication data received from the core network side into a predetermined frame format or communication data generated by itself. The digital signal after the signal processing is output to the wireless transmission unit 94.
 無線送信部94は、送信信号処理部97から受けたデジタル信号をアナログ信号に変換し、変換したアナログ信号を無線信号に周波数変換してサーキュレータ92へ出力する。 The wireless transmission unit 94 converts the digital signal received from the transmission signal processing unit 97 into an analog signal, converts the frequency of the converted analog signal into a wireless signal, and outputs the converted signal to the circulator 92.
 制御部98は、無線基地局装置101における各ユニットおよびコアネットワークとの間で各種情報をやり取りする。 The control unit 98 exchanges various types of information with each unit and the core network in the radio base station apparatus 101.
 [ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断]
 次に、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置によるハンドオーバ動作の実行判断について詳細に説明する。
[Determine execution of handover operation]
Next, the execution determination of the handover operation by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail.
 前述のように、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に電力測定処理(Measurement)を利用する。この電力測定処理は、たとえば3GPPでは、レイヤ3スタックのRRCに対応する。 As described above, the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention uses power measurement processing (Measurement) for determining whether to perform a handover operation. This power measurement process corresponds to RRC of the layer 3 stack in 3GPP, for example.
 電力測定処理には、たとえば、周期的電力測定処理(Periodic Measurement)およびイベント起動電力測定処理(Event Triggered Measurement)の2種類がある。イベント起動電力測定処理における測定結果通知の送信は、たとえば前述のイベントA1~A5におけるレポートオン状態への遷移によって開始されるが、他の種類のイベントを利用してもよい。 There are two types of power measurement processing, for example, periodic power measurement processing (Periodic Measurement) and event activation power measurement processing (Event Triggered Measurement). The transmission of the measurement result notification in the event activation power measurement process is started by, for example, the transition to the report-on state in the events A1 to A5 described above, but other types of events may be used.
 たとえば3GPPでは、周期的電力測定処理の報告周期は120ミリ秒~60分で設定可能あり、イベント起動電力測定処理の報告周期は0~5120ミリ秒で設定可能であるが、”TS36.508”および”TS36.523”において推奨値として記載されているように、測定結果の報告周期の最短時間は、イベントA1の256ミリ秒であり、それほど短くない。 For example, in 3GPP, the reporting period of the periodic power measurement process can be set from 120 milliseconds to 60 minutes, and the reporting period of the event activation power measurement process can be set from 0 to 5120 milliseconds, but “TS36.508” And as described as a recommended value in “TS36.523”, the shortest time of the measurement result reporting period is 256 milliseconds of event A1, and is not so short.
 このため、次回の測定結果通知が無線端末装置から無線基地局装置に到着する前に電波環境が劣化し、無線端末装置および無線基地局装置間の無線リンクが切断されてしまう可能性がある。 For this reason, the radio wave environment may deteriorate before the next measurement result notification arrives from the wireless terminal device to the wireless base station device, and the wireless link between the wireless terminal device and the wireless base station device may be disconnected.
 図20は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置が受信電力情報のみを用いてハンドオーバ動作の実行判断を行なうと仮定した場合におけるハンドオーバ動作の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of the handover operation when it is assumed that the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention performs the handover operation using only the received power information.
 図20において、横軸は時間であり、縦軸は電波強度である。SVCはサービングセルの電波強度すなわちサービング基地局が送信する無線信号の無線端末装置202における受信電力であり、NBCは周辺セルの電波強度すなわち周辺基地局が送信する無線信号の無線端末装置202における受信電力である。 In FIG. 20, the horizontal axis represents time, and the vertical axis represents radio wave intensity. SVC is the radio field intensity of the serving cell, that is, the received power of the radio signal transmitted by the serving base station in the radio terminal apparatus 202, and NBC is the radio field intensity of the surrounding cell, that is, the received power of the radio signal transmitted by the peripheral base station in the radio terminal apparatus 202. It is.
 また、図20において、無線基地局装置101は、タイミングT81~T83,T86において、無線端末装置202から受信電力情報すなわち測定結果通知をそれぞれ受信する。 In FIG. 20, the radio base station apparatus 101 receives the received power information, that is, the measurement result notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 at timings T81 to T83 and T86, respectively.
 図20を参照して、サービングセルの電波強度および周辺セルの電波強度が実線で示すように推移する場合には、無線基地局装置101は、周辺セルの電波強度がサービングセルの電波強度よりも大きくなる状態を示す受信電力情報をタイミングT86において取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101は、取得した受信電力情報に基づいて、当該無線端末装置202による周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を実行する。 Referring to FIG. 20, when the radio field intensity of the serving cell and the radio field intensity of the surrounding cell change as indicated by solid lines, radio base station apparatus 101 has the radio field intensity of the peripheral cell larger than the radio field intensity of the serving cell. Received power information indicating the state is acquired at timing T86. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 performs a handover operation to the neighboring base station by the radio terminal apparatus 202 based on the acquired received power information.
 サービングセルの電波強度および周辺セルの電波強度は、このように実線で示すように推移する場合が理想的である。しかしながら、破線で示すように、サービングセルおよび周辺セルの一方または両方における電波環境が急激に劣化し、ハンドオーバ動作が間に合わず、タイミングT86より前のタイミングT85において無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101間の無線リンクが切断されてしまう場合がある。 Ideally, the radio wave intensity of the serving cell and the radio wave intensity of the surrounding cells change as shown by the solid line. However, as indicated by a broken line, the radio wave environment in one or both of the serving cell and the neighboring cell is rapidly deteriorated, the handover operation is not in time, and the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101 are connected at the timing T85 before the timing T86. Wireless link may be disconnected.
 そこで、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、以下のような構成により、上記問題点を解決する。 Therefore, the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention solves the above problem by the following configuration.
 すなわち、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新される情報、たとえば3GPPにおいて、最短で5ミリ秒周期の報告が可能なCQI(Channel Quality Indication)レポートを併用することにより、無線リンクが切断される可能性を低減する。CQIレポートは、レイヤ2スタックのMAC(Medium Access Control)またはPHY(Physical Layer)に対応する。 That is, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, information updated at a cycle shorter than the received power information, for example, 3QPP, CQI (Channel The combined use of a Quality Indication report reduces the possibility of a radio link being disconnected. The CQI report corresponds to MAC (Medium Access Control) or PHY (Physical Layer) of the layer 2 stack.
 CQIレポートは、直接現在の各セルにおける電波状況を通知するものではなく、SINRを用いた以下の式により0~15の16段階で表現される値である。CQI=0の場合、無線端末装置202の受信品質が最も悪く、CQI=15の場合、無線端末装置202の受信品質が最も良い。
CQI=min(max(round((SINR[dB]+8)/1.892),0),15)
The CQI report does not directly notify the current radio wave condition in each cell, but is a value expressed in 16 levels from 0 to 15 by the following formula using SINR. When CQI = 0, the reception quality of the wireless terminal device 202 is the worst, and when CQI = 15, the reception quality of the wireless terminal device 202 is the best.
CQI = min (max (round ((SINR [dB] +8) /1.892), 0), 15)
 図21は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置における制御部の構成を示す図である。 FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a control unit in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図21を参照して、制御部98は、受信電力情報取得部(第1測定情報取得部)11と、受信品質情報取得部(第2測定情報取得部)12と、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13と、条件設定部14とを含む。 Referring to FIG. 21, control unit 98 includes reception power information acquisition unit (first measurement information acquisition unit) 11, reception quality information acquisition unit (second measurement information acquisition unit) 12, handover operation determination unit 13, The condition setting unit 14 is included.
 受信電力情報取得部11は、無線端末装置202における各無線基地局装置101からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報すなわち測定結果通知を取得する。 The reception power information acquisition unit 11 acquires reception power information indicating measurement results of reception power of radio signals from the radio base station apparatuses 101 in the radio terminal apparatus 202, that is, measurement result notification.
 受信品質情報取得部12は、受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、無線端末装置202における自己の無線基地局装置101からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報すなわちCQIレポートを取得する。 The reception quality information acquisition unit 12 is updated at a cycle shorter than the reception power information, and acquires reception quality information, that is, a CQI report indicating the reception quality of the radio signal from the radio base station apparatus 101 in the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得された受信品質情報に基づいて、無線端末装置202による自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置101へのハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する。たとえば、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、上記受信品質情報に加えて、受信電力情報取得部11によって取得された受信電力情報に基づいて、上記ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する。 Based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12, the handover operation determination unit 13 performs a handover operation from the radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus 101 by the radio terminal apparatus 202. Judge whether to do. For example, the handover operation determination unit 13 determines whether or not to execute the handover operation based on the reception power information acquired by the reception power information acquisition unit 11 in addition to the reception quality information.
 条件設定部14は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得された受信品質情報に基づいて、イベント起動電力測定処理の各種条件、すなわち上記受信電力情報の各種作成条件を変更する。 The condition setting unit 14 changes various conditions of the event activation power measurement process, that is, various generation conditions of the reception power information, based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12.
 なお、図21において破線で囲まれた構成要素、すなわち条件設定部14は、本発明において必須の構成要素ではない。無線基地局装置101は、この構成要素を備えなくても、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図るという本発明の目的を達成することが可能である。 Note that the components surrounded by broken lines in FIG. 21, that is, the condition setting unit 14 are not essential components in the present invention. Even if the radio base station apparatus 101 does not include this component, it is possible to achieve the object of the present invention to stabilize communication by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus.
 図22は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置のハンドオーバ動作の実行判断による、ハンドオーバ動作の一例を示す図である。図の見方は図20と同様である。 FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of the handover operation based on the execution determination of the handover operation of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
 図22を参照して、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、CQIレポートによって電力測定処理を補完し、無線リンクが切断される前にハンドオーバ動作の実行を促す。 Referring to FIG. 22, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the power measurement process is complemented by the CQI report, and the execution of the handover operation is prompted before the radio link is disconnected.
 より詳細には、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202に対して、電力測定処理に併せて、電力測定処理よりも報告周期の短いCQIレポートの作成処理を行なわせる。たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、タイミングT83において無線端末装置202に対してCQIレポートの送信を指示し、無線端末装置202から受信したCQIレポートの内容に基づいて電波環境の劣化を検知する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101は、CQIレポートを参照して、サービングセルが周辺セルから受ける干渉により、どの程度無線端末装置202の受信品質が劣化しているかを把握する。 More specifically, the radio base station apparatus 101 causes the radio terminal apparatus 202 to perform a CQI report creation process having a report period shorter than that of the power measurement process in addition to the power measurement process. For example, radio base station apparatus 101 instructs radio terminal apparatus 202 to transmit a CQI report at timing T83, and detects deterioration of the radio wave environment based on the contents of the CQI report received from radio terminal apparatus 202. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101 refers to the CQI report and grasps how much the reception quality of the radio terminal apparatus 202 is deteriorated due to the interference that the serving cell receives from the neighboring cells.
 無線基地局装置101は、CQIレポートの値に基づいて、サービングセルにおける無線端末装置202の通信可否を判断し、これ以上通信を継続することは困難であると判断した場合、当該無線端末装置202による周辺セルへのハンドオーバ動作を実行する。 Based on the value of the CQI report, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether or not the radio terminal apparatus 202 can communicate in the serving cell, and determines that it is difficult to continue communication. A handover operation to a neighboring cell is executed.
 これにより、サービングセルおよび周辺セルの一方または両方における電波環境が破線で示すように急激に劣化しても、図20においてハンドオーバ動作が間に合わず無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101間の無線リンクが切断されてしまったタイミングT85より前のタイミングT84においてハンドオーバ動作を実行することができる。 As a result, even if the radio wave environment in one or both of the serving cell and the neighboring cell rapidly deteriorates as indicated by a broken line, the handover operation is not in time in FIG. 20, and the radio link between the radio terminal apparatus 202 and the radio base station apparatus 101 is The handover operation can be executed at timing T84 before timing T85 at which disconnection has occurred.
 [受信電力情報およびCQIレポートの組み合わせ]
 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置のハンドオーバ動作の実行判断における、受信電力情報およびCQIレポートの組み合わせは、種々考えられる。
[Combination of received power information and CQI report]
Various combinations of the received power information and the CQI report in the execution determination of the handover operation of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention are conceivable.
 まず、一段階の電力測定処理によってハンドオーバ動作の実行を判断する場合について説明する。 First, a case where execution of a handover operation is determined by a one-step power measurement process will be described.
 図23は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置が一段階の電力測定処理によってハンドオーバ動作の実行を判断する場合における、ハンドオーバ動作の一例を示す図である。図の見方は図20と同様である。 FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of the handover operation when the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention determines execution of the handover operation by one-stage power measurement processing. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
 図23において、無線基地局装置101は、タイミングT102,T103,T105において、無線端末装置202から受信電力情報をそれぞれ受信する。 23, the radio base station apparatus 101 receives received power information from the radio terminal apparatus 202 at timings T102, T103, and T105, respectively.
 図23を参照して、無線基地局装置101は、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断を行なうための電力測定処理として、イベント起動電力測定処理を用いる。 Referring to FIG. 23, radio base station apparatus 101 uses an event activation power measurement process as a power measurement process for determining execution of a handover operation.
 すなわち、無線基地局装置101は、イベント起動電力測定処理を無線端末装置202に開始させた段階で、無線端末装置202にCQIレポートの作成処理も開始させ、受信電力情報を監視するとともに、CQIレポートを監視する。 That is, the radio base station apparatus 101 starts the CQI report creation process in the radio terminal apparatus 202 at the stage where the radio terminal apparatus 202 starts the event activation power measurement process, and monitors the received power information and the CQI report. To monitor.
 具体的には、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202に対して、タイミングT101においてイベント起動電力測定処理を開始するように指示するとともに、同じくタイミングT101においてCQIレポートの作成処理を開始するように指示する。そして、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から送信されるCQIレポートを、受信電力情報と併せて監視する。 Specifically, the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start the event activation power measurement process at timing T101, and similarly starts the CQI report creation process at timing T101. To instruct. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202 together with the received power information.
 そして、タイミングT103の後の、周辺セルの電波強度がサービングセルの電波強度よりも大きくなり、周辺セルの電波強度とサービングセルの電波強度との差が大きくなったタイミングT104において、無線基地局装置101は、CQIレポートから電波環境の劣化を検知し、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を実行する。 Then, after the timing T103, the radio base station apparatus 101 at time T104 when the radio field strength of the neighboring cell becomes larger than the radio field strength of the serving cell and the difference between the radio field strength of the neighboring cell and the radio wave strength of the serving cell becomes large. , Detecting the deterioration of the radio wave environment from the CQI report, and executing the handover operation to the neighboring base stations.
 なお、無線基地局装置101は、イベント起動電力測定処理の開始タイミングT101においてCQIレポートの作成処理を開始させる構成に限らず、タイミングT103等、たとえば、ある程度サービングセルの電波環境が劣化してきた段階、もしくは周辺セルの電波環境が改善した段階、またはこれらの両方を満たした段階において、無線端末装置202に対してCQIレポートの作成開始を指示してもよい。 The radio base station apparatus 101 is not limited to the configuration in which the CQI report generation process is started at the start timing T101 of the event activation power measurement process, but the timing T103 and the like, for example, when the radio wave environment of the serving cell has deteriorated to some extent, At the stage where the radio wave environment of the surrounding cells has improved, or both of these conditions are satisfied, the wireless terminal device 202 may be instructed to start creating a CQI report.
 次に、二段階の電力測定処理によってハンドオーバ動作の実行を判断する場合について説明する。 Next, a case where execution of a handover operation is determined by a two-stage power measurement process will be described.
 図24は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置が二段階の電力測定処理によってハンドオーバ動作の実行を判断する場合における、ハンドオーバ動作の一例を示す図である。図の見方は図20と同様である。 FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation when the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention determines execution of a handover operation by a two-stage power measurement process. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
 図24において、無線基地局装置101は、タイミングT112,T115において、無線端末装置202から受信電力情報をそれぞれ受信する。 24, the radio base station apparatus 101 receives received power information from the radio terminal apparatus 202 at timings T112 and T115, respectively.
 図24を参照して、無線基地局装置101は、ある程度サービングセルの電波環境が劣化するまで第一の電力測定処理を用いて周期的な監視を行ない、その後、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断を行なうための第二の電力測定処理に切り替える。 Referring to FIG. 24, radio base station apparatus 101 performs periodic monitoring using the first power measurement process until the radio wave environment of the serving cell deteriorates to some extent, and then performs a handover operation execution determination. Switch to the second power measurement process.
 たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、第一の電力測定処理を周期的電力測定処理とし、第二の電力測定処理をイベント起動電力測定処理とする。このイベント起動電力測定処理に対応するイベントとしては、たとえばイベントA3またはA5が好ましい。 For example, the radio base station apparatus 101 sets the first power measurement process as a periodic power measurement process and the second power measurement process as an event activation power measurement process. As an event corresponding to this event activation power measurement process, for example, event A3 or A5 is preferable.
 ここでは、無線基地局装置101は、周期的電力測定処理の実行中に、併せてCQIレポートを使用する。これにより、急激な電波環境の変化に応じてイベント起動電力測定処理の起動および条件設定を柔軟に実行する。 Here, the radio base station apparatus 101 uses the CQI report together with the execution of the periodic power measurement process. Thereby, the activation of the event activation power measurement process and the condition setting are flexibly executed according to a sudden change in the radio wave environment.
 すなわち、無線基地局装置101は、周期的電力測定処理を無線端末装置202が開始した段階で、無線端末装置202にCQIレポートの作成処理も開始させ、受信電力情報を監視するとともに、CQIレポートを監視する。 That is, when the wireless terminal device 202 starts the periodic power measurement process, the wireless base station device 101 also causes the wireless terminal device 202 to start a CQI report creation process, monitors received power information, and displays a CQI report. Monitor.
 具体的には、無線基地局装置101は、たとえば無線端末装置202との通信コネクションの確立に伴い、無線端末装置202に対して、タイミングT111において周期的測定処理を開始するように指示するとともに、同じくタイミングT111においてCQIレポートの作成処理を開始するように指示する。そして、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から送信されるCQIレポートを、受信電力情報と併せて監視する。 Specifically, the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start the periodic measurement process at timing T111, for example, along with establishment of a communication connection with the radio terminal apparatus 202, Similarly, at timing T111, an instruction is given to start the CQI report creation process. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202 together with the received power information.
 そして、サービングセルの電波強度が徐々に小さくなるとともに周辺セルの電波強度が徐々に大きくなり、両者の差がある程度小さくなったタイミングT113において、無線基地局装置101は、CQIレポートから電波環境の劣化を検知し、無線端末装置202に対してイベント起動電力測定処理による受信電力情報の送信を指示する。なお、無線基地局装置101は、さらに、タイミングT113において受信したCQIレポートに基づいて、イベント起動電力測定処理のレポートオン状態への遷移条件および報告周期等を設定してもよい。無線端末装置202は、タイミングT114においてイベント起動電力測定処理を開始する。 Then, at the timing T113 when the radio wave intensity of the serving cell gradually decreases and the radio wave intensity of the surrounding cells gradually increases and the difference between the two decreases to some extent, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment has deteriorated from the CQI report. Detecting and instructing the wireless terminal device 202 to transmit received power information by event activation power measurement processing. Radio base station apparatus 101 may further set the transition condition to the report-on state of the event activation power measurement process, the report cycle, and the like based on the CQI report received at timing T113. The wireless terminal device 202 starts the event activation power measurement process at timing T114.
 そして、無線基地局装置101は、タイミングT115において無線端末装置202から受信した受信電力情報に基づいて、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を実行する。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 performs a handover operation to the neighboring base stations based on the received power information received from the radio terminal apparatus 202 at timing T115.
 なお、ここでは、第一の電力測定処理を周期的電力測定処理とし、第二の電力測定処理をイベント起動電力測定処理としたが、これに限定するものではなく、別の組み合わせであってもよい。たとえば、第一の電力測定処理および第二の電力測定処理をイベント起動電力測定処理としてもよいし、第一の電力測定処理を周期的電力測定処理とし、第二の電力測定処理をイベント起動電力測定処理としてもよいし、第一の電力測定処理および第二の電力測定処理を周期的電力測定処理としてもよい。また、イベント種別についても同様であり、使用するイベント種別は限定されない。 Here, the first power measurement process is a periodic power measurement process, and the second power measurement process is an event activation power measurement process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other combinations may be used. Good. For example, the first power measurement process and the second power measurement process may be an event activation power measurement process, the first power measurement process is a periodic power measurement process, and the second power measurement process is an event activation power. The measurement process may be performed, and the first power measurement process and the second power measurement process may be a periodic power measurement process. The same applies to the event type, and the event type to be used is not limited.
 また、無線基地局装置101は、三段階以上の電力測定処理によってハンドオーバ動作を実行する構成であってもよい。 Also, the radio base station apparatus 101 may be configured to perform a handover operation by three or more stages of power measurement processing.
 この場合、上記のような二段階の電力測定処理と同様の考え方に基づき、無線基地局装置101は、CQIレポートを利用して、次の段階の電力測定処理の起動および条件設定を柔軟に行なうことが可能である。 In this case, based on the same concept as the above-described two-stage power measurement process, the radio base station apparatus 101 uses the CQI report to flexibly start the next-stage power measurement process and set conditions. It is possible.
 [CQIレポートの利用方法]
 次に、上記のような受信電力情報およびCQIレポートの組み合わせによるハンドオーバ動作の実行判断における、CQIレポートの内容の具体的な利用方法について説明する。
[How to use CQI report]
Next, a specific method of using the contents of the CQI report in the execution determination of the handover operation based on the combination of the received power information and the CQI report as described above will be described.
 図25は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による、CQIレポートの内容に基づくハンドオーバ動作の一例を示す図である。図の見方は図20と同様である。 FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation based on the content of the CQI report by the radio base station device according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
 図25において、無線基地局装置101は、タイミングT122,T123において、無線端末装置202から受信電力情報をそれぞれ受信する。 In FIG. 25, the radio base station apparatus 101 receives the received power information from the radio terminal apparatus 202 at timings T122 and T123, respectively.
 図25を参照して、無線基地局装置101は、タイミングT121においてイベント起動電力測定処理を開始するように、無線端末装置202に対して指示する。そして、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から送信される受信電力情報を監視する。 Referring to FIG. 25, radio base station apparatus 101 instructs radio terminal apparatus 202 to start the event activation power measurement process at timing T121. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors received power information transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 そして、サービングセルの電波強度が徐々に小さくなるとともに周辺セルの電波強度が徐々に大きくなり、両者の差が小さくなったタイミングT123において、無線基地局装置101は、CQIレポートの作成処理を開始するように、無線端末装置202に対して指示する。そして、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から送信されるCQIレポートを、受信電力情報と併せて監視する。 Then, at time T123 when the radio field strength of the serving cell gradually decreases and the radio field strength of the neighboring cells gradually increases and the difference between the two decreases, the radio base station apparatus 101 starts the CQI report creation process. To the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202 together with the received power information.
 そして、タイミングT123の後の、周辺セルの電波強度がサービングセルの電波強度よりも大きくなり、周辺セルの電波強度とサービングセルの電波強度との差が大きくなったタイミングT124において、無線基地局装置101は、CQIレポートから電波環境の劣化を検知し、無線端末装置および無線基地局装置101間の無線リンクが切断される前に、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を実行する。 Then, after timing T123, the radio base station apparatus 101 at time T124 when the radio field strength of the neighboring cell becomes larger than the radio field strength of the serving cell and the difference between the radio field strength of the neighboring cell and the radio field strength of the serving cell becomes large. Then, the deterioration of the radio wave environment is detected from the CQI report, and before the wireless link between the wireless terminal device and the wireless base station device 101 is disconnected, a handover operation to the neighboring base station is executed.
 ここで、たとえば、CQIレポートから電波環境の劣化を検知し、イベント起動電力測定処理のイベント種別および条件等を変更する場合には、RRCコネクション再構成指示を利用して、無線基地局装置101から無線端末装置202に変更を通知する必要がある。 Here, for example, when detecting the deterioration of the radio wave environment from the CQI report and changing the event type and condition of the event activation power measurement process, the radio base station apparatus 101 uses the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction. It is necessary to notify the wireless terminal device 202 of the change.
 このため、無線基地局装置101がCQIレポートを受信した時点で既に電波環境が劣化してきていることから、上記変更が間に合わない可能性がある。 For this reason, since the radio wave environment has already deteriorated when the radio base station apparatus 101 receives the CQI report, the above change may not be in time.
 そこで、無線基地局装置101では、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得された受信品質情報が所定条件を満たす場合には、ハンドオーバ動作を実行すると判断し、無線端末装置202による自己の無線基地局装置から他の所定の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を実行する。 Therefore, in the radio base station apparatus 101, the handover operation determining unit 13 determines to execute the handover operation when the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquiring unit 12 satisfies a predetermined condition, and the radio terminal apparatus 202 The handover operation from its own radio base station apparatus to another predetermined radio base station apparatus is executed.
 たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、3GPPで規定されているブラインドハンドオーバ(Blind Handover)を利用して、タイミングT124において、周辺セルのうち最も条件の良いセルへの強制的なハンドオーバ動作を実行する。 For example, the radio base station apparatus 101 uses the blind handover defined by 3GPP to execute a forced handover operation to a cell having the best condition among neighboring cells at timing T124.
 このブラインドハンドオーバでは、どの周辺セルをハンドオーバ先とするかが重要となる。しかしながら、CQIレポートでは、サービングセル以外の周辺セルについては、周辺セルがサービングセルに与える干渉強度しか分からない。このため、無線基地局装置101は、CQIレポートだけでは、どの周辺セルがハンドオーバ先として最良かを判断することができない。 In this blind handover, it is important which neighboring cell is the handover destination. However, in the CQI report, for neighboring cells other than the serving cell, only the interference strength that the neighboring cell gives to the serving cell is known. For this reason, the radio base station apparatus 101 cannot determine which neighboring cell is the best handover destination only from the CQI report.
 そこで、無線基地局装置101では、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、どの無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を実行するかを、受信電力情報取得部11によって取得された受信電力情報に基づいて決定する。 Therefore, in the radio base station apparatus 101, the handover operation determining unit 13 determines which radio base station apparatus the handover operation is to be executed based on the received power information acquired by the received power information acquiring unit 11.
 すなわち、無線基地局装置101は、電力測定処理において、サービングセルの測定だけでなく、周辺セルの測定も併せて実行するように無線端末装置202に対して指示する。具体的には、使用するイベント種別は、周辺セルの測定も必要となるイベントA3またはA5が好ましい。なお、サービングセルのみの測定でよいイベントA1およびA2を使用してもよいが、この場合、周期的電力測定処理においてサービングセルおよび周辺セルの測定を実行する必要がある。 That is, the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to execute not only the measurement of the serving cell but also the measurement of the neighboring cells in the power measurement process. Specifically, the event type to be used is preferably event A3 or A5 that requires measurement of neighboring cells. Note that events A1 and A2, which may be measured only for the serving cell, may be used, but in this case, it is necessary to perform measurement of the serving cell and the neighboring cells in the periodic power measurement process.
 図26は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置のハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。 FIG. 26 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining whether to perform a handover operation of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図26を参照して、まず、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202に対して、イベント起動電力測定処理の開始を指示する(ステップS161)。 Referring to FIG. 26, first, the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start the event activation power measurement process (step S161).
 次に、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202に対して、受信品質情報すなわちCQIレポートの作成開始を指示する(ステップS162)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start generating reception quality information, that is, a CQI report (step S162).
 次に、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から受信品質情報を取得し、取得した受信品質情報に基づいて、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する(ステップS163)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101 acquires reception quality information from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and determines whether or not to perform a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 based on the acquired reception quality information (step) S163).
 次に、無線基地局装置101は、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すると判断した場合、過去に取得済みの受信電力情報に基づいて、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ先となる無線基地局装置を選択する(ステップS164)。 Next, when the radio base station apparatus 101 determines to execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202, the radio base station that is the handover destination of the radio terminal apparatus 202 based on the received power information acquired in the past A device is selected (step S164).
 次に、CQIレポートの利用方法の他の例として、無線基地局装置101において、条件設定部14は、CQIレポートに基づいて、イベント起動電力測定処理の条件すなわち受信電力情報の作成条件を変更する。たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、実行中のイベント起動電力測定処理について、報告周期すなわちTTTの変更、および報告開始条件すなわちオフセットOSTまたはヒステリシスHSの変更等を行なうことにより、ハンドオーバ動作が実行されやすい状況を作る。 Next, as another example of the method of using the CQI report, in the radio base station apparatus 101, the condition setting unit 14 changes the event activation power measurement processing condition, that is, the reception power information creation condition, based on the CQI report. . For example, the radio base station apparatus 101 can easily execute a handover operation by changing the reporting period, that is, TTT, and the reporting start condition, that is, changing the offset OST or hysteresis HS, for the event activation power measurement process that is being performed. Create a situation.
 図27は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による、CQIレポートの内容に基づくハンドオーバ動作の一例を示す図である。図の見方は図20と同様である。 FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation based on the content of the CQI report by the radio base station device according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
 図27において、無線基地局装置101は、タイミングT132,T133,T136において、無線端末装置202から受信電力情報をそれぞれ受信する。 In FIG. 27, the radio base station apparatus 101 receives the received power information from the radio terminal apparatus 202 at timings T132, T133, and T136, respectively.
 図27を参照して、無線基地局装置101は、タイミングT131においてイベント起動電力測定処理を開始するように、無線端末装置202に対して指示する。そして、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から送信される受信電力情報を監視する。 Referring to FIG. 27, radio base station apparatus 101 instructs radio terminal apparatus 202 to start the event activation power measurement process at timing T131. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors received power information transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 そして、サービングセルの電波強度が徐々に小さくなるとともに周辺セルの電波強度が徐々に大きくなり、両者の差が小さくなったタイミングT133において、無線基地局装置101は、CQIレポートの作成処理を開始するように、無線端末装置202に対して指示する。そして、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から送信されるCQIレポートを、受信電力情報と併せて監視する。 Then, at time T133 when the radio field strength of the serving cell gradually decreases and the radio field strength of the surrounding cells gradually increases and the difference between the two decreases, the radio base station apparatus 101 starts the CQI report creation process. To the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202 together with the received power information.
 そして、タイミングT133の後の、周辺セルの電波強度がサービングセルの電波強度よりも大きくなり、周辺セルの電波強度とサービングセルの電波強度との差がある程度大きくなったタイミングT134において、無線基地局装置101は、CQIレポートから電波環境の劣化を検知し、イベント起動電力測定処理の条件、たとえばTTTを1/4に短縮するよう、無線端末装置202に対して指示する。 Then, after the timing T133, at the timing T134 when the radio field intensity of the surrounding cell becomes larger than the radio field intensity of the serving cell, and the difference between the radio field intensity of the surrounding cell and the radio wave intensity of the serving cell has increased to some extent, the radio base station apparatus 101 Detects the deterioration of the radio wave environment from the CQI report, and instructs the wireless terminal device 202 to reduce the event activation power measurement processing condition, for example, TTT to ¼.
 そして、タイミングT134の後の、周辺セルの電波強度とサービングセルの電波強度との差がさらに大きくなったタイミングT135において、無線基地局装置101は、受信電力情報から電波環境のさらなる劣化を検知し、無線端末装置および無線基地局装置101間の無線リンクが切断される前に、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を実行する。 Then, at the timing T135 after the timing T134 when the difference between the radio field intensity of the neighboring cell and the radio wave intensity of the serving cell is further increased, the radio base station apparatus 101 detects further deterioration of the radio wave environment from the received power information, Before the wireless link between the wireless terminal device and the wireless base station device 101 is disconnected, a handover operation to the neighboring base station is executed.
 図28は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置のハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。 FIG. 28 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining whether to perform a handover operation of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図28を参照して、まず、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202に対して、イベント起動電力測定処理の開始を指示する(ステップS171)。 Referring to FIG. 28, first, the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start the event activation power measurement process (step S171).
 次に、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202に対して、受信品質情報すなわちCQIレポートの作成開始を指示する(ステップS172)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start generating reception quality information, that is, a CQI report (step S172).
 次に、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から受信品質情報を取得し、取得した受信品質情報に基づいて、当該無線端末装置202による受信電力情報の作成条件を変更する、たとえば受信電力情報の更新周期を短くする(ステップS173)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101 acquires reception quality information from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and changes a condition for generating reception power information by the radio terminal apparatus 202 based on the acquired reception quality information. The information update cycle is shortened (step S173).
 次に、無線基地局装置101は、取得した受信電力情報に基づいて、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する(ステップS174)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether or not to execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 based on the acquired received power information (step S174).
 なお、条件設定部14は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得された受信品質情報から受信品質の劣化すなわち無線端末装置202における電波環境の劣化を検知すると、受信電力情報の作成開始が早まるように受信電力情報の作成開始条件を設定する構成であってもよい。 When the condition setting unit 14 detects the deterioration of the reception quality, that is, the deterioration of the radio wave environment in the wireless terminal device 202, from the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12, the start of generation of the reception power information is accelerated. The configuration may be such that reception power information creation start conditions are set.
 具体的には、タイミングT134において、無線基地局装置101は、CQIレポートから電波環境の劣化を検知し、イベント起動電力測定処理の条件として、TTTを小さくする代わりに、ヒステリシスHSを小さくするか、オフセットOST1を小さくするか、またはオフセットOST2を大きくするよう、無線端末装置202に対して指示する。 Specifically, at timing T134, the radio base station apparatus 101 detects the deterioration of the radio wave environment from the CQI report, and instead of decreasing the TTT as a condition for the event activation power measurement process, The wireless terminal apparatus 202 is instructed to decrease the offset OST1 or increase the offset OST2.
 次に、受信電力情報の作成条件を変更する他の例として、無線基地局装置101は、CQIレポートに基づいて、イベント起動電力測定処理の起動タイミングすなわちイベント起動電力測定処理への切り替えタイミングを早める。たとえば、二段階の電力測定処理によってハンドオーバ動作の実行を判断する場合、最終段階の電力測定処理を起動するタイミングを早めることにより、無線リンクが切断される前にハンドオーバ動作を実行することが可能となる。 Next, as another example of changing the reception power information creation condition, the radio base station apparatus 101 advances the activation timing of the event activation power measurement process, that is, the switching timing to the event activation power measurement process, based on the CQI report. . For example, when the execution of a handover operation is determined by a two-stage power measurement process, the handover operation can be executed before the radio link is disconnected by advancing the timing of starting the final-stage power measurement process. Become.
 すなわち、条件設定部14は、第1の周期で受信品質情報が作成される処理たとえば周期的電力測定処理が行なわれている状態において、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得された受信品質情報から受信品質の劣化を検知すると、受信電力情報の作成条件を以下のように変更する。すなわち、条件設定部14は、受信電力情報の作成条件を、所定の開始条件が満たされた場合に上記第1の周期より短い第2の周期で受信品質情報が作成される処理たとえばイベント起動電力測定処理の作成条件へ変更する。 In other words, the condition setting unit 14 receives the reception quality information from the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12 in a state in which reception quality information is generated in the first period, for example, a periodic power measurement process is performed. When quality degradation is detected, the reception power information creation conditions are changed as follows. That is, the condition setting unit 14 sets the reception power information creation condition as a process for creating reception quality information in a second cycle shorter than the first cycle when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, for example, event activation power. Change to creation conditions for measurement processing.
 この例において、電力測定処理の組み合わせは特に限定する必要はないが、ここでは、上記のように、より一般的に使用されると考えられる周期的電力測定処理およびイベント起動電力測定処理の二段階方式について説明する。 In this example, the combination of the power measurement processes need not be particularly limited, but here, as described above, the two stages of the periodic power measurement process and the event activation power measurement process that are considered to be more commonly used. The method will be described.
 図29は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による、CQIレポートの内容に基づくハンドオーバ動作の一例を示す図である。図の見方は図20と同様である。 FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation based on the content of the CQI report by the radio base station device according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
 図29おいて、無線基地局装置101は、タイミングT142,T143において、無線端末装置202から受信電力情報をそれぞれ受信する。 29, the radio base station apparatus 101 receives received power information from the radio terminal apparatus 202 at timings T142 and T143, respectively.
 図29を参照して、無線基地局装置101は、たとえば無線端末装置202との通信コネクションの確立に伴い、タイミングT141において周期的電力測定処理を開始するように、当該無線端末装置202に対して指示する。そして、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から送信される受信電力情報を監視する。 Referring to FIG. 29, radio base station apparatus 101, for example, establishes a communication connection with radio terminal apparatus 202, so that radio terminal apparatus 202 starts periodic power measurement processing at timing T <b> 141. Instruct. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors received power information transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 また、無線基地局装置101は、今後取得する周期的電力測定処理の受信電力情報において、サービングセルの電波強度よりも周辺セルの電波強度が所定の閾値より大きくなると、周期的電力測定処理からイベント起動電力測定処理への切り替えを無線端末装置202に対して指示する。 In addition, in the received power information of the periodic power measurement process to be acquired in the future, the radio base station apparatus 101 activates an event from the periodic power measurement process when the radio field intensity of the neighboring cell becomes larger than a predetermined threshold value than the radio field intensity of the serving cell. The wireless terminal device 202 is instructed to switch to the power measurement process.
 そして、サービングセルの電波強度が徐々に小さくなるとともに周辺セルの電波強度が徐々に大きくなり、両者の差が小さくなったタイミングT143において、無線基地局装置101は、CQIレポートの作成処理を開始するように、無線端末装置202に対して指示する。そして、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から送信されるCQIレポートを、受信電力情報と併せて監視する。 Then, at time T143 when the radio field strength of the serving cell gradually decreases and the radio field strength of the surrounding cells gradually increases and the difference between the two decreases, the radio base station apparatus 101 starts the CQI report creation process. To the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202 together with the received power information.
 そして、タイミングT143の後の、周辺セルの電波強度がサービングセルの電波強度よりも大きくなり、周辺セルの電波強度とサービングセルの電波強度との差が大きくなったタイミングT144において、無線基地局装置101は、CQIレポートから電波環境の劣化を検知し、イベント起動電力測定処理を開始するように、無線端末装置202に対して指示する。そして、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から送信される受信電力情報を監視する。 Then, after the timing T143, the radio base station apparatus 101 at time T144 when the radio field intensity of the surrounding cell becomes larger than the radio field intensity of the serving cell and the difference between the radio field intensity of the peripheral cell and the radio wave intensity of the serving cell becomes large. The wireless terminal device 202 is instructed to detect the deterioration of the radio wave environment from the CQI report and start the event activation power measurement process. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors received power information transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 そして、タイミングT144の後の、周辺セルの電波強度とサービングセルの電波強度との差がさらに大きくなったタイミングT145において、無線基地局装置101は、受信電力情報から電波環境のさらなる劣化を検知し、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を実行する。 Then, at timing T145 after the timing T144, when the difference between the radio field intensity of the neighboring cell and the radio wave intensity of the serving cell is further increased, the radio base station apparatus 101 detects further deterioration of the radio wave environment from the received power information, A handover operation to a neighboring base station is executed.
 これにより、周期的電力測定処理の受信電力情報によってイベント起動電力測定処理の開始が指示される予定のタイミングT146より前に、イベント起動電力測定処理の開始が早期に指示され、無線端末装置および無線基地局装置101間の無線リンクが切断される前に、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作が実行される。 As a result, the start of the event activation power measurement process is instructed early before the timing T146 when the start of the event activation power measurement process is instructed by the received power information of the periodic power measurement process. Before the wireless link between the base station devices 101 is disconnected, a handover operation to the neighboring base station is performed.
 なお、無線基地局装置101は、タイミングT144において、イベント起動電力測定処理への切り替えを指示するだけでなく、電波環境に応じてイベント起動電力測定処理の条件、たとえばヒステリシスHSおよびオフセットOST等を通常とは異なる値に変更してもよい。 Note that the radio base station apparatus 101 not only instructs switching to the event activation power measurement process at timing T144, but also normally sets the conditions for the event activation power measurement process, such as hysteresis HS and offset OST, according to the radio wave environment. You may change to a different value.
 図30は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置のハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。 FIG. 30 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining whether to perform a handover operation of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図30を参照して、まず、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202に対して、周期的電力測定処理の開始を指示する(ステップS191)。 Referring to FIG. 30, first, the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start a periodic power measurement process (step S191).
 次に、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202に対して、受信品質情報すなわちCQIレポートの作成開始を指示する(ステップS192)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start generating reception quality information, that is, a CQI report (step S192).
 次に、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から受信品質情報を取得し、取得した受信品質情報に基づいて、当該無線端末装置202に対して、イベント起動電力測定処理の開始を指示する、すなわち周期的電力測定処理からイベント起動電力測定処理への切り替えを指示する(ステップS193)。なお、無線端末装置202は、単にイベント起動電力測定処理を追加で開始する構成であってもよい。すなわち、無線端末装置202は、前述のように、周期的電力測定処理による測定結果をイベント起動電力測定処理において測定結果通知として送信する構成であってもよい。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101 acquires reception quality information from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start an event activation power measurement process based on the acquired reception quality information. That is, switching from the periodic power measurement process to the event activation power measurement process is instructed (step S193). The wireless terminal device 202 may simply be configured to additionally start the event activation power measurement process. That is, as described above, the wireless terminal device 202 may be configured to transmit a measurement result by the periodic power measurement process as a measurement result notification in the event activation power measurement process.
 次に、無線基地局装置101は、取得した受信電力情報に基づいて、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する(ステップS194)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether or not to execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 based on the acquired received power information (step S194).
 次に、CQIレポートの利用方法の他の例として、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、受信電力情報取得部11によって取得された受信電力情報が所定条件を満たす場合には、無線端末装置202による自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置101へのハンドオーバ動作を実行すると判断する。そして、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得された受信品質情報に基づいて上記所定条件を調整する。 Next, as another example of a method of using the CQI report, the handover operation determining unit 13 determines that the wireless terminal device 202 has its own power when the received power information acquired by the received power information acquiring unit 11 satisfies a predetermined condition. It is determined that a handover operation from the radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus 101 is executed. Then, the handover operation determination unit 13 adjusts the predetermined condition based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12.
 たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、イベント起動電力測定処理の測定結果にCQIレポートの内容を加味することにより、ハンドオーバ動作が実行されやすい状況を作る。 For example, the radio base station apparatus 101 creates a situation where the handover operation is easily performed by adding the content of the CQI report to the measurement result of the event activation power measurement process.
 図31は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による、CQIレポートの内容に基づくハンドオーバ動作の一例を示す図である。図の見方は図20と同様である。 FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation based on the content of the CQI report by the radio base station device according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The way of viewing the figure is the same as in FIG.
 図31において、無線基地局装置101は、タイミングT152,T153において、無線端末装置202から受信電力情報をそれぞれ受信する。 In FIG. 31, the radio base station apparatus 101 receives received power information from the radio terminal apparatus 202 at timings T152 and T153, respectively.
 図31を参照して、無線基地局装置101は、タイミングT151においてイベント起動電力測定処理を開始するように、無線端末装置202に対して指示する。そして、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から送信される受信電力情報を監視する。 Referring to FIG. 31, radio base station apparatus 101 instructs radio terminal apparatus 202 to start the event activation power measurement process at timing T151. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors received power information transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 そして、サービングセルの電波強度が徐々に小さくなるとともに周辺セルの電波強度が徐々に大きくなり、両者の差が小さくなったタイミングT153において、無線基地局装置101は、受信電力情報から電波環境の劣化を検知し、CQIレポートの作成処理を開始するように、無線端末装置202に対して指示する。そして、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から送信されるCQIレポートを、受信電力情報と併せて監視する。 Then, at time T153 when the radio field strength of the serving cell gradually decreases and the radio field strength of the surrounding cells gradually increases and the difference between the two decreases, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines the radio wave environment from the received power information. The wireless terminal device 202 is instructed to detect and start the CQI report creation process. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report transmitted from the radio terminal apparatus 202 together with the received power information.
 タイミングT153の後、無線基地局装置101は、CQIレポートを受信するたびに、受信したCQIレポートに基づいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行を判断するための条件式を演算する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101は、タイミングT153において取得した受信電力情報の内容に、タイミングT153以降において取得したCQIレポートの内容を加味した条件式を用いて、ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する。 After timing T153, every time the radio base station apparatus 101 receives a CQI report, the radio base station apparatus 101 calculates a conditional expression for determining execution of a handover operation based on the received CQI report. That is, radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether or not to execute the handover operation using a conditional expression in which the content of the received power information acquired at timing T153 is added to the content of the CQI report acquired after timing T153. To do.
 そして、周辺セルの電波強度がサービングセルの電波強度よりも大きくなり、周辺セルの電波強度とサービングセルの電波強度との差が大きくなったタイミングT154において、無線基地局装置101は、条件式が満たされることから、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を実行する。 The radio base station apparatus 101 satisfies the conditional expression at timing T154 when the radio wave intensity of the surrounding cell becomes larger than the radio wave intensity of the serving cell and the difference between the radio wave intensity of the peripheral cell and the radio wave intensity of the serving cell becomes large. Therefore, the handover operation to the neighboring base station is executed.
 これにより、イベント起動電力測定処理の受信電力情報によってハンドオーバ動作の実行判断がなされる予定のタイミングT155より前に、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作が実行され、無線端末装置および無線基地局装置101間の無線リンクが切断されることを防ぐことができる。 As a result, the handover operation to the neighboring base station is executed before the timing T155 at which the execution determination of the handover operation is scheduled based on the received power information of the event activation power measurement process, and the wireless terminal device and the wireless base station device 101 are Can be prevented from being disconnected.
 より詳細には、無線基地局装置101は、イベント起動電力測定処理の条件を変更せずに、たとえば以下のような条件式を利用して、CQIレポートの内容を加味する。これにより、ハンドオーバ動作の実行を促すことができる。
(サービングセルの受信電力+サービングセルのオフセットOST+サービングセルのヒステリシスHS+α×(CQIレポートの値-β))<(周辺セルの受信電力+周辺セルのオフセットOST)
More specifically, the radio base station apparatus 101 considers the contents of the CQI report, for example, using the following conditional expression without changing the event activation power measurement processing conditions. Thereby, execution of the handover operation can be prompted.
(Receiving power of serving cell + offset OST of serving cell + hysteresis HS of serving cell + α × (CQI report value−β)) <(received power of neighboring cell + offset OST of neighboring cell)
 ここで、αおよびβは、たとえば正の整数である。すなわち、この条件式では、CQIレポートの値が大きくなるほどサービングセルの電波環境が良く評価される方向になり、ハンドオーバ動作が実行されにくくなる。無線基地局装置101は、このαおよびβを、たとえば自己の無線基地局装置から他の無線基地局装置への”Too Late HO”が生じた回数に基づいて調整してもよい。 Here, α and β are positive integers, for example. That is, in this conditional expression, the larger the value of the CQI report, the better the radio environment of the serving cell is evaluated, and the more difficult the handover operation is performed. The radio base station apparatus 101 may adjust α and β based on, for example, the number of times that “Too Late HO” has occurred from its own radio base station apparatus to another radio base station apparatus.
 すなわち、無線基地局装置101は、イベントA3におけるレポートオン状態への遷移の条件式に対して、CQIレポート値による補正を行っている。通常、この条件式は無線端末装置202において使用される式である。 That is, the radio base station apparatus 101 corrects the conditional expression for the transition to the report-on state at the event A3 using the CQI report value. Normally, this conditional expression is an expression used in the wireless terminal device 202.
 なお、無線基地局装置101は、イベントごとに定義される条件式に対してCQIレポート値による補正を加える構成に限らず、CQIレポート値単独で条件判定を行ってもよいし、2回以上のCQIレポートの値の組み合わせによって条件判定を行ってもよい。すなわち、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、所定条件を満たす場合には、無線端末装置202による自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置101へのハンドオーバ動作を実行すると判断し、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得された受信品質情報に基づいて上記所定条件を設定する。 The radio base station apparatus 101 is not limited to the configuration in which the conditional expression defined for each event is corrected by the CQI report value, and the condition determination may be performed by the CQI report value alone, or two or more times. The condition determination may be performed based on a combination of CQI report values. That is, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the handover operation determining unit 13 determines that the wireless terminal device 202 performs a handover operation from its own wireless base station device 101 to another wireless base station device 101, and receives the reception quality information The predetermined condition is set based on the reception quality information acquired by the acquisition unit 12.
 また、無線基地局装置101は、2回以上のCQIレポートの値をイベントごとに定義される条件式に組み込んでもよい。 Also, the radio base station apparatus 101 may incorporate two or more CQI report values into a conditional expression defined for each event.
 図32は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置のハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。 FIG. 32 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining whether to perform a handover operation of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図32を参照して、まず、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202に対して、イベント起動電力測定処理の開始を指示する(ステップS181)。 32, first, the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start the event activation power measurement process (step S181).
 次に、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202に対して、受信品質情報すなわちCQIレポートの作成開始を指示する(ステップS182)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to start generating reception quality information, that is, a CQI report (step S182).
 次に、無線基地局装置101は、取得した受信品質情報、および取得済みの最新の受信電力情報すなわち最後に取得した受信電力情報に基づいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の条件式を求める(ステップS183)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101 obtains a conditional expression for determining whether to perform the handover operation based on the acquired reception quality information and the acquired latest received power information, that is, the last acquired received power information (step S183). ).
 次に、無線基地局装置101は、求めた条件式からハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する(ステップS184)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether or not to execute a handover operation from the obtained conditional expression (step S184).
 [CQIレポートおよび受信電力情報の評価方法の具体例]
 次に、CQIレポートおよび受信電力情報から、電波環境の劣化の検知およびハンドオーバ動作の実行判断を行なう具体例について説明する。
[Specific Example of CQI Report and Received Power Information Evaluation Method]
Next, a specific example of detecting the deterioration of the radio wave environment and determining whether to execute the handover operation from the CQI report and the received power information will be described.
 たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、CQIレポートの値だけでハンドオーバ動作の実行判断を行なう。より詳細には、無線基地局装置101におけるハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得されたCQIレポートに基づいて、無線端末装置202による自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置101へのハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する。 For example, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether or not to perform the handover operation using only the value of the CQI report. More specifically, the handover operation determination unit 13 in the radio base station apparatus 101 performs another radio transmission from its own radio base station apparatus 101 by the radio terminal apparatus 202 based on the CQI report acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12. It is determined whether or not a handover operation to the base station apparatus 101 is to be executed.
 図33は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による電波環境の劣化判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。 FIG. 33 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining deterioration of the radio wave environment by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the invention.
 図33を参照して、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から送信されるCQIレポートを監視し、CQIレポートの値が所定の閾値以上の場合には(ステップS201でNO)、当該無線端末装置202の電波環境が劣化していないと判断し、引き続きCQIレポートを監視する。 Referring to FIG. 33, radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report transmitted from radio terminal apparatus 202. If the value of CQI report is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (NO in step S201), radio base station apparatus 101 It is determined that the radio wave environment of the terminal device 202 has not deteriorated, and the CQI report is continuously monitored.
 一方、無線基地局装置101は、CQIレポートの値が所定の閾値未満になると(ステップS201でYES)、当該無線端末装置202の電波環境が劣化したと判断し、たとえば図22~図32で説明したようにハンドオーバ動作の実行およびイベント起動電力測定処理の条件変更等を行なう。たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、ハンドオーバ動作を実行すると判断した場合には、受信電力情報において最も受信電力の大きい周辺基地局、またはマクロ基地局等の所定の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先として選択する(ステップS202)。 On the other hand, when the value of the CQI report becomes less than the predetermined threshold value (YES in step S201), the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has deteriorated, and is described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the handover operation is executed and the event activation power measurement processing condition is changed. For example, if it is determined that the handover operation is to be performed, the radio base station apparatus 101 selects a predetermined radio base station apparatus such as a neighboring base station or macro base station having the highest received power in the received power information as a handover destination. (Step S202).
 また、たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、CQIレポートおよび受信電力情報に基づいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断を行なう。より詳細には、無線基地局装置101におけるハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、受信電力情報取得部11によって取得された受信電力情報からSIR(Signal to Interference Ratio)を算出する。SIRは、以下の式で表される。ただし、ターゲットセルは、周辺セルのうちの1つのセルである。
SIR=サービングセルの受信電力-ターゲットセルの受信電力
For example, radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether to perform a handover operation based on the CQI report and the received power information. More specifically, the handover operation determining unit 13 in the radio base station apparatus 101 calculates an SIR (Signal to Interference Ratio) from the received power information acquired by the received power information acquiring unit 11. SIR is represented by the following equation. However, the target cell is one of the peripheral cells.
SIR = Receiving power of serving cell−Receiving power of target cell
 そして、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、SIRとCQIレポートの値との和を評価し、電波環境の劣化を判断する。 Then, the handover operation determining unit 13 evaluates the sum of the SIR and the value of the CQI report, and determines the deterioration of the radio wave environment.
 図34は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による電波環境の劣化判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。 FIG. 34 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining deterioration of the radio wave environment by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the invention.
 図34を参照して、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から送信されるCQIレポートおよび受信電力情報を監視し、以下の判定式に従い、SIRとCQIレポートの値との和を評価し、電波環境の劣化を判断する。
Α×SIR+B×CQI<閾値
Referring to FIG. 34, radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report and received power information transmitted from radio terminal apparatus 202, and evaluates the sum of the SIR and the value of the CQI report according to the following determination formula. Determine the deterioration of the radio wave environment.
Α × SIR + B × CQI <threshold
 ただし、AおよびBは任意の値である。上記判定式では、Aが小さいほど、また、Bの値が大きいほど、CQIレポートの値を重視することになる。上記判定式は、サービングセルの受信電力、ターゲットセルの受信電力およびCQIの関数となる。 However, A and B are arbitrary values. In the above determination formula, the smaller the value of A and the larger the value of B, the more important the value of the CQI report is. The determination formula is a function of the reception power of the serving cell, the reception power of the target cell, and the CQI.
 無線基地局装置101は、上記判定式が満たされない場合には(ステップS211でNO)、当該無線端末装置202の電波環境が劣化していないと判断し、引き続きCQIレポートおよび受信電力情報を監視する。 When the determination formula is not satisfied (NO in step S211), the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has not deteriorated, and continuously monitors the CQI report and the received power information. .
 一方、無線基地局装置101は、上記判定式が満たされると(ステップS211でYES)、当該無線端末装置202の電波環境が劣化したと判断し、たとえば図22~図32で説明したようにハンドオーバ動作の実行およびイベント起動電力測定処理の条件変更等を行なう。たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、ハンドオーバ動作を実行すると判断した場合には、受信電力情報において最も受信電力の大きい周辺基地局、またはマクロ基地局等の所定の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先として選択する(ステップS212)。 On the other hand, when the determination formula is satisfied (YES in step S211), the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has deteriorated. For example, as described with reference to FIGS. The execution of the operation and the condition change of the event activation power measurement process are performed. For example, if it is determined that the handover operation is to be performed, the radio base station apparatus 101 selects a predetermined radio base station apparatus such as a neighboring base station or macro base station having the highest received power in the received power information as a handover destination. (Step S212).
 また、たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、CQIレポート、受信電力情報およびこれらの更新経過時間に基づいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断を行なう。すなわち、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得されたCQIレポートと、受信電力情報取得部11によって取得された受信電力情報と、CQIレポートが更新されてから経過した時間および受信電力情報が更新されてから経過した時間の少なくとも一方とに基づいて、ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する。 Also, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether to perform the handover operation based on the CQI report, the received power information, and the update elapsed time. That is, the handover operation determination unit 13 receives the CQI report acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12, the reception power information acquired by the reception power information acquisition unit 11, the time elapsed since the CQI report was updated, and the reception Whether or not to execute the handover operation is determined based on at least one of the time elapsed since the power information was updated.
 図35は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による電波環境の劣化判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。 FIG. 35 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining deterioration of the radio wave environment by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the invention.
 図35を参照して、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から送信されるCQIレポートおよび受信電力情報を監視し、また、CQIレポートおよび受信電力情報の更新経過時間を計測し、以下の判定式に従い、SIRとCQIレポートの値との和を評価し、電波環境の劣化を判断する。
Α(T_MR)×SIR+B(T_CQI)×CQI<閾値
Referring to FIG. 35, radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report and received power information transmitted from radio terminal apparatus 202, measures the update elapsed time of the CQI report and received power information, and According to the determination formula, the sum of the SIR and the value of the CQI report is evaluated to determine deterioration of the radio wave environment.
Α (T_MR) × SIR + B (T_CQI) × CQI <threshold
 ただし、AおよびBは任意の値である。上記判定式では、Aが小さいほど、また、Bの値が大きいほど、CQIレポートの値を重視することになる。上記判定式は、サービングセルの受信電力、ターゲットセルの受信電力、CQI、および更新経過時間の関数となる。 However, A and B are arbitrary values. In the above determination formula, the smaller the value of A and the larger the value of B, the more important the value of the CQI report is. The determination formula is a function of the reception power of the serving cell, the reception power of the target cell, the CQI, and the update elapsed time.
 すなわち、無線基地局装置101は、受信電力情報が最後に更新されたタイミングからの経過時間T_MRに応じてAを調整し、また、CQIレポートが最後に更新されたタイミングからの経過時間T_CQIに応じてBを調整する。具体的には、無線基地局装置101は、上記判定式において、古い情報の重みを小さく設定する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101は、経過時間T_MRが大きいほどAを小さく設定し、経過時間T_CQIが大きいほどBを小さく設定する。 That is, the radio base station apparatus 101 adjusts A according to the elapsed time T_MR from the timing when the received power information was last updated, and also according to the elapsed time T_CQI from the timing when the CQI report was last updated. Adjust B. Specifically, the radio base station apparatus 101 sets the weight of old information small in the above determination formula. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101 sets A smaller as the elapsed time T_MR is larger, and sets B smaller as the elapsed time T_CQI is larger.
 無線基地局装置101は、上記判定式が満たされない場合には(ステップS221でNO)、当該無線端末装置202の電波環境が劣化していないと判断し、引き続きCQIレポートおよび受信電力情報を監視する。 When the determination formula is not satisfied (NO in step S221), the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has not deteriorated, and continuously monitors the CQI report and the received power information. .
 一方、無線基地局装置101は、上記判定式が満たされると(ステップS221でYES)、当該無線端末装置202の電波環境が劣化したと判断し、たとえば図22~図32で説明したようにハンドオーバ動作の実行およびイベント起動電力測定処理の条件変更等を行なう。たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、ハンドオーバ動作を実行すると判断した場合には、受信電力情報において最も受信電力の大きい周辺基地局、またはマクロ基地局等の所定の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先として選択する(ステップS222)。 On the other hand, when the determination formula is satisfied (YES in step S221), the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has deteriorated. For example, as described with reference to FIGS. The execution of the operation and the condition change of the event activation power measurement process are performed. For example, if it is determined that the handover operation is to be performed, the radio base station apparatus 101 selects a predetermined radio base station apparatus such as a neighboring base station or macro base station having the highest received power in the received power information as a handover destination. (Step S222).
 また、たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、サービングセルの受信電力に基づいて、CQIレポートの重みを変える。すなわち、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得されたCQIレポートおよび受信電力情報取得部11によって取得された受信電力情報に基づいて、ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断し、ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かの判断におけるCQIレポートの重みすなわち寄与度を、受信電力情報に基づいて調整する。 For example, the radio base station apparatus 101 changes the weight of the CQI report based on the received power of the serving cell. That is, the handover operation determining unit 13 determines whether to execute the handover operation based on the CQI report acquired by the reception quality information acquiring unit 12 and the received power information acquired by the received power information acquiring unit 11. The weight of the CQI report, that is, the degree of contribution in determining whether to perform the handover operation is adjusted based on the received power information.
 図36は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による電波環境の劣化判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。 FIG. 36 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining deterioration of the radio wave environment by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the invention.
 図36を参照して、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から送信されるCQIレポートおよび受信電力情報を監視し、以下の判定式に従い、SIRとCQIレポートの値との和を評価し、電波環境の劣化を判断する。
A(サービングセルの受信電力)×(サービングセルの受信電力-ターゲットセルの受信電力)+B(サービングセルの受信電力)×CQI<閾値
Referring to FIG. 36, radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report and received power information transmitted from radio terminal apparatus 202, and evaluates the sum of the SIR and the value of the CQI report according to the following determination formula. Determine the deterioration of the radio wave environment.
A (received power of serving cell) × (received power of serving cell−received power of target cell) + B (received power of serving cell) × CQI <threshold
 ただし、AおよびBは任意の値である。上記判定式では、Aが小さいほど、また、Bの値が大きいほど、CQIレポートの値を重視することになる。上記判定式は、サービングセルの受信電力、ターゲットセルの受信電力、およびCQIの関数となる。 However, A and B are arbitrary values. In the above determination formula, the smaller the value of A and the larger the value of B, the more important the value of the CQI report is. The determination formula is a function of the reception power of the serving cell, the reception power of the target cell, and the CQI.
 すなわち、無線基地局装置101は、受信電力情報におけるサービングセルの受信電力に応じてAおよびBを調整する。 That is, the radio base station apparatus 101 adjusts A and B according to the received power of the serving cell in the received power information.
 ここで、CQIレポートの示す受信品質が悪い原因としては、たとえば、周辺基地局からの干渉電力すなわち周辺セルの受信電力が大きい場合、およびサービング基地局からの信号電力すなわちサービングセルの受信電力が小さい場合の2つが考えられる。周辺基地局からの干渉電力が大きい場合には、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を実行することにより、無線端末装置202の電波環境を改善することができる。しかしながら、サービング基地局からの信号電力が小さい場合には、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を実行しても無線端末装置202の電波環境が改善されず、無駄なハンドオーバ動作になる可能性がある。 Here, the cause of the poor reception quality indicated by the CQI report is, for example, when the interference power from the neighboring base station, that is, the reception power of the neighboring cell is large, and when the signal power from the serving base station, that is, the reception power of the serving cell is small. These are considered. When the interference power from the neighboring base station is large, the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 can be improved by performing a handover operation to the neighboring base station. However, when the signal power from the serving base station is small, even if the handover operation to the neighboring base station is executed, the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 is not improved, and there is a possibility that the useless handover operation will occur.
 そこで、無線基地局装置101は、Aの関数において、サービングセルの受信電力が所定の閾値以上の場合にはAを大きくするか、あるいは、Bの関数において、サービングセルの受信電力が所定の閾値以上の場合にはBを小さくすることにより、上記判定式におけるCQIの重みを減らす。 Therefore, the radio base station apparatus 101 increases A when the received power of the serving cell is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold in the function A, or the received power of the serving cell is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold in the function B. In this case, by reducing B, the weight of CQI in the above judgment formula is reduced.
 無線基地局装置101は、上記判定式が満たされない場合には(ステップS231でNO)、当該無線端末装置202の電波環境が劣化していないと判断し、引き続きCQIレポートおよび受信電力情報を監視する。 If the determination formula is not satisfied (NO in step S231), the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has not deteriorated, and continuously monitors the CQI report and the received power information. .
 一方、無線基地局装置101は、上記判定式が満たされると(ステップS231でYES)、当該無線端末装置202の電波環境が劣化したと判断し、たとえば図22~図32で説明したようにハンドオーバ動作の実行およびイベント起動電力測定処理の条件変更等を行なう。たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、ハンドオーバ動作を実行すると判断した場合には、受信電力情報において最も受信電力の大きい周辺基地局、またはマクロ基地局等の所定の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先として選択する(ステップS232)。 On the other hand, when the determination formula is satisfied (YES in step S231), the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has deteriorated. For example, as described with reference to FIGS. The execution of the operation and the condition change of the event activation power measurement process are performed. For example, if it is determined that the handover operation is to be performed, the radio base station apparatus 101 selects a predetermined radio base station apparatus such as a neighboring base station or macro base station having the highest received power in the received power information as a handover destination. (Step S232).
 また、たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、サービングセルの受信電力に基づいて、CQIレポートの重みを変える。すなわち、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得されたCQIレポートおよび受信電力情報取得部11によって取得された受信電力情報に基づいて、ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断し、ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かの判断におけるCQIレポートの重みすなわち寄与度を、受信電力情報に基づいて、たとえばハンドオーバ先の候補となる無線基地局装置の数に基づいて調整する。 For example, the radio base station apparatus 101 changes the weight of the CQI report based on the received power of the serving cell. That is, the handover operation determining unit 13 determines whether to execute the handover operation based on the CQI report acquired by the reception quality information acquiring unit 12 and the received power information acquired by the received power information acquiring unit 11. The weight of the CQI report, that is, the degree of contribution in determining whether or not to execute the handover operation is adjusted based on the received power information, for example, based on the number of radio base station apparatuses that are candidates for the handover destination.
 図37は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による電波環境の劣化判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。 FIG. 37 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining deterioration of the radio wave environment by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the invention.
 図37を参照して、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から送信されるCQIレポートおよび受信電力情報を監視し、以下の判定式に従い、SIRとCQIレポートの値との和を評価し、電波環境の劣化を判断する。
A(測定された基地局数)×(サービングセルの受信電力-ターゲットセルの受信電力)+B(測定された基地局数)×CQI<閾値
Referring to FIG. 37, radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report and received power information transmitted from radio terminal apparatus 202, and evaluates the sum of the SIR and the value of the CQI report according to the following determination formula. Determine the deterioration of the radio wave environment.
A (number of measured base stations) × (received power of serving cell−received power of target cell) + B (number of measured base stations) × CQI <threshold
 ただし、AおよびBは任意の値である。上記判定式では、Aが小さいほど、また、Bの値が大きいほど、CQIレポートの値を重視することになる。上記判定式は、サービングセルの受信電力、ターゲットセルの受信電力、CQIの関数、および基地局数の関数となる。 However, A and B are arbitrary values. In the above determination formula, the smaller the value of A and the larger the value of B, the more important the value of the CQI report is. The determination formula is a function of reception power of the serving cell, reception power of the target cell, CQI function, and number of base stations.
 すなわち、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202における測定対象の周辺基地局数に応じてAおよびBを調整する。 That is, the radio base station apparatus 101 adjusts A and B according to the number of peripheral base stations to be measured in the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 ここで、受信電力情報において、測定対象となっている周辺基地局が、ターゲットセルを形成する周辺基地局であるターゲット基地局以外にも複数ある場合には、CQIレポートの示す受信品質が悪い場合にターゲット基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を実行しても、実はターゲット基地局以外の周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであったという可能性がある。すなわち、”HO to Wrong Cell”が発生する可能性がある。 Here, in the received power information, when there are a plurality of neighboring base stations other than the target base station that is the neighboring base station forming the target cell, the reception quality indicated by the CQI report is poor. Even if the handover operation to the target base station is executed, there is a possibility that the handover operation to the peripheral base station other than the target base station should actually be executed. That is, there is a possibility that “HO to Wong Cell” occurs.
 そこで、無線基地局装置101は、サービングセルの受信電力およびターゲットセルの受信電力だけではなく、受信電力情報を全体的に活用して、ハンドオーバ先の候補の基地局数すなわち測定対象の周辺基地局数が多い場合には、上記判定式におけるCQIの重みを減らす。 Therefore, the radio base station apparatus 101 uses not only the reception power of the serving cell and the reception power of the target cell, but also the reception power information as a whole, so that the number of handover destination candidate base stations, that is, the number of measurement target peripheral base stations If there are many, the weight of CQI in the above judgment formula is reduced.
 すなわち、無線基地局装置101は、Aの関数において、測定対象の周辺基地局数が所定の閾値以上の場合にはAを大きくするか、あるいは、Bの関数において、測定対象の周辺基地局数が所定の閾値以上の場合にはBを小さくすることにより、上記判定式におけるCQIの重みを減らす。 That is, the radio base station apparatus 101 increases A when the number of neighboring base stations to be measured is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold in the function A, or the number of neighboring base stations to be measured in the B function. When is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, B is reduced to reduce the weight of CQI in the determination formula.
 なお、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202における測定対象の周辺基地局数の代わりに、受信電力情報において受信電力が所定の閾値以上となる周辺基地局の数を用いてもよい。 Note that the radio base station apparatus 101 may use the number of neighboring base stations whose received power is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold in the received power information, instead of the number of neighboring base stations to be measured in the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 無線基地局装置101は、上記判定式が満たされない場合には(ステップS241でNO)、当該無線端末装置202の電波環境が劣化していないと判断し、引き続きCQIレポートおよび受信電力情報を監視する。 When the determination formula is not satisfied (NO in step S241), the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has not deteriorated, and continuously monitors the CQI report and the received power information. .
 一方、無線基地局装置101は、上記判定式が満たされると(ステップS241でYES)、当該無線端末装置202の電波環境が劣化したと判断し、たとえば図22~図32で説明したようにハンドオーバ動作の実行およびイベント起動電力測定処理の条件変更等を行なう。たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、ハンドオーバ動作を実行すると判断した場合には、受信電力情報において最も受信電力の大きい周辺基地局、またはマクロ基地局等の所定の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先として選択する(ステップS242)。 On the other hand, when the determination formula is satisfied (YES in step S241), the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has deteriorated. For example, as described with reference to FIGS. The execution of the operation and the condition change of the event activation power measurement process are performed. For example, if it is determined that the handover operation is to be performed, the radio base station apparatus 101 selects a predetermined radio base station apparatus such as a neighboring base station or macro base station having the highest received power in the received power information as a handover destination. (Step S242).
 また、たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、複数回分のCQIレポートの統計データに基づいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断を行なう。すなわち、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、複数回分のCQIレポートに基づいて、ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する。 Also, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether to perform a handover operation based on statistical data of CQI reports for a plurality of times. That is, the handover operation determining unit 13 determines whether or not to execute the handover operation based on a plurality of CQI reports.
 図38は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による電波環境の劣化判断の手順の一例を定めたフローチャートである。 FIG. 38 is a flowchart defining an example of a procedure for determining deterioration of the radio wave environment by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the invention.
 図38を参照して、無線基地局装置101は、無線端末装置202から送信されるCQIレポートを監視し、複数回分のCQIレポ-トの値に対する統計処理たとえば平均処理を行ってCQIレポートの値を評価し、電波環境の劣化を判断する。無線基地局装置101は、たとえば以下の判定式に従い、電波環境の劣化を判断する。
ΣCQI(t)<閾値
Referring to FIG. 38, radio base station apparatus 101 monitors the CQI report transmitted from radio terminal apparatus 202, performs statistical processing such as average processing on the CQI report values for a plurality of times, and performs CQI report values. To determine the deterioration of the radio wave environment. The radio base station apparatus 101 determines deterioration of the radio wave environment, for example, according to the following determination formula.
ΣCQI (t) <threshold
 なお、無線基地局装置101は、上記判定式に限らず、たとえば差分情報{CQI(t+1)-CQI(t)}を使用してもよい。 Note that the radio base station apparatus 101 is not limited to the above determination formula, and may use difference information {CQI (t + 1) −CQI (t)}, for example.
 無線基地局装置101は、上記判定式が満たされない場合には(ステップS251でNO)、当該無線端末装置202の電波環境が劣化していないと判断し、引き続きCQIレポートを監視する。 If the determination formula is not satisfied (NO in step S251), the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has not deteriorated, and continues to monitor the CQI report.
 一方、無線基地局装置101は、上記判定式が満たされると(ステップS251でYES)、当該無線端末装置202の電波環境が劣化したと判断し、たとえば図22~図32で説明したようにハンドオーバ動作の実行およびイベント起動電力測定処理の条件変更等を行なう。たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、ハンドオーバ動作を実行すると判断した場合には、受信電力情報において最も受信電力の大きい周辺基地局、またはマクロ基地局等の所定の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先として選択する(ステップS252)。 On the other hand, when the determination formula is satisfied (YES in step S251), the radio base station apparatus 101 determines that the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has deteriorated. For example, as described with reference to FIGS. The execution of the operation and the condition change of the event activation power measurement process are performed. For example, if it is determined that the handover operation is to be performed, the radio base station apparatus 101 selects a predetermined radio base station apparatus such as a neighboring base station or macro base station having the highest received power in the received power information as a handover destination. (Step S252).
 ここで、フェージングおよび測定誤差によってたまたま瞬間的に伝送路特性が悪化し、無線端末装置202における電波環境が劣化したことにより、あるタイミングにおけるCQIレポートの値だけが極端に小さくなる可能性がある。 Here, there is a possibility that only the value of the CQI report at a certain timing becomes extremely small because the transmission path characteristics are instantaneously deteriorated due to fading and measurement errors, and the radio wave environment in the wireless terminal device 202 is deteriorated.
 そこで、無線基地局装置101は、上記のように、異なる時間に取得された受信品質を示す複数回分のCQIレポートに基づいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断を行なう。これにより、瞬間的な伝送路特性の悪化による誤判断を抑制することができる。 Therefore, as described above, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether to perform the handover operation based on a plurality of CQI reports indicating reception quality acquired at different times. Thereby, it is possible to suppress erroneous determination due to instantaneous deterioration of the transmission path characteristics.
 なお、無線基地局装置101は、図33~図38を用いて説明した評価方法を組み合わせて電波環境の劣化判断を行なう構成であってもよい。たとえば、図38で説明したCQIレポートの統計処理後の値を図33~図37に示す各判定式に用いることが可能である。 Note that the radio base station apparatus 101 may be configured to determine the deterioration of the radio wave environment by combining the evaluation methods described with reference to FIGS. For example, the value after statistical processing of the CQI report described with reference to FIG. 38 can be used for each determination formula shown in FIGS.
 図39は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による、受信電力情報およびCQIレポートと、通信プロトコルにおける各レイヤとの対応を示す図である。 FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a correspondence between the reception power information and the CQI report and each layer in the communication protocol by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
 図39を参照して、無線基地局装置101は、たとえば、RRCレイヤ、PDCP(Packet Data Convergence Protocol)レイヤ、RLC(Radio Link Control)レイヤ、MACレイヤ、PHYレイヤおよびRF(Radio Frequency)レイヤを有する通信プロトコルに従って動作する。ここでは、RRCレイヤが最上位レイヤであり、RFレイヤが最下位レイヤである。 Referring to FIG. 39, radio base station apparatus 101 has, for example, an RRC layer, a PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) layer, an RLC (Radio Link Control) layer, a MAC layer, a PHY layer, and an RF (Radio Frequency) layer. Operates according to the communication protocol. Here, the RRC layer is the highest layer and the RF layer is the lowest layer.
 すなわち、受信電力情報取得部11は、上記各レイヤのうちのRRCレイヤに従い、受信電力情報すなわち測定結果通知を取得する。 That is, the reception power information acquisition unit 11 acquires reception power information, that is, a measurement result notification according to the RRC layer among the above layers.
 受信品質情報取得部12は、上記各レイヤのうち、RRCレイヤよりも下位のMACレイヤおよびPHYレイヤの少なくとも一方に従い、CQIレポートを取得する。 The reception quality information acquisition unit 12 acquires a CQI report according to at least one of the MAC layer and the PHY layer lower than the RRC layer among the above layers.
 受信電力情報はRRCレイヤに対応するため、無線基地局装置101は、R1の矢印で示すようにRRCレイヤ、PDCPレイヤ、RLCレイヤ、MACレイヤ、PHYレイヤおよびRFレイヤにおいてそれぞれ無線端末装置202との間で要求および応答等のメッセージのやり取りを行なう。 Since the received power information corresponds to the RRC layer, the radio base station apparatus 101 communicates with the radio terminal apparatus 202 in each of the RRC layer, the PDCP layer, the RLC layer, the MAC layer, the PHY layer, and the RF layer as indicated by an arrow R1. Messages such as requests and responses are exchanged between them.
 また、CQIレポートはMACレイヤおよびPHYレイヤの少なくとも一方に対応する。このため、無線基地局装置101は、たとえばCQIレポートがMACレイヤに対応する場合、R2の矢印で示すようにMACレイヤ、PHYレイヤおよびRFレイヤにおいてそれぞれ無線端末装置202との間で要求および応答等のメッセージのやり取りを行なう。 Also, the CQI report corresponds to at least one of the MAC layer and the PHY layer. For this reason, for example, when the CQI report corresponds to the MAC layer, the radio base station apparatus 101 makes a request, a response, etc. Exchange messages.
 このため、CQIレポートは、受信電力情報と比べて取得処理に時間を要さず、無線基地局装置101において短い周期での取得が可能となる。 For this reason, the CQI report does not require time for the acquisition process compared to the received power information, and the radio base station apparatus 101 can acquire the CQI report in a short cycle.
 このように、よりレイヤの低い情報を有効に活用することにより、ハンドオーバ動作の迅速かつ適切な判断が可能となる。 In this way, by making effective use of lower layer information, it is possible to quickly and appropriately determine the handover operation.
 ところで、非特許文献1に記載されるような不適切なハンドオーバ動作が行なわれると、通信システムにおいて、通信断および通信トラフィックの増大等、種々の問題が生じる。 By the way, when an inappropriate handover operation as described in Non-Patent Document 1 is performed, various problems such as communication disconnection and increase in communication traffic occur in the communication system.
 これに対して、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、受信電力情報取得部11は、無線端末装置202における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報を取得する。受信品質情報取得部12は、受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、無線端末装置202における自己の無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得する。そして、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得された受信品質情報に基づいて、無線端末装置202による自己の無線基地局装置から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する。 On the other hand, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the received power information acquisition unit 11 performs the measurement result of the received power of the radio signal from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus 202. Is received. The reception quality information acquisition unit 12 is updated at a cycle shorter than the reception power information, and acquires reception quality information indicating the reception quality of the radio signal from its own radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus 202. Then, based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12, the handover operation determination unit 13 executes a handover operation from the own radio base station device to another radio base station device by the radio terminal device 202. Judge whether to do.
 このように、受信電力情報よりも更新周期の短いCQIレポートを用いる構成により、急激な電波環境の変化に追従することが可能となるため、たとえば”Too Late HO”の発生を抑制することができる。すなわち、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を迅速に実行し、無線端末装置および無線基地局装置間の無線リンクが切断されることを防ぐことができる。 As described above, the configuration using the CQI report whose update cycle is shorter than the received power information can follow a rapid change in the radio wave environment, so that, for example, the occurrence of “Too Late HO” can be suppressed. . That is, it is possible to quickly execute the handover operation to the neighboring base station and prevent the radio link between the radio terminal device and the radio base station device from being disconnected.
 したがって、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 Therefore, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得された受信品質情報および受信電力情報取得部11によって取得された受信電力情報に基づいて、無線端末装置202による自己の無線基地局装置から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する。 Further, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the handover operation determination unit 13 is acquired by the reception quality information and reception power information acquisition unit 11 acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12. Based on the received power information, it is determined whether or not the wireless terminal device 202 performs a handover operation from its own wireless base station device to another wireless base station device.
 このように、CQIレポートに加えて受信電力情報をハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に用いる構成により、無線端末装置202の電波環境をより詳細に把握し、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断をより適切に行なうことができる。 As described above, the configuration using the received power information in addition to the CQI report for determination of execution of the handover operation makes it possible to grasp the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 in more detail and more appropriately determine whether to execute the handover operation. .
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、条件設定部14は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得された受信品質情報に基づいて、受信電力情報の作成条件を変更する。 In the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, condition setting unit 14 changes the reception power information creation condition based on the reception quality information acquired by reception quality information acquisition unit 12. To do.
 このような構成により、無線端末装置202の受信品質に応じて受信電力情報の作成条件を迅速かつ適切に設定し、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断のための情報としてより適切な受信電力情報を取得することができる。 With such a configuration, reception power information creation conditions are quickly and appropriately set according to the reception quality of the wireless terminal device 202, and more appropriate reception power information is acquired as information for determining whether to perform a handover operation. Can do.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、条件設定部14は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得された受信品質情報から受信品質の劣化を検知すると、受信電力情報の更新周期を短くする。 In the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, when condition setting section 14 detects reception quality deterioration from reception quality information acquired by reception quality information acquisition section 12, reception power information Reduce the update cycle.
 このような構成により、無線端末装置202の受信品質の劣化に応じて受信電力情報の更新タイミングを早めることができるため、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断のための情報を、急激な電波環境の変化に追従して迅速に取得することができる。 With such a configuration, the update timing of the received power information can be advanced according to the deterioration of the reception quality of the wireless terminal device 202. Therefore, the information for determining whether to execute the handover operation can follow the rapid change in the radio wave environment. And can get quickly.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、受信電力情報は、所定の開始条件が満たされるとその作成が開始される。条件設定部14は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得された受信品質情報から受信品質の劣化を検知すると、上記受信電力情報の作成開始が早まるように上記開始条件を設定する。 Moreover, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, reception power information starts to be created when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. When the condition setting unit 14 detects deterioration of reception quality from the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12, the condition setting unit 14 sets the start condition so that the generation of the reception power information is started earlier.
 このような構成により、無線端末装置202の受信品質の劣化に応じて受信電力情報の作成を早期に開始することができるため、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断のための情報を、急激な電波環境の変化に追従して迅速に取得することができる。 With such a configuration, reception power information can be created early in response to reception quality degradation of the wireless terminal device 202, so that information for determining whether to perform a handover operation can be changed rapidly. Can be quickly acquired by following.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得された受信品質情報が所定条件を満たす場合には、ハンドオーバ動作を実行すると判断し、無線端末装置202による自己の無線基地局装置から所定の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を実行する。 In the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the handover operation determining unit 13 performs the handover operation when the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquiring unit 12 satisfies a predetermined condition. The wireless terminal device 202 performs a handover operation from its own wireless base station device to a predetermined wireless base station device.
 このような構成により、CQIレポートによって無線端末装置202の受信品質の劣化を検知した後、無線端末装置202に対する受信電力情報の作成条件の変更要求等を行なうことなく、迅速にハンドオーバ動作を実行することができる。 With such a configuration, after detecting the deterioration of the reception quality of the wireless terminal device 202 by the CQI report, the handover operation is quickly performed without requesting the wireless terminal device 202 to change the reception power information creation condition. be able to.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、どの無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を実行するかを、受信電力情報取得部11によって取得された受信電力情報に基づいて決定する。 Moreover, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the handover operation determining unit 13 is acquired by the received power information acquiring unit 11 to which radio base station apparatus the handover operation is to be executed. It is determined based on the received power information.
 このような構成により、無線端末装置202の電波環境に応じてハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を適切に選択することができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately select a handover destination radio base station apparatus according to the radio wave environment of the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、所定条件を満たす場合に、無線端末装置202による自己の無線基地局装置から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を実行すると判断する。そして、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得された受信品質情報に基づいて上記所定条件を設定する。 Further, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the handover operation determining unit 13 performs a radio terminal station 202 to another radio base station from its own radio base station apparatus when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is determined that a handover operation to the device is executed. The handover operation determination unit 13 sets the predetermined condition based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12.
 このような構成により、無線端末装置202の受信品質に応じてハンドオーバ動作の実行判断条件を迅速かつ適切に設定することができる。 With this configuration, it is possible to quickly and appropriately set the execution judgment condition for the handover operation according to the reception quality of the wireless terminal device 202.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、受信電力情報取得部11によって取得された受信電力情報が所定条件を満たす場合に、無線端末装置202による自己の無線基地局装置から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を実行すると判断する。そして、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得された受信品質情報に基づいて上記所定条件を調整する。 Further, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the handover operation determining unit 13 is configured such that when the received power information acquired by the received power information acquiring unit 11 satisfies a predetermined condition, It is determined that a handover operation from its own radio base station apparatus to another radio base station apparatus is executed by 202. Then, the handover operation determination unit 13 adjusts the predetermined condition based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12.
 このような構成により、ある受信電力情報の内容からハンドオーバ動作を実行しないと判断した後、次に受信電力情報が更新されるタイミングまでに無線端末装置202の電波環境が急激に劣化した場合でも、上記タイミングを待つことなくハンドオーバ動作を迅速に実行することができる。 Even if the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 rapidly deteriorates by the timing at which the received power information is updated next after determining that the handover operation is not performed from the content of certain received power information by such a configuration, The handover operation can be quickly executed without waiting for the above timing.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得されたCQIレポートと、受信電力情報取得部11によって取得された受信電力情報と、CQIレポートが更新されてから経過した時間および受信電力情報が更新されてから経過した時間の少なくとも一方とに基づいて、ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する。 Moreover, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the handover operation determining unit 13 is acquired by the CQI report acquired by the received quality information acquiring unit 12 and the received power information acquiring unit 11. Whether or not to execute the handover operation is determined based on the received power information and at least one of the time elapsed since the CQI report was updated and the time elapsed since the received power information was updated.
 このように、無線端末装置202の電波環境を示す情報の更新経過時間をハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に用いる構成により、古い情報による誤判断を抑制し、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断をより適切に行なうことができる。 As described above, the configuration in which the update elapsed time of the information indicating the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 is used for determination of execution of the handover operation can suppress erroneous determination due to old information and more appropriately perform execution determination of the handover operation. it can.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得されたCQIレポートおよび受信電力情報取得部11によって取得された受信電力情報に基づいて、ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断し、ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かの判断におけるCQIレポートの重みを、受信電力情報に基づいて調整する。 Further, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the handover operation determination unit 13 receives the CQI report acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12 and the reception power information acquisition unit 11. Whether or not to execute the handover operation is determined based on the power information, and the weight of the CQI report in determining whether or not to execute the handover operation is adjusted based on the received power information.
 このような構成により、受信電力情報に基づいてCQIレポートの値を適切に評価することができるため、無線端末装置202の電波環境をより正確に把握し、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断をより適切に行なうことができる。 With such a configuration, the value of the CQI report can be appropriately evaluated based on the received power information. Therefore, the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 can be grasped more accurately and the execution determination of the handover operation can be performed more appropriately. be able to.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13は、複数回分のCQIレポートに基づいて、ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する。 Moreover, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the handover operation determining unit 13 determines whether or not to execute the handover operation based on the CQI reports for a plurality of times.
 このような構成により、電波環境の瞬間的な変化に起因する誤判断を抑制し、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断をより適切に行なうことができる。 With this configuration, it is possible to suppress misjudgment due to instantaneous changes in the radio wave environment and more appropriately perform execution judgment of the handover operation.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、受信電力情報取得部11は、通信プロトコルにおける複数レイヤのうちの第1のレイヤに従い、受信電力情報を取得する。受信品質情報取得部12は、上記複数レイヤのうち、第1のレイヤよりも下位の第2のレイヤに従い、受信品質情報を取得する。 Moreover, in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the received power information acquisition unit 11 acquires received power information according to the first layer among a plurality of layers in the communication protocol. The reception quality information acquisition unit 12 acquires reception quality information according to a second layer lower than the first layer among the plurality of layers.
 このように、通信プロトコルにおいて、よりレイヤの低い情報を用いてハンドオーバ動作の実行判断を行なう構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断のための情報の取得時間を短縮することができるため、ハンドオーバ動作の迅速かつ適切な実行判断が可能となる。すなわち、急激な電波環境の変化に追従することが可能となるため、たとえば”Too Late HO”の発生を抑制することができる。これにより、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を迅速に実行し、無線端末装置および無線基地局装置間の無線リンクが切断されることを防ぐことができる。したがって、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 Thus, in the communication protocol, the configuration for performing the handover operation execution determination using lower layer information can reduce the acquisition time of the information for determining the handover operation execution. And appropriate execution judgment becomes possible. That is, since it becomes possible to follow a sudden change in the radio wave environment, for example, the occurrence of “Too Late HO” can be suppressed. As a result, the handover operation to the neighboring base station can be quickly executed, and the radio link between the radio terminal device and the radio base station device can be prevented from being disconnected. Therefore, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device.
 なお、このレイヤの観点から、無線基地局装置は、受信品質情報および受信電力情報を取得する構成に限らず、無線端末装置における1または複数の無線基地局装置からの無線信号の測定結果を示す情報を取得する構成であればよい。 From the viewpoint of this layer, the radio base station apparatus is not limited to the configuration for acquiring the reception quality information and the reception power information, and shows the measurement results of radio signals from one or a plurality of radio base station apparatuses in the radio terminal apparatus. Any configuration that acquires information may be used.
 また、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、受信電力情報は3GPPで規定されたRRCレイヤに対応し、受信品質情報は3GPPで規定されたMACレイヤおよびPHYレイヤの少なくとも一方に対応する。 In the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the received power information corresponds to the RRC layer specified by 3GPP, and the reception quality information is at least of the MAC layer and the PHY layer specified by 3GPP. Corresponds to one.
 このような構成により、3GPPで規定された通信プロトコルに従って動作する無線基地局装置において、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることが可能となる。 With such a configuration, in a radio base station apparatus that operates in accordance with a communication protocol defined by 3GPP, it is possible to stabilize communication by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus.
 なお、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置は、無線端末装置202から受信品質情報および受信電力情報を受信する構成であるとしたが、これに限定するものではない。無線基地局装置は、他の装置を介して無線端末装置202から間接的に受信品質情報および受信電力情報を取得する構成であってもよいし、無線端末装置202以外の装置が作成した受信品質情報および受信電力情報を取得する構成であってもよい。 The radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention is configured to receive the reception quality information and the reception power information from the radio terminal apparatus 202, but is not limited thereto. The radio base station apparatus may be configured to acquire reception quality information and reception power information indirectly from the radio terminal apparatus 202 via another apparatus, or reception quality created by an apparatus other than the radio terminal apparatus 202 The configuration may be such that information and received power information are acquired.
 次に、本発明の他の実施の形態について図面を用いて説明する。なお、図中同一または相当部分には同一符号を付してその説明は繰り返さない。 Next, another embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the drawings, the same or corresponding parts are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will not be repeated.
 <第2の実施の形態>
 本実施の形態は、第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置と比べてハンドオーバ動作の所要時間を短縮するための制御を追加した無線基地局装置に関する。以下で説明する内容以外は第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置と同様である。
<Second Embodiment>
The present embodiment relates to a radio base station apparatus to which control for reducing the time required for the handover operation is added as compared with the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment. The contents other than those described below are the same as those of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment.
 図3~図9では、不適切なハンドオーバ動作およびその検出処理について説明した。不適切なハンドオーバ動作を検出した場合、前述のように無線基地局装置は、ヒステリシスHS、オフセットOSTおよびTTT等のパラメータを調整することにより、ハンドオーバ動作を最適化する。 In FIGS. 3 to 9, an inappropriate handover operation and its detection processing have been described. When an inappropriate handover operation is detected, the radio base station apparatus optimizes the handover operation by adjusting parameters such as hysteresis HS, offset OST, and TTT as described above.
 しかしながら、たとえば”Too Late HO”と”Too Early HO”とは相反する事象であり、パラメータの調整についてトレードオフの関係にあるため、バランスよく調整することが困難な場合もある。このようなパラメータ調整の代わりに、あるいはパラメータ調整に加えて、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制する手法が望まれる。 However, for example, “Too Late HO” and “Too Early HO” are contradictory events, and there is a trade-off relationship with respect to parameter adjustment, so it may be difficult to adjust in a balanced manner. Instead of such parameter adjustment or in addition to parameter adjustment, a technique for suppressing an inappropriate handover operation is desired.
 図2では、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を説明した。このシーケンスにおいて、無線基地局装置101Aがハンドオーバ動作を行なうべきであると判断する元となる測定結果通知を無線端末装置202が送信してから、コアネットワーク側の準備処理すなわち無線基地局装置101Aと上位装置および無線基地局装置101Bとの各種情報のやり取りが行なわれ、その後無線基地局装置101Aが無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信する処理を行なうまでの準備期間T101を考える。図2に示すシーケンスでは、準備期間T101において無線端末装置202の電波環境が劣化すると、”Too Late HO”が発生する可能性がある。特に、コアネットワーク側の準備処理では、一般の通信回線を経由して情報が送受信される場合が多いことから、当該準備処理の完了までに長時間を要し、準備期間T101が大幅に長くなる可能性がある。 FIG. 2 illustrates an example of the sequence of the handover operation in the radio communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention. In this sequence, after the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification from which the wireless base station device 101A determines that the handover operation should be performed, a preparation process on the core network side, that is, the wireless base station device 101A Consider a preparation period T101 until various information is exchanged between the host apparatus and the radio base station apparatus 101B, and then the radio base station apparatus 101A performs a process of transmitting an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202. In the sequence shown in FIG. 2, when the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 deteriorates during the preparation period T101, “Too Late HO” may occur. In particular, in the preparation process on the core network side, information is often transmitted and received via a general communication line. Therefore, it takes a long time to complete the preparation process, and the preparation period T101 is significantly increased. there is a possibility.
 そこで、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムでは、以下のような構成により、”Too Late HO”を効果的に抑制する。 Therefore, in the wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention, “Too Late HO” is effectively suppressed by the following configuration.
 図40は、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置における制御部の構成を示す図である。 FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a control unit in the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
 図40を参照して、制御部98は、ハンドオーバ要求部21と、ハンドオーバ指示部22と、ハンドオーバ条件調整部23と、ハンドオーバ情報取得部24と、端末測定結果取得部25とを含む。 40, the control unit 98 includes a handover request unit 21, a handover instruction unit 22, a handover condition adjustment unit 23, a handover information acquisition unit 24, and a terminal measurement result acquisition unit 25.
 端末測定結果取得部25は、無線端末装置202からの測定結果通知を取得し、取得した測定結果通知から自己の無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質を求め、当該通信品質をハンドオーバ要求部21およびハンドオーバ指示部22に通知する。 The terminal measurement result acquisition unit 25 acquires the measurement result notification from the wireless terminal device 202, obtains the communication quality between the wireless base station device 101 and the wireless terminal device 202 from the acquired measurement result notification, and determines the communication quality. The handover request unit 21 and the handover instruction unit 22 are notified.
 ハンドオーバ要求部21は、自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置への無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を行なう要求を他の無線基地局装置に対して行なう、すなわちハンドオーバ要求を他の無線基地局装置へ送信する。たとえば、ハンドオーバ要求部21は、自己の無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質に関する所定のハンドオーバ準備条件が満たされる場合に、上記要求を他の無線基地局装置に対して行なう。 The handover request unit 21 makes a request for performing a handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202 from its own wireless base station device 101 to another wireless base station device to other wireless base station devices, that is, makes a handover request to other wireless base station devices. Transmit to the radio base station apparatus. For example, the handover request unit 21 makes the request to another radio base station apparatus when a predetermined handover preparation condition regarding communication quality between the radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied.
 ハンドオーバ指示部22は、上記要求に対する他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けて、無線端末装置202に対して自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を行なう指示を与える、すなわちRRCコネクション再構成指示を無線端末装置202へ送信する。ここで、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、上記応答を受けて、自己の無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質に関するハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされていない場合には、無線端末装置202に対する上記指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する。たとえば、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、所定のハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされていない場合には、無線端末装置202に対して上記指示を与えず、ハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を他の無線基地局装置に通知する。 In response to the response from the other radio base station apparatus to the request, the handover instruction unit 22 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to perform a handover operation from its own radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus. That is, an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202. Here, the handover instructing unit 22 receives the above response, and if the handover execution condition regarding the communication quality between its own radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio terminal apparatus 202 is not satisfied, Cancel or suspend giving instructions. For example, when a predetermined handover execution condition is not satisfied, the handover instruction unit 22 does not give the instruction to the wireless terminal device 202 and notifies other wireless base station devices that the handover operation is to be stopped. To do.
 図41は、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。 FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an example of a handover operation sequence in the wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
 ここでは、図1に示すように、無線端末装置202が、セルCA内に位置し、無線基地局装置101Aと通信中である状態から、セルCAおよびセルCBの重複領域へ移動した場合を想定する。 Here, as shown in FIG. 1, it is assumed that the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA and is in communication with the wireless base station device 101A, and moves to an overlapping area of the cell CA and the cell CB. To do.
 図41を参照して、まず、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己と通信中の無線端末装置202の測定対象となる周波数と、当該周波数の無線信号を送信する他の無線基地局装置とを設定する(ステップS301)。 Referring to FIG. 41, first, radio base station apparatus 101A sets a frequency to be measured by radio terminal apparatus 202 in communication with itself and another radio base station apparatus that transmits a radio signal of the frequency. (Step S301).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、設定した他の無線基地局装置から送信される無線信号の受信レベルを無線端末装置202に測定させるための測定開始要求を無線端末装置202へ送信する。この測定開始要求には、周辺セル情報、すなわち測定対象となる無線基地局装置のセルIDが含まれる。また、この測定開始要求には、各無線基地局装置の送信周波数が含まれる(ステップS302)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A transmits to the wireless terminal device 202 a measurement start request for causing the wireless terminal device 202 to measure the reception level of the wireless signal transmitted from the other wireless base station device that has been set. This measurement start request includes neighboring cell information, that is, the cell ID of the radio base station apparatus to be measured. Further, the measurement start request includes the transmission frequency of each radio base station device (step S302).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Aから測定開始要求を受信して、電力測定処理を開始する、すなわち受信した測定開始要求の示す周波数において、測定開始要求の示す無線基地局装置から送信される無線信号の受信電力を測定する(ステップS303)。 Next, the radio terminal apparatus 202 receives the measurement start request from the radio base station apparatus 101A and starts power measurement processing, that is, the radio base station apparatus indicated by the measurement start request at the frequency indicated by the received measurement start request. The received power of the radio signal transmitted from is measured (step S303).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、この受信電力の測定結果を示す測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する。たとえば、無線端末装置202は、受信電力の測定を定期的に行ない、無線基地局装置101Aとの通信状態が悪くなった場合、および無線基地局装置101A以外の他の無線基地局装置との通信状態が良くなった場合に、測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS304)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating the measurement result of the received power to the wireless base station device 101A. For example, the wireless terminal device 202 periodically measures the received power, when the communication state with the wireless base station device 101A deteriorates, and with other wireless base station devices other than the wireless base station device 101A When the state becomes better, a measurement result notification is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S304).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、セルIDごとの測定結果を示す測定情報を取得し、図示しない記憶部に保存する(ステップS305)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID based on the measurement result notification received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and stores it in a storage unit (not shown) (step S305).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ準備条件を満たす場合には、ハンドオーバの準備処理を行なうべきであると判断し、周辺セル情報を参照してたとえば無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先として決定する(ステップS306)。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that a handover preparation process should be performed, and refers to neighboring cell information, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B is determined as the handover destination (step S306).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を上位装置へ送信する(ステップS307)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the higher-level apparatus (step S307).
 次に、上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、無線基地局装置101Bへ当該ハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS308)。 Next, the host device receives the handover request from the radio base station device 101A and transmits the handover request to the radio base station device 101B (step S308).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、上位装置からハンドオーバ要求を受信して、上位装置へ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS309)。 Next, the radio base station device 101B receives the handover request from the higher-level device and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the higher-level device (step S309).
 次に、上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する(ステップS310)。 Next, the host device receives a handover response from the radio base station device 101B, and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station device 101A (step S310).
 以上のような準備処理が実行されている間に、無線端末装置202は、新たな測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS311)。 While the above preparation process is being performed, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S311).
 そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を新たに取得する。このようにして、無線基地局装置101Aは、測定結果通知を受信するたびに上記通信品質を更新する(ステップS312)。 Then, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. In this way, the radio base station apparatus 101A updates the communication quality every time it receives a measurement result notification (step S312).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置からハンドオーバ指示を受信して、新たに取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する(ステップS313)。 Next, when the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover instruction from the host apparatus and the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A should execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 (Step S313).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信する(ステップS314)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S314).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置へ自己の通信状態等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS315)。 Next, the radio base station device 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status to the higher-level device (step S315).
 次に、上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Aから状態通知を受信して、無線基地局装置101Bへ無線端末装置202との通信内容等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS316)。 Next, the host device receives the status notification from the radio base station device 101A, and transmits a status notification indicating the communication content with the radio terminal device 202 to the radio base station device 101B (step S316).
 また、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101BへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を送信する(ステップS317)。 Further, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification to the wireless base station device 101B (step S317).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、上位装置へハンドオーバ完了通知を送信する(ステップS318)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the higher-level apparatus (step S318).
 次に、上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ完了通知を受信して、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS319)。 Next, the host device receives a handover completion notification from the radio base station device 101B and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station device 101A (step S319).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置から端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、上位装置へ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS320)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the higher-level device, releases information related to the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the higher-level device (step S320).
 図42は、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。図42は、ハンドオーバ動作を中止するシーケンスの一例を示す。図42において想定するケースは図41と同様である。 FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an exemplary sequence of a handover operation in the wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 42 shows an example of a sequence for canceling the handover operation. The case assumed in FIG. 42 is the same as FIG.
 図42を参照して、ステップS331~S342の動作は、図41に示すステップS301~S312の動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 42, the operations in steps S331 to S342 are the same as the operations in steps S301 to S312 shown in FIG. 41, and thus detailed description thereof will not be repeated here.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置からハンドオーバ指示を受信して、最後に取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たさない場合には、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきでなく、準備処理の行なわれたハンドオーバ動作を中止すべきであると判断する(ステップS343)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover instruction from the host apparatus, and executes the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 when the finally acquired communication quality does not satisfy the predetermined handover execution condition. It is determined that the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed should be stopped (step S343).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置へハンドオーバ中止通知を送信する(ステップS344)。 Next, the radio base station device 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the higher-level device (step S344).
 ここで、無線基地局装置101Aにおいて、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、ハンドオーバ動作の中止を無線基地局装置101Bに通知する際、自己の無線基地局装置101Aおよび無線端末装置202間の通信品質が条件を満たしていない旨を上位装置および無線基地局装置101Bに通知する。 Here, in the radio base station apparatus 101A, when the handover instructing unit 22 notifies the radio base station apparatus 101B that the handover operation has been stopped, the communication quality between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the radio terminal apparatus 202 is subject to the condition. Notify the upper apparatus and the radio base station apparatus 101B that it is not satisfied.
 具体的には、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202との通信品質が原因でハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を示すフラグをハンドオーバ中止通知において設定し、上位装置および無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する。 Specifically, the radio base station apparatus 101A sets a flag indicating that the handover operation is canceled due to the communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the handover cancellation notification, and transmits the flag to the host apparatus and the radio base station apparatus 101B. To do.
 これにより、上位装置および無線基地局装置101Bは、たとえばハンドオーバ動作に関するパラメータ設定の誤り等によってハンドオーバ動作が中止された事象との区別をつけることができる。このため、上位装置および無線基地局装置101Bにおいて、新たなパラメータ設定処理等の不要な処理の発生を防ぎ、かつハンドオーバ動作のために確保した各種リソースの解放を適切に行なうことができる。 Thereby, the host apparatus and the radio base station apparatus 101B can distinguish from an event in which the handover operation is stopped due to, for example, an error in parameter setting regarding the handover operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing such as new parameter setting processing from occurring in the higher-level device and the radio base station device 101B, and to appropriately release various resources reserved for the handover operation.
 上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ中止通知を受信して、必要であれば当該ハンドオーバ中止通知に対応するハンドオーバ動作について、保持情報の消去等のハンドオーバ中止処理を行なうとともに、無線基地局装置101Bへ当該ハンドオーバ中止通知を送信する(ステップS345)。 The host apparatus receives the handover cancellation notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and performs handover cancellation processing such as erasure of stored information for the handover operation corresponding to the handover cancellation notification, if necessary, and the radio base station apparatus The handover stop notification is transmitted to 101B (step S345).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、ハンドオーバ中止通知を受信して、当該ハンドオーバ中止通知に対応するハンドオーバ動作について、保持情報の消去等のハンドオーバ中止処理を行なう(ステップS346)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover cancellation notification, and performs handover cancellation processing such as erasure of stored information for the handover operation corresponding to the handover cancellation notification (step S346).
 図41および図42に示すシーケンスにおける無線基地局装置および無線端末装置間の通信品質の具体例として、たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、イベントA3の条件式を利用して、ハンドオーバ実行条件およびハンドオーバ準備条件を設定する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101は、以下の式を満たす場合にハンドオーバ動作の実行を判断する。
(サービングセルの受信電力+サービングセルのオフセットOST1+ヒステリシスHS)<(周辺セルの受信電力+周辺セルのオフセットOST2)
As a specific example of the communication quality between the radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus in the sequences shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101 uses the conditional expression of event A3 to Set the preparation conditions. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines execution of the handover operation when the following expression is satisfied.
(Receiving power of serving cell + offset OST1 of serving cell + hysteresis HS) <(received power of neighboring cell + offset OST2 of neighboring cell)
 また、無線基地局装置101は、以下の式を満たす場合に、ハンドオーバ動作の準備開始を判断する。ただし、制御値Pはゼロ以上の値である。
(サービングセルの受信電力+サービングセルのオフセットOST1+ヒステリシスHS)<(周辺セルの受信電力+周辺セルのオフセットOST2+制御値P)
Also, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines the start of preparation for handover operation when the following expression is satisfied. However, the control value P is a value of zero or more.
(Receiving power of serving cell + offset OST1 of serving cell + hysteresis HS) <(received power of neighboring cell + offset OST2 + of neighboring cell + control value P)
 この式において、制御値Pを大きくすることにより、ハンドオーバ動作の準備開始タイミングが早くなる。これにより、ハンドオーバ動作の実行タイミングを早め、”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。 In this equation, by increasing the control value P, the preparation start timing for the handover operation is advanced. Thereby, the execution timing of the handover operation can be advanced, and “Too Late HO” can be suppressed.
 ただし、制御値Pを大きくしすぎると、ハンドオーバ動作が実行されずに当該ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が無駄になる場合が増える。このような場合には、制御値Pを小さくすることにより、ハンドオーバ動作の準備開始タイミングがハンドオーバ動作の実行タイミングに近づくことになり、無駄な準備処理が行なわれる可能性を低くすることができる。 However, if the control value P is increased too much, the handover operation is not executed and the case where the preparation process for the handover operation is wasted increases. In such a case, by reducing the control value P, the preparation start timing of the handover operation approaches the execution timing of the handover operation, and the possibility that unnecessary preparation processing is performed can be reduced.
 また、制御値Pを正の値に設定すると、ハンドオーバ準備条件の示す通信品質は、ハンドオーバ実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質となる。すなわち、ハンドオーバ準備条件は、ハンドオーバ実行条件と比べて、無線端末装置202による自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を行なう必要性の低い条件となる。この場合、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理開始時と比べて、上位装置からのハンドオーバ指示の受信時において把握している最新の通信品質が制御値P相当分以上劣化している場合に、ハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する。すなわち、制御値Pを正の値に設定する場合、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の基準となる通信品質よりも緩やかな条件で前もってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行なうことができるため、無線端末装置202の電波環境の変化に対して迅速にハンドオーバ動作を実行することが可能となる。 Also, when the control value P is set to a positive value, the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition. That is, the handover preparation condition is a condition where it is less necessary to perform a handover operation from the radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus by the radio terminal apparatus 202 as compared with the handover execution condition. In this case, in the radio base station apparatus 101A, the latest communication quality grasped at the time of receiving the handover instruction from the higher-level apparatus is deteriorated by the amount corresponding to the control value P or more compared with the time when the preparation process for the handover operation is started. In this case, it is determined that a handover operation should be executed. That is, when the control value P is set to a positive value, the preparatory process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the criterion for determining whether to execute the handover operation. It becomes possible to quickly execute a handover operation in response to an environmental change.
 また、制御値Pをゼロに設定すると、ハンドオーバ準備条件の示す通信品質は、ハンドオーバ実行条件の示す通信品質と同等となる。この場合、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理開始時と比べて、上位装置からのハンドオーバ指示の受信時において把握している最新の通信品質が良好になっている場合に、ハンドオーバ動作を中止すべきであると判断する。すなわち、制御値Pをゼロに設定する場合、無線端末装置202の電波環境の好転によって行なう必要のなくなったハンドオーバ動作を適切に中止することが可能となる。 Further, when the control value P is set to zero, the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition is equivalent to the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition. In this case, the radio base station apparatus 101A performs the handover operation when the latest communication quality grasped at the time of receiving the handover instruction from the host apparatus is better than when the preparation process for the handover operation is started. It is determined that should be stopped. That is, when the control value P is set to zero, the handover operation that is no longer necessary due to the improvement of the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 can be appropriately stopped.
 また、無線基地局装置101において、ハンドオーバ条件調整部23は、ハンドオーバ実行条件の示す通信品質およびハンドオーバ準備条件の示す通信品質の差を調整可能である。 In the radio base station apparatus 101, the handover condition adjusting unit 23 can adjust the difference between the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition and the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition.
 たとえば、ハンドオーバ情報取得部24は、ハンドオーバ指示部22によってハンドオーバ動作の中止が他の無線基地局装置に通知された回数を取得する。そして、ハンドオーバ条件調整部23は、ハンドオーバ情報取得部24によって取得された回数に基づいて上記通信品質の差を調整する。 For example, the handover information acquisition unit 24 acquires the number of times that the handover instruction unit 22 has notified other wireless base station devices that the handover operation has been stopped. The handover condition adjusting unit 23 adjusts the communication quality difference based on the number of times acquired by the handover information acquiring unit 24.
 あるいは、ハンドオーバ情報取得部24は、無線端末装置202による自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作が不適切であった回数を取得する。そして、ハンドオーバ条件調整部23は、ハンドオーバ情報取得部24によって取得された回数に基づいて上記通信品質の差を調整する。 Alternatively, the handover information acquisition unit 24 acquires the number of times that the handover operation from the wireless base station device 101 to another wireless base station device by the wireless terminal device 202 is inappropriate. The handover condition adjusting unit 23 adjusts the communication quality difference based on the number of times acquired by the handover information acquiring unit 24.
 具体的には、ハンドオーバ条件調整部23は、以下のような式に従って制御値Pを調整する。ただし、W1およびW2は重み付け係数であり、それぞれ正の値および負の値である。
P=W1×”Too Late HO”の回数+W2×無駄な準備処理が行なわれた回数(ハンドオーバ動作の中止回数)
Specifically, the handover condition adjusting unit 23 adjusts the control value P according to the following equation. However, W1 and W2 are weighting coefficients, and are a positive value and a negative value, respectively.
P = W1 × “Too Late HO” number of times + W2 × number of times of useless preparation processing (number of times of handover operation cancellation)
 なお、上記各回数は、ある無線基地局装置において、1つの他の無線基地局装置についての回数に限らず、複数の他の無線基地局装置についての合計回数とすることも可能である。 It should be noted that the number of times described above is not limited to the number of times for one other wireless base station device in a certain wireless base station device, but may be the total number of times for a plurality of other wireless base station devices.
 また、無線基地局装置101は、たとえばCQIレポートの値を通信品質として利用してもよい。 Further, the radio base station apparatus 101 may use, for example, the value of the CQI report as the communication quality.
 CQIレポートは、直接現在の各セルにおける電波状況を通知するものではなく、SINRを用いた以下の式により0~15の16段階で表現される値である。CQI=0の場合、無線端末装置202の受信品質が最も悪く、CQI=15の場合、無線端末装置202の受信品質が最も良い。
CQI=min(max(round((SINR[dB]+8)/1.892),0),15)
The CQI report does not directly notify the current radio wave condition in each cell, but is a value expressed in 16 levels from 0 to 15 by the following formula using SINR. When CQI = 0, the reception quality of the wireless terminal device 202 is the worst, and when CQI = 15, the reception quality of the wireless terminal device 202 is the best.
CQI = min (max (round ((SINR [dB] +8) /1.892), 0), 15)
 また、無線基地局装置101は、ハンドオーバ要求に対する他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けてから、通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たすまで待機する構成であってもよい。すなわち、無線基地局装置101において、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けて、ハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされていない場合には、ハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされるまで待機する。そして、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、ハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされると無線端末装置202に対してハンドオーバ動作の指示を与える。一方、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、ハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされる前に通信品質に関する所定のハンドオーバ中止条件が満たされた場合には、無線端末装置202に対してハンドオーバ動作の指示を与えず、ハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を他の無線基地局装置に通知する。 Further, the radio base station apparatus 101 may be configured to wait until the communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition after receiving a response from another radio base station apparatus to the handover request. That is, in radio base station apparatus 101, handover instruction unit 22 receives a response from another radio base station apparatus and waits until the handover execution condition is satisfied when the handover execution condition is not satisfied. Then, when the handover execution condition is satisfied, the handover instruction unit 22 instructs the wireless terminal device 202 to perform a handover operation. On the other hand, if a predetermined handover suspension condition related to communication quality is satisfied before the handover execution condition is satisfied, the handover instruction unit 22 does not give a handover operation instruction to the wireless terminal device 202 and performs the handover operation. Notify other radio base station apparatus to cancel.
 すなわち、無線基地局装置101は、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理の完了後、無線端末装置202からたとえば周期的に到着する測定結果通知に基づいて自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を監視し、当該通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たした時点で、無線端末装置202に対してハンドオーバ動作の指示を与える。 That is, the radio base station apparatus 101 monitors communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 based on a measurement result notification that arrives periodically, for example, from the radio terminal apparatus 202 after completion of the handover operation preparation process. When the communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition, the wireless terminal device 202 is instructed to perform a handover operation.
 これにより、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理の開始タイミングを早めるほど、最適なタイミングでハンドオーバ動作を実行できる可能性が高まる。 As a result, the earlier the start timing of the preparation process for the handover operation, the higher the possibility that the handover operation can be executed at the optimum timing.
 図43は、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。図43において想定するケースは図41と同様である。 FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an exemplary sequence of a handover operation in the wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The case assumed in FIG. 43 is the same as FIG.
 図43を参照して、ステップS361~S370の動作は、図41に示すステップS301~S310の動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Referring to FIG. 43, the operations in steps S361 to S370 are the same as the operations in steps S301 to S310 shown in FIG. 41, so detailed description will not be repeated here.
 ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が実行されている間に、無線端末装置202は、新たな測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS371)。 While the handover operation preparation process is being executed, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S371).
 そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を新たに取得する。このようにして、無線基地局装置101Aは、測定結果通知を受信するたびに上記通信品質を更新する(ステップS372)。 Then, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. In this way, the radio base station apparatus 101A updates the communication quality every time it receives a measurement result notification (step S372).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置からハンドオーバ指示を受信して、通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件またはハンドオーバ中止条件を満たすまで待機する(ステップS373)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover instruction from the host apparatus and waits until the communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition or handover cancellation condition (step S373).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、更新された通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する(ステップS374)。 Next, if the updated communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed (step S374).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信する(ステップS375)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S375).
 ステップS376~S381の動作は、図41に示すステップS315~S320の動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Since operations in steps S376 to S381 are the same as those in steps S315 to S320 shown in FIG. 41, detailed description will not be repeated here.
 図44は、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。図44は、ハンドオーバ動作を中止するシーケンスの一例を示す。図44において想定するケースは図41と同様である。 FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an exemplary sequence of a handover operation in the wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 44 shows an example of a sequence for canceling the handover operation. The case assumed in FIG. 44 is the same as FIG.
 図44を参照して、ステップS401~S413の動作は、図43に示すステップS361~S373の動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Referring to FIG. 44, the operations in steps S401 to S413 are the same as the operations in steps S361 to S373 shown in FIG. 43, so detailed description will not be repeated here.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、更新された通信品質がハンドオーバ中止条件を満たす場合には、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきでなく、準備処理の行なわれたハンドオーバ動作を中止すべきであると判断する(ステップS414)。 Next, when the updated communication quality satisfies the handover cancel condition, the radio base station device 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal device 202, and cancels the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that it should be (step S414).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、上位装置へハンドオーバ中止通知を送信する(ステップS415)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the higher-level device (step S415).
 ここで、図42に示すシーケンスと同様に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202との通信品質が原因でハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を示すフラグをハンドオーバ中止通知において設定し、上位装置へ送信する。 Here, similarly to the sequence shown in FIG. 42, the radio base station apparatus 101A sets a flag indicating that the handover operation is canceled due to the communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the handover cancellation notification, and sends it to the host apparatus. Send.
 次に、上位装置は、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ中止通知を受信して、必要であれば当該ハンドオーバ中止通知に対応するハンドオーバ動作について、保持情報の消去等のハンドオーバ中止処理を行なうとともに、無線基地局装置101Bへ当該ハンドオーバ中止通知を送信する(ステップS416)。 Next, the higher-level apparatus receives the handover cancellation notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and performs handover cancellation processing such as erasure of retained information for the handover operation corresponding to the handover cancellation notification, if necessary, The handover cancellation notice is transmitted to the base station apparatus 101B (step S416).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、ハンドオーバ中止通知を受信して、当該ハンドオーバ中止通知に対応するハンドオーバ動作について、保持情報の消去等のハンドオーバ中止処理を行なう(ステップS417)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover cancellation notification, and performs handover cancellation processing such as erasure of retained information for the handover operation corresponding to the handover cancellation notification (step S417).
 図43および図44に示すシーケンスにおける無線基地局装置および無線端末装置間の通信品質の具体例として、たとえば、無線基地局装置101は、イベントA3の条件式を利用して、ハンドオーバ中止条件を設定する。すなわち、図42および図43に示すシーケンスにおいて説明したハンドオーバ動作の実行判断および準備開始判断の条件式に加えて、無線基地局装置101は、以下の式を満たす場合にハンドオーバ動作の中止を判断する。ただし、制御値Qは正の値である。
(サービングセルの受信電力+サービングセルのオフセットOST1+ヒステリシスHS+制御値Q)<(周辺セルの受信電力+周辺セルのオフセットOST2)
As a specific example of the communication quality between the radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus in the sequences shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101 sets a handover cancel condition using the conditional expression of event A3. To do. That is, in addition to the conditional expression for determining whether to execute the handover operation and determining whether to start preparation described with reference to the sequences shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the radio base station apparatus 101 determines whether to cancel the handover operation when the following expression is satisfied. . However, the control value Q is a positive value.
(Receiving power of serving cell + offset OST1 of serving cell + hysteresis HS + control value Q) <(received power of neighboring cell + offset OST2 of neighboring cell)
 この式において、制御値Qを正の値に設定すると、ハンドオーバ中止条件の示す通信品質は、ハンドオーバ準備条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質となる。この場合、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理開始時と比べて、通信品質が制御値Q相当分以上良くなっている場合に、ハンドオーバ動作を中止すべきであると判断する。すなわち、制御値Qを正の値に設定する場合、無線端末装置202の電波環境の好転に対して適切にハンドオーバ動作を中止することが可能となる。 In this equation, when the control value Q is set to a positive value, the communication quality indicated by the handover cancellation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition. In this case, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation should be stopped when the communication quality is improved by an amount corresponding to the control value Q or more compared to when the preparation process for the handover operation is started. That is, when the control value Q is set to a positive value, the handover operation can be appropriately stopped with respect to the improvement of the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202.
 また、制御値Qをゼロに設定すると、ハンドオーバ準備条件およびハンドオーバ中止条件が等しくなり、ハンドオーバの準備処理および中止処理が繰り返されてしまうが、制御値Qを正の値に設定することにより、このような事象の発生を防ぐことができる。 Further, when the control value Q is set to zero, the handover preparation condition and the handover cancellation condition become equal, and the handover preparation process and the cancellation process are repeated. However, by setting the control value Q to a positive value, The occurrence of such an event can be prevented.
 なお、ハンドオーバ中止条件は、通信品質に関する条件である場合に限らず、たとえば経過時間であってもよい。 Note that the handover cancel condition is not limited to a condition related to communication quality, and may be an elapsed time, for example.
 具体的には、図44において、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を上位装置へ送信する(ステップS407)前後においてタイマをスタートさせ、タイマの満了をハンドオーバ中止条件とする。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす前にスタートさせておいたタイマが満了すると、無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきでなく、準備処理の行なわれたハンドオーバ動作を中止すべきであると判断し、上位装置へハンドオーバ中止通知を送信する(ステップS414)。 Specifically, in FIG. 44, the radio base station apparatus 101A starts a timer before and after transmitting a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the host apparatus (step S407), To do. Then, when the timer started before the handover execution condition expires, the radio base station apparatus 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202, and cancels the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that it should be, and a handover stop notification is transmitted to the host device (step S414).
 図45は、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいてハンドオーバ動作に要する時間の内訳の一例を示す図である。 FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating an example of a breakdown of time required for the handover operation in the wireless communication system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
 図45を参照して、ハンドオーバ動作に要する時間は、たとえば無線端末装置202における電力測定処理の間隔に相当する時間T201と、TTTに相当する時間T202と、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理時間T203と、ハンドオーバ動作の実行時間、すなわちRRCコネクション再構成指示が送信されてからハンドオーバ完了通知が送信されるまでの時間T204との和である。 Referring to FIG. 45, the time required for the handover operation includes, for example, time T201 corresponding to the interval of power measurement processing in radio terminal apparatus 202, time T202 corresponding to TTT, preparation processing time T203 for handover operation, and handover This is the sum of the operation execution time, that is, the time T204 from when the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction is transmitted to when the handover completion notification is transmitted.
 なお、TTTは、前述のように、レポートオン状態へ遷移してから無線端末装置202が一定間隔で測定結果通知を送信するための周期である。このため、時間T201および時間T202は重複する場合がある。図45では、説明を簡単にするために、レポートオン状態へ遷移してから無線端末装置202が最初に送信した測定結果通知に基づいてハンドオーバ動作が行なわれる場合を示している。 Note that, as described above, TTT is a period for the wireless terminal device 202 to transmit measurement result notifications at regular intervals after transition to the report-on state. For this reason, time T201 and time T202 may overlap. FIG. 45 shows a case where the handover operation is performed based on the measurement result notification first transmitted by the wireless terminal device 202 after the transition to the report-on state in order to simplify the description.
 時間T201は、たとえば200msであり、CQIレポートを利用する場合には5msとなる。また、時間T202は、たとえば0ms~2000msである。また、時間T203は、たとえば50ms~150msである。また、時間T204は、たとえば40msである。 The time T201 is 200 ms, for example, and 5 ms when using the CQI report. The time T202 is, for example, 0 ms to 2000 ms. The time T203 is, for example, 50 ms to 150 ms. The time T204 is 40 ms, for example.
 時間T201および時間T202については、ヒステリシスHS、オフセットOSTおよびTTT等のパラメータを調整することによって短縮することが可能である。 Time T201 and time T202 can be shortened by adjusting parameters such as hysteresis HS, offset OST, and TTT.
 そして、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、前述のようにハンドオーバ動作の準備処理およびハンドオーバ動作の実行判断処理を行なう構成により、時間T203を理想的には0msまで短縮することが可能である。 In the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention, time T203 is ideally reduced to 0 ms by the configuration for performing the handover operation preparation process and the handover operation execution determination process as described above. Is possible.
 すなわち、”Too Late HO”の発生頻度が高く、かつハンドオーバ動作のタイミングを早めるためのパラメータ調整がこれ以上困難な場合に、たとえば前述の制御値Pを大きくする。これにより、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理のタイミングを早め、適切なハンドオーバ動作を実現することができる。 That is, when the frequency of occurrence of “Too Late HO” is high and parameter adjustment for advancing the timing of the handover operation is more difficult than this, for example, the control value P described above is increased. Thereby, the timing of the preparation process for the handover operation can be advanced and an appropriate handover operation can be realized.
 ところで、非特許文献1に記載されるような不適切なハンドオーバ動作が行なわれると、通信システムにおいて、通信断および通信トラフィックの増大等、種々の問題が生じる。 By the way, when an inappropriate handover operation as described in Non-Patent Document 1 is performed, various problems such as communication disconnection and increase in communication traffic occur in the communication system.
 これに対して、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ要求部21は、自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置への無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を行なう要求を他の無線基地局装置に対して行なう。ハンドオーバ指示部22は、上記要求に対する他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けて、無線端末装置202に対して自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を行なう指示を与える。そして、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、上記応答を受けて、自己の無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質に関する所定のハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされていない場合には、無線端末装置202に対する上記指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する。 On the other hand, in the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the handover request unit 21 performs handover of the radio terminal apparatus 202 from its own radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus. A request for operation is made to another radio base station apparatus. In response to the response from the other radio base station apparatus to the request, the handover instruction unit 22 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to perform a handover operation from its own radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus. give. In response to the above response, the handover instruction unit 22 responds to the wireless terminal device 202 when a predetermined handover execution condition regarding communication quality between the wireless base station device 101 and the wireless terminal device 202 is not satisfied. Cancel or hold the above instructions.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な通信システムを構築することができる。 With such a configuration, the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed prior to determining whether to execute the handover operation, so that “Too Late HO” can be suppressed. In addition, unlike the case of adjusting the parameters of the handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence probability of “Too Early HO” from increasing. That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good communication system can be constructed.
 したがって、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 Therefore, in the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention, communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus.
 また、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、上記応答を受けて、自己の無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質に関する所定のハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされていない場合には、無線端末装置202に対してハンドオーバ動作の指示を与えず、ハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を他の無線基地局装置に通知する。 Further, in the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the handover instruction unit 22 receives the above response and performs a predetermined communication quality between the radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio terminal apparatus 202. When the handover execution condition is not satisfied, the wireless terminal device 202 is not instructed to perform the handover operation, and notifies the other wireless base station device that the handover operation is to be stopped.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の中止に伴い、たとえば他の無線基地局装置においてハンドオーバ動作のために確保した各種リソースの解放を適切に行なうことができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately release various resources secured for the handover operation in other radio base station apparatuses, for example, when the handover operation is stopped.
 また、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、他の無線基地局装置から上記応答を受けて、自己の無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質に関する所定のハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされていない場合には、ハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされるまで待機する。そして、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、ハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされると無線端末装置202に対してハンドオーバ指示を与える。 Further, in the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the handover instruction unit 22 receives the response from the other radio base station apparatus and receives its own radio base station apparatus 101 and radio terminal apparatus 202. If a predetermined handover execution condition regarding the communication quality is not satisfied, the system waits until the handover execution condition is satisfied. Then, the handover instruction unit 22 gives a handover instruction to the wireless terminal device 202 when the handover execution condition is satisfied.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了した後、無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たした時点で、無線端末装置202に対してハンドオーバ動作の指示を与えることができるため、最適なタイミングでハンドオーバ動作を実行することができる。 With such a configuration, after the preparation process for the handover operation is completed, when the communication quality between the radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies the handover execution condition, the handover operation is performed on the radio terminal apparatus 202. Since an instruction can be given, a handover operation can be executed at an optimal timing.
 また、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、ハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされるまで待機し、ハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされる前に通信品質に関するハンドオーバ中止条件が満たされた場合には、無線端末装置202に対してハンドオーバ指示を与えず、ハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を他の無線基地局装置に通知する。 Also, in the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the handover instruction unit 22 waits until the handover execution condition is satisfied, and before the handover execution condition is satisfied, the handover stop condition regarding the communication quality is set. When the condition is satisfied, a handover instruction is not given to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and the other radio base station apparatus is notified that the handover operation is to be stopped.
 このような構成により、タイマの満了等の適切なタイミング、または電波環境に応じた適切な条件でハンドオーバ動作を中止し、ハンドオーバ動作の待機時間の増大を防ぐことができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作の中止に伴い、たとえば他の無線基地局装置においてハンドオーバ動作のために確保した各種リソースの解放を適切に行なうことができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to stop the handover operation at an appropriate timing such as the expiration of the timer or an appropriate condition according to the radio wave environment and prevent an increase in the standby time of the handover operation. Also, with the cancellation of the handover operation, for example, it is possible to appropriately release various resources reserved for the handover operation in other radio base station apparatuses.
 また、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ要求部21は、自己の無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質に関する所定のハンドオーバ準備条件が満たされる場合に、ハンドオーバ要求を他の無線基地局装置に対して行なう。ハンドオーバ準備条件の示す通信品質は、ハンドオーバ実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 Further, in the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the handover request unit 21 satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition regarding the communication quality between its own radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio terminal apparatus 202. In this case, a handover request is made to another radio base station apparatus. The communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の基準となる通信品質よりも緩やかな条件で前もってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行なうことができる。 With such a configuration, the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation.
 また、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ準備条件の示す通信品質は、ハンドオーバ実行条件の示す通信品質と同等である。 In the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition is equivalent to the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の準備期間において無線端末装置の電波環境が好転し、実行する必要のなくなったハンドオーバ動作を適切に中止することができるため、不要となったハンドオーバ動作の実行を抑制することができる。 With such a configuration, the radio environment of the wireless terminal device improves during the preparation period for the handover operation, and the handover operation that is no longer necessary can be stopped appropriately, thereby suppressing the execution of the unnecessary handover operation. can do.
 また、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ準備条件の示す通信品質は、ハンドオーバ実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて同等であるかまたは良い品質であり、ハンドオーバ中止条件の示す通信品質は、ハンドオーバ準備条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 Further, in the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition is equal to or better than the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition, and the handover is canceled. The communication quality indicated by the condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の準備期間において無線端末装置の電波環境が好転し、実行する必要のなくなったハンドオーバ動作を適切に中止することができるため、不要となったハンドオーバ動作の実行を抑制することができる。 With such a configuration, the radio environment of the wireless terminal device improves during the preparation period for the handover operation, and the handover operation that is no longer necessary can be stopped appropriately, thereby suppressing the execution of the unnecessary handover operation. can do.
 また、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、ハンドオーバ動作の中止を他の無線基地局装置に通知する際、自己の無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質が条件を満たしていない旨を他の無線基地局装置に通知する。 Moreover, in the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention, when the handover instruction unit 22 notifies other radio base station apparatuses of the suspension of the handover operation, the radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio base station apparatus The other radio base station apparatus is notified that the communication quality between the terminal apparatuses 202 does not satisfy the condition.
 これにより、他の無線基地局装置は、たとえばハンドオーバ動作に関するパラメータ設定の誤り等によってハンドオーバ動作が中止された事象との区別をつけることができる。このため、他の無線基地局装置における新たなパラメータ設定処理等の余計な処理の発生を防ぎ、かつハンドオーバ動作のために確保した各種リソースの解放を適切に行なうことができる。 Thereby, the other radio base station apparatus can distinguish from an event in which the handover operation is stopped due to, for example, an error in parameter setting related to the handover operation. For this reason, it is possible to prevent occurrence of unnecessary processes such as new parameter setting processes in other radio base station apparatuses and appropriately release various resources reserved for the handover operation.
 また、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ条件調整部23は、ハンドオーバ実行条件の示す通信品質およびハンドオーバ準備条件の示す通信品質の差を調整する。 Moreover, in the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the handover condition adjustment unit 23 adjusts the difference between the communication quality indicated by the handover execution condition and the communication quality indicated by the handover preparation condition.
 このような構成により、”Too Late HO”等の不適切なハンドオーバ動作の発生頻度、およびハンドオーバ動作の中止頻度の調整が可能となり、より適切なハンドオーバ動作を実現することができる。 Such a configuration makes it possible to adjust the frequency of inappropriate handover operations such as “Too Late HO” and the frequency of canceling handover operations, thereby realizing more appropriate handover operations.
 また、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ条件調整部23は、ハンドオーバ指示部22によってハンドオーバ動作の中止が他の無線基地局装置に通知された回数に基づいて上記通信品質の差を調整する。 Further, in the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the handover condition adjustment unit 23 is based on the number of times that the handover instruction unit 22 is notified of the cancellation of the handover operation to another radio base station apparatus. Adjust the communication quality difference.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の中止頻度の観点から、”Too Late HO”等の不適切なハンドオーバ動作の発生頻度、およびハンドオーバ動作の中止頻度を適切に調整することができる。 Such a configuration makes it possible to appropriately adjust the frequency of inappropriate handover operations such as “Too Late HO” and the frequency of cancellation of handover operations from the viewpoint of the frequency of handover operation cancellation.
 また、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、ハンドオーバ情報取得部24は、無線端末装置202による自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作が不適切であった回数を取得する。そして、ハンドオーバ条件調整部23は、ハンドオーバ情報取得部24によって取得された回数に基づいて上記通信品質の差を調整する。 Also, in the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the handover information acquisition unit 24 performs a handover operation from the radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus by the radio terminal apparatus 202. Get the number of times it was inappropriate. The handover condition adjusting unit 23 adjusts the communication quality difference based on the number of times acquired by the handover information acquiring unit 24.
 このような構成により、”Too Late HO”等の不適切なハンドオーバ動作の発生頻度の観点から、不適切なハンドオーバ動作の発生頻度およびハンドオーバ動作の中止頻度を適切に調整することができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately adjust the frequency of inappropriate handover operations and the frequency of canceling handover operations from the viewpoint of the frequency of inappropriate handover operations such as “Too Late HO”.
 なお、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置では、無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質として、サービングセルの受信電力および周辺セルの受信電力の関係、あるいはCQIレポートの値を用いる構成であるとしたが、これに限定するものではない。無線端末装置202の受信電力に限らず、パイロット信号の誤り率等、無線基地局装置および無線端末装置間の通信品質を示す何らかの指標を用いる構成であればよい。また、イベントA3以外のイベントの条件式を利用する構成であってもよい。また、下り方向の通信品質に限らず、上り方向の通信品質を利用する構成であってもよい。 Note that, in the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the communication quality between the radio base station apparatus 101 and the radio terminal apparatus 202 includes the relationship between the reception power of the serving cell and the reception power of the neighboring cells, or the CQI. Although the configuration uses report values, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not limited to the received power of the wireless terminal device 202, and any configuration that uses some index indicating communication quality between the wireless base station device and the wireless terminal device, such as an error rate of a pilot signal, may be used. Moreover, the structure using the conditional expression of events other than event A3 may be sufficient. Further, the communication quality is not limited to the downlink communication quality, and may be configured to use the uplink communication quality.
 その他の構成および動作は第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Since other configurations and operations are the same as those of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will not be repeated here.
 <シミュレーション>
 本願発明者らは、本発明の第1の実施の形態および第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置の動作についてシミュレーションを行った。以下、本シミュレーションの内容および結果について詳細に説明する。
<Simulation>
The inventors of the present application performed a simulation on the operation of the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the present invention. Hereinafter, the contents and results of this simulation will be described in detail.
 図46は、シミュレーション対象の無線通信システムにおける無線環境パラメータを示す図である。 FIG. 46 is a diagram showing radio environment parameters in the radio communication system to be simulated.
 図46を参照して、本シミュレーションの対象となる無線通信システムの無線環境パラメータは、「基地局数/セクタ数」、「基地局間距離」、「パスロス」すなわち無線基地局装置が送信する無線信号の送信電力と、無線端末装置における当該無線信号の受信電力との差、「基地局アンテナゲイン」すなわち無指向性を0dBとした場合の指向性によるゲイン、「端末アンテナゲイン」、「シャドウィング」すなわち無線端末装置202における無線信号の受信電力の時間的な変動量、「シャドウィングの相関距離」すなわちシャドウィングの2地点間の相関が0.5となるときの当該2地点間の距離、「シャドウィングの相関値」、「基地局アンテナ指向性パターン」、「キャリア周波数/帯域」、「基地局の総送信電力」、「アンテナ構成」および「基地局-端末間の最小距離」である。 Referring to FIG. 46, the radio environment parameters of the radio communication system to be the subject of this simulation are “number of base stations / number of sectors”, “distance between base stations”, “path loss”, that is, radio transmitted by the radio base station apparatus. The difference between the transmission power of the signal and the reception power of the radio signal in the radio terminal device, the “base station antenna gain”, that is, the gain by directivity when the non-directivity is 0 dB, “terminal antenna gain”, “shadowing” "That is, the amount of time fluctuation of the reception power of the radio signal in the wireless terminal device 202," the shadowing correlation distance ", that is, the distance between the two points when the correlation between the two points of shadowing is 0.5, “Correlation value of shadowing”, “Base station antenna directivity pattern”, “Carrier frequency / band”, “Total transmission power of base station”, “Ante Configuration "and" base station - the minimum distance "between terminals.
 具体的には、この無線通信システムにおけるマクロ基地局数は19であり、マクロ基地局が3つのセクタを有するものとして総セクタ数は57であり、ピコ基地局数は1であり、ピコ基地局が1つのセクタを有するものとして総セクタ数は1である。マクロ基地局間の距離は500mであり、マクロ基地局およびピコ基地局間の距離は250mである。マクロ基地局についてのパスロスは、マクロ基地局および無線端末装置間の距離をd[m]として15.3+37.6×log10(d)[dB]であり、ピコ基地局についてのパスロスは、ピコ基地局および無線端末装置間の距離をd[m]として30.6+36.7×log10(d)[dB]である。マクロ基地局のアンテナゲインは15dBiであり、ピコ基地局のアンテナゲインは5dBiである。無線端末装置202のアンテナゲインはマクロ基地局およびピコ基地局のいずれにおいても0dBiである。マクロ基地局についてのシャドウィングの標準偏差は8dBであり、ピコ基地局についてのシャドウィングの標準偏差は10dBである。マクロ基地局についてのシャドウィングの相間距離は25mであり、ピコ基地局についてのシャドウィングの相間距離は25mである。マクロ基地局についてのシャドウィングの相関値はセル間で0.5であり、セクタ間で1であり、ピコ基地局についてのシャドウィングの相関値はセル間で0.5である。マクロ基地局のアンテナの指向性パターンは3次元のパターンであり、ピコ基地局のアンテナは無指向性である。マクロ基地局の送信側のキャリア周波数および帯域はそれぞれ2.0GHzおよび10MHzであり、ピコ基地局の送信側のキャリア周波数および帯域はそれぞれ2.0GHzおよび10MHzである。マクロ基地局の総送信電力は46dBmであり、ピコ基地局の総送信電力は30dBmである。マクロ基地局の有する送信アンテナは1本であり、ピコ基地局の有する送信アンテナは1本であり、無線端末装置202の有する受信アンテナは2本である。その他、無線基地局装置および無線端末装置間の最小距離等のパラメータは、3GPP TR 36.814に従う。 Specifically, the number of macro base stations in this wireless communication system is 19, the total number of sectors is 57, assuming that the macro base station has three sectors, the number of pico base stations is 1, and the pico base station Has one sector and the total number of sectors is one. The distance between the macro base stations is 500 m, and the distance between the macro base station and the pico base station is 250 m. The path loss for the macro base station is 15.3 + 37.6 × log 10 (d) [dB] where the distance between the macro base station and the wireless terminal device is d [m], and the path loss for the pico base station is pico The distance between the base station and the wireless terminal device is 30.6 + 36.7 × log 10 (d) [dB] where d [m] is the distance. The antenna gain of the macro base station is 15 dBi, and the antenna gain of the pico base station is 5 dBi. The antenna gain of the wireless terminal device 202 is 0 dBi in both the macro base station and the pico base station. The standard deviation of shadowing for the macro base station is 8 dB, and the standard deviation of shadowing for the pico base station is 10 dB. The shadowing interphase distance for the macro base station is 25 m, and the shadowing interphase distance for the pico base station is 25 m. The shadowing correlation value for a macro base station is 0.5 between cells and 1 between sectors, and the shadowing correlation value for a pico base station is 0.5 between cells. The directivity pattern of the macro base station antenna is a three-dimensional pattern, and the pico base station antenna is omnidirectional. The carrier frequency and band on the transmission side of the macro base station are 2.0 GHz and 10 MHz, respectively, and the carrier frequency and band on the transmission side of the pico base station are 2.0 GHz and 10 MHz, respectively. The total transmission power of the macro base station is 46 dBm, and the total transmission power of the pico base station is 30 dBm. The macro base station has one transmission antenna, the pico base station has one transmission antenna, and the wireless terminal device 202 has two reception antennas. Other parameters such as the minimum distance between the radio base station apparatus and the radio terminal apparatus conform to 3GPP TR 36.814.
 図47は、シミュレーション対象の無線通信システムにおける電力測定処理(Measurement)のパラメータを示す図である。 FIG. 47 is a diagram showing parameters of power measurement processing (Measurement) in the wireless communication system to be simulated.
 図47を参照して、本シミュレーションでは、プロファイルとしてセット1~セット5を設けている。セット1からセット5の順番で、ハンドオーバ動作のタイミングが早くなり、セット5においてハンドオーバ動作のタイミングが最も早くなる。また、電力測定処理のパラメータは、端末移動速度、基地局負荷率、TTT、イベントA3のオフセットOST、電力測定間隔すなわち測定結果通知の更新周期、およびフィルタリング係数αである。 Referring to FIG. 47, in this simulation, set 1 to set 5 are provided as profiles. In the order from set 1 to set 5, the timing of the handover operation is advanced, and in set 5, the timing of the handover operation is the earliest. The parameters of the power measurement process are the terminal moving speed, the base station load factor, TTT, the offset OST of the event A3, the power measurement interval, that is, the measurement result notification update cycle, and the filtering coefficient α.
 ここで、フィルタリング係数αについて説明する。無線端末装置202は、たとえば、時刻(t-1)において測定した受信電力M(t-1)、時刻(t-1)より後の時刻tにおいて測定した受信電力M(t)およびフィルタリング係数αから、以下の式で表される受信電力MR(t)を算出する。
MR(t)=(1-2-α/4)×MR(t-1)+2-α/4×M(t)
Here, the filtering coefficient α will be described. For example, the wireless terminal device 202 receives the received power M (t−1) measured at time (t−1), the received power M (t) measured at time t after time (t−1), and the filtering coefficient α. From this, the received power MR (t) expressed by the following equation is calculated.
MR (t) = (1-2− α / 4 ) × MR (t−1) + 2− α / 4 × M (t)
 無線端末装置202は、受信電力MR(t)を示す測定結果通知を無線基地局装置へ送信する。 The wireless terminal device 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating the received power MR (t) to the wireless base station device.
 フィルタリング係数αを大きくする場合には、より過去の受信電力が測定結果通知に反映されることになるため、ハンドオーバ動作のタイミングが遅くなる。一方、フィルタリング係数αを小さくする場合には、より最近の受信電力が測定結果通知に反映されることになるため、ハンドオーバ動作のタイミングが早くなる。 When the filtering coefficient α is increased, the past received power is reflected in the measurement result notification, so the timing of the handover operation is delayed. On the other hand, when the filtering coefficient α is reduced, the more recent received power is reflected in the measurement result notification, so that the timing of the handover operation is advanced.
 セット1~セット5において、無線端末装置202の移動速度は時速3km,30km,60km,120kmであり、基地局負荷率は100%である。また、セット1において、TTTは480msであり、オフセットOSTは3dBであり、電力測定間隔は200msであり、フィルタリング係数αは4である。セット2において、TTTは160msであり、オフセットOSTは3dBであり、電力測定間隔は200msであり、フィルタリング係数αは4である。セット3において、TTTは160msであり、オフセットOSTは2dBであり、電力測定間隔は200msであり、フィルタリング係数αは1である。セット4において、TTTは80msであり、オフセットOSTは1dBであり、電力測定間隔は200msであり、フィルタリング係数αは1である。セット5において、TTTは40msであり、オフセットOSTは-1dBであり、電力測定間隔は200msであり、フィルタリング係数αは0である。 In set 1 to set 5, the moving speed of the wireless terminal device 202 is 3 km, 30 km, 60 km, and 120 km per hour, and the base station load factor is 100%. In the set 1, the TTT is 480 ms, the offset OST is 3 dB, the power measurement interval is 200 ms, and the filtering coefficient α is 4. In set 2, the TTT is 160 ms, the offset OST is 3 dB, the power measurement interval is 200 ms, and the filtering coefficient α is 4. In set 3, the TTT is 160 ms, the offset OST is 2 dB, the power measurement interval is 200 ms, and the filtering coefficient α is 1. In set 4, the TTT is 80 ms, the offset OST is 1 dB, the power measurement interval is 200 ms, and the filtering coefficient α is 1. In set 5, TTT is 40 ms, offset OST is −1 dB, power measurement interval is 200 ms, and filtering coefficient α is 0.
 ここでは、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による、CQIレポートを用いてハンドオーバ動作の実行判断を行なう動作を「CQIによるHO判断」と称し、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置における、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておく動作を「HO準備短縮」と称する。 Here, the operation of performing the handover operation execution determination using the CQI report by the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention is referred to as “HO determination by CQI”, and the second embodiment of the present invention. In the radio base station apparatus according to the above embodiment, the operation for completing the handover operation preparation process prior to the execution determination of the handover operation is referred to as “HO preparation shortening”.
 本シミュレーションでは、無線基地局装置は、CQIレポートの値が所定値以下になると、ハンドオーバ動作の実行を判断する。具体的には、無線基地局装置は、CQIレポートの値が1以下になるとハンドオーバ動作を実行する。 In this simulation, when the value of the CQI report becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value, the radio base station apparatus determines to execute the handover operation. Specifically, the radio base station apparatus executes a handover operation when the value of the CQI report becomes 1 or less.
 また、無線基地局装置は、最も新しい測定結果通知において受信電力が最も大きい無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先として選択する。 Also, the radio base station apparatus selects the radio base station apparatus with the highest received power as the handover destination in the newest measurement result notification.
 また、無線基地局装置は、無線端末装置202から、CQIレポートを10msに1回受信し、測定結果通知を200msに1回受信する。 Also, the radio base station apparatus receives a CQI report from the radio terminal apparatus 202 once every 10 ms and a measurement result notification once every 200 ms.
 また、HO準備短縮を行なった場合におけるハンドオーバ動作の準備処理時間は10msであり、HO準備短縮を行なわない場合におけるハンドオーバ動作の準備処理時間は、図2に示すように、X2インタフェースを用いずにS1インタフェースを用いるハンドオーバ動作を想定し、100msである。 In addition, the handover operation preparation processing time when the HO preparation shortening is performed is 10 ms, and the handover operation preparation processing time when the HO preparation shortening is not performed is as shown in FIG. 2 without using the X2 interface. Assuming a handover operation using the S1 interface, it is 100 ms.
 図48は、ハンドオーバ失敗確率のシミュレーション結果を示す図である。 FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a simulation result of a handover failure probability.
 図48を参照して、CQIによるHO判断は行なわず、HO準備短縮を行なう構成では、ハンドオーバ失敗(HOF)の発生確率を、CQIによるHO判断を行なわず、かつHO準備短縮を行なわない構成と比べてほとんどのケースで減少させることができる。 Referring to FIG. 48, in the configuration in which the HO determination by CQI is not performed and the HO preparation is shortened, the occurrence probability of handover failure (HOF) is determined without the HO determination by CQI and the HO preparation is not shortened. It can be reduced in most cases.
 また、CQIによるHO判断を行ない、HO準備短縮を行なわない構成では、CQIによるHO判断は行なわず、HO準備短縮を行なう構成と比べて、ハンドオーバ失敗(HOF)の発生確率を大幅に減少させることができる。 Further, in the configuration in which the HO determination based on the CQI is performed and the HO preparation is not shortened, the HO determination based on the CQI is not performed, and the probability of occurrence of a handover failure (HOF) is greatly reduced as compared with the configuration in which the HO preparation is shortened. Can do.
 また、CQIによるHO判断を行ない、かつHO準備短縮を行なう構成では、CQIによるHO判断を行ない、HO準備短縮を行なわない構成と比べて、ハンドオーバ失敗(HOF)の発生確率をさらに減少させることができる。 Further, in the configuration in which the HO determination by CQI is performed and the HO preparation is shortened, the probability of occurrence of a handover failure (HOF) can be further reduced as compared with the configuration in which the HO determination by CQI is performed and the HO preparation is not shortened. it can.
 図49は、”Ping Pong HO”の発生確率のシミュレーション結果を示す図である。 FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a simulation result of the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO”.
 図49を参照して、CQIによるHO判断は行なわず、HO準備短縮を行なう構成では、”Ping Pong HO”の発生確率は、CQIによるHO判断を行なわず、かつHO準備短縮を行なわない構成と比べて一部に若干の増加が見られる。これは、ハンドオーバ失敗(HOF)が回避されていることによるものである。 Referring to FIG. 49, in the configuration in which HO determination is not performed by CQI and HO preparation is shortened, the probability of occurrence of “Ping Pong HO” is the configuration in which HO determination by CQI is not performed and HO preparation is not shortened. There is a slight increase in some areas. This is because handover failure (HOF) is avoided.
 また、CQIによるHO判断を行ない、HO準備短縮を行なわない構成では、CQIによるHO判断を行なわず、かつHO準備短縮を行なわない構成と比べて、セット1およびセット2における”Ping Pong HO”の発生確率が増加している。これは、ハンドオーバ失敗(HOF)を回避することによるものである。一方、セット3~5では、不要なハンドオーバ動作が回避されることにより、”Ping Pong HO”の発生確率が減少している。 In addition, in the configuration in which the HO determination by CQI is not performed and the HO preparation shortening is not performed, the “Ping Pong HO” in the set 1 and set 2 is compared with the configuration in which the HO determination by CQI is not performed and the HO preparation is not shortened. The probability of occurrence has increased. This is due to avoiding handover failure (HOF). On the other hand, in the sets 3 to 5, the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO” is reduced by avoiding unnecessary handover operation.
 また、CQIによるHO判断を行ない、かつHO準備短縮を行なう構成では、CQIによるHO判断を行ない、HO準備短縮を行なわない構成と比べて、”Ping Pong  HO”の発生確率が増加している。これは、HO準備短縮により、ハンドオーバ失敗(HOF)がさらに回避されることによるものである。 In addition, in the configuration in which the HO determination by CQI is performed and the HO preparation is shortened, the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO” is increased as compared with the configuration in which the HO determination is performed by CQI and the HO preparation is not shortened. This is because handover failure (HOF) is further avoided by shortening HO preparation.
 図50は、図48に示すハンドオーバ失敗確率、および図49に示す”Ping Pong HO”の発生確率の和を示す図である。 FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the sum of the handover failure probability shown in FIG. 48 and the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO” shown in FIG.
 図50を参照して、CQIによるHO判断は行なわず、HO準備短縮を行なう構成、CQIによるHO判断を行ない、HO準備短縮を行なわない構成およびCQIによるHO判断を行ない、かつHO準備短縮を行なう構成のいずれでも、CQIによるHO判断を行なわず、かつHO準備短縮を行なわない構成と比べて、ハンドオーバ失敗確率および”Ping Pong HO”の発生確率の和がほとんどのケースで減少している。 Referring to FIG. 50, the HO determination is not performed by CQI, the HO preparation is shortened, the HO determination is performed by CQI, the HO preparation is not shortened, the HO determination is performed by CQI, and the HO preparation is shortened. In any of the configurations, the sum of the failure probability of handover and the occurrence probability of “Ping Pong HO” is reduced in most cases as compared with the configuration in which the HO determination by the CQI is not performed and the HO preparation is not shortened.
 図51は、本発明の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置による改善対象を示す図である。 FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an improvement target by the radio base station apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention.
 図51は、サービングセルにおける電波環境よりもターゲットセルにおける電波環境の方が良くなってから、実際にハンドオーバ動作が完了するまでの経過時間の内訳を示している。 FIG. 51 shows a breakdown of the elapsed time from when the radio wave environment in the target cell becomes better than that in the serving cell until the handover operation is actually completed.
 ハンドオーバ動作に要する時間は、たとえば無線端末装置202における電力測定処理の間隔に相当する時間T211と、TTTに相当する時間T212と、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理時間T213と、ハンドオーバ動作の実行時間、すなわちRRCコネクション再構成指示が送信されてからハンドオーバ完了通知が送信されるまでの時間T214との和である。 The time required for the handover operation is, for example, a time T211 corresponding to an interval of power measurement processing in the wireless terminal device 202, a time T212 corresponding to TTT, a preparation time T213 for handover operation, and an execution time of the handover operation, that is, RRC This is the sum of the time T214 from when the connection reconfiguration instruction is transmitted to when the handover completion notification is transmitted.
 なお、TTTは、前述のように、レポートオン状態へ遷移してから無線端末装置202が一定間隔で測定結果通知を送信するための周期である。このため、時間T211および時間T212は重複する場合がある。図51では、説明を簡単にするために、レポートオン状態へ遷移してから無線端末装置202が最初に送信した測定結果通知に基づいてハンドオーバ動作が行なわれる場合を示している。 Note that, as described above, TTT is a period for the wireless terminal device 202 to transmit measurement result notifications at regular intervals after transition to the report-on state. For this reason, time T211 and time T212 may overlap. FIG. 51 shows a case where a handover operation is performed based on a measurement result notification first transmitted by the wireless terminal device 202 after the transition to the report-on state, for the sake of simplicity.
 時間T211は、たとえば200msであり、CQIレポートを利用する場合には最短で5msとなる。また、時間T212は、たとえば40ms~1000msである。また、時間T213は、たとえば40ms~100msである。また、時間T214は、たとえば50msである。 The time T211 is, for example, 200 ms, and is 5 ms at the shortest when the CQI report is used. The time T212 is 40 ms to 1000 ms, for example. The time T213 is, for example, 40 ms to 100 ms. The time T214 is 50 ms, for example.
 本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置における「CQIによるHO判断」による改善対象は、時間T211および時間T212であり、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置における「HO準備短縮」による改善対象は、時間T213である。 Improvement targets by the “HO judgment based on CQI” in the radio base station apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention are time T211 and time T212, and the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention The target of improvement by “shortening HO preparation” is time T213.
 ハンドオーバ動作に要する時間のうち、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理時間である時間T213が占める割合は、全体の10%~20%程度である。しかしながら、CQIによるHO判断を行なう構成では、時間T211を短縮することができるため、時間T213の上記割合が高くなる。HO準備短縮を行なえば、時間T213を10msに短縮することができるため、特にCQIによるHO判断と組み合わせた構成において、ハンドオーバ失敗の発生確率を大きく改善することができる。 Of the time required for the handover operation, the proportion of the time T213, which is the preparation processing time for the handover operation, is about 10% to 20% of the whole. However, in the configuration in which the HO determination based on CQI is performed, the time T211 can be shortened, and thus the ratio of the time T213 is increased. If the HO preparation is shortened, the time T213 can be shortened to 10 ms, so that the probability of occurrence of a handover failure can be greatly improved particularly in the configuration combined with the HO determination by CQI.
 なお、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理は、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の後に行なわれる。このため、HO準備短縮を行っても、”Ping Pong HO”の発生を減らす、すなわち不要なハンドオーバ動作の実行回数を減らす、という効果は直接的には得られない。 Note that the preparation process for the handover operation is performed after the execution of the handover operation is determined. For this reason, even if the HO preparation is shortened, the effect of reducing the occurrence of “Ping Pong HO”, that is, reducing the number of unnecessary handover operations is not directly obtained.
 以上のように、本シミュレーションから、本発明の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置により、無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作が適切に制御され、無線通信システムにおける通信の安定化が図られることが確認された。 As described above, it is confirmed from the simulation that the radio base station apparatus according to the embodiment of the present invention appropriately controls the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus and stabilizes communication in the radio communication system. It was.
 <第3の実施の形態>
 上述した第2の実施の形態では、ハンドオーバ動作において無線端末装置202の通信接続先が無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替わる場合について説明した。これに対して、第3の実施の形態では、無線基地局装置101A,101Bだけでなくコアネットワークにおける上位装置が切り替えられる場合について説明する。以下で説明する内容以外は第2の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムと同様である。なお、上位装置としては、例えば、MME(Mobility Management Entity)またはS-GW(Serving Gateway)が挙げられる。
<Third Embodiment>
In the above-described second embodiment, the case where the communication connection destination of the wireless terminal device 202 is switched from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B in the handover operation has been described. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a case will be described in which not only the radio base station devices 101A and 101B but also higher-level devices in the core network are switched. The contents other than those described below are the same as those of the wireless communication system according to the second embodiment. Examples of the host device include MME (Mobility Management Entity) or S-GW (Serving Gateway).
 以下、本発明の第3の実施の形態として、ハンドオーバ動作においてMMEの切り替えが必要な場合と、ハンドオーバ動作においてS-GWの切り替えが必要な場合と、ハンドオーバ動作においてMMEおよびS-GWの切り替えが必要な場合とに分けて説明する。 Hereinafter, as a third embodiment of the present invention, switching of MME is required in handover operation, switching of S-GW is required in handover operation, switching of MME and S-GW in handover operation. The explanation is divided into cases where necessary.
(a)MMEの切り替えが必要な場合
 [構成および基本動作]
 図52は、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。
(A) When MME switching is required [Configuration and basic operation]
FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
 図52を参照して、無線通信システム401は、たとえば3GPPで規格化されたLTE(Long Term Evolution)に従う移動体通信システムであり、無線基地局装置101A,101Bを備える。ここでは、無線端末装置202が、無線基地局装置101Aと通信中である状態から移動し、通信相手すなわち通信接続先が無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替わるハンドオーバ動作が行われる場合を想定する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aがサービング基地局に相当し、無線基地局装置101Bが周辺基地局(ターゲット基地局とも称する)に相当する場合を想定する。 Referring to FIG. 52, a radio communication system 401 is a mobile communication system according to LTE (Long Term Evolution) standardized by 3GPP, for example, and includes radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B. Here, when the wireless terminal device 202 moves from a state where it is communicating with the wireless base station device 101A, a handover operation is performed in which the communication partner, that is, the communication connection destination is switched from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B. Is assumed. That is, it is assumed that the radio base station apparatus 101A corresponds to a serving base station and the radio base station apparatus 101B corresponds to a peripheral base station (also referred to as a target base station).
 図52では、2つの無線基地局装置101A,101Bを代表的に示しているが、さらに多数の無線基地局装置が設けられてもよい。無線通信システム401は、さらに、コアネットワーク301に設けられたS-GW161(ゲートウェイ装置)と、MME162A,162B(通信制御装置)と、P-GW(Packet Data Network Gateway)163とを備える。 FIG. 52 representatively shows two radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B, but a larger number of radio base station apparatuses may be provided. The wireless communication system 401 further includes an S-GW 161 (gateway device), MMEs 162A and 162B (communication control device), and a P-GW (Packet Data Network Gateway) 163 provided in the core network 301.
 無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101A,101B、S-GW161、および、P-GW163を介してIP網302(上位ネットワーク)におけるサーバ等と通信コネクションを確立し、たとえばIP(Internet Protocol)パケットを含む通信データを送受信する。 The wireless terminal device 202 establishes a communication connection with a server or the like in the IP network 302 (upper network) via the wireless base station devices 101A and 101B, the S-GW 161, and the P-GW 163, for example, an IP (Internet Protocol) packet. Communication data including
 S-GW161は、無線基地局装置101A,101BとIP網302との間に接続されている。S-GW161は、無線基地局装置101A,101B経由で無線端末装置202から受信した通信データをP-GW163経由でIP網302へ送信するとともに、IP網302におけるサーバ等からP-GW163経由で受信した通信データを無線基地局装置101A,101B経由で無線端末装置202へ送信する。 The S-GW 161 is connected between the radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B and the IP network 302. The S-GW 161 transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A and 101B to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and also received via the P-GW 163 from a server or the like in the IP network 302. The transmitted communication data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A and 101B.
 MME162Aは、無線通信システム401における無線基地局装置101Aおよび無線端末装置202等を管理する。MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aとの間で制御メッセージを送受信する。また、MME162Bは、無線通信システム401における無線基地局装置101Bおよび無線端末装置202等を管理する。MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bとの間で制御メッセージを送受信する。 The MME 162A manages the wireless base station device 101A, the wireless terminal device 202, and the like in the wireless communication system 401. The MME 162A transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Further, the MME 162B manages the radio base station apparatus 101B and the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the radio communication system 401. The MME 162B transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101B.
 無線基地局装置101A,101Bは、S-GW161およびP-GW163を介してIP網302との間で通信データを送受信する。無線基地局装置101A,101BおよびS-GW161は、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 Radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B transmit and receive communication data to and from IP network 302 via S-GW 161 and P-GW 163. The radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
 無線基地局装置101AおよびMME162Aは、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。無線基地局装置101BおよびMME162Bも同様に、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatus 101A and the MME 162A exchange various data via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line. Similarly, wireless base station apparatus 101B and MME 162B exchange various data via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by dotted lines. .
 MME162A,162BおよびS-GW161は、論理的なインタフェースであるS11インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S11インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The MMEs 162A, 162B and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface which is a logical interface.
 S-GW161およびP-GW163は、論理的なインタフェースであるS5インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S5インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The S-GW 161 and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
 MME162AおよびMME162Bは、論理的なインタフェースであるS10インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S10インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The MME 162A and the MME 162B mutually exchange various information via the S10 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S10 interface which is a logical interface.
 [動作]
 次に、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム401におけるハンドオーバ動作の流れについて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされる場合と、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされない場合とに分けて説明する。
[Operation]
Next, the handover operation flow in the wireless communication system 401 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described separately when the handover operation execution condition is satisfied and when the handover operation execution condition is not satisfied. To do.
(i)実行条件が満たされる場合
 図53は、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされる状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
(I) When Execution Condition is Satisfied FIG. 53 is a sequence of handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for handover operation is satisfied in the wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
 図53を参照して、まず、無線端末装置202は、受信電力の測定結果を示す測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する。たとえば、無線端末装置202は、受信電力の測定を定期的に行ない、無線基地局装置101Aとの通信状態が悪くなった場合、および無線基地局装置101A以外の他の無線基地局装置との通信状態が良くなった場合に、測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS421)。 53, first, wireless terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating a measurement result of received power to wireless base station apparatus 101A. For example, the wireless terminal device 202 periodically measures the received power, when the communication state with the wireless base station device 101A deteriorates, and with other wireless base station devices other than the wireless base station device 101A When the state becomes better, a measurement result notification is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S421).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、セルIDごとの測定結果を示す測定情報を取得し、図示しない記憶部に保存する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ準備条件を満たす場合には、ハンドオーバの準備処理を行なうべきであると判断し、周辺セル情報を参照してたとえば無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先として決定する(ステップS422)。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID and stores it in a storage unit (not shown). Then, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that a handover preparation process should be performed, and refers to neighboring cell information, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101B is determined as the handover destination (step S422).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を、対応する上位装置であるMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS423)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A that is a corresponding higher-level apparatus (step S423).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、MMEの切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162Aは、ハンドオーバ要求に示されている無線基地局装置101Bが自己の管理対象であるか否かを判断する(ステップS424)。 Next, the MME 162A determines whether it is necessary to switch the MME based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162A determines whether or not the radio base station apparatus 101B indicated in the handover request is its management target (step S424).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Bが自己の管理対象ではないことから、無線基地局装置101Bを管理するMME162Bへ無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS425)。 Next, since the radio base station apparatus 101B is not a management target, the MME 162A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162B that manages the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S425).
 次に、MME162Bは、MME162Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、S-GW161の切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161と、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161とが異なるか否かを判断する。ここでは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161と、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161とが同じであることから、MME162Bは、S-GW161の切り替えを行う必要がないと判断する(ステップS426)。 Next, the MME 162B determines whether it is necessary to switch the S-GW 161 based on the handover request received from the MME 162A. Specifically, the MME 162B includes an S-GW 161 connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW 161 connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Whether or not is different. Here, the S-GW 161 connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302 and the S-GW 161 connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302 are the same. Therefore, the MME 162B determines that there is no need to switch the S-GW 161 (step S426).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bへハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS427)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S427).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162Bからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MME162Bへ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS428)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162B, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162B (step S428).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bから受信したハンドオーバ応答をMME162Aへ転送する(ステップS429)。 Next, the MME 162B transfers the handover response received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S429).
 ここで、無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作の準備期間中に無線基地局装置101Aに当該無線端末装置202宛のパケットである対象パケットが蓄積されている場合、または、S-GW161から対象パケットが新たに受信された場合、無線基地局装置101Aがこの対象パケットを無線基地局装置101Bへ転送するデータフォワーディングが行われる。 Here, when the target packet that is a packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is accumulated in the wireless base station device 101A during the preparation period for the handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202, or the target packet is newly received from the S-GW 161. In this case, data forwarding is performed in which the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B.
 このため、MME162Aは、MME162Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信すると、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路すなわち論理的なパス(以下、データフォワーディングパスとも称する)の確立要求をS-GW161へ送信する(ステップS430)。 Therefore, when the MME 162A receives the handover response from the MME 162B, the MME 162A sends a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path (hereinafter also referred to as a data forwarding path) to the S-GW 161. Transmit (step S430).
 次に、S-GW161は、MME162Aからデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161は、自己を介する無線基地局装置101Aと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的なパスを確立する。そして、S-GW161は、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS431)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162A, the S-GW 161 establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161 establishes a logical path between radio base station apparatus 101A and radio base station apparatus 101B through itself. Then, the S-GW 161 transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162A (step S431).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する。そして、以上のようなハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が実行されて、無線基地局装置101AがMME162Aからハンドオーバ指示を受信すると、無線基地局装置101Aは、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを開始する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己に蓄積されているかまたはS-GW161から新たに受信する当該無線端末装置202宛のパケットである対象パケットをS-GW161経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する(ステップS432)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. When the above-described handover operation preparation processing is executed and the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover instruction from the MME 162A, the radio base station apparatus 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet, which is a packet addressed to the radio terminal apparatus 202 that is stored in itself or newly received from the S-GW 161, to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161. (Step S432).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己および無線端末装置202間の通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たしているか否かを判断する。そして、通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する(ステップS433)。なお、上述した準備条件の示す通信品質は、実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. If the communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed (step S433). Note that the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition described above is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)を送信する(ステップS434)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S434).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aへ自己の通信状態等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS435)。この状態通知に、データフォワーディングにおいて、無線基地局装置101Bが転送パケットを処理するための、パケットのシリアル番号等の情報が含まれる。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status and the like to the MME 162A (step S435). This state notification includes information such as the serial number of the packet for the radio base station apparatus 101B to process the transfer packet in data forwarding.
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信した状態通知を、MME162Bへ転送する(ステップS436)。 Next, the MME 162A transfers the status notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162B (step S436).
 次に、MME162Bは、MME162Aから転送された状態通知に対する状態通知応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS437)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a status notification response to the status notification transferred from the MME 162A to the MME 162A (step S437).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bへ無線端末装置202との通信内容等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS438)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a status notification indicating the content of communication with the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101B (step S438).
 次に、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101BへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete)を送信する(ステップS439)。 Next, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B. (Step S439).
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aから転送されたパケットを無線端末装置202へ送信する。ここで、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信した状態通知の示すシリアル番号等を用いて、パケットの順序制御を行なう。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits the packet transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202. Here, radio base station apparatus 101B performs packet sequence control using the serial number or the like indicated by the status notification received from radio base station apparatus 101A.
 また、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Bへパケットを送信し、無線基地局装置101Bは、当該対象パケットをS-GW161へ送信する。 Further, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a packet to the wireless base station device 101B, and the wireless base station device 101B transmits the target packet to the S-GW 161.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、MME162Bへハンドオーバ完了通知を送信する(ステップS440)。このハンドオーバ完了通知に、S-GW161に対するパス切り替え要求が含まれる。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162B (step S440). This handover completion notification includes a path switching request to the S-GW 161.
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bから受信したハンドオーバ完了通知をMME162Aへ転送する(ステップS441)。 Next, the MME 162B transfers the handover completion notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S441).
 次に、MME162Aは、MME162Bから受信したハンドオーバ完了通知に対するハンドオーバ完了通知応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS442)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a handover completion notification response to the handover completion notification received from the MME 162B to the MME 162B (step S442).
 次に、MME162Bは、上記パス切り替え要求を含むベアラ変更要求をS-GW161へ送信する(ステップS443)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a bearer change request including the path switching request to the S-GW 161 (step S443).
 そして、S-GW161は、MME162Bからベアラ変更要求を受信して、パスの切り替え処理を行なう、すなわち、当該無線端末装置202宛の対象パケットの送信先を無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替える。 The S-GW 161 receives the bearer change request from the MME 162B, and performs path switching processing. That is, the transmission destination of the target packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B. Switch to.
 次に、S-GW161は、ベアラ変更要求に対する、パス切り替え応答を含むベアラ変更応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS444)。 Next, the S-GW 161 transmits a bearer change response including a path switching response to the bearer change request to the MME 162B (step S444).
 そして、S-GW161は、エンドマーカが付された対象パケットを無線基地局装置101Aへ送信し、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Aへの送信を終了して、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Bへの送信を開始する。 Then, the S-GW 161 transmits the target packet with the end marker attached to the radio base station apparatus 101A, ends the transmission of the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101A, and then transmits the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B. Start sending.
 また、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aを経由していないS-GW161からの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を保留し、蓄積しておく。 Also, the radio base station apparatus 101B suspends and accumulates transmission of the target packet from the S-GW 161 not via the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S-GW161から受信したエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットをS-GW161経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する。このとき、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する対象パケットの最後を、このエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットとする。 Then, the wireless base station device 101A transfers the target packet with the end marker received from the S-GW 161 to the wireless base station device 101B via the S-GW 161. At this time, the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the end of the target packet to be transferred to the radio base station apparatus 101B as the target packet with the end marker.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aからエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットを受信して、無線基地局装置101Aによる自己へのデータフォワーディングが完了したことを認識する。そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから転送された対象パケットをすべて無線端末装置202へ送信した後、蓄積していたS-GW161からの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を開始する。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the target packet with the end marker from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and recognizes that the data forwarding to itself by the radio base station apparatus 101A has been completed. The radio base station apparatus 101B transmits all the target packets transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits the accumulated target packets from the S-GW 161 to the radio terminal apparatus 202. To start.
 次に、MME162Aは、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS445)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S445).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aから端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162Aへ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS446)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162A, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162A (step S446).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから端末情報解放完了通知を受信すると、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求をS-GW161へ送信する(ステップS447)。 Next, when receiving the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, the MME 162A transmits a data forwarding path deletion request to the S-GW 161 (step S447).
 次に、S-GW161は、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、データフォワーディングパスの削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS448)。 Next, when receiving the data forwarding path deletion request, the S-GW 161 deletes the data forwarding path and transmits a data forwarding path deletion response to the MME 162A (step S448).
(ii)実行条件が満たされない場合
 図54は、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされない状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
(Ii) Case where Execution Condition is Not Satisfied FIG. 54 is a sequence of the handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for the handover operation is not satisfied in the radio communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
 図54を参照して、ステップS451からステップS462までの動作は、図53に示すステップS421からステップS432までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 54, the operation from step S451 to step S462 is the same as the operation from step S421 to step S432 shown in FIG. 53, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aからハンドオーバ指示を受信すると、自己および無線端末装置202間の通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たしているか否かを判断する。そして、通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たさない場合には、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきでなく、準備処理の行われたハンドオーバ動作を中止すべきであると判断する(ステップS463)。 Next, upon receiving a handover instruction from the MME 162A, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. If the communication quality does not satisfy the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 and should stop the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that there is (step S463).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aへハンドオーバ動作を中止するためのハンドオーバ中止通知を送信する(ステップS464)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification for canceling the handover operation to the MME 162A (step S464).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信したハンドオーバ中止通知をMME162Bへ転送する(ステップS465)。 Next, the MME 162A transfers the handover cancellation notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162B (step S465).
 次に、MME162Bは、ハンドオーバ中止通知を受信すると、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS466)。 Next, when the MME 162B receives the handover cancellation notification, the MME 162B transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S466).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162Bから端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162Bへ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS467)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162B, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162B (step S467).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bから端末情報解放完了通知を受信すると、ハンドオーバ中止応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS468)。 Next, upon receiving the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101B, the MME 162B transmits a handover stop response to the MME 162A (step S468).
 次に、MME162Aは、MME162Bから受信したハンドオーバ中止応答を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS469)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits the handover stop response received from the MME 162B to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S469).
 次に、MME162Aは、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求をS-GW161へ送信する(ステップS470)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a data forwarding path deletion request to the S-GW 161 (step S470).
 次に、S-GW161は、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、データフォワーディングパスの削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS471)。 Next, when receiving the data forwarding path deletion request, the S-GW 161 deletes the data forwarding path, and transmits a data forwarding path deletion response to the MME 162A (step S471).
(b)S-GWの切り替えが必要な場合
 [構成および基本動作]
 図55は、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。
(B) When switching of S-GW is necessary [Configuration and basic operation]
FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
 図55を参照して、無線通信システム402は、図52に示す無線通信システム401と同様に、たとえば3GPPで規格化されたLTEに従う移動体通信システムであり、無線基地局装置101Aと、無線基地局装置101Bとを備える。ここでは、図52に示す場合と同様に、無線端末装置202が、無線基地局装置101Aと通信中である状態から移動し、通信相手すなわち通信接続先が無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替わるようにハンドオーバ動作が行われる場合を想定する。 Referring to FIG. 55, radio communication system 402 is a mobile communication system according to LTE standardized by, for example, 3GPP, similar to radio communication system 401 shown in FIG. 52, and includes radio base station apparatus 101A and radio base station A station apparatus 101B. Here, similarly to the case shown in FIG. 52, the wireless terminal device 202 moves from a state where it is communicating with the wireless base station device 101A, and the communication partner, that is, the communication connection destination is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device. Assume that a handover operation is performed so as to switch to 101B.
 無線通信システム402は、さらに、コアネットワーク301に設けられたS-GW161A,161B(ゲートウェイ装置)と、MME162(通信制御装置)と、P-GW163とを備える。 The wireless communication system 402 further includes S- GWs 161A and 161B (gateway devices), an MME 162 (communication control device), and a P-GW 163 provided in the core network 301.
 S-GW161Aは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されている。S-GW161Aは、無線基地局装置101A経由で無線端末装置202から受信した通信データをP-GW163経由でIP網302へ送信するとともに、IP網302におけるサーバ等からP-GW163経由で受信した通信データを無線基地局装置101A経由で無線端末装置202へ送信する。 The S-GW 161A is connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302. The S-GW 161A transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101A to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and communication received from the server in the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163. Data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101A.
 S-GW161Bは、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されている。S-GW161Bは、無線基地局装置101B経由で無線端末装置202から受信した通信データをP-GW163経由でIP網302へ送信するとともに、IP網302におけるサーバ等からP-GW163経由で受信した通信データを無線基地局装置101B経由で無線端末装置202へ送信する。 The S-GW 161B is connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. The S-GW 161B transmits the communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101B to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and the communication received via the P-GW 163 from a server or the like in the IP network 302. Data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101B.
 MME162は、無線通信システム402における無線基地局装置101A,101Bおよび無線端末装置202等を管理する。MME162は、無線基地局装置101A,101Bとの間で制御メッセージを送受信する。 The MME 162 manages the radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B and the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the radio communication system 402. The MME 162 transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B.
 無線基地局装置101Aは、S-GW161AおよびP-GW163を介してIP網302との間で通信データを送受信する。無線基地局装置101Bは、S-GW161BおよびP-GW163を介してIP網302との間で通信データを送受信する。 The radio base station apparatus 101A transmits / receives communication data to / from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161A and the P-GW 163. The radio base station apparatus 101B transmits / receives communication data to / from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161B and the P-GW 163.
 無線基地局装置101AおよびS-GW161Aは、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。無線基地局装置101BおよびS-GW161Bは、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatus 101A and the S-GW 161A exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface. The radio base station apparatus 101B and the S-GW 161B exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
 無線基地局装置101A,101BおよびMME162は、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatuses 101A and 101B and the MME 162 exchange various data with each other via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line. .
 MME162およびS-GW161A,161Bは、論理的なインタフェースであるS11インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S11インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The MME 162 and the S- GWs 161A and 161B exchange various pieces of information with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface, which is a logical interface.
 S-GW161A,161BおよびP-GW163は、論理的なインタフェースであるS5インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S5インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The S- GWs 161A and 161B and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
 [動作]
 次に、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム402におけるハンドオーバ動作の流れについて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされる場合と、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされない場合とに分けて説明する。
[Operation]
Next, the flow of the handover operation in the wireless communication system 402 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described separately when the handover operation execution condition is satisfied and when the handover operation execution condition is not satisfied. To do.
(i)実行条件が満たされる場合
 図56は、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされる状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
(I) When Execution Condition is satisfied FIG. 56 is a sequence of a handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for the handover operation is satisfied in the wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
 図56を参照して、ステップS481からステップS483までの動作は、図53に示すステップS421からステップS423までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Referring to FIG. 56, the operation from step S481 to step S483 is the same as the operation from step S421 to step S423 shown in FIG. 53, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、MME162の切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162は、ハンドオーバ要求に示されている無線基地局装置101Bが自己の管理対象であるか否かを判断する。ここでは、無線基地局装置101BがMME162の管理対象であることから、MME162は、MMEの切り替えを行う必要がないと判断する(ステップS484)。 Next, the MME 162 determines whether it is necessary to switch the MME 162 based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162 determines whether or not the radio base station apparatus 101B indicated in the handover request is its own management target. Here, since the radio base station apparatus 101B is a management target of the MME 162, the MME 162 determines that there is no need to switch the MME (step S484).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、S-GWの切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162は、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWとが異なるか否かを判断する(ステップS485)。 Next, the MME 162 determines whether or not it is necessary to perform S-GW switching based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162 includes an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Whether or not is different (step S485).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Aと、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Bとが異なることから、上位ネットワークから無線端末装置202宛の下りパケット、および、無線端末装置202から上位ネットワークへの上りパケットが、S-GW161Bを経由可能となるように、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路の作成をS-GW161Bへ要求する(ステップS486)。 Next, the MME 162 includes an S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Because of the difference, the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus are configured so that downlink packets addressed to the radio terminal apparatus 202 from the upper network and uplink packets from the radio terminal apparatus 202 to the upper network can pass through the S-GW 161B. The S-GW 161B is requested to create a communication path with the terminal 101B (step S486).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、MME162から通信経路の作成要求を受信して、自己を経由するP-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路を作成し、通信経路の作成応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS487)。 Next, the S-GW 161B receives the communication path creation request from the MME 162, creates a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B passing through the S-GW 161B, and sends a communication path creation response to the MME 162. (Step S487).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bへハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS488)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S488).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162からハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MME162へ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS489)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162 (step S489).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信すると、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路すなわち論理的なパス(以下、データフォワーディングパスとも称する)の確立要求をS-GW161Bへ送信する(ステップS490)。 Next, when receiving a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, the MME 162 issues a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path (hereinafter also referred to as a data forwarding path). The data is transmitted to the S-GW 161B (step S490).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、MME162からデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161Bは、S-GW161AとS-GW161Bとの間の論理的な通信経路、および、S-GW161Bと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的な通信経路を確立する。そして、S-GW161Bは、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS491)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161B establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161B establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and S-GW 161B, and a logical communication path between S-GW 161B and radio base station apparatus 101B. Then, the S-GW 161B transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S491).
 次に、MME162は、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路の確立要求をS-GW161Aへ送信する(ステップS492)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a communication path establishment request for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface to the S-GW 161A (step S492).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、MME162からデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161Aは、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路を確立する。そして、S-GW161Aは、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS493)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161A establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161A establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the S-GW 161A transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S493).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを開始する(ステップS494)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the base transceiver station 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface (step S494).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己および無線端末装置202間の通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たしているか否かを判断する。そして、通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する(ステップS495)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. If the communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed (step S495).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信する(ステップS496)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S496).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162へ自己の通信状態等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS497)。この状態通知に、データフォワーディングにおいて、無線基地局装置101Bが転送パケットを処理するための、パケットのシリアル番号等の情報が含まれる。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status and the like to the MME 162 (step S497). This state notification includes information such as the serial number of the packet for the radio base station apparatus 101B to process the transfer packet in data forwarding.
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bへ無線端末装置202との通信内容等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS498)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a status notification indicating communication contents and the like with the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101B (step S498).
 次に、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101BへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を送信する(ステップS499)。 Next, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification to the wireless base station device 101B (step S499).
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aから転送されたパケットを無線端末装置202へ送信する。ここで、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信した状態通知の示すシリアル番号等を用いて、パケットの順序制御を行なう。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits the packet transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202. Here, radio base station apparatus 101B performs packet sequence control using the serial number or the like indicated by the status notification received from radio base station apparatus 101A.
 また、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Bへパケットを送信し、無線基地局装置101Bは、当該対象パケットをS-GW161Bへ送信する。 Also, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a packet to the wireless base station device 101B, and the wireless base station device 101B transmits the target packet to the S-GW 161B.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、MME162へハンドオーバ完了通知を送信する(ステップS500)。このハンドオーバ完了通知に、S-GW161Bに対するパス切り替え要求が含まれる。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162 (step S500). This handover completion notification includes a path switching request for the S-GW 161B.
 次に、MME162は、上記パス切り替え要求を含むベアラ変更要求をS-GW161Bへ送信する(ステップS501)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a bearer change request including the above path switching request to the S-GW 161B (step S501).
 そして、S-GW161Bは、MME162からベアラ変更要求を受信して、パスの切り替え処理を行なう、すなわち、当該無線端末装置202宛の対象パケットの送信先を無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替える。 The S-GW 161B receives the bearer change request from the MME 162, and performs path switching processing. That is, the transmission destination of the target packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B. Switch to.
 次に、S-GW161Bは、ベアラ変更要求に対する、パス切り替え応答を含むベアラ変更応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS502)。 Next, the S-GW 161B transmits a bearer change response including a path switching response to the bearer change request to the MME 162 (step S502).
 そして、S-GW161Aは、エンドマーカが付された対象パケットを無線基地局装置101Aへ送信し、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Aへの送信を終了して、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Bへの送信を開始する。 Then, the S-GW 161A transmits the target packet with the end marker attached thereto to the radio base station apparatus 101A, terminates the transmission of the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B. Start sending.
 また、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aを経由していないS-GW161Bからの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を保留し、蓄積しておく。 Also, the radio base station apparatus 101B suspends and accumulates transmission of the target packet from the S-GW 161B not via the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S-GW161Aから受信したエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットをS-GW161AおよびS-GW161B経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する。このとき、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する対象パケットの最後を、このエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットとする。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet with the end marker received from the S-GW 161A to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B. At this time, the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the end of the target packet to be transferred to the radio base station apparatus 101B as the target packet with the end marker.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aからエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットを受信して、無線基地局装置101Aによる自己へのデータフォワーディングが完了したことを認識する。そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから転送された対象パケットをすべて無線端末装置202へ送信した後、蓄積していたS-GW161Bからの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を開始する。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the target packet with the end marker from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and recognizes that the data forwarding to itself by the radio base station apparatus 101A has been completed. The radio base station apparatus 101B transmits all the target packets transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits the accumulated target packets from the S-GW 161B to the radio terminal apparatus 202. To start.
 次に、MME162は、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Aとの間の通信経路の削除をS-GW161Aへ要求する(ステップS503)。 Next, the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161A to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S503).
 次に、MME162は、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS504)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S504).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162から端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162へ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS505)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S505).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、MME162から通信経路の削除要求を受信して、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Aとの間の通信経路を削除し、通信経路の削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS506)。 Next, the S-GW 161A receives the communication path deletion request from the MME 162, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162 ( Step S506).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aから端末情報解放完了通知を受信すると、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路、すなわちデータフォワーディングパスの削除をS-GW161Aへ要求する(ステップS507)。 Next, when the MME 162 receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, the MME 162 deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, that is, the data forwarding path, from the S-GW 161A. (Step S507).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路の削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS508)。 Next, when receiving the data forwarding path deletion request, the S-GW 161A deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and sends a data forwarding path deletion response to the MME 162. Transmit (step S508).
 次に、MME162は、S-GW161AとS-GW161Bとの間の論理的な通信経路およびS-GW161Bと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的な通信経路、すなわちデータフォワーディングパスの削除をS-GW161Bへ要求する(ステップS509)。 Next, the MME 162 deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B and the logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, the deletion of the data forwarding path. -Request to GW 161B (step S509).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、S-GW161AとS-GW161Bとの間の論理的な通信経路およびS-GW161Bと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的な通信経路の削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS510)。 Next, when the S-GW 161B receives the data forwarding path deletion request, the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B and the logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B. The communication path is deleted, and a data forwarding path deletion response is transmitted to the MME 162 (step S510).
(ii)実行条件が満たされない場合
 図57は、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされない状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
(Ii) Case where Execution Condition is Not Satisfied FIG. 57 is a sequence of a handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for the handover operation is not satisfied in the wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
 図57を参照して、ステップS511からステップS524までの動作は、図56に示すステップS481からステップS494までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Referring to FIG. 57, the operation from step S511 to step S524 is the same as the operation from step S481 to step S494 shown in FIG. 56, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162からハンドオーバ指示を受信すると、自己および無線端末装置202間の通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たしているか否かを判断する。そして、通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たさない場合には、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきでなく、準備処理の行われたハンドオーバ動作を中止すべきであると判断する(ステップS525)。 Next, when receiving the handover instruction from the MME 162, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. If the communication quality does not satisfy the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 and should stop the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that there is (step S525).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162へハンドオーバ中止通知を送信する(ステップS526)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the MME 162 (step S526).
 次に、MME162は、ハンドオーバ中止通知を受信すると、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS527)。 Next, when the MME 162 receives the handover cancellation notification, the MME 162 transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S527).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162から端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162へ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS528)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S528).
 次に、MME162は、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路の削除をS-GW161Bへ要求する(ステップS529)。 Next, the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161B to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S529).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、MME162から通信経路の削除要求を受信して、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路を削除し、通信経路の削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS530)。 Next, the S-GW 161B receives the communication path deletion request from the MME 162, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162 ( Step S530).
 次に、MME162は、S-GW161Bから通信経路の削除応答を受信すると、ハンドオーバ中止応答を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS531)。 Next, when receiving the communication path deletion response from the S-GW 161B, the MME 162 transmits a handover stop response to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S531).
 そして、ステップS532からステップS535までの動作が実行される。これらステップS532からステップS535までの動作は、図56に示すステップS507からステップS510までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Then, the operations from step S532 to step S535 are executed. Since the operations from step S532 to step S535 are the same as the operations from step S507 to step S510 shown in FIG. 56, detailed description will not be repeated here.
(c)MMEおよびS-GWの切り替えが必要な場合
 [構成および基本動作]
 図58は、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。
(C) When switching between MME and S-GW is necessary [Configuration and basic operation]
FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
 図58を参照して、無線通信システム403は、図52に示す無線通信システム401と同様に、たとえば3GPPで規格化されたLTEに従う移動体通信システムであり、無線基地局装置101Aと、無線基地局装置101Bとを備える。ここでは、図52に示す場合と同様に、無線端末装置202が、無線基地局装置101Aと通信中である状態から移動し、通信相手すなわち通信接続先が、無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替わるようにハンドオーバ動作が行われる場合を想定する。 Referring to FIG. 58, radio communication system 403 is a mobile communication system that complies with LTE standardized by 3GPP, for example, similar to radio communication system 401 shown in FIG. A station apparatus 101B. Here, similarly to the case shown in FIG. 52, the wireless terminal device 202 moves from a state in which it is communicating with the wireless base station device 101A, and the communication partner, that is, the communication connection destination is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station. Assume that a handover operation is performed so as to switch to the apparatus 101B.
 無線通信システム403は、さらに、コアネットワーク301に設けられたS-GW161A,161B(ゲートウェイ装置)と、MME162A,162B(通信制御装置)と、P-GW163とを備える。 The wireless communication system 403 further includes S- GWs 161A and 161B (gateway devices), MMEs 162A and 162B (communication control devices), and a P-GW 163 provided in the core network 301.
 無線基地局装置101Aは、S-GW161AおよびP-GW163を介してIP網302との間で通信データを送受信する。無線基地局装置101Bは、S-GW161BおよびP-GW163を介してIP網302との間で通信データを送受信する。 The radio base station apparatus 101A transmits / receives communication data to / from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161A and the P-GW 163. The radio base station apparatus 101B transmits / receives communication data to / from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161B and the P-GW 163.
 無線基地局装置101AおよびS-GW161Aは、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。無線基地局装置101BおよびS-GW161Bは、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatus 101A and the S-GW 161A exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface. The radio base station apparatus 101B and the S-GW 161B exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
 無線基地局装置101AおよびMME162Aは、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatus 101A and the MME 162A exchange various data via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line.
 無線基地局装置101BおよびMME162Bは、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatus 101B and the MME 162B exchange various kinds of information with each other via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line.
 MME162AおよびS-GW161Aは、論理的なインタフェースであるS11インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S11インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。MME162BおよびS-GW161Bは、論理的なインタフェースであるS11インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S11インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The MME 162A and the S-GW 161A exchange various data with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface which is a logical interface. The MME 162B and the S-GW 161B exchange various data with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface which is a logical interface.
 S-GW161A,161BおよびP-GW163は、論理的なインタフェースであるS5インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S5インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The S- GWs 161A and 161B and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
 MME162AおよびMME162Bは、論理的なインタフェースであるS10インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S10インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The MME 162A and the MME 162B mutually exchange various information via the S10 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S10 interface which is a logical interface.
 [動作]
 次に、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム403におけるハンドオーバ動作の流れについて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされる場合と、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされない場合とに分けて説明する。
[Operation]
Next, the flow of the handover operation in the radio communication system 403 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described separately when the handover operation execution condition is satisfied and when the handover operation execution condition is not satisfied. To do.
(i)実行条件が満たされる場合
 図59は、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされる状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
(I) When Execution Condition is satisfied FIG. 59 is a sequence of a handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for the handover operation is satisfied in the wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
 図59を参照して、ステップS541からステップS545までの動作は、図53に示すステップS421からステップS425までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Referring to FIG. 59, the operation from step S541 to step S545 is the same as the operation from step S421 to step S425 shown in FIG. 53, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
 次に、MME162Bは、MME162Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、S-GWの切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWとが異なるか否かを判断する(ステップS546)。 Next, the MME 162B determines whether it is necessary to switch the S-GW based on the handover request received from the MME 162A. Specifically, the MME 162B includes an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Are different from each other (step S546).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Aと、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Bとが異なることから、上位ネットワークから無線端末装置202宛の下りパケット、および、無線端末装置202から上位ネットワークへの上りパケットがS-GW161Bを経由可能となるように、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路の作成をS-GW161Bへ要求する(ステップS547)。 Next, the MME 162B includes an S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Because of the difference, the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B are configured so that downlink packets addressed to the radio terminal apparatus 202 from the higher level network and uplink packets from the radio terminal apparatus 202 to the higher level network can pass through the S-GW 161B. A request is made to the S-GW 161B to create a communication path between them (step S547).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、MME162Bから通信経路の作成要求を受信して、自己を経由するP-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路を作成し、通信経路の作成応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS548)。 Next, the S-GW 161B receives a communication path creation request from the MME 162B, creates a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B passing through the S-GW 161B, and sends a communication path creation response to the MME 162B. (Step S548).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bへハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS549)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S549).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162Bからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MME162Bへ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS550)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162B and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162B (step S550).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信すると、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路すなわち論理的なパス(以下、データフォワーディングパスとも称する)の確立要求をS-GW161Bへ送信する(ステップS551)。 Next, when receiving a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, the MME 162B issues a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path (hereinafter also referred to as a data forwarding path). The data is transmitted to the S-GW 161B (step S551).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、MME162Bからデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161Bは、S-GW161AとS-GW161Bとの間の論理的な通信経路、および、S-GW161Bと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的な通信経路を確立する。そして、S-GW161Bは、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS552)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162B, the S-GW 161B establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161B establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and S-GW 161B, and a logical communication path between S-GW 161B and radio base station apparatus 101B. Then, the S-GW 161B transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162B (step S552).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bから受信したハンドオーバ応答をMME162Aへ転送する(ステップS553)。 Next, the MME 162B transfers the handover response received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S553).
 次に、MME162Aは、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための論理的な通信経路の確立要求をS-GW161Aへ送信する(ステップS554)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a request for establishing a logical communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface to the S-GW 161A (step S554).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、MME162Aからデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161Aは、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路を確立する。そして、S-GW161Aは、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS555)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162A, the S-GW 161A establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161A establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the S-GW 161A transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162A (step S555).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを開始する(ステップS556)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the base transceiver station 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface (step S556).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己および無線端末装置202間の通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たしているか否かを判断する。そして、通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する(ステップS557)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. When the communication quality satisfies the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed (step S557).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信する(ステップS558)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S558).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aへ自己の通信状態等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS559)。この状態通知に、データフォワーディングにおいて、無線基地局装置101Bが転送パケットを処理するための、パケットのシリアル番号等の情報が含まれる。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status to the MME 162A (step S559). This state notification includes information such as the serial number of the packet for the radio base station apparatus 101B to process the transfer packet in data forwarding.
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信した状態通知を、MME162Bへ転送する(ステップS560)。 Next, the MME 162A transfers the status notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162B (step S560).
 次に、MME162Bは、MME162Aから転送された状態通知に対する状態通知応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS561)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a status notification response to the status notification transferred from the MME 162A to the MME 162A (step S561).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bへ無線端末装置202との通信内容等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS562)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a status notification indicating the communication contents and the like with the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101B (step S562).
 次に、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101BへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete)を送信する(ステップS563)。 Next, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) to the wireless base station device 101B. (Step S563).
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aから転送されたパケットを無線端末装置202へ送信する。ここで、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信した状態通知の示すシリアル番号等を用いて、パケットの順序制御を行なう。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits the packet transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202. Here, radio base station apparatus 101B performs packet sequence control using the serial number or the like indicated by the status notification received from radio base station apparatus 101A.
 また、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Bへパケットを送信し、無線基地局装置101Bは、当該対象パケットをS-GW161Bへ送信する。 Also, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a packet to the wireless base station device 101B, and the wireless base station device 101B transmits the target packet to the S-GW 161B.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、MME162Bへハンドオーバ完了通知を送信する(ステップS564)。このハンドオーバ完了通知に、S-GW161Bに対するパス切り替え要求が含まれる。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162B (step S564). This handover completion notification includes a path switching request for the S-GW 161B.
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bから受信したハンドオーバ完了通知をMME162Aへ転送する(ステップS565)。 Next, the MME 162B transfers the handover completion notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S565).
 次に、MME162Aは、MME162Bから受信したハンドオーバ完了通知に対するハンドオーバ完了通知応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS566)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a handover completion notification response to the handover completion notification received from the MME 162B to the MME 162B (step S566).
 次に、MME162Bは、上記パス切り替え要求を含むベアラ変更要求をS-GW161Bへ送信する(ステップS567)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a bearer change request including the above path switching request to the S-GW 161B (step S567).
 そして、S-GW161Bは、MME162Bからベアラ変更要求を受信して、パスすなわち論理的な通信経路の切り替え処理を行なう、すなわち、当該無線端末装置202宛の対象パケットの送信先を無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替える。 Then, the S-GW 161B receives the bearer change request from the MME 162B, and performs a path, that is, a logical communication path switching process, that is, sets the transmission destination of the target packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101A To the radio base station apparatus 101B.
 次に、S-GW161Bは、ベアラ変更要求に対する、パス切り替え応答を含むベアラ変更応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS568)。 Next, the S-GW 161B transmits a bearer change response including a path switching response to the bearer change request to the MME 162B (step S568).
 そして、S-GW161Aは、エンドマーカが付された対象パケットを無線基地局装置101Aへ送信し、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Aへの送信を終了して、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Bへの送信を開始する。 Then, the S-GW 161A transmits the target packet with the end marker attached thereto to the radio base station apparatus 101A, terminates the transmission of the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B. Start sending.
 また、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aを経由していないS-GW161Bからの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を保留し、蓄積しておく。 Also, the radio base station apparatus 101B suspends and accumulates transmission of the target packet from the S-GW 161B not via the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S-GW161Aから受信したエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットをS-GW161AおよびS-GW161B経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する。このとき、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する対象パケットの最後を、このエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットとする。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet with the end marker received from the S-GW 161A to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B. At this time, the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the end of the target packet to be transferred to the radio base station apparatus 101B as the target packet with the end marker.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aからエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットを受信して、無線基地局装置101Aによる自己へのデータフォワーディングが完了したことを認識する。そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから転送された対象パケットをすべて無線端末装置202へ送信した後、蓄積していたS-GW161Bからの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を開始する。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the target packet with the end marker from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and recognizes that the data forwarding to itself by the radio base station apparatus 101A has been completed. The radio base station apparatus 101B transmits all the target packets transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits the accumulated target packets from the S-GW 161B to the radio terminal apparatus 202. To start.
 次に、MME162Aは、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Aとの間の通信経路の削除をS-GW161Aへ要求する(ステップS569)。 Next, the MME 162A requests the S-GW 161A to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S569).
 次に、MME162Aは、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS570)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S570).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aから端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162Aへ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS571)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162A, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162A (step S571).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、MME162Aから通信経路の削除要求を受信して、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Aとの間の通信経路を削除し、通信経路の削除応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS572)。 Next, the S-GW 161A receives a communication path deletion request from the MME 162A, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162A ( Step S572).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから端末情報解放完了通知を受信すると、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路、すなわちデータフォワーディングパスの削除をS-GW161Aへ要求する(ステップS573)。 Next, when the MME 162A receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, the MME 162A deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, that is, the data forwarding path, from the S-GW 161A. (Step S573).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路の削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS574)。 Next, when receiving the data forwarding path deletion request, the S-GW 161A deletes a logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and sends a data forwarding path deletion response to the MME 162A. Transmit (step S574).
 次に、MME162Bは、S-GW161AとS-GW161Bとの間の論理的な通信経路およびS-GW161Bと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的な通信経路、すなわちデータフォワーディングパスの削除をS-GW161Bへ要求する(ステップS575)。 Next, the MME 162B deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B and the logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, the deletion of the data forwarding path. -Request to GW 161B (step S575).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、S-GW161AとS-GW161Bとの間の論理的な通信経路およびS-GW161Bと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的な通信経路の削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS576)。 Next, when the S-GW 161B receives the data forwarding path deletion request, the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B and the logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B. The communication path is deleted, and a data forwarding path deletion response is transmitted to the MME 162B (step S576).
(ii)実行条件が満たされない場合
 図60は、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ動作の実行条件が満たされない状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
(Ii) Case where Execution Condition is Not Satisfied FIG. 60 is a sequence of the handover operation in a situation where the execution condition for the handover operation is not satisfied in the wireless communication system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
 図60を参照して、ステップS581からステップS596までの動作は、図59に示すステップS541からステップS556までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Referring to FIG. 60, the operation from step S581 to step S596 is the same as the operation from step S541 to step S556 shown in FIG. 59, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aからハンドオーバ指示を受信すると、自己および無線端末装置202間の通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たしているか否かを判断する。そして、通信品質がハンドオーバ実行条件を満たさない場合には、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきでなく、準備処理の行われたハンドオーバ動作を中止すべきであると判断する(ステップS597)。 Next, upon receiving a handover instruction from the MME 162A, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the communication quality between itself and the radio terminal apparatus 202 satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. If the communication quality does not satisfy the handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A should not execute the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 and should stop the handover operation for which the preparation process has been performed. It is determined that there is (step S597).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aへハンドオーバ中止通知を送信する(ステップS598)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the MME 162A (step S598).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信したハンドオーバ中止通知をMME162Bへ転送する(ステップS599)。 Next, the MME 162A transfers the handover cancellation notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162B (step S599).
 次に、MME162Bは、ハンドオーバ中止通知を受信すると、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS600)。 Next, when the MME 162B receives the handover cancellation notification, the MME 162B transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S600).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162Bから端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162Bへ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS601)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162B, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162B (step S601).
 次に、MME162Bは、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路の削除をS-GW161Bへ要求する(ステップS602)。 Next, the MME 162B requests the S-GW 161B to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S602).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、MME162Bから通信経路の削除要求を受信して、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路を削除し、通信経路の削除応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS603)。 Next, the S-GW 161B receives the communication path deletion request from the MME 162B, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162B ( Step S603).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bから端末情報解放完了通知を受信すると、ハンドオーバ中止応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS604)。 Next, when receiving the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101B, the MME 162B transmits a handover stop response to the MME 162A (step S604).
 次に、MME162Aは、MME162Bから受信したハンドオーバ中止応答を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS605)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits the handover stop response received from the MME 162B to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S605).
 そして、ステップS606からステップS609までの動作が実行される。これらステップS606からステップS609までの動作は、図59に示すステップS573からステップS576までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Then, the operations from step S606 to step S609 are executed. Since the operations from step S606 to step S609 are the same as the operations from step S573 to step S576 shown in FIG. 59, detailed description will not be repeated here.
 なお、図53、図54、図56、図57、図59および図60に示すシーケンスにおける無線基地局装置101Aおよび無線端末装置202間の通信品質として、CQIレポートの値を利用してもよい。 Note that the value of the CQI report may be used as the communication quality between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the sequences shown in FIGS. 53, 54, 56, 57, 59, and 60.
 ところで、非特許文献1に記載されるような不適切なハンドオーバ動作が行なわれると、無線通信システムにおいて、通信断および通信トラフィックの増大等、種々の問題が生じる。 Incidentally, when an inappropriate handover operation as described in Non-Patent Document 1 is performed, various problems such as communication interruption and increase in communication traffic occur in the wireless communication system.
 これに対して、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム401では、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己から無線基地局装置101Bへの無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を対応のMME162Aへ送信する。また、MME162Aは、ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置101Bが自己の管理対象でない場合には、無線基地局装置101Bを管理するMME162Bへハンドオーバ要求を送信する。また、MME162Bは、受信したハンドオーバ要求を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信し、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信するとMME162Aに応答を送信する。また、MME162Aは、MME162Bから応答を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する。無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、無線端末装置202との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、実行条件が満たされていない場合には、無線端末装置202に対するハンドオーバ動作を行うための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する。 On the other hand, in the radio communication system 401 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the radio base station apparatus 101A issues a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 from itself to the radio base station apparatus 101B. It transmits to corresponding MME162A. Further, when the handover destination radio base station apparatus 101B indicated by the handover request is not the management target of the MME 162A, the MME 162A transmits the handover request to the MME 162B that manages the radio base station apparatus 101B. In addition, the MME 162B transmits the received handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B, and when receiving a response to the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101B, transmits a response to the MME 162A. Further, the MME 162A receives the response from the MME 162B, and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. The radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover instruction, determines whether or not a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied, and if the execution condition is not satisfied, The provision of an instruction for performing a handover operation to the wireless terminal device 202 is stopped or suspended.
 このような構成により、無線基地局装置101Aを管理するMME162Aと、無線基地局装置101Bを管理するMME162Bとが異なる場合であっても、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置202によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置202によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な無線通信システムを構築することができる。したがって、無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 With such a configuration, even when the MME 162A that manages the radio base station apparatus 101A and the MME 162B that manages the radio base station apparatus 101B are different, the preparation process for the handover operation is completed prior to determining whether to perform the handover operation. Therefore, for example, “Too Late HO” in which the timing of handover by the wireless terminal device 202 is too late can be suppressed. Also, unlike when adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, the timing of handover by wireless terminal device 202 is too early to prevent an increase in the occurrence probability of “Too Early HO”. it can. That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good wireless communication system can be constructed. Therefore, the communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202.
 また、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム401では、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202との間の通信品質に関する所定の準備条件が満たされる場合に、ハンドオーバ要求を無線基地局装置101Bに対して送信し、準備条件の示す通信品質は、実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 Also, in the radio communication system 401 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the radio base station apparatus 101A issues a handover request when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied. The communication quality transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101B and indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の基準となる通信品質よりも緩やかな条件で前もってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行なうことができる。また、MME162の切り替えのために必要な情報の送受信を、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理として前もって行うことにより、ハンドオーバ動作に要する時間を大幅に短縮することができる。 With such a configuration, the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation. In addition, the time required for the handover operation can be significantly shortened by performing transmission / reception of information necessary for switching the MME 162 in advance as a preparation process for the handover operation.
 また、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム402では、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己から無線基地局装置101Bへの無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求をMME162へ送信する。また、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aと上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているS-GW161Aと、無線基地局装置101Bと上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているS-GW161Bとが異なる場合には、通信経路作成要求をS-GW161Bへ送信する。また、S-GW161Bは、通信経路作成要求を受信すると、上位ネットワークから送信される無線端末装置202宛の通信データおよび無線端末装置202から送信される上位ネットワークへの通信データを中継可能とする通信経路を作成し、通信経路作成要求に対する通信経路作成応答をMME162へ送信する。また、MME162は、通信経路作成応答を受信すると、無線基地局装置101Bへハンドオーバ要求を送信し、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する。また、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、無線端末装置202との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、実行条件が満たされていない場合には、無線端末装置202に対するハンドオーバ動作を行うための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する。 Also, in the radio communication system 402 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 from itself to the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162. To do. In addition, the MME 162 is configured when the S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the upper network is different from the S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the upper network. Transmits a communication path creation request to the S-GW 161B. In addition, when the S-GW 161B receives the communication path creation request, the S-GW 161B can relay communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 transmitted from the upper network and communication data transmitted from the wireless terminal device 202 to the upper network. A route is created, and a communication route creation response to the communication route creation request is transmitted to the MME 162. Further, when the MME 162 receives the communication path creation response, the MME 162 transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B, and when receiving a response to the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101B, transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. When the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover instruction, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied, and the execution condition is not satisfied. In this case, the provision of an instruction for performing a handover operation to the wireless terminal device 202 is stopped or suspended.
 このような構成により、無線基地局装置101Aと上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているS-GW161Aと、無線基地局装置101Bと上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているS-GW161Bとが異なる場合であっても、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断に先立ってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を完了しておくことができるため、たとえば無線端末装置202によるハンドオーバのタイミングが遅すぎる”Too Late HO”を抑制することができる。また、ハンドオーバ動作のパラメータの調整を行なう場合と異なり、”Too Late HO”を抑制しても、無線端末装置202によるハンドオーバのタイミングが早すぎる”Too Early HO”の発生確率の上昇を防ぐことができる。すなわち、不適切なハンドオーバ動作を抑制し、良好な無線通信システムを構築することができる。したがって、無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を適切に制御することにより、通信の安定化を図ることができる。 With such a configuration, the S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the upper network is different from the S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the upper network. However, since the preparation process for the handover operation can be completed prior to the determination of the execution of the handover operation, for example, it is possible to suppress “Too Late HO” in which the timing of the handover by the wireless terminal device 202 is too late. it can. Also, unlike when adjusting parameters for handover operation, even if “Too Late HO” is suppressed, the timing of handover by wireless terminal device 202 is too early to prevent an increase in the occurrence probability of “Too Early HO”. it can. That is, an inappropriate handover operation can be suppressed and a good wireless communication system can be constructed. Therefore, the communication can be stabilized by appropriately controlling the handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202.
 また、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム402では、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202との間の通信品質に関する所定の準備条件が満たされる場合に、前記ハンドオーバ要求をMME162へ送信し、準備条件の示す通信品質は、実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 Also, in the radio communication system 402 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the radio base station apparatus 101A performs the handover request when a predetermined preparation condition regarding communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is satisfied. Is transmitted to the MME 162, and the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断の基準となる通信品質よりも緩やかな条件で前もってハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行なうことができる。また、S-GW161の切り替えのために必要な情報の送受信を、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理として前もって行うことにより、ハンドオーバ動作に要する時間を大幅に短縮することができる。 With such a configuration, the preparation process for the handover operation can be performed in advance under conditions that are milder than the communication quality that is the basis for determining whether to execute the handover operation. In addition, the time required for the handover operation can be significantly shortened by performing transmission / reception of information necessary for switching the S-GW 161 in advance as a preparation process for the handover operation.
 <第4の実施の形態>
 上述した第2の実施の形態では、ハンドオーバ動作において無線端末装置202の通信接続先が無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替わる場合について説明した。これに対して、第4の実施の形態では、切り替え先すなわちハンドオーバ先の候補が無線基地局装置101Bだけでなく複数存在する場合について説明する。以下で説明する内容以外は第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置と同様である。
<Fourth embodiment>
In the above-described second embodiment, the case where the communication connection destination of the wireless terminal device 202 is switched from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B in the handover operation has been described. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, a case will be described in which there are a plurality of switching destinations, that is, handover destination candidates in addition to the radio base station apparatus 101B. The contents other than those described below are the same as those of the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment.
(a)ハンドオーバ先の候補が複数存在する場合における課題
 まず、ハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置が複数存在する場合における課題について説明する。図61は、ハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置が複数存在する状況の一例を説明するための図であり、図62は、図61に示す状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。
(A) Problems when there are a plurality of handover destination candidates First, problems when there are a plurality of radio base station apparatuses that are handover destination candidates will be described. 61 is a diagram for explaining an example of a situation where there are a plurality of radio base station apparatuses that are handover destination candidates. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of a sequence of handover operations in the situation shown in FIG. is there.
 図61を参照して、無線基地局装置101Aは、セルCAを形成し、セルCA内に存在する無線端末装置202と無線信号を送受信することにより、当該無線端末装置202と通信することが可能である。無線基地局装置101Bは、セルCBを形成し、セルCB内に存在する無線端末装置202と無線信号を送受信することにより、当該無線端末装置202と通信することが可能である。無線基地局装置101Cは、セルCCを形成し、セルCC内に存在する無線端末装置202と無線信号を送受信することにより、当該無線端末装置202と通信することが可能である。 Referring to FIG. 61, radio base station apparatus 101A can communicate with radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming cell CA and transmitting / receiving radio signals to / from radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in cell CA. It is. The radio base station apparatus 101B can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CB and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CB. The radio base station apparatus 101C can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CC and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CC.
 ここでは、無線端末装置202が、セルCA内に位置し、無線基地局装置101Aを通信接続先として選択してから、セルCA、セルCBおよびセルCCの重複領域へ移動した場合を想定する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aがサービング基地局に相当し、無線基地局装置101B,101Cが周辺基地局に相当し、これら無線基地局装置101B,101Cがハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置に該当する場合を想定する。 Here, it is assumed that the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA, moves to the overlapping area of the cell CA, the cell CB, and the cell CC after selecting the wireless base station device 101A as a communication connection destination. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A corresponds to a serving base station, the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C correspond to peripheral base stations, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C serve as handover destination candidates. Assume the case.
 図62を参照して、まず、無線端末装置202は、受信電力の測定結果を示す測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する。この測定結果には、周辺セルの無線基地局装置101B,101Cから送信される無線信号の受信電力の測定結果および無線基地局装置101B,101CのセルIDが含まれている(ステップS611)。 62, first, radio terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating a measurement result of received power to radio base station apparatus 101A. This measurement result includes the measurement results of the received power of the radio signals transmitted from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C in the neighboring cells and the cell IDs of the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C (step S611).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、セルIDごとの測定結果を示す測定情報を取得し、図示しない記憶部に保存する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ準備条件を満たす場合には、ハンドオーバの準備処理を行なうべきであると判断する。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID and stores it in a storage unit (not shown). Then, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover preparation process should be performed when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition.
 このとき、無線基地局装置101Bから送信される無線信号に関する測定結果および無線基地局装置101Cから送信される無線信号に関する測定結果が、いずれもハンドオーバ準備条件を満たす場合がある。このような場合、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置101B,101Cのうち無線端末装置202との間の通信品質がより良い方をハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置として選択する(ステップS612)。 At this time, the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101B and the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101C may both satisfy the handover preparation condition. In such a case, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines, as a handover destination radio base station apparatus, that the communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is better among the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C that are candidates for the handover destination. Select (step S612).
 次に、ステップS612において例えば無線基地局装置101Bがハンドオーバ先として選択された場合、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を上位装置であるMME(Mobility Management Entity)162へ送信する(ステップS613)。 Next, when the radio base station apparatus 101B is selected as a handover destination in step S612, for example, the radio base station apparatus 101A sends a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to an MME (Mobility Management Entity) 162 that is a higher-level apparatus. Transmit (step S613).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、無線基地局装置101Bへ当該ハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS614)。 Next, the MME 162 receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S614).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162からハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MMEへ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS615)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME (step S615).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する(ステップS616)。上記のようにして、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了する(ステップS617)。 Next, the MME 162 receives the handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S616). As described above, the preparation process for the handover operation is completed (step S617).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、新たな測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS618)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S618).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を新たに取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、新たに取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する(ステップS619)。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, when the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition, the radio base station device 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal device 202 should be executed (step S619).
 そして、ステップS620からステップS626までの動作が実行される。これらステップS620からステップS626までの動作は、図41に示すステップS314からステップS320までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Then, the operations from step S620 to step S626 are executed. Since the operations from step S620 to step S626 are the same as the operations from step S314 to step S320 shown in FIG. 41, detailed description will not be repeated here.
 図63は、ハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置が複数存在する状況の一例における課題を説明するための図であり、図64は、図63に示す状況におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスの一例を示す図である。 63 is a diagram for explaining a problem in an example of a situation where there are a plurality of radio base station apparatuses that are handover destination candidates, and FIG. 64 shows an example of a sequence of a handover operation in the situation shown in FIG. FIG.
 図63を参照して、無線端末装置202がセルCA、セルCBおよびセルCCの重複領域内に位置し、無線端末装置202との間の通信品質が最も良い無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了した後に、無線端末装置202がセルCC内へ進入した場合を想定する。この場合、図64に示すような動作が実行される。 Referring to FIG. 63, handover operation to radio base station apparatus 101B having the best communication quality with radio terminal apparatus 202 when radio terminal apparatus 202 is located in the overlapping area of cell CA, cell CB and cell CC Assume that the wireless terminal device 202 enters the cell CC after the preparation process is completed. In this case, an operation as shown in FIG. 64 is executed.
 図64を参照して、まず、ステップS631からステップS638までの動作が実行される。これらステップS631からステップS638までの動作は、図62に示すステップS611からステップS618までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Referring to FIG. 64, first, operations from step S631 to step S638 are executed. Since the operations from step S631 to step S638 are the same as the operations from step S611 to step S618 shown in FIG. 62, detailed description will not be repeated here.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて通信品質を新たに取得する。このとき、無線端末装置202はセルCC内へ進入しており、無線基地局装置101Aにより新たに取得された無線基地局装置101Bおよび無線端末装置202間の通信品質は、所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たしていないとする。この場合、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202の無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバ動作を中止すべきであると判断する(ステップS639)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202. At this time, the wireless terminal device 202 has entered the cell CC, and the communication quality between the wireless base station device 101B and the wireless terminal device 202 newly acquired by the wireless base station device 101A satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. Suppose that it does not meet. In this case, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 to the radio base station apparatus 101B should be stopped (step S639).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162に対して無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバ動作を中止するためのハンドオーバ中止通知を送信する(ステップS640)。そして、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ中止通知を受信して、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Bへ送信する(ステップS641)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification for canceling the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162 (step S640). Then, the MME 162 receives the handover cancellation notification from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S641).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162から端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162へ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS642)。そして、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bから端末情報解放完了通知を受信して、ハンドオーバ中止応答を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS643)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S642). Then, the MME 162 receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a handover stop response to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S643).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、新たに取得した測定結果に基づいて、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。このとき、無線端末装置202は、セルCC内へ進入しているため、無線基地局装置101Cが新たにハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置として選択される(ステップS644)。そして、再びハンドオーバ動作の準備処理(ステップS645からステップS649)が行われる。これらステップS645からステップS649までの動作は、図62に示すステップS613からステップS617までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A selects a handover destination wireless base station device based on the newly acquired measurement result. At this time, since the radio terminal apparatus 202 has entered the cell CC, the radio base station apparatus 101C is newly selected as the handover destination radio base station apparatus (step S644). Then, a handover operation preparation process (steps S645 to S649) is performed again. Since the operations from step S645 to step S649 are the same as the operations from step S613 to step S617 shown in FIG. 62, detailed description will not be repeated here.
 このように、ある周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理の完了後に無線端末装置202が移動することで、当該周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置202の電波状況が悪化する場合が考えられる。このような場合、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理およびハンドオーバ動作の中止処理が繰り返される。 As described above, it is conceivable that the radio terminal apparatus 202 related to the peripheral base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal apparatus 202 after the completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain peripheral base station. In such a case, the handover operation preparation process and the handover operation stop process are repeated.
(b)本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム
 次に、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム404について、ハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置が複数あり、(i)ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置101Aがハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する場合と、(ii)無線端末装置202がハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する場合と、(iii)ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置101Aがハンドオーバ先を選択する場合であって、無線端末装置202とサービング基地局との間の通信品質に関する所定の準備条件が満たされているか否かを判断する準備判断、および、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する実行判断においてCQIレポートおよび受信電力情報の両方を用いる場合とに分けて説明する。
(B) Radio communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention Next, with respect to the radio communication system 404 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, there are a plurality of radio base station apparatuses that are handover destination candidates. (I) when the handover source radio base station apparatus 101A selects the handover destination radio base station apparatus, (ii) when the radio terminal apparatus 202 selects the handover destination radio base station apparatus, and (iii) Preparation determination for determining whether or not a predetermined preparation condition relating to communication quality between the wireless terminal device 202 and the serving base station is satisfied when the handover source wireless base station device 101A selects a handover destination And both the CQI report and the received power information in the execution determination for determining whether or not to execute the handover operation to the neighboring base station. This will be described separately for the case of use.
 再び図61を参照して、本発明の第4の実施の形態では、無線端末装置202が、セルCA内に位置し、無線基地局装置101Aを通信接続先として選択してから、セルCA、セルCBおよびセルCCの重複領域へ移動した状況において、無線基地局装置101B,101Cがハンドオーバ動作の準備条件を満たしている場合を想定する。 Referring to FIG. 61 again, in the fourth embodiment of the present invention, after radio terminal apparatus 202 is located in cell CA and selects radio base station apparatus 101A as a communication connection destination, cell CA, It is assumed that the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C satisfy the preparation conditions for the handover operation in a situation where the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C have moved to the overlapping area of the cell CB and the cell CC.
(i)ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置がハンドオーバ先を選択する場合
 [構成および基本動作]
 図65は、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成を示す図である。
(I) When the handover source radio base station apparatus selects the handover destination [Configuration and Basic Operation]
FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a wireless communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
 図65を参照して、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム404は、たとえば3GPPで規格化されたLTE(Long Term Evolution)に従う移動体通信システムであり、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cを備える。図65では、3つの無線基地局装置を代表的に示しているが、さらに多数の無線基地局装置が設けられてもよい。無線通信システム404は、さらに、コアネットワーク301に設けられたS-GW(Serving Gateway)161(ゲートウェイ装置)と、MME(Mobility Management Entity)162(通信制御装置)と、P-GW(Packet Data Network Gateway)163とを含む。 65, radio communication system 404 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention is a mobile communication system according to LTE (Long Term Evolution) standardized by 3GPP, for example, and includes radio base station apparatus 101A. , 101B, 101C. In FIG. 65, three radio base station apparatuses are representatively shown, but a larger number of radio base station apparatuses may be provided. The wireless communication system 404 further includes an S-GW (Serving Gateway) 161 (gateway device), an MME (Mobility Management Entity) 162 (communication control device) provided in the core network 301, and a P-GW (Packet Data Network). Gateway) 163.
 無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cと、S-GW161と、P-GW163とを介してIP網302におけるサーバ等と通信コネクションを確立し、たとえばIP(Internet Protocol)パケットを含む通信データを送受信する。 The wireless terminal device 202 establishes a communication connection with a server or the like in the IP network 302 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C, the S-GW 161, and the P-GW 163, for example, an IP (Internet Protocol) packet. Send and receive communication data.
 S-GW161は、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101CとIP網302との間に接続されている。S-GW161は、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101C経由で無線端末装置202から受信した通信データをP-GW163経由でIP網302へ送信するとともに、IP網302におけるサーバ等からP-GW163経由で受信した通信データを無線基地局装置101A,101B,101C経由で無線端末装置202へ送信する。 The S-GW 161 is connected between the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C and the IP network 302. The S-GW 161 transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and from the server in the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163. The communication data received in (1) is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, 101C.
 MME162は、無線通信システム401における無線基地局装置101A,101B,101C、および無線端末装置202等を管理する。MME162は、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cとの間で制御メッセージを送受信する。 The MME 162 manages the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C, the radio terminal apparatus 202, and the like in the radio communication system 401. The MME 162 transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C.
 無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cは、S-GW161およびP-GW163を介してIP網302との間で通信データを送受信する。 The radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C transmit and receive communication data to and from the IP network 302 via the S-GW 161 and the P-GW 163.
 無線基地局装置101A,101B,101CおよびS-GW161は、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
 無線基地局装置101A,101B,101CおよびMME162は、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C and the MME 162 transmit and receive communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, to each other via the S1-MME interface, as indicated by dotted lines. Communicate.
 MME162およびS-GW161は、論理的なインタフェースであるS11インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S11インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The MME 162 and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface which is a logical interface.
 S-GW161およびP-GW163は、論理的なインタフェースであるS5インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S5インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The S-GW 161 and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
 (無線基地局装置の詳細な構成)
 また、無線通信システム404の無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cは、いずれも本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置101と同様である。すなわち、図19を参照して、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cは、アンテナ91と、サーキュレータ92と、無線受信部93と、無線送信部94と、信号処理部95と、制御部98とを含む。
(Detailed configuration of radio base station device)
Also, the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C of the radio communication system 404 are all the same as the radio base station apparatus 101 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. That is, referring to FIG. 19, radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C include antenna 91, circulator 92, radio reception unit 93, radio transmission unit 94, signal processing unit 95, and control unit 98. including.
 また、無線通信システム404の無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cの制御部98は、いずれも本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置の制御部98と同様である。すなわち、図40を参照して、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cの制御部98は、ハンドオーバ要求部21と、ハンドオーバ指示部22と、ハンドオーバ条件調整部23と、ハンドオーバ情報取得部24と、端末測定結果取得部25とを有する。 Also, the control unit 98 of each of the radio base station devices 101A, 101B, 101C of the radio communication system 404 is the same as the control unit 98 of the radio base station device according to the second embodiment of the present invention. That is, with reference to FIG. 40, the control unit 98 of the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C includes a handover request unit 21, a handover instruction unit 22, a handover condition adjustment unit 23, a handover information acquisition unit 24, And a terminal measurement result acquisition unit 25.
 ハンドオーバ要求部21は、ハンドオーバ要求を複数の他の無線基地局装置へ送信する。たとえば、無線基地局装置101Aのハンドオーバ要求部21は、無線端末装置202と無線基地局装置101B,101Cとの間でハンドオーバの準備条件が満たされている場合、無線基地局装置101B,101Cの双方に対してハンドオーバ要求を送信する。 The handover request unit 21 transmits a handover request to a plurality of other radio base station devices. For example, the handover request unit 21 of the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that both the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C have a handover preparation condition between the radio terminal apparatus 202 and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C. A handover request is transmitted to.
 ハンドオーバ指示部22は、ハンドオーバ要求に対する他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けて、この応答に対応する他の無線基地局装置の中からハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。たとえば、無線基地局装置101Aのハンドオーバ要求部21が無線基地局装置101B,101Cへハンドオーバ要求を送信し、無線基地局装置101B,101Cが無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ動作の実行が可能であることを示す応答を送信した場合、無線基地局装置101Aのハンドオーバ指示部22は、無線基地局装置101B,101Cをハンドオーバ先の候補として、これら無線基地局装置101B,101Cの中からハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。 The handover instruction unit 22 receives a response from another radio base station apparatus to the handover request, and selects a handover destination radio base station apparatus from other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to this response. For example, the handover request unit 21 of the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C can execute a handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101A. Is transmitted, the handover instruction unit 22 of the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C as handover destination candidates, and selects the handover destination radio base station from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C. Select a station device.
 具体的には、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、無線基地局装置101B,101Cから送信される無線信号の無線端末装置202における受信電力の測定結果を取得して、この測定結果に基づいて、無線端末装置202との間の通信状態が良い方の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置として選択する。 Specifically, the handover instructing unit 22 acquires the measurement result of the received power in the radio terminal device 202 of the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station devices 101B and 101C, and based on this measurement result, the radio terminal device The radio base station apparatus with the better communication state with 202 is selected as the handover destination radio base station apparatus.
 また、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、選択したハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を指示するためのRRCコネクション再構成指示を、無線端末装置202へ送信する。 Also, the handover instruction unit 22 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction for instructing a handover operation to the selected handover destination radio base station apparatus to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 また、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、本発明の第2の実施の形態と同様に、上記応答を受けて、自己の無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cおよび無線端末装置202間の通信品質に関するハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされていない場合には、無線端末装置202に対する上記指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する。たとえば、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、所定のハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされていない場合には、無線端末装置202に対してRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信せず、ハンドオーバ中止通知を他の無線基地局装置へ送信する。 Similarly to the second embodiment of the present invention, the handover instructing unit 22 receives the above response and executes handover related to the communication quality between its own radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C and the radio terminal apparatus 202. If the condition is not satisfied, the assignment of the instruction to the wireless terminal device 202 is stopped or suspended. For example, when a predetermined handover execution condition is not satisfied, the handover instruction unit 22 does not transmit an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and sends a handover cancellation notification to another radio base station apparatus. Send.
 また、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、無線基地局装置101B,101Cから上記応答を受信した後、所定期間取得できない測定結果に対応する他の無線基地局装置を、ハンドオーバ先の候補から外すことが可能である。 Further, after receiving the response from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C, the handover instruction unit 22 can exclude other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to measurement results that cannot be acquired for a predetermined period from the handover destination candidates. is there.
 すなわち、たとえば、無線端末装置202により受信電力の測定が行われ、無線基地局装置101B,101Cへのハンドオーバ動作の準備が開始されてから、次に上記測定が行われるまでの間に、無線端末装置202が、無線基地局装置101Cとの間の受信電力を測定することができない程度に無線基地局装置101Cから離れた位置へ移動する場合を想定する。この場合、無線基地局装置101Aが、上記応答を受信してから所定期間内に無線端末装置202から受信する測定結果通知には、無線基地局装置101Bと無線端末装置202との通信状態を示す受信電力の測定結果に関する情報が含まれているものの、無線基地局装置101Cと無線端末装置202との通信状態を示す受信電力の測定結果に関する情報が含まれていないということがある。このような場合、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、無線基地局装置101Cをハンドオーバ先の候補から外すことができる。 That is, for example, after the reception power is measured by the wireless terminal device 202 and the preparation for the handover operation to the wireless base station devices 101B and 101C is started, the wireless terminal It is assumed that the device 202 moves to a position away from the radio base station device 101C to such an extent that the received power with the radio base station device 101C cannot be measured. In this case, the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202 within a predetermined period after the wireless base station device 101A receives the response indicates the communication state between the wireless base station device 101B and the wireless terminal device 202. Although information related to the measurement result of the received power is included, information related to the measurement result of the received power indicating the communication state between the radio base station apparatus 101C and the radio terminal apparatus 202 may not be included. In such a case, the handover instruction unit 22 can remove the radio base station apparatus 101C from the handover destination candidates.
 また、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、ハンドオーバ動作が完了した後、上記応答に対応する他の無線基地局装置のうちハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置以外の他の無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ動作の中止通知を送信する。 In addition, after the handover operation is completed, the handover instruction unit 22 notifies the other wireless base station devices other than the handover destination wireless base station device among other wireless base station devices corresponding to the response of the handover operation cancellation notification. Send.
 すなわち、たとえば、無線基地局装置101Aのハンドオーバ要求部21が無線基地局装置101B,101Cへハンドオーバ要求を送信し、無線基地局装置101B,101Cが無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ動作の実行が可能であることを示す応答を送信した場合であって、ハンドオーバ指示部22が、ハンドオーバ先として無線基地局装置101Bを選択する場合を想定する。この場合、無線基地局装置101Aが、たとえば上位装置経由で無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバが完了したことを示す通知を受信すると、無線基地局装置101Aのハンドオーバ指示部22は、ハンドオーバ先ではない無線基地局装置101Cへハンドオーバ動作の中止通知を送信する。 That is, for example, the handover request unit 21 of the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C can execute a handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101A. It is assumed that a response indicating that there is a response and the handover instruction unit 22 selects the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination. In this case, when the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a notification indicating that the handover has been completed from the radio base station apparatus 101B, for example, via the higher-level apparatus, the handover instruction unit 22 of the radio base station apparatus 101A is a radio that is not the handover destination. A handover operation stop notification is transmitted to the base station apparatus 101C.
 [動作]
 次に、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム404において、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置101Aがハンドオーバ先を選択する場合におけるハンドオーバ動作の流れについて説明する。図66は、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置がハンドオーバ先を選択する場合におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
[Operation]
Next, a flow of a handover operation when the handover source radio base station apparatus 101A selects a handover destination in the radio communication system 404 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 66 is a sequence of the handover operation when the handover source radio base station apparatus selects the handover destination in the radio communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
 図66を参照して、まず、無線端末装置202は、受信電力の測定結果を示す測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する。この測定結果通知には、周辺セルの無線基地局装置101B,101Cから送信される無線信号の受信電力の測定結果が含まれている(ステップS651)。 66, first, wireless terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating a measurement result of received power to wireless base station apparatus 101A. This measurement result notification includes the measurement result of the received power of the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C in the neighboring cells (step S651).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、セルIDごとの測定結果を示す測定情報を取得し、図示しない記憶部に保存する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ準備条件を満たす場合には、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行なうべきであると判断する。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID and stores it in a storage unit (not shown). Then, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the preparation process for the handover operation should be performed when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition.
 このとき、無線基地局装置101Bから送信される無線信号に関する測定結果および無線基地局装置101Cから送信される無線信号に関する測定結果が、いずれもハンドオーバ準備条件を満たす場合がある。このような場合、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bおよび無線基地局装置101Cをハンドオーバ先の候補とする(ステップS652)。 At this time, the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101B and the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101C may both satisfy the handover preparation condition. In such a case, the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the radio base station apparatus 101B and the radio base station apparatus 101C as handover destination candidates (step S652).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求をMME162へ送信する(ステップS653)。また、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Cを示すハンドオーバ要求をMME162へ送信する(ステップS654)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162 (step S653). Also, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101C to the MME 162 (step S654).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、無線基地局装置101Bへ当該ハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS655)。また、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、無線基地局装置101Cへ当該ハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS656)。 Next, the MME 162 receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S655). Also, the MME 162 receives the handover request from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S656).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162からハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MME162へ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS657)。また、無線基地局装置101Cは、MME162からハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MME162へ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS658)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162 and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162 (step S657). Also, the radio base station apparatus 101C receives a handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162 (Step S658).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aへ無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先とするハンドオーバ指示を送信する(ステップS659)。また、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Cからハンドオーバ応答を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aへ無線基地局装置101Cをハンドオーバ先とするハンドオーバ指示を送信する(ステップS660)。上記のようにして、無線基地局装置101B,101Cへのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了する(ステップS661)。 Next, the MME 162 receives the handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a handover instruction with the radio base station apparatus 101B as the handover destination to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S659). Further, the MME 162 receives the handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101C, and transmits a handover instruction with the radio base station apparatus 101C as the handover destination to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S660). As described above, the preparation process for the handover operation to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C is completed (step S661).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、新たな測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS662)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S662).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を新たに取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、新たに取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed when the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition.
 このとき、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了している無線基地局装置101B,101Cの中から、例えば無線端末装置202との間の通信品質がより良い方をハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置として選択する。第4の実施の形態では、無線基地局装置101Bが選択される場合を想定する(ステップS663)。 At this time, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines, for example, the one with the better communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C for which the handover operation preparation process has been completed. Select as a radio base station device. In the fourth embodiment, it is assumed that the radio base station apparatus 101B is selected (step S663).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202へ、無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先とするRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信する(ステップS664)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction with the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S664).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162へ自己の通信状態等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS665)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status and the like to the MME 162 (step S665).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aから状態通知を受信して、無線基地局装置101Bへ無線端末装置202との通信内容等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS666)。 Next, the MME 162 receives the status notification from the radio base station device 101A, and transmits a status notification indicating the communication contents and the like with the radio terminal device 202 to the radio base station device 101B (step S666).
 また、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101BへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を送信する(ステップS667)。 Further, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification to the wireless base station device 101B (step S667).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、MME162へハンドオーバ完了通知を送信する(ステップS668)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162 (step S668).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ完了通知を受信して、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS669)。 Next, the MME 162 receives the handover completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101B, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S669).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162から端末情報解放指示を受信して、ハンドオーバ先として選択された無線基地局装置101B以外の無線基地局装置、すなわち無線基地局装置101Cへのハンドオーバ動作を中止するためのハンドオーバ中止通知をMME162へ送信する(ステップS670)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, and performs a handover operation to the radio base station apparatus other than the radio base station apparatus 101B selected as the handover destination, that is, the radio base station apparatus 101C. A handover cancel notification for canceling is transmitted to the MME 162 (step S670).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ中止通知を受信して、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Cへ送信する(ステップS671)。 Next, the MME 162 receives the handover cancellation notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S671).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、MME162から端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162へ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS672)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101C receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, releases information related to the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S672).
 そして、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Cから端末情報解放完了通知を受信して、ハンドオーバ中止応答を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS673)。 Then, the MME 162 receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101C, and transmits a handover stop response to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S673).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162からハンドオーバ中止応答を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162へ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS674)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover stop response from the MME 162, releases information regarding the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S674).
 なお、上述した動作の流れでは、無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバ動作が完了し(ステップS668)、無線基地局装置101AがMME162から端末情報解放指示を受信した(ステップS669)後に、無線基地局装置101AがMME162へハンドオーバ中止通知を送信している(ステップS670)。しかしながら、必ずしもこのような動作の流れに限定されず、例えば、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバ動作が完了する前に無線基地局装置101Cへのハンドオーバ動作中止通知をMME162へ送信してもよい。この場合、例えば、ステップS670からステップS673までの動作が、ステップS667の前に行われる。 In the operation flow described above, the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101B is completed (step S668), and after the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the MME 162 (step S669), the radio base station The apparatus 101A transmits a handover cancellation notification to the MME 162 (step S670). However, the operation flow is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the radio base station apparatus 101A sends a handover operation stop notification to the radio base station apparatus 101C before the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101B is completed. May be sent to. In this case, for example, the operations from step S670 to step S673 are performed before step S667.
 このように、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム404において、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cのハンドオーバ要求部21は、ハンドオーバ要求を複数の他の無線基地局装置に対して行う。 As described above, in the radio communication system 404 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the handover request unit 21 of the radio base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C sends a handover request to a plurality of other radio base station devices. Do it.
 ある周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理の完了後に無線端末装置202が移動することで、当該周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置202の電波状況が悪化する場合が考えられる。このような場合でも、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了していることから、当該他の周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を短時間で行うことができるため、無線端末装置202と無線基地局装置との間の通信が途切れることを防ぐことができる。 It can be considered that the radio terminal device 202 related to the neighboring base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal device 202 after the completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain neighboring base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent the communication between the device 202 and the radio base station device from being interrupted.
 また、上記のように、周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置202の電波状況が悪化した場合であっても、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了しているため、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理およびハンドオーバ動作の中止処理のための情報の送受信が繰り返されることを防ぎ、無線通信システムにおける負荷を軽減させることができる。 Further, as described above, even when the radio wave condition of the wireless terminal device 202 related to the neighboring base station deteriorates, the handover operation preparation processing with other neighboring base stations is completed, so the handover operation It is possible to prevent the transmission / reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation stop process from being repeated, and to reduce the load on the wireless communication system.
 また、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム404において、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、ハンドオーバ応答を受信して、この応答に対応する他の無線基地局装置の中からハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択し、無線端末装置202に対してハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を行う指示を与える。 Also, in the radio communication system 404 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the handover instruction unit 22 receives a handover response, and receives a handover destination radio from other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to this response. A base station apparatus is selected, and an instruction to perform a handover operation to the handover destination radio base station apparatus is given to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 このように、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択したうえで無線端末装置202に対してハンドオーバ動作の指示を与える構成により、当該指示内に複数の無線基地局装置を提示する場合と比べて情報量を少なくすることができ、当該指示内容を簡潔にすることができる。 Thus, by selecting a handover destination radio base station apparatus and giving an instruction for a handover operation to the radio terminal apparatus 202, the information is compared with the case where a plurality of radio base station apparatuses are presented in the instruction. The amount can be reduced, and the contents of the instruction can be simplified.
 また、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム404において、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、ハンドオーバ応答を受信した後、この応答に対応する他の無線基地局装置から送信される無線信号の無線端末装置202における受信電力の測定結果を取得して、この測定結果に基づいてハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。 Moreover, in the wireless communication system 404 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, after receiving the handover response, the handover instruction unit 22 transmits a radio signal transmitted from another radio base station apparatus corresponding to this response. A measurement result of the received power in the radio terminal device 202 is acquired, and a handover destination radio base station device is selected based on the measurement result.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ動作の準備完了後の無線端末装置202における電波環境に応じて、ハンドオーバ先として適切な無線基地局装置を選択することができる。 With such a configuration, it is possible to select an appropriate radio base station apparatus as a handover destination according to the radio wave environment in the radio terminal apparatus 202 after completion of preparation for the handover operation.
 また、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム404において、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、ハンドオーバ応答を受信した後、所定期間取得できない測定結果に対応する他の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先の候補から外す。 Also, in the radio communication system 404 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the handover instruction unit 22 receives another radio base station apparatus corresponding to the measurement result that cannot be acquired for a predetermined period after receiving the handover response as the handover destination. Remove from the candidate.
 このような構成により、たとえば、無線端末装置202が受信電力を測定できない程度に無線端末装置202との距離が離れてしまった無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先の候補から外すことができるため、ハンドオーバ先として適切な無線基地局装置を選択することができる。 With such a configuration, for example, a radio base station apparatus that is far away from the radio terminal apparatus 202 to such an extent that the radio terminal apparatus 202 cannot measure received power can be excluded from handover destination candidates. A suitable radio base station apparatus can be selected.
 また、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム404において、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、ハンドオーバ動作が完了した後、ハンドオーバ応答に対応する他の無線基地局装置のうちハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置以外の他の無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ動作の中止要求を送信する。 Also, in the radio communication system 404 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the handover instruction unit 22 performs handover destination radio base station among other radio base station apparatuses corresponding to the handover response after the handover operation is completed. A request for canceling the handover operation is transmitted to a radio base station apparatus other than the station apparatus.
 ここで、たとえば、ハンドオーバ先として選択された無線基地局装置以外の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作がハンドオーバ動作の完了前に中止された後、無線端末装置202が、当該中止対象の無線基地局装置に近づく方向に移動する場合、当該中止対象の無線基地局装置が最適なハンドオーバ先となることがある。この場合、当該中止対象の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を再び行う必要がある。 Here, for example, after the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus other than the radio base station apparatus selected as the handover destination is canceled before the handover operation is completed, the radio terminal apparatus 202 may When moving in a direction approaching the apparatus, the radio base station apparatus to be canceled may be an optimal handover destination. In this case, it is necessary to perform the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus to be canceled again.
 これに対して、無線通信システム404におけるハンドオーバ指示部22は、上記のように、ハンドオーバ先として選択された無線基地局装置以外の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作が完了した後に中止する。これにより、ハンドオーバ動作が完了するまでの間に無線端末装置202が移動して電波状況が変わり、他の周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作が行われる場合であっても、再びハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行う必要がない。 On the other hand, the handover instruction unit 22 in the wireless communication system 404 performs the handover operation to the wireless base station device other than the wireless base station device selected as the handover destination as described above. Stop after completion. As a result, even when the wireless terminal device 202 moves and the radio wave state changes before the handover operation is completed, and the handover operation to another neighboring base station is performed, the preparation process for the handover operation is performed again. There is no need to do it.
(ii)無線端末装置がハンドオーバ先を選択する場合
 [構成および基本動作]
 次に、無線端末装置202が、複数のハンドオーバ先の候補からハンドオーバ先を選択する場合について説明する。ここでは、上述した「(i)ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置がハンドオーバ先を選択する場合」における無線通信システム404と異なる点について説明する。
(Ii) When the wireless terminal device selects a handover destination [Configuration and basic operation]
Next, a case where the radio terminal apparatus 202 selects a handover destination from a plurality of handover destination candidates will be described. Here, differences from radio communication system 404 in “(i) When the handover source radio base station apparatus selects a handover destination” will be described.
 (無線基地局装置の詳細な構成)
 再び図19を参照して、第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム405の無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cは、アンテナ91と、サーキュレータ92と、無線受信部93と、無線送信部94と、信号処理部95と、制御部98とを備える。
(Detailed configuration of radio base station device)
Referring to FIG. 19 again, radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C of radio communication system 405 according to the fourth embodiment include antenna 91, circulator 92, radio receiver 93, and radio transmitter 94. A signal processing unit 95 and a control unit 98.
 また、無線通信システム405の無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cの制御部98は、いずれも本発明の第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置の制御部98と同様である。すなわち、図40を参照して、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cの制御部98は、ハンドオーバ要求部21と、ハンドオーバ指示部22と、ハンドオーバ条件調整部23と、ハンドオーバ情報取得部24と、端末測定結果取得部25とを含む。 Also, the control unit 98 of the radio base station devices 101A, 101B, 101C of the radio communication system 405 is the same as the control unit 98 of the radio base station device according to the second embodiment of the present invention. That is, with reference to FIG. 40, the control unit 98 of the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C includes a handover request unit 21, a handover instruction unit 22, a handover condition adjustment unit 23, a handover information acquisition unit 24, Terminal measurement result acquisition unit 25.
 ハンドオーバ指示部22は、ハンドオーバ要求に対する他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けて、この応答に対応する他の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先の候補とし、この候補である無線基地局装置を示す情報を無線端末装置202へ送信する。 The handover instruction unit 22 receives a response from another radio base station apparatus to the handover request, sets another radio base station apparatus corresponding to this response as a handover destination candidate, and indicates the radio base station apparatus that is the candidate Information is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202.
 たとえば、無線基地局装置101Aのハンドオーバ要求部21が無線基地局装置101B,101Cへハンドオーバ要求を送信し、無線基地局装置101B,101Cが無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ動作の実行が可能であることを示す応答を送信した場合、無線基地局装置101Aのハンドオーバ指示部22は、無線基地局装置101B,101Cをハンドオーバ先の候補として、これら無線基地局装置101B,101Cへのハンドオーバ動作を指示するためのRRCコネクション再構成指示を、無線端末装置202へ送信する。 For example, the handover request unit 21 of the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C can execute a handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101A. Is transmitted, the handover instruction unit 22 of the radio base station apparatus 101A instructs the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C to perform a handover operation using the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C as handover destination candidates. The RRC connection reconfiguration instruction is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202.
 ここで、図67は、RRCコネクション再構成指示のメッセージ構造の比較例を示す図であり、図68は、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ要求部から送信されるRRCコネクション再構成指示のメッセージ構造の一例を示す図である。 Here, FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating a comparative example of the message structure of the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction, and FIG. 68 is transmitted from the handover request unit in the wireless communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the message structure of a RRC connection reconfiguration instruction | indication.
 図67に示すように、たとえば、無線基地局装置101Aがハンドオーバ先として無線基地局装置101Bを選択して、無線端末装置202へRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信する場合には、無線基地局装置101Aは、RRCコネクション再構成指示の「Mobility Control Info」に無線基地局装置101Bの情報のみを含める(図67の「Info1」参照)。 As shown in FIG. 67, for example, when the radio base station apparatus 101A selects the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination and transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to the radio terminal apparatus 202, the radio base station apparatus 101A Includes only the information of the radio base station apparatus 101B in the “Mobility Control Info” of the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction (see “Info1” in FIG. 67).
 これに対して、無線端末装置202がハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する場合には、たとえば図68に示すように、無線基地局装置101Aは、RRCコネクション再構成指示の「Mobility Control Info」に複数の無線基地局装置の情報(「Target Cell List」)を列挙して無線端末装置202へ送信する(図68の「Info2」参照)。これにより、無線端末装置202は、受信したRRCコネクション再構成指示から、ハンドオーバ先の候補である複数の無線基地局装置を把握することができる。 On the other hand, when the radio terminal apparatus 202 selects a handover destination radio base station apparatus, for example, as shown in FIG. 68, the radio base station apparatus 101A uses the “Mobility Control Info” in the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction. The information ("Target Cell List") of a plurality of radio base station apparatuses is enumerated and transmitted to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (see "Info2" in FIG. 68). Thereby, the radio | wireless terminal apparatus 202 can grasp | ascertain the some radio base station apparatus which is a candidate of a handover destination from the received RRC connection reconfiguration | reconfiguration instruction | indication.
 そして、無線端末装置202が、RRCコネクション再構成指示を受信してハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。ハンドオーバ指示部22は、無線端末装置202によって選択されたハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を示す情報を受信して、自己の無線基地局装置の通信状態を示す状態通知をハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置へ送信する。 Then, the wireless terminal device 202 receives the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction and selects a handover destination wireless base station device. The handover instructing unit 22 receives information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the radio terminal apparatus 202 and sends a status notification indicating the communication state of its own radio base station apparatus to the handover destination radio base station apparatus Send to.
 (無線端末装置の詳細な構成)
 図69は、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの無線端末装置の構成を示す図である。
(Detailed configuration of wireless terminal device)
FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a wireless terminal device of the wireless communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
 図69を参照して、無線通信システム405の無線端末装置202は、アンテナ31と、サーキュレータ32と、受信部33と、送信部34と、信号処理部35とを備える。信号処理部35は、受信信号処理部36と、選択部37と、通信制御部38とを含む。 69, the wireless terminal device 202 of the wireless communication system 405 includes an antenna 31, a circulator 32, a receiving unit 33, a transmitting unit 34, and a signal processing unit 35. The signal processing unit 35 includes a reception signal processing unit 36, a selection unit 37, and a communication control unit 38.
 サーキュレータ32は、アンテナ31において受信された無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cからの無線信号を受信部33へ出力し、また、送信部34から受けた無線信号をアンテナ31へ出力する。 The circulator 32 outputs radio signals from the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C received at the antenna 31 to the reception unit 33, and outputs radio signals received from the transmission unit 34 to the antenna 31.
 受信部33は、サーキュレータ32から受けた無線信号を信号処理部35へ出力する。受信信号処理部36は、受信部33から出力される無線信号に対して、CDMA(Code Division Multiple Access)方式における逆拡散等の各種信号処理を行う。 The receiving unit 33 outputs the radio signal received from the circulator 32 to the signal processing unit 35. The received signal processing unit 36 performs various signal processing such as despreading in a CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) system on the radio signal output from the receiving unit 33.
 選択部37は、たとえば、無線端末装置202の通信接続先である無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cから受信したRRCコネクション再構成指示に基づいて、ハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置の中からハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。 For example, based on the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction received from the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C, which are communication connection destinations of the radio terminal apparatus 202, the selection unit 37 determines whether the radio base station apparatus is a handover destination candidate. To select a handover destination radio base station apparatus.
 具体的には、無線端末装置202の選択部37は、無線基地局装置101B,101Cから送信される無線信号の無線端末装置202における受信電力の測定結果を取得して、この測定結果に基づいて、無線端末装置202との間の通信状態が良い方の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置として選択する。 Specifically, the selection unit 37 of the wireless terminal device 202 acquires the measurement result of the received power in the wireless terminal device 202 of the wireless signal transmitted from the wireless base station devices 101B and 101C, and based on the measurement result Then, the radio base station apparatus with the better communication state with the radio terminal apparatus 202 is selected as the handover destination radio base station apparatus.
 通信制御部38は、選択部37により選択されたハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を示す情報または自ら生成した情報に対して、OFDM(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex)方式におけるIFFT(Inverse Fast Fourier Transform)等の各種信号処理を行ない、この信号処理後の信号を送信部34へ出力する。 The communication control unit 38 uses an IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) or the like in the OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex) method for information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the selection unit 37 or information generated by itself. Various signal processing is performed, and the signal after this signal processing is output to the transmitter 34.
 送信部34は、通信制御部38から受けた信号をサーキュレータ32へ出力する。たとえば、送信部34は、選択部37により選択されたハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を示す情報、すなわちハンドオーバ先通知をサーキュレータ32およびアンテナ31を介して、無線端末装置202の通信接続先である無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する。 The transmission unit 34 outputs the signal received from the communication control unit 38 to the circulator 32. For example, the transmission unit 34 transmits information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the selection unit 37, that is, a handover destination notification via the circulator 32 and the antenna 31, which is a communication connection destination of the radio terminal apparatus 202. Transmit to base station apparatus 101A.
 [動作]
 次に、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム405において、無線端末装置202がハンドオーバ先を選択する場合におけるハンドオーバ動作の流れについて説明する。図70は、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置がハンドオーバ先を選択する場合におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
[Operation]
Next, the flow of a handover operation when the radio terminal apparatus 202 selects a handover destination in the radio communication system 405 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 70 is a sequence of the handover operation when the radio terminal apparatus selects the handover destination in the radio communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
 図70を参照して、ステップS681からステップS692までの動作が実行される。これらステップS681からステップS692までの動作は、図66に示すステップS651からステップS662までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Referring to FIG. 70, operations from step S681 to step S692 are executed. Since the operations from step S681 to step S692 are the same as the operations from step S651 to step S662 shown in FIG. 66, detailed description will not be repeated here.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を新たに取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、新たに取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する(ステップS693)。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, when the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed (step S693).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、測定結果通知に基づいてハンドオーバ先の候補として判断した無線基地局装置101B,101Cへのハンドオーバ動作を無線端末装置202へ指示するため、RRCコネクション再構成指示を無線端末装置202へ送信する(ステップS694)。 Next, radio base station apparatus 101A issues an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction to instruct radio terminal apparatus 202 to perform a handover operation to radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C determined as a handover destination candidate based on the measurement result notification. It transmits to the wireless terminal device 202 (step S694).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101B,101Cへのハンドオーバ動作を指示するためのRRCコネクション再構成指示を受信して、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了している無線基地局装置101B,101Cの中からハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。第4の実施の形態では、無線基地局装置101Bが選択される場合を想定する(ステップS695)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 receives the RRC connection reconfiguration instruction for instructing the handover operation from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station devices 101B and 101C, and the handover operation preparation process is completed. A handover destination radio base station apparatus is selected from the existing radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C. In the fourth embodiment, it is assumed that the radio base station apparatus 101B is selected (step S695).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、選択したハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置101Bを示す情報、すなわちハンドオーバ先通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS696)。 Next, the radio terminal apparatus 202 transmits information indicating the selected handover destination radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, a handover destination notification to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S696).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202によって選択されたハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置101Bを示す情報を受信して、MME162へ無線基地局装置101Aの通信状態等を示す状態通知を送信する。この状態通知には、たとえばハンドオーバ先として選択された無線基地局装置101Bを示す情報が含まれる(ステップS697)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus 101B selected by the radio terminal apparatus 202, and sends a status notification indicating the communication status of the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162. Send. This state notification includes, for example, information indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B selected as the handover destination (step S697).
 そして、ステップS698からステップS706までの動作が実行される。これらステップS698からステップS706までの動作は、図66に示すステップS666からステップS674までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Then, the operations from step S698 to step S706 are executed. Since the operations from step S698 to step S706 are the same as the operations from step S666 to step S674 shown in FIG. 66, detailed description will not be repeated here.
 上記のように、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム405において、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、ハンドオーバ応答を受信して、この応答に対応する他の無線基地局装置をハンドオーバ先の候補として示す情報を無線端末装置202へ送信する。 As described above, in the radio communication system 405 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the handover instructing unit 22 receives the handover response, and sends another radio base station apparatus corresponding to this response to the handover destination. Information indicated as a candidate is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202.
 このように、無線端末装置202にハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択させる構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置が選択する場合に比べて、最新の電波環境に応じてハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択することができる。 As described above, the configuration in which the wireless terminal device 202 selects the handover destination wireless base station device makes it possible to select the handover destination wireless base station according to the latest radio wave environment as compared with the case where the handover source wireless base station device selects. A device can be selected.
 また、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム405において、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、無線端末装置202によって選択されたハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を示す情報を受信して、受信した情報の示すハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置へ所定の情報を送信する。 Further, in the radio communication system 405 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the handover instruction unit 22 receives and receives information indicating the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the radio terminal apparatus 202 Predetermined information is transmitted to the handover destination radio base station apparatus indicated by the information.
 このような構成により、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置が、無線端末装置202により選択されたハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を把握したうえで、ハンドオーバ動作に必要な情報を当該ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置へ送信するので、無駄のない情報の送受信を行うことができる。 With such a configuration, the handover source radio base station apparatus grasps the handover destination radio base station apparatus selected by the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits information necessary for the handover operation to the handover destination radio base station apparatus. Since it is transmitted to the apparatus, it is possible to transmit and receive information without waste.
(iii)ハンドオーバ動作の準備判断および実行判断においてCQIレポートおよび受信電力情報の両方を用いる場合
 [構成および基本動作]
 次に、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置101Aが複数のハンドオーバ先の候補からハンドオーバ先を選択する場合であって、ハンドオーバ動作の準備判断および実行判断においてCQIレポートおよび受信電力情報の両方を用いる場合について説明する。
(Iii) Case where both CQI report and received power information are used in preparation determination and execution determination of handover operation [Configuration and basic operation]
Next, a case where the handover source radio base station apparatus 101A selects a handover destination from a plurality of handover destination candidates and uses both the CQI report and the received power information in the handover operation preparation determination and execution determination. explain.
 ここでは、上述した「(i)ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置がハンドオーバ先を選択する場合」における無線通信システム404と異なる点について説明する。 Here, differences from the radio communication system 404 in the above-described “(i) When the handover source radio base station apparatus selects a handover destination” will be described.
 (無線基地局装置の詳細な構成)
 本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム406の無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cは、いずれも本発明の第1の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置101と同様である。すなわち、図19を参照して、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cは、アンテナ91と、サーキュレータ92と、無線受信部93と、無線送信部94と、信号処理部95と、制御部98とを含む。
(Detailed configuration of radio base station device)
Radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C of radio communication system 406 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention are all the same as radio base station apparatus 101 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. That is, referring to FIG. 19, radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C include antenna 91, circulator 92, radio reception unit 93, radio transmission unit 94, signal processing unit 95, and control unit 98. including.
 また、図71は、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置における制御部の構成を示す図である。 FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a control unit in the radio base station apparatus according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
 図71を参照して、無線通信システム404の無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cの制御部98は、受信電力情報取得部(第1測定情報取得部)11と、受信品質情報取得部(第2測定情報取得部)12と、ハンドオーバ動作判断部13と、条件設定部14と、ハンドオーバ要求部21と、ハンドオーバ指示部22と、ハンドオーバ条件調整部23と、ハンドオーバ情報取得部24と、端末測定結果取得部25とを有する。 71, control unit 98 of radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C of radio communication system 404 includes received power information acquisition unit (first measurement information acquisition unit) 11 and reception quality information acquisition unit (first 2 measurement information acquisition unit) 12, handover operation determination unit 13, condition setting unit 14, handover request unit 21, handover instruction unit 22, handover condition adjustment unit 23, handover information acquisition unit 24, terminal measurement And a result acquisition unit 25.
 受信電力情報取得部11は、無線端末装置202における各無線基地局装置101からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報すなわち測定結果通知を取得する。 The reception power information acquisition unit 11 acquires reception power information indicating measurement results of reception power of radio signals from the radio base station apparatuses 101 in the radio terminal apparatus 202, that is, measurement result notification.
 受信品質情報取得部12は、受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、無線端末装置202における自己の無線基地局装置101からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報すなわちCQIレポートを取得する。 The reception quality information acquisition unit 12 is updated at a cycle shorter than the reception power information, and acquires reception quality information, that is, a CQI report indicating the reception quality of the radio signal from the radio base station apparatus 101 in the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 ハンドオーバ要求部21は、自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置への無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を行なう要求を他の無線基地局装置に対して行なう、すなわちハンドオーバ要求を他の無線基地局装置へ送信する。 The handover request unit 21 makes a request for performing a handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202 from its own wireless base station device 101 to another wireless base station device to other wireless base station devices, that is, makes a handover request to other wireless base station devices. Transmit to the radio base station apparatus.
 たとえば、ハンドオーバ要求部21は、受信品質情報取得部12からCQIレポートを取得し、このCQIレポートの値が所定の閾値より低い場合に、自己が形成するセルCAが周辺セルから受ける干渉により無線端末装置202の受信品質が劣化していると判断する。そして、ハンドオーバ要求部21は、無線端末装置202の受信品質が劣化していると判断した場合に、自己の無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質に関する所定のハンドオーバ準備条件が満たされるか否かを判断し、このハンドオーバ準備条件が満たされる場合には、ハンドオーバ要求を他の無線基地局装置に対して行う。 For example, the handover request unit 21 acquires a CQI report from the reception quality information acquisition unit 12, and when the value of the CQI report is lower than a predetermined threshold, the cell CA formed by the handover request unit 21 receives interference from neighboring cells due to interference received from the neighboring cells. It is determined that the reception quality of the apparatus 202 has deteriorated. When the handover request unit 21 determines that the reception quality of the wireless terminal device 202 has deteriorated, a predetermined handover preparation condition regarding communication quality between the wireless base station device 101 and the wireless terminal device 202 is satisfied. When this handover preparation condition is satisfied, a handover request is made to another radio base station apparatus.
 ハンドオーバ指示部22は、ハンドオーバ要求に対する他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けて、無線端末装置202に対して自己の無線基地局装置101から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を行なう指示を与える、すなわちRRCコネクション再構成指示を無線端末装置202へ送信する。 In response to a response from the other radio base station apparatus to the handover request, the handover instruction unit 22 instructs the radio terminal apparatus 202 to perform a handover operation from its own radio base station apparatus 101 to another radio base station apparatus. That is, an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202.
 たとえば、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、受信品質情報取得部12からCQIレポートを取得し、このCQIレポートの値が所定の閾値より低い場合には、無線端末装置202の受信品質が劣化していると判断する。そして、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、無線端末装置202の受信品質が劣化していると判断した場合に、自己の無線基地局装置101および無線端末装置202間の通信品質に関する所定のハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされるか否かを判断し、このハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされる場合には、上記指示を他の無線基地局装置に対して与える。 For example, the handover instruction unit 22 acquires a CQI report from the reception quality information acquisition unit 12, and determines that the reception quality of the wireless terminal device 202 is degraded when the value of this CQI report is lower than a predetermined threshold. To do. When the handover instruction unit 22 determines that the reception quality of the wireless terminal device 202 has deteriorated, a predetermined handover execution condition regarding communication quality between the wireless base station device 101 and the wireless terminal device 202 is satisfied. If this handover execution condition is satisfied, the above instruction is given to another radio base station apparatus.
 また、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、このハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされていない場合には、無線端末装置202に対する上記指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する。たとえば、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、所定のハンドオーバ実行条件が満たされていない場合には、無線端末装置202に対して上記指示を与えず、ハンドオーバ動作を中止する旨を他の無線基地局装置に通知する。 Further, when the handover execution condition is not satisfied, the handover instruction unit 22 cancels or holds the provision of the instruction to the wireless terminal device 202. For example, when a predetermined handover execution condition is not satisfied, the handover instruction unit 22 does not give the instruction to the wireless terminal device 202 and notifies other wireless base station devices that the handover operation is to be stopped. To do.
 [動作]
 次に、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム406において、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置101Aがハンドオーバ先を選択する場合におけるハンドオーバ動作の流れについて説明する。
[Operation]
Next, a flow of a handover operation when the handover source radio base station apparatus 101A selects a handover destination in the radio communication system 406 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
 図72は、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおいて、ハンドオーバ元の無線基地局装置がハンドオーバ先を選択する場合におけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。 FIG. 72 is a sequence of a handover operation when the handover source radio base station apparatus selects a handover destination in the radio communication system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
 図72を参照して、まず、無線端末装置202は、受信電力の測定結果を示す測定結果通知すなわち受信電力情報を、無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する。この測定結果通知には、周辺セルの無線基地局装置101B,101Cから送信される無線信号の受信電力の測定結果が含まれている(ステップS721)。 72, first, radio terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating a measurement result of received power, that is, reception power information, to radio base station apparatus 101A. This measurement result notification includes the measurement result of the received power of the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C in the neighboring cells (step S721).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、自己における無線基地局装置101Aからの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報すなわちCQIレポートを、無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS722)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 is updated to measurement results of the received power at a period shorter than shown to receive power information, the reception quality information i.e. CQI indicating reception quality of a radio signal from the radio base station apparatus 101A in a self The report is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S722).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信したCQIレポートの値に基づいて、無線端末装置202の電波環境の劣化を検知する(ステップS723)。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、受信したCQIレポートの値が所定の閾値以上である場合には、無線端末装置202の受信品質は劣化していないと判断し、測定結果通知の受信(ステップS721)およびCQIレポートの受信(ステップS722)を繰り返す。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A detects deterioration of the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 based on the value of the CQI report received from the wireless terminal device 202 (step S723). If the value of the received CQI report is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the reception quality of the radio terminal apparatus 202 has not deteriorated, and receives a measurement result notification (step S721). ) And CQI report reception (step S722) are repeated.
 一方、無線基地局装置101Aは、受信したCQIレポートの値が所定の閾値より低い場合には、無線端末装置202の受信品質が劣化していると判断して、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行なうべきであるか否かを判断する(ステップS724)。 On the other hand, when the value of the received CQI report is lower than a predetermined threshold, radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the reception quality of radio terminal apparatus 202 has deteriorated and should perform a handover operation preparation process. It is determined whether or not (step S724).
 すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、セルIDごとの測定結果を示す測定情報を取得し、図示しない記憶部に保存する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、ステップS721において無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ準備条件を満たす場合には、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行なうべきであると判断する。 That is, 101 A of radio base station apparatuses acquire the measurement information which shows the measurement result for every cell ID based on the measurement result notification received from the radio | wireless terminal apparatus 202, and preserve | save it in the memory | storage part which is not shown in figure. Then, the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202 based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202 in step S721. Then, radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the preparation process for the handover operation should be performed when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition.
 このとき、無線基地局装置101Bから送信される無線信号に関する測定結果および無線基地局装置101Cから送信される無線信号に関する測定結果が、いずれもハンドオーバ準備条件を満たす場合がある。このような場合、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bおよび無線基地局装置101Cをハンドオーバ先の候補とする。 At this time, the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101B and the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101C may both satisfy the handover preparation condition. In such a case, the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the radio base station apparatus 101B and the radio base station apparatus 101C as handover destination candidates.
 そして、ステップS725からステップS733までの動作が実行される。このステップS725からステップS733までの動作は、図66に示すステップS653からステップS661までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Then, the operations from step S725 to step S733 are executed. Since the operations from step S725 to step S733 are similar to the operations from step S653 to step S661 shown in FIG. 66, detailed description will not be repeated here.
 次に、無線端末装置202は、新たな測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS734)。また、無線端末装置202は、新たなCQIレポートを、無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS735)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S734). Also, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new CQI report to the wireless base station device 101A (step S735).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から新たに受信したCQIレポートの値に基づいて、無線端末装置202の電波環境の劣化を検知する(ステップS736)。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、新たに受信したCQIレポートの値が所定の閾値より低い場合には、無線端末装置202の受信品質が劣化していると判断して、ハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであるか否かを判断する(ステップS737)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A detects deterioration of the radio wave environment of the wireless terminal device 202 based on the value of the CQI report newly received from the wireless terminal device 202 (step S736). Then, when the value of the newly received CQI report is lower than a predetermined threshold, radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the reception quality of radio terminal apparatus 202 has deteriorated and should perform a handover operation. It is determined whether or not (step S737).
 すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aは、ステップS734において無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を新たに取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、新たに取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する。 That is, 101 A of radio base station apparatuses newly acquire the communication quality between self and the said radio | wireless terminal apparatus 202 based on the measurement result notification received from the radio | wireless terminal apparatus 202 in step S734. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed when the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition.
 なお、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ動作の準備完了後にCQIレポートを受信(ステップS735)した後、ハンドオーバ動作の実行判断を行う前に、さらに、無線端末装置202から測定結果通知を新たに受信した場合には、新たに受信した最新の測定結果通知に基づいてハンドオーバ動作の実行判断を行うことができる。 The radio base station apparatus 101A newly receives a measurement result notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 after receiving the CQI report after completing the preparation for the handover operation (step S735) and before performing the handover operation execution determination. In this case, it is possible to determine whether to perform the handover operation based on the latest measurement result notification newly received.
 また、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ動作の準備判断(ステップS724)を行う前に受信した測定結果通知(ステップS721)に基づいてハンドオーバ動作の実行判断を行ってもよい。 Also, the radio base station apparatus 101A may make a handover operation execution decision based on the measurement result notification (step S721) received before making the handover operation preparation decision (step S724).
 そして、ステップS738からステップS748までの動作が実行される。このステップS738からステップS748までの動作は、図66に示すステップS664からステップS674までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 Then, the operations from step S738 to step S748 are executed. Since the operations from step S738 to step S748 are the same as the operations from step S664 to step S674 shown in FIG. 66, detailed description will not be repeated here.
 なお、上述した本発明の第4の実施の形態では、無線基地局装置101Aが無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいてハンドオーバ動作の準備判断および実行判断を行う場合について説明した。しかしながら、必ずしもこのような形態に限定されず、たとえば、無線基地局装置101Aは、CQIレポートの値単独で上記準備判断および実行判断を行ってもよいし、2回以上のCQIレポートの値の組み合わせによって上記準備判断および実行判断を行ってもよい。 In the above-described fourth embodiment of the present invention, the case where the radio base station apparatus 101A performs the handover operation preparation determination and execution determination based on the measurement result notification received from the radio terminal apparatus 202 has been described. However, the radio base station apparatus 101A is not necessarily limited to such a form. For example, the radio base station apparatus 101A may perform the preparation determination and the execution determination based on the CQI report value alone, or a combination of two or more CQI report values. The above preparation determination and execution determination may be performed.
 具体的には、無線基地局装置101Aは、CQIレポートの値に基づいて、自己により形成されるサービングセルにおける無線端末装置202の通信可否を判断し、これ以上通信を継続することは困難であると判断した場合、当該無線端末装置202による周辺セルへのハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断することができる。 Specifically, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines whether or not the radio terminal apparatus 202 can communicate in the serving cell formed by itself based on the value of the CQI report, and it is difficult to continue the communication any more. When it is determined, it can be determined that a handover operation to the neighboring cell by the wireless terminal device 202 should be executed.
 上記のように、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム406において、ハンドオーバ要求部21は、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得された受信品質情報から受信品質の劣化が検知された場合に、ハンドオーバ動作の要求を複数の他の無線基地局装置に対して行うか否かを判断する。 As described above, in the wireless communication system 406 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the handover request unit 21 detects the deterioration of the reception quality from the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12. In this case, it is determined whether or not a request for a handover operation is to be made to a plurality of other radio base station apparatuses.
 このように、受信電力情報よりも更新周期の短いCQIレポートを用いる構成により、急激な電波環境の変化に追従することが可能となるため、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を迅速に行い、無線端末装置および無線基地局装置間の無線リンクが切断されることを一層防ぐことができる。 As described above, the configuration using the CQI report whose update cycle is shorter than the received power information makes it possible to follow a sudden change in the radio wave environment, so that the preparation process for the handover operation to the neighboring base stations can be performed quickly. Further, disconnection of the wireless link between the wireless terminal device and the wireless base station device can be further prevented.
 また、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム406において、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信した後、受信品質情報取得部12によって取得された受信品質情報から受信品質の劣化が検知された場合に、ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。 Further, in the wireless communication system 406 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the handover instruction unit 22 receives the response to the handover request and then receives the reception quality from the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit 12. When the degradation of is detected, the handover destination radio base station apparatus is selected.
 このように、受信電力情報よりも更新周期の短いCQIレポートを用いる構成により、急激な電波環境の変化に追従することが可能となるため、周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を迅速に実行し、無線端末装置および無線基地局装置間の無線リンクが切断されることを一層防ぐことができる。 As described above, the configuration using the CQI report having a shorter update cycle than the received power information makes it possible to follow a sudden change in the radio wave environment. It is possible to further prevent disconnection of the radio link between the terminal device and the radio base station device.
 また、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム406において、ハンドオーバ指示部22は、受信品質情報取得部12によって受信品質情報が取得されるよりも前に受信電力情報取得部11によって取得された受信電力情報のうち最新の受信電力情報に示される測定結果に基づいてハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する。 Further, in the wireless communication system 406 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the handover instruction unit 22 is received by the received power information acquisition unit 11 before the reception quality information acquisition unit 12 acquires the reception quality information. A handover destination radio base station apparatus is selected based on the measurement result indicated in the latest received power information among the acquired received power information.
 このように、予め取得された受信電力情報が用いられる構成により、ハンドオーバ指示部22が受信品質情報から受信品質の劣化を検知した場合に、迅速にハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択することができる。 As described above, with the configuration in which the received power information acquired in advance is used, when the handover instruction unit 22 detects the deterioration of the reception quality from the reception quality information, it is possible to quickly select the handover destination radio base station apparatus. it can.
 <第5の実施の形態>
 上述した第2の実施の形態では、ハンドオーバ動作において無線端末装置202の通信接続先が無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替わる場合について説明した。これに対して、第5の実施の形態では、切り替え先すなわちハンドオーバ先の候補が複数あり、かつ、コアネットワークにおける上位装置も切り替えられる場合について説明する。以下で説明する内容以外は第2の実施の形態に係る無線基地局装置と同様である。なお、上位装置としては、第2の実施の形態と同様に、例えば、MME(Mobility Management Entity)またはS-GW(Serving Gateway)が挙げられる。
<Fifth embodiment>
In the above-described second embodiment, the case where the communication connection destination of the wireless terminal device 202 is switched from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B in the handover operation has been described. In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, a case will be described in which there are a plurality of switching destinations, that is, handover destination candidates, and a higher-level device in the core network is also switched. The contents other than those described below are the same as those of the radio base station apparatus according to the second embodiment. As the host device, for example, MME (Mobility Management Entity) or S-GW (Serving Gateway) can be cited as in the second embodiment.
 以下、本発明の第5の実施の形態として、ハンドオーバ動作においてMMEの切り替えが必要な場合と、ハンドオーバ動作においてS-GWの切り替えが必要な場合とに分けて説明する。 Hereinafter, as a fifth embodiment of the present invention, a case where MME switching is required in a handover operation and a case where S-GW switching is required in a handover operation will be described separately.
(a)MMEの切り替えが必要な場合
 [構成および基本動作]
 図73は、本発明の第5の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。
(A) When MME switching is required [Configuration and basic operation]
FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
 図73を参照して、第5の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム407は、たとえば3GPPで規格化されたLTE(Long Term Evolution)に従う移動体通信システムであり、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cを備える。 Referring to FIG. 73, a radio communication system 407 according to the fifth embodiment is a mobile communication system according to LTE (Long Term Evolution) standardized by 3GPP, for example, and includes radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C is provided.
 図61および図63を参照して、図61に示すように、無線基地局装置101Aは、セルCAを形成し、セルCA内に存在する無線端末装置202と無線信号を送受信することにより、当該無線端末装置202と通信することが可能である。無線基地局装置101Bは、セルCBを形成し、セルCB内に存在する無線端末装置202と無線信号を送受信することにより、当該無線端末装置202と通信することが可能である。無線基地局装置101Cは、セルCCを形成し、セルCC内に存在する無線端末装置202と無線信号を送受信することにより、当該無線端末装置202と通信することが可能である。 Referring to FIG. 61 and FIG. 63, as shown in FIG. 61, radio base station apparatus 101A forms cell CA, and transmits / receives radio signals to / from radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in cell CA. Communication with the wireless terminal device 202 is possible. The radio base station apparatus 101B can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CB and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CB. The radio base station apparatus 101C can communicate with the radio terminal apparatus 202 by forming a cell CC and transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus 202 existing in the cell CC.
 ここでは、無線端末装置202が、セルCA内に位置し、無線基地局装置101Aを通信接続先として選択してから、セルCA、セルCBおよびセルCCの重複領域へ移動した場合を想定する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aがサービング基地局に相当し、無線基地局装置101B,101Cが周辺基地局に相当し、これら無線基地局装置101B,101Cがハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置に該当する場合を想定する。 Here, it is assumed that the wireless terminal device 202 is located in the cell CA, moves to the overlapping area of the cell CA, the cell CB, and the cell CC after selecting the wireless base station device 101A as a communication connection destination. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A corresponds to a serving base station, the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C correspond to peripheral base stations, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C serve as handover destination candidates. Assume the case.
 再び図73を参照して、無線通信システム407は、さらに、コアネットワーク301に設けられたS-GW161(ゲートウェイ装置)と、MME162A,162B,162C(通信制御装置)と、P-GW(Packet Data Network Gateway)163とを備える。 Referring again to FIG. 73, the wireless communication system 407 further includes an S-GW 161 (gateway device), MME 162A, 162B, 162C (communication control device), and P-GW (Packet Data) provided in the core network 301. Network Gateway) 163.
 無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cと、S-GW161と、P-GW163とを介してIP網302(上位ネットワーク)におけるサーバ等と通信コネクションを確立し、たとえばIP(Internet Protocol)パケットを含む通信データを送受信する。 The wireless terminal device 202 establishes a communication connection with a server or the like in the IP network 302 (upper network) via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C, the S-GW 161, and the P-GW 163. Protocol) Communication data including packets is transmitted and received.
 S-GW161は、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101CとIP網302との間に接続されている。S-GW161は、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101C経由で無線端末装置202から受信した通信データをP-GW163経由でIP網302へ送信するとともに、IP網302におけるサーバ等からP-GW163経由で受信した通信データを無線基地局装置101A,101B,101C経由で無線端末装置202へ送信する。 The S-GW 161 is connected between the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C and the IP network 302. The S-GW 161 transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and from the server in the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163. The communication data received in (1) is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station devices 101A, 101B, 101C.
 MME162Aは、無線通信システム407における無線基地局装置101Aおよび無線端末装置202等を管理する。MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aとの間で制御メッセージを送受信する。また、MME162Bは、無線通信システム407における無線基地局装置101Bおよび無線端末装置202等を管理する。MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bとの間で制御メッセージを送受信する。MME162Cは、無線通信システム407における無線基地局装置101Cおよび無線端末装置202等を管理する。MME162Cは、無線基地局装置101Cとの間で制御メッセージを送受信する。 The MME 162A manages the wireless base station device 101A, the wireless terminal device 202, and the like in the wireless communication system 407. The MME 162A transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101A. The MME 162B manages the radio base station apparatus 101B and the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the radio communication system 407. The MME 162B transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101B. The MME 162C manages the radio base station apparatus 101C, the radio terminal apparatus 202, and the like in the radio communication system 407. The MME 162C transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatus 101C.
 無線基地局装置101A,101B,101CおよびS-GW161は、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
 無線基地局装置101AおよびMME162Aは、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。無線基地局装置101BおよびMME162Bも同様に、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。無線基地局装置101CおよびMME162Cも同様に、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatus 101A and the MME 162A exchange various data via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line. Similarly, wireless base station apparatus 101B and MME 162B exchange various data via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by dotted lines. . Similarly, the wireless base station apparatus 101C and the MME 162C exchange various pieces of information with each other via the S1-MME interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, as indicated by a dotted line. .
 MME162A,162B,162CおよびS-GW161は、論理的なインタフェースであるS11インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S11インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The MMEs 162A, 162B, 162C and the S-GW 161 exchange various data with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface which is a logical interface.
 S-GW161およびP-GW163は、論理的なインタフェースであるS5インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S5インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The S-GW 161 and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
 MME162A,MME162BおよびMME162Cは、論理的なインタフェースであるS10インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S10インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The MME 162A, MME 162B, and MME 162C exchange various data with each other via the S10 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S10 interface that is a logical interface.
 [動作]
 図74は、本発明の第5の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
[Operation]
FIG. 74 is a sequence of a handover operation in the radio communication system according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
 図74を参照して、まず、無線端末装置202は、受信電力の測定結果を示す測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する。たとえば、無線端末装置202は、受信電力の測定を定期的に行ない、無線基地局装置101Aとの通信状態が悪くなった場合、および無線基地局装置101A以外の他の無線基地局装置との通信状態が良くなった場合に、測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS811)。 74, first, radio terminal apparatus 202 transmits a measurement result notification indicating a measurement result of received power to radio base station apparatus 101A. For example, the wireless terminal device 202 periodically measures the received power, when the communication state with the wireless base station device 101A deteriorates, and with other wireless base station devices other than the wireless base station device 101A When the state becomes better, a measurement result notification is transmitted to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S811).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、セルIDごとの測定結果を示す測定情報を取得し、図示しない記憶部に保存する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ準備条件を満たす場合には、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理を行なうべきであると判断する。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the radio terminal apparatus 202, the radio base station apparatus 101A acquires measurement information indicating the measurement result for each cell ID and stores it in a storage unit (not shown). Then, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A acquires the communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the preparation process for the handover operation should be performed when the acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover preparation condition.
 このとき、無線基地局装置101Bから送信される無線信号に関する測定結果および無線基地局装置101Cから送信される無線信号に関する測定結果が、いずれもハンドオーバ準備条件を満たす場合がある。このような場合、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bおよび無線基地局装置101Cをハンドオーバ先の候補とする(ステップS812)。 At this time, the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101B and the measurement result regarding the radio signal transmitted from the radio base station apparatus 101C may both satisfy the handover preparation condition. In such a case, the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the radio base station apparatus 101B and the radio base station apparatus 101C as handover destination candidates (step S812).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS813)。また、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Cを示すハンドオーバ要求をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS814)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S813). Also, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101C to the MME 162A (step S814).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、MMEの切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162Aは、ハンドオーバ要求に示されている無線基地局装置101B,101Cが自己の管理対象であるか否かを判断する(ステップS815)。 Next, the MME 162A determines whether it is necessary to switch the MME based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162A determines whether or not the radio base station devices 101B and 101C indicated in the handover request are their management targets (step S815).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Bが自己の管理対象ではないことから、無線基地局装置101Bを管理するMME162Bへ無線基地局装置101Bを示すハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS816)。 Next, since the radio base station apparatus 101B is not a management target, the MME 162A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162B that manages the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S816).
 次に、MME162Bは、MME162Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、S-GW161の切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWとが異なるか否かを判断する。ここでは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと同じであることから、MME162Bは、S-GW161の切り替えを行う必要がないと判断する(ステップS817)。 Next, the MME 162B determines whether it is necessary to switch the S-GW 161 based on the handover request received from the MME 162A. Specifically, the MME 162B includes an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Whether or not is different. Here, the S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302 is the same as the S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Therefore, the MME 162B determines that there is no need to switch the S-GW 161 (step S817).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bへハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS818)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S818).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162Bからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MME162Bへ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS819)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162B and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162B (step S819).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bから受信したハンドオーバ応答をMME162Aへ転送する(ステップS820)。 Next, the MME 162B transfers the handover response received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S820).
 ここで、無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作の準備期間中に無線基地局装置101Aに無線端末装置202宛のパケットである対象パケットが蓄積されている場合、または、S-GW161から対象パケットが新たに受信された場合、無線基地局装置101Aがこの対象パケットを無線基地局装置101Bへ転送するデータフォワーディングが行われる。 Here, when a target packet that is a packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is accumulated in the wireless base station device 101A during the preparation period of the handover operation of the wireless terminal device 202, or a new target packet is received from the S-GW 161. When received, data forwarding is performed in which the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers this target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B.
 このため、MME162Aは、MME162Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信すると、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路すなわち論理的なパス(以下、データフォワーディングパスとも称する)の確立要求をS-GW161へ送信する(ステップS821)。 Therefore, when the MME 162A receives the handover response from the MME 162B, the MME 162A sends a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path (hereinafter also referred to as a data forwarding path) to the S-GW 161. Transmit (step S821).
 次に、S-GW161は、MME162Aからデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161は、自己を介する無線基地局装置101Aと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的なパスを確立する。そして、S-GW161は、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS822)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162A, the S-GW 161 establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161 establishes a logical path between radio base station apparatus 101A and radio base station apparatus 101B through itself. Then, the S-GW 161 transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162A (step S822).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する。そして、以上のようなハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が実行されて、無線基地局装置101AがMME162Aからハンドオーバ指示を受信すると、無線基地局装置101Aは、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを開始する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己に蓄積されているかまたはS-GW161から新たに受信する当該無線端末装置202宛のパケットである対象パケットをS-GW161経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する(ステップS823)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. When the above-described handover operation preparation processing is executed and the radio base station apparatus 101A receives a handover instruction from the MME 162A, the radio base station apparatus 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet, which is a packet addressed to the radio terminal apparatus 202 that is stored in itself or newly received from the S-GW 161, to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161. (Step S823).
 また、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Cが自己の管理対象ではないことにより、無線基地局装置101Cを管理するMME162Cへ無線基地局装置101Cを示すハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS824)。 Also, the MME 162A transmits a handover request indicating the radio base station apparatus 101C to the MME 162C that manages the radio base station apparatus 101C because the radio base station apparatus 101C is not a management target of itself (step S824).
 次に、MME162Cは、MME162Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、S-GW161の切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162Cは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと、無線基地局装置101CとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWとが異なるか否かを判断する。ここでは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと、無線基地局装置101CとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと同じであることから、MME162Cは、S-GW161の切り替えを行う必要がないと判断する(ステップS825)。 Next, the MME 162C determines whether or not it is necessary to switch the S-GW 161 based on the handover request received from the MME 162A. Specifically, the MME 162C includes an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101C and the IP network 302. Whether or not is different. Here, the S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302 is the same as the S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101C and the IP network 302. Therefore, the MME 162C determines that there is no need to switch the S-GW 161 (step S825).
 次に、MME162Cは、無線基地局装置101Cへハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS826)。 Next, the MME 162C transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S826).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、MME162Cからハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MME162Cへ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS827)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101C receives a handover request from the MME 162C and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162C (step S827).
 次に、MME162Cは、無線基地局装置101Cから受信したハンドオーバ応答をMME162Aへ転送する(ステップS828)。 Next, the MME 162C transfers the handover response received from the radio base station apparatus 101C to the MME 162A (step S828).
 次に、MME162Aは、MME162Cからハンドオーバ応答を受信すると、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路すなわち論理的なパスの確立要求をS-GW161へ送信する(ステップS829)。 Next, when receiving a handover response from the MME 162C, the MME 162A transmits a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path, to the S-GW 161 (step S829).
 次に、S-GW161は、MME162Aからデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161は、自己を介する無線基地局装置101Aと無線基地局装置101Cとの間の論理的なパスを確立する。そして、S-GW161は、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS830)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162A, the S-GW 161 establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161 establishes a logical path between radio base station apparatus 101A and radio base station apparatus 101C through itself. Then, the S-GW 161 transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162A (step S830).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを開始する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己に蓄積されているかまたはS-GW161から新たに受信する当該無線端末装置202宛のパケットである対象パケットをS-GW161経由で無線基地局装置101Cへ転送する(ステップS831)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface. That is, the wireless base station device 101A transfers the target packet, which is a packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 stored in itself or newly received from the S-GW 161, to the wireless base station device 101C via the S-GW 161. (Step S831).
 上記のようにして、無線基地局装置101B,101Cへのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了する(ステップS832)。なお、上記のようなステップS816からステップS823までの動作と、ステップS824からステップS831までの動作は並行して行われるものとする。 As described above, the preparation process for the handover operation to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C is completed (step S832). Note that the operations from step S816 to step S823 as described above and the operations from step S824 to step S831 are performed in parallel.
 次に、無線端末装置202は、新たな測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS833)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S833).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を新たに取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、新たに取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する。なお、上述した準備条件の示す通信品質は、実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed when the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. Note that the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition described above is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
 このとき、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了している無線基地局装置101B,101Cの中から、例えば無線端末装置202との間の通信品質がより良い方をハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置として選択する。第5の実施の形態では、無線基地局装置101Bが選択される場合を想定する(ステップS834)。 At this time, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines, for example, the one with the better communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C for which the handover operation preparation process has been completed. Select as a radio base station device. In the fifth embodiment, it is assumed that the radio base station apparatus 101B is selected (step S834).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202へ、無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先とするRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信する(ステップS835)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction with the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S835).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aへ自己の通信状態等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS836)。この状態通知に、データフォワーディングにおいて、無線基地局装置101Bが転送パケットを処理するための、パケットのシリアル番号等の情報が含まれる。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits a status notification indicating its own communication status and the like to the MME 162A (step S836). This state notification includes information such as the serial number of the packet for the radio base station apparatus 101B to process the transfer packet in data forwarding.
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信した状態通知を、MME162Bへ転送する(ステップS837)。 Next, the MME 162A transfers the status notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162B (step S837).
 次に、MME162Bは、MME162Aから転送された状態通知に対する状態通知応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS838)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a status notification response to the status notification transferred from the MME 162A to the MME 162A (step S838).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bへ無線端末装置202との通信内容等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS839)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a status notification indicating the content of communication with the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101B (step S839).
 次に、無線端末装置202および無線基地局装置101B間でRRCコネクションが確立されると、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101BへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を送信する(ステップS840)。 Next, when the RRC connection is established between the wireless terminal device 202 and the wireless base station device 101B, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification to the wireless base station device 101B (step S840).
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aから転送されたパケットを無線端末装置202へ送信する。ここで、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信した状態通知の示すシリアル番号等を用いて、パケットの順序制御を行なう。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits the packet transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202. Here, radio base station apparatus 101B performs packet sequence control using the serial number or the like indicated by the status notification received from radio base station apparatus 101A.
 また、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Bへパケットを送信し、無線基地局装置101Bは、当該対象パケットをS-GW161へ送信する。 Further, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a packet to the wireless base station device 101B, and the wireless base station device 101B transmits the target packet to the S-GW 161.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、MME162Bへハンドオーバ完了通知を送信する。このハンドオーバ完了通知に、S-GW161に対するパス切り替え要求が含まれる(ステップS841)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162B. This handover completion notification includes a path switching request for the S-GW 161 (step S841).
 次に、MME162Bは、無線基地局装置101Bから受信したハンドオーバ完了通知をMME162Aへ転送する(ステップS842)。 Next, the MME 162B transfers the handover completion notification received from the radio base station apparatus 101B to the MME 162A (step S842).
 次に、MME162Aは、MME162Bから受信したハンドオーバ完了通知に対するハンドオーバ完了通知応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS843)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits a handover completion notification response to the handover completion notification received from the MME 162B to the MME 162B (step S843).
 次に、MME162Bは、上記パス切り替え要求を含むベアラ変更要求をS-GW161へ送信する(ステップS844)。 Next, the MME 162B transmits a bearer change request including the path switching request to the S-GW 161 (step S844).
 次に、S-GW161は、MME162Bからベアラ変更要求を受信して、パスの切り替え処理を行なう、すなわち、当該無線端末装置202宛の対象パケットの送信先を無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替える。そして、S-GW161は、ベアラ変更要求に対する、パス切り替え応答を含むベアラ変更応答をMME162Bへ送信する(ステップS845)。 Next, the S-GW 161 receives the bearer change request from the MME 162B, and performs path switching processing. That is, the transmission destination of the target packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device. Switch to 101B. Then, the S-GW 161 transmits a bearer change response including a path switching response to the bearer change request to the MME 162B (step S845).
 そして、S-GW161は、エンドマーカが付された対象パケットを無線基地局装置101Aへ送信し、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Aへの送信を終了して、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Bへの送信を開始する。また、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aを経由していないS-GW161からの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を保留し、蓄積しておく。 Then, the S-GW 161 transmits the target packet with the end marker attached to the radio base station apparatus 101A, ends the transmission of the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101A, and then transmits the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B. Start sending. In addition, the radio base station apparatus 101B suspends and stores the transmission of the target packet from the S-GW 161 that does not pass through the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S-GW161から受信したエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットをS-GW161経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する。このとき、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する対象パケットの最後を、このエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットとする。 Then, the wireless base station device 101A transfers the target packet with the end marker received from the S-GW 161 to the wireless base station device 101B via the S-GW 161. At this time, the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the end of the target packet to be transferred to the radio base station apparatus 101B as the target packet with the end marker.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aからエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットを受信して、無線基地局装置101Aによる自己へのデータフォワーディングが完了したことを認識する。そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから転送された対象パケットをすべて無線端末装置202へ送信した後、蓄積していたS-GW161からの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を開始する。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the target packet with the end marker from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and recognizes that the data forwarding to itself by the radio base station apparatus 101A has been completed. The radio base station apparatus 101B transmits all the target packets transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits the accumulated target packets from the S-GW 161 to the radio terminal apparatus 202. To start.
 次に、上記のようなデータフォワーディングが完了すると、MME162Aは、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS846)。 Next, when the data forwarding as described above is completed, the MME 162A transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S846).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aから端末情報解放指示を受信して、ハンドオーバ先として選択されて無線基地局装置101B以外の無線基地局装置、すなわち無線基地局装置101Cへのハンドオーバ中止通知をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS847)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the MME 162A, and is selected as the handover destination and notifies the radio base station apparatus other than the radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, the radio base station apparatus 101C. Is transmitted to the MME 162A (step S847).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信した無線基地局装置101Cへのハンドオーバ中止通知をMME162Cへ転送する(ステップS848)。 Next, the MME 162A transfers the handover cancellation notification to the radio base station apparatus 101C received from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the MME 162C (step S848).
 次に、MME162Cは、MME162Aからハンドオーバ中止通知を受信して、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Cへ送信する(ステップS849)。 Next, the MME 162C receives the handover cancellation notification from the MME 162A, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S849).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、MME162Cから端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162Cへ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS850)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101C receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162C, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162C (step S850).
 次に、MME162Cは、無線基地局装置101Cから端末情報解放完了通知を受信して、ハンドオーバ中止応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS851)。 Next, the MME 162C receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101C, and transmits a handover stop response to the MME 162A (step S851).
 次に、MME162Aは、MME162Cから受信したハンドオーバ中止応答を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS852)。 Next, the MME 162A transmits the handover stop response received from the MME 162C to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S852).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162Aからハンドオーバ中止応答を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162Aへ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS853)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the handover stop response from the MME 162A, releases information related to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162A (step S853).
 次に、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから端末情報解放完了通知を受信すると、S-GW161を介する無線基地局装置101Aと無線基地局装置101Bとの間のデータフォワーディングパスの削除要求をS-GW161へ送信する(ステップS854)。 Next, when the MME 162A receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, the MME 162A issues a request to delete the data forwarding path between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161. It transmits to GW161 (step S854).
 次に、S-GW161は、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、自己を介する無線基地局装置101Aと無線基地局装置101Bとの間のデータフォワーディングパスの削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS855)。 Next, when the S-GW 161 receives the data forwarding path deletion request, the S-GW 161 deletes the data forwarding path between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the radio base station apparatus 101B via itself, and the data forwarding path deletion response. Is transmitted to the MME 162A (step S855).
 また、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aから端末情報解放完了通知を受信すると、S-GW161を介する無線基地局装置101Aと無線基地局装置101Cとの間のデータフォワーディングパスの削除要求をS-GW161へ送信する(ステップS856)。 When the MME 162A receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101A, the MME 162A issues a request to delete the data forwarding path between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the radio base station apparatus 101C via the S-GW 161. (Step S856).
 次に、S-GW161は、データフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、自己を介する無線基地局装置101Aと無線基地局装置101Cとの間のデータフォワーディングパスの削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162Aへ送信する(ステップS857)。 Next, when the S-GW 161 receives the data forwarding path deletion request, the S-GW 161 deletes the data forwarding path between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the radio base station apparatus 101C via the data transmission path, and receives a data forwarding path deletion response. Is transmitted to the MME 162A (step S857).
 なお、上述した動作の流れでは、無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバ動作が完了し、無線基地局装置101AがMME162から端末情報解放指示を受信した(ステップS846)後に、無線基地局装置101AがMME162へハンドオーバ中止通知を送信している(ステップS847)。しかしながら、必ずしもこのような動作の流れに限定されず、例えば、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bへのハンドオーバ動作が完了する前に無線基地局装置101Cへのハンドオーバ動作中止通知をMME162へ送信してもよい。この場合、たとえば、ステップS847からステップS852までの動作が、ステップS840の前に行われる。 In the above-described operation flow, after the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101B is completed and the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the MME 162 (step S846), the radio base station apparatus 101A performs the MME 162. The handover stop notification is transmitted to the terminal (step S847). However, the operation flow is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the radio base station apparatus 101A sends a handover operation stop notification to the radio base station apparatus 101C before the handover operation to the radio base station apparatus 101B is completed. May be sent to. In this case, for example, the operations from step S847 to step S852 are performed before step S840.
 このように、本発明の第5の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム407において、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ先として無線基地局装置101B,101Cを示すハンドオーバ要求を受信し、ハンドオーバ要求の示す無線基地局装置101B,101Cごとに自己の管理対象であるか否かを判断し、自己の管理対象でない場合には、無線基地局装置101B,101Cを管理するMME162B,162Cへハンドオーバ要求を送信する。 Thus, in the wireless communication system 407 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the MME 162A receives the handover request indicating the wireless base station devices 101B and 101C as the handover destination from the wireless base station device 101A, and receives the handover request. Is determined for each of the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C. If the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C are not their own management targets, a handover request is sent to the MMEs 162B and 162C that manage the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C. Send.
 ある周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理の完了後に無線端末装置202が移動することで、当該周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置202の電波状況が悪化する場合が考えられる。このような場合でも、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了していることから、当該他の周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を短時間で行うことができるため、無線端末装置202と無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cとの間の通信が途切れることを防ぐことができる。 It can be considered that the radio terminal device 202 related to the neighboring base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal device 202 after the completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain neighboring base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent communication between the device 202 and the radio base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C from being interrupted.
 また、上記のように、周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置202の電波状況が悪化した場合であっても、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了しているため、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理およびハンドオーバ動作の中止処理のための情報の送受信が繰り返されることを防ぎ、無線通信システムにおける負荷を軽減させることができる。 Further, as described above, even when the radio wave condition of the wireless terminal device 202 related to the neighboring base station deteriorates, the handover operation preparation processing with other neighboring base stations is completed, so the handover operation It is possible to prevent the transmission / reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation stop process from being repeated, and to reduce the load on the wireless communication system.
(b)S-GWの切り替えが必要な場合
 [構成および基本動作]
 図75は、本発明の第5の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムの構成の一例を示す図である。
(B) When switching of S-GW is necessary [Configuration and basic operation]
FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a wireless communication system according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
 図75を参照して、第5の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム408は、図73に示す無線通信システム407と同様に、たとえば3GPPで規格化されたLTEに従う移動体通信システムであり、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cを備える。ここでは、無線端末装置202が、セルCA内に位置し、無線基地局装置101Aを通信接続先として選択してから、セルCA、セルCBおよびセルCCの重複領域へ移動した場合を想定する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aがサービング基地局に相当し、無線基地局装置101B,101Cが周辺基地局に相当し、これら無線基地局装置101B,101Cがハンドオーバ先の候補である無線基地局装置に該当する場合を想定する。 75, radio communication system 408 according to the fifth embodiment is a mobile communication system according to LTE standardized by 3GPP, for example, similarly to radio communication system 407 shown in FIG. 73. Base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C are provided. Here, it is assumed that radio terminal apparatus 202 is located in cell CA, selects radio base station apparatus 101A as a communication connection destination, and then moves to an overlapping area of cell CA, cell CB, and cell CC. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A corresponds to a serving base station, the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C correspond to peripheral base stations, and the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C serve as handover destination candidates. Assume the case.
 再び図75を参照して、無線通信システム408は、さらに、コアネットワーク301に設けられたS-GW161A,161B,161C(ゲートウェイ装置)と、MME162(通信制御装置)と、P-GW163とを備える。 Referring to FIG. 75 again, wireless communication system 408 further includes S- GWs 161A, 161B, 161C (gateway devices), MME 162 (communication control device), and P-GW 163 provided in core network 301. .
 S-GW161Aは、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されている。S-GW161Aは、無線基地局装置101A経由で無線端末装置202から受信した通信データをP-GW163経由でIP網302へ送信するとともに、IP網302におけるサーバ等からP-GW163経由で受信した通信データを無線基地局装置101A経由で無線端末装置202へ送信する。 The S-GW 161A is connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302. The S-GW 161A transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101A to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and communication received from the server in the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163. Data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101A.
 S-GW161Bは、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されている。S-GW161Bは、無線基地局装置101B経由で無線端末装置202から受信した通信データをP-GW163経由でIP網302へ送信するとともに、IP網302におけるサーバ等からP-GW163経由で受信した通信データを無線基地局装置101B経由で無線端末装置202へ送信する。 The S-GW 161B is connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. The S-GW 161B transmits the communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101B to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and the communication received via the P-GW 163 from a server or the like in the IP network 302. Data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101B.
 S-GW161Cは、無線基地局装置101CとIP網302との間に接続されている。S-GW161Cは、無線基地局装置101B経由で無線端末装置202から受信した通信データをP-GW163経由でIP網302へ送信するとともに、IP網302におけるサーバ等からP-GW163経由で受信した通信データを無線基地局装置101C経由で無線端末装置202へ送信する。 The S-GW 161C is connected between the radio base station apparatus 101C and the IP network 302. The S-GW 161C transmits communication data received from the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101B to the IP network 302 via the P-GW 163, and communication received via the P-GW 163 from a server or the like in the IP network 302. Data is transmitted to the wireless terminal device 202 via the wireless base station device 101C.
 MME162は、無線通信システム402における無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cおよび無線端末装置202等を管理する。MME162は、無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cとの間で制御メッセージを送受信する。 The MME 162 manages the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C, the radio terminal apparatus 202, and the like in the radio communication system 402. The MME 162 transmits and receives control messages to and from the radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, and 101C.
 無線基地局装置101AおよびS-GW161Aは、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。無線基地局装置101BおよびS-GW161Bは、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。無線基地局装置101CおよびS-GW161Cは、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-Uインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-Uインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatus 101A and the S-GW 161A exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface. The radio base station apparatus 101B and the S-GW 161B exchange various data with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface. The radio base station apparatus 101C and the S-GW 161C exchange various pieces of information with each other via the S1-U interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S1-U interface which is a logical interface.
 無線基地局装置101A,101B,101CおよびMME162は、点線で示すように、論理的なインタフェースであるS1-MMEインタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S1-MMEインタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The radio base station apparatuses 101A, 101B, 101C and the MME 162 transmit and receive communication data according to the S1-MME interface, which is a logical interface, to each other via the S1-MME interface, as indicated by dotted lines. Communicate.
 MME162およびS-GW161A,161B,161Cは、論理的なインタフェースであるS11インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S11インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The MME 162 and the S- GWs 161A, 161B, and 161C exchange various pieces of information with each other via the S11 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S11 interface that is a logical interface.
 S-GW161A,161B,161CおよびP-GW163は、論理的なインタフェースであるS5インタフェースに従う通信データを互いに送受信することにより、S5インタフェース経由で種々の情報を互いにやりとりする。 The S-GW 161A, 161B, 161C and the P-GW 163 exchange various data with each other via the S5 interface by transmitting and receiving communication data according to the S5 interface which is a logical interface.
 [動作]
 図76は、本発明の第5の実施の形態に係る無線通信システムにおけるハンドオーバ動作のシーケンスである。
[Operation]
FIG. 76 is a sequence of a handover operation in the radio communication system according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
 図76を参照して、ステップS861からステップS864までの動作は、図74に示すステップS811からステップS814までの動作と同様であるため、ここでは詳細な説明を繰り返さない。 76, the operation from step S861 to step S864 is the same as the operation from step S811 to step S814 shown in FIG. 74, and therefore detailed description will not be repeated here.
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、MME162の切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162は、ハンドオーバ要求に示されている無線基地局装置101B,101Cが自己の管理対象であるか否かを判断する。ここでは、無線基地局装置101B,101CがMME162の管理対象であることから、MME162は、MMEの切り替えを行う必要がないと判断する(ステップS865)。 Next, the MME 162 determines whether it is necessary to switch the MME 162 based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162 determines whether or not the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C indicated in the handover request are their management targets. Here, since the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C are the management targets of the MME 162, the MME 162 determines that there is no need to switch the MME (step S865).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aから受信したハンドオーバ要求に基づいて、S-GWの切り替えを行う必要があるか否かを判断する。具体的には、MME162は、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWとが異なるか否かを判断する。また、MME162は、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWと、無線基地局装置101CとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GWとが異なるか否かを判断する(ステップS866)。 Next, the MME 162 determines whether or not it is necessary to perform S-GW switching based on the handover request received from the radio base station apparatus 101A. Specifically, the MME 162 includes an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Whether or not is different. Further, in the MME 162, the S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302 is different from the S-GW connected between the radio base station apparatus 101C and the IP network 302. It is determined whether or not (step S866).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Aと、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Bとが異なることから、上位ネットワークから無線端末装置202宛の下りパケット、および、無線端末装置202から上位ネットワークへの上りパケットが、無線基地局装置101BとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Bを経由可能となるように、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路の作成をS-GW161Bへ要求する(ステップS867)。 Next, the MME 162 includes an S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302, and an S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101B and the IP network 302. Due to the difference, the downstream packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 from the higher level network and the upstream packet from the wireless terminal device 202 to the higher level network are connected between the wireless base station device 101B and the IP network 302. The S-GW 161B is requested to create a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B so as to be able to pass through the GW 161B (step S867).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、MME162から通信経路の作成要求を受信して、自己を経由するP-GW163と無線基地局装置101Bとの間の通信経路を作成し、通信経路の作成応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS868)。 Next, the S-GW 161B receives the communication path creation request from the MME 162, creates a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101B passing through the S-GW 161B, and sends a communication path creation response to the MME 162. (Step S868).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bへハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS869)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101B (step S869).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、MME162からハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MME162へ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS870)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162 (step S870).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信すると、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路すなわち論理的なパスの確立要求をS-GW161Bへ送信する(ステップS871)。 Next, when receiving a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, the MME 162 transmits a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path, to the S-GW 161B (step S871). ).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、MME162からデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161Bは、S-GW161AとS-GW161Bとの間の論理的な通信経路、および、S-GW161Bと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的な通信経路を確立する。そして、S-GW161Bは、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS872)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161B establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161B establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and S-GW 161B, and a logical communication path between S-GW 161B and radio base station apparatus 101B. Then, the S-GW 161B transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S872).
 次に、MME162は、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路の確立要求をS-GW161Aへ送信する(ステップS873)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a request for establishing a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface to the S-GW 161A (step S873).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、MME162からデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161Aは、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路を確立する。そして、S-GW161Aは、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS874)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161A establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161A establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the S-GW 161A transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S874).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを開始する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己に蓄積されているかまたはS-GW161から新たに受信する当該無線端末装置202宛のパケットである対象パケットをS-GW161経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する(ステップS875)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface. That is, the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet, which is a packet addressed to the radio terminal apparatus 202 that is stored in itself or newly received from the S-GW 161, to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161. (Step S875).
 また、MME162は、無線基地局装置101AとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Aと、無線基地局装置101CとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Bとが異なることから、上位ネットワークから無線端末装置202宛の下りパケット、および、無線端末装置202から上位ネットワークへの上りパケットが、無線基地局装置101CとIP網302との間に接続されているS-GW161Cを経由可能となるように、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Cとの間の通信経路の作成をS-GW161Cへ要求する(ステップS876)。 The MME 162 is different in S-GW 161A connected between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the IP network 302 and S-GW 161B connected between the radio base station apparatus 101C and the IP network 302. Therefore, the S-GW 161C in which the downstream packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 from the higher level network and the upstream packet from the wireless terminal device 202 to the higher level network are connected between the wireless base station device 101C and the IP network 302. The S-GW 161C is requested to create a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S876).
 次に、S-GW161Cは、MME162から通信経路の作成要求を受信して、自己を経由するP-GW163と無線基地局装置101Cとの間の通信経路を作成し、通信経路の作成応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS877)。 Next, the S-GW 161C receives the communication path creation request from the MME 162, creates a communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101C passing through the S-GW 161C, and sends a communication path creation response to the MME 162. (Step S877).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Cへハンドオーバ要求を送信する(ステップS878)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a handover request to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S878).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、MME162からハンドオーバ要求を受信して、MME162へ当該ハンドオーバ要求に対するハンドオーバ応答を送信する(ステップS879)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101C receives a handover request from the MME 162, and transmits a handover response to the handover request to the MME 162 (step S879).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bからハンドオーバ応答を受信すると、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路すなわち論理的なパスの確立要求をS-GW161Cへ送信する(ステップS880)。 Next, when receiving a handover response from the radio base station apparatus 101B, the MME 162 transmits a communication path for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface, that is, a logical path establishment request to the S-GW 161C (step S880). ).
 次に、S-GW161Cは、MME162からデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161Cは、S-GW161AとS-GW161Cとの間の論理的な通信経路、および、S-GW161Cと無線基地局装置101Cとの間の論理的な通信経路を確立する。そして、S-GW161Cは、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS881)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161C establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161C establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and S-GW 161C, and a logical communication path between S-GW 161C and radio base station apparatus 101C. Then, the S-GW 161C transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S881).
 次に、MME162は、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを行うための通信経路の確立要求をS-GW161Aへ送信する(ステップS882)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a communication path establishment request for performing data forwarding via the S1-U interface to the S-GW 161A (step S882).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、MME162からデータフォワーディングパスの確立要求を受けると、データフォワーディングパスを確立させる。すなわち、S-GW161Aは、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路を確立する。そして、S-GW161Aは、データフォワーディングパスの確立応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS874)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path establishment request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161A establishes a data forwarding path. That is, S-GW 161A establishes a logical communication path between S-GW 161A and radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the S-GW 161A transmits a data forwarding path establishment response to the MME 162 (step S874).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Aへハンドオーバ指示を送信する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S1-Uインタフェース経由のデータフォワーディングを開始する。すなわち、無線基地局装置101Aは、自己に蓄積されているかまたはS-GW161から新たに受信する当該無線端末装置202宛のパケットである対象パケットをS-GW161経由で無線基地局装置101Cへ転送する(ステップS884)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A starts data forwarding via the S1-U interface. That is, the wireless base station device 101A transfers the target packet, which is a packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 stored in itself or newly received from the S-GW 161, to the wireless base station device 101C via the S-GW 161. (Step S884).
 上記のようにして、無線基地局装置101B,101Cへのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了する(ステップS885)。なお、上記のようなステップS867からステップS875までの動作と、ステップS876からステップS884までの動作は並行して行われるものとする。 As described above, the preparation process for the handover operation to the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C is completed (step S885). Note that the operations from step S867 to step S875 as described above and the operations from step S876 to step S884 are performed in parallel.
 次に、無線端末装置202は、新たな測定結果通知を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS886)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a new measurement result notification to the wireless base station device 101A (step S886).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線端末装置202から受信した測定結果通知に基づいて、自己および当該無線端末装置202間の通信品質を新たに取得する。そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、新たに取得した通信品質が所定のハンドオーバ実行条件を満たす場合には、当該無線端末装置202のハンドオーバ動作を実行すべきであると判断する。なお、上述した準備条件の示す通信品質は、実行条件の示す通信品質と比べて良い品質である。 Next, based on the measurement result notification received from the wireless terminal device 202, the wireless base station device 101A newly acquires communication quality between itself and the wireless terminal device 202. Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines that the handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus 202 should be executed when the newly acquired communication quality satisfies a predetermined handover execution condition. Note that the communication quality indicated by the preparation condition described above is better than the communication quality indicated by the execution condition.
 このとき、無線基地局装置101Aは、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了している無線基地局装置101B,101Cの中から、例えば無線端末装置202との間の通信品質がより良い方をハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置として選択する。第5の実施の形態では、無線基地局装置101Bが選択される場合を想定する(ステップS887)。 At this time, the radio base station apparatus 101A determines, for example, the one with the better communication quality with the radio terminal apparatus 202 from the radio base station apparatuses 101B and 101C for which the handover operation preparation process has been completed. Select as a radio base station device. In the fifth embodiment, it is assumed that the radio base station apparatus 101B is selected (step S887).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、当該無線端末装置202へ、無線基地局装置101Bをハンドオーバ先とするRRCコネクション再構成指示を送信する(ステップS888)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration instruction with the radio base station apparatus 101B as a handover destination to the radio terminal apparatus 202 (step S888).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162へ自己の通信状態等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS889)。この状態通知に、データフォワーディングにおいて、無線基地局装置101Bが転送パケットを処理するための、パケットのシリアル番号等の情報が含まれる。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A transmits a state notification indicating its own communication state and the like to the MME 162 (step S889). This state notification includes information such as the serial number of the packet for the radio base station apparatus 101B to process the transfer packet in data forwarding.
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Bへ無線端末装置202との通信内容等を示す状態通知を送信する(ステップS890)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a status notification indicating communication contents and the like with the wireless terminal device 202 to the wireless base station device 101B (step S890).
 次に、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101BへRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を送信する(ステップS891)。 Next, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification to the wireless base station device 101B (step S891).
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、無線基地局装置101Aから転送されたパケットを無線端末装置202へ送信する。ここで、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから受信した状態通知の示すシリアル番号等を用いて、パケットの順序制御を行なう。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202, and transmits the packet transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202. Here, radio base station apparatus 101B performs packet sequence control using the serial number or the like indicated by the status notification received from radio base station apparatus 101A.
 また、無線端末装置202は、無線基地局装置101Bへパケットを送信し、無線基地局装置101Bは、当該対象パケットをS-GW161Bへ送信する。 Also, the wireless terminal device 202 transmits a packet to the wireless base station device 101B, and the wireless base station device 101B transmits the target packet to the S-GW 161B.
 次に、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線端末装置202からRRCコネクション再構成完了通知を受信して、MME162へハンドオーバ完了通知を送信する。このハンドオーバ完了通知に、S-GW161Bに対するパス切り替え要求が含まれる(ステップS892)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101 B receives the RRC connection reconfiguration completion notification from the radio terminal apparatus 202 and transmits a handover completion notification to the MME 162. This handover completion notification includes a path switching request for the S-GW 161B (step S892).
 次に、MME162は、上記パス切り替え要求を含むベアラ変更要求をS-GW161Bへ送信する(ステップS893)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a bearer change request including the path switching request to the S-GW 161B (step S893).
 そして、S-GW161Bは、MME162からベアラ変更要求を受信して、パスの切り替え処理を行なう、すなわち、当該無線端末装置202宛の対象パケットの送信先を無線基地局装置101Aから無線基地局装置101Bへ切り替える。そして、S-GW161Bは、ベアラ変更要求に対する、パス切り替え応答を含むベアラ変更応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS894)。 The S-GW 161B receives the bearer change request from the MME 162, and performs path switching processing. That is, the transmission destination of the target packet addressed to the wireless terminal device 202 is changed from the wireless base station device 101A to the wireless base station device 101B. Switch to. Then, the S-GW 161B transmits a bearer change response including a path switching response to the bearer change request to the MME 162 (step S894).
 そして、S-GW161Aは、エンドマーカが付された対象パケットを無線基地局装置101Aへ送信し、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Aへの送信を終了して、対象パケットの無線基地局装置101Bへの送信を開始する。また、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aを経由していないS-GW161Bからの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を保留し、蓄積しておく。 Then, the S-GW 161A transmits the target packet with the end marker attached thereto to the radio base station apparatus 101A, terminates the transmission of the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits the target packet to the radio base station apparatus 101B. Start sending. Also, the radio base station apparatus 101B suspends and stores the transmission of the target packet from the S-GW 161B that does not pass through the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Aは、S-GW161Aから受信したエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットをS-GW161AおよびS-GW161B経由で無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する。このとき、無線基地局装置101Aは、無線基地局装置101Bへ転送する対象パケットの最後を、このエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットとする。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101A transfers the target packet with the end marker received from the S-GW 161A to the radio base station apparatus 101B via the S-GW 161A and the S-GW 161B. At this time, the radio base station apparatus 101A sets the end of the target packet to be transferred to the radio base station apparatus 101B as the target packet with the end marker.
 そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aからエンドマーカ付きの対象パケットを受信して、無線基地局装置101Aによる自己へのデータフォワーディングが完了したことを認識する。そして、無線基地局装置101Bは、無線基地局装置101Aから転送された対象パケットをすべて無線端末装置202へ送信した後、蓄積していたS-GW161Bからの対象パケットの無線端末装置202への送信を開始する。 Then, the radio base station apparatus 101B receives the target packet with the end marker from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and recognizes that the data forwarding to itself by the radio base station apparatus 101A has been completed. The radio base station apparatus 101B transmits all the target packets transferred from the radio base station apparatus 101A to the radio terminal apparatus 202, and then transmits the accumulated target packets from the S-GW 161B to the radio terminal apparatus 202. To start.
 次に、MME162は、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Aとの間の通信経路の削除をS-GW161Aへ要求する(ステップS895)。 Next, the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161A to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S895).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、MME162から通信経路の削除要求を受信して、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Aとの間の通信経路を削除し、通信経路の削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS896)。 Next, the S-GW 161A receives the communication path deletion request from the MME 162, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162 ( Step S896).
 次に、MME162は、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS897)。 Next, the MME 162 transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S897).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162から端末情報解放指示を受信して、ハンドオーバ先として選択されて無線基地局装置101B以外の無線基地局装置、すなわち無線基地局装置101Cへのハンドオーバ中止通知をMME162へ送信する(ステップS898)。 Next, the radio base station apparatus 101A receives the terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, and is selected as the handover destination and notifies the radio base station apparatus other than the radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, the radio base station apparatus 101C. Is transmitted to the MME 162 (step S898).
 次に、MME162は、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Cとの間の通信経路の削除をS-GW161Cへ要求する(ステップS899)。 Next, the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161C to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S899).
 次に、S-GW161Cは、MME162から通信経路の削除要求を受信して、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Cとの間の通信経路を削除し、通信経路の削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS900)。 Next, the S-GW 161C receives a communication path deletion request from the MME 162, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101C, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162 ( Step S900).
 次に、MME162は、S-GW161Cから通信経路の削除応答を受信して、端末情報解放指示を無線基地局装置101Cへ送信する(ステップS901)。 Next, the MME 162 receives a communication path deletion response from the S-GW 161C, and transmits a terminal information release instruction to the radio base station apparatus 101C (step S901).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Cは、MME162から端末情報解放指示を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162へ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS902)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101C receives a terminal information release instruction from the MME 162, releases information related to the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S902).
 次に、MME162は、無線基地局装置101Cから端末情報解放完了通知を受信して、ハンドオーバ中止応答を無線基地局装置101Aへ送信する(ステップS903)。 Next, the MME 162 receives the terminal information release completion notification from the radio base station apparatus 101C, and transmits a handover stop response to the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S903).
 次に、無線基地局装置101Aは、MME162からハンドオーバ中止応答を受信して、無線端末装置202に関する情報を解放し、MME162へ端末情報解放完了通知を送信する(ステップS904)。 Next, the wireless base station device 101A receives a handover stop response from the MME 162, releases information related to the wireless terminal device 202, and transmits a terminal information release completion notification to the MME 162 (step S904).
 次に、MME162は、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Aとの間の通信経路の削除をS-GW161Aへ要求する(ステップS905)。 Next, the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161A to delete the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A (step S905).
 次に、MME162は、S-GW161Bと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的な通信経路、すなわちデータフォワーディングパスの削除をS-GW161Bへ要求する(ステップS906)。 Next, the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161B to delete the logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B, that is, the data forwarding path (step S906).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、MME162から通信経路の削除要求を受信して、P-GW163と無線基地局装置101Aとの間の通信経路を削除し、通信経路の削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS907)。 Next, the S-GW 161A receives the communication path deletion request from the MME 162, deletes the communication path between the P-GW 163 and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and transmits a communication path deletion response to the MME 162 ( Step S907).
 次に、S-GW161Bは、MME162からデータフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、S-GW161Bと無線基地局装置101Bとの間の論理的な通信経路の削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS908)。 Next, upon receiving a data forwarding path deletion request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161B deletes a logical communication path between the S-GW 161B and the radio base station apparatus 101B, and sends a data forwarding path deletion response. It transmits to MME162 (step S908).
 また、MME162は、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路、すなわちデータフォワーディングパスの削除をS-GW161Aへ要求する(ステップS909)。 Also, the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161A to delete the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, that is, the data forwarding path (Step S909).
 また、MME162は、S-GW161Cと無線基地局装置101Cとの間の論理的な通信経路、すなわちデータフォワーディングパスの削除をS-GW161Cへ要求する(ステップS910)。 Also, the MME 162 requests the S-GW 161C to delete the logical communication path between the S-GW 161C and the radio base station apparatus 101C, that is, the data forwarding path (Step S910).
 次に、S-GW161Aは、MME162からデータフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、S-GW161Aと無線基地局装置101Aとの間の論理的な通信経路の削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS911)。 Next, when the S-GW 161A receives the data forwarding path deletion request from the MME 162, it deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161A and the radio base station apparatus 101A, and sends a data forwarding path deletion response. It transmits to MME162 (step S911).
 また、S-GW161Cは、MME162からデータフォワーディングパスの削除要求を受信すると、S-GW161Cと無線基地局装置101Cとの間の論理的な通信経路の削除を行い、データフォワーディングパスの削除応答をMME162へ送信する(ステップS912)。 When the S-GW 161C receives the data forwarding path deletion request from the MME 162, the S-GW 161C deletes the logical communication path between the S-GW 161C and the radio base station apparatus 101C, and sends a data forwarding path deletion response to the MME 162. (Step S912).
 なお、図74および図76に示すシーケンスにおける無線基地局装置101Aおよび無線端末装置202間の通信品質として、CQIレポートの値を利用してもよい。 Note that the value of the CQI report may be used as the communication quality between the radio base station apparatus 101A and the radio terminal apparatus 202 in the sequences shown in FIGS.
 このように、本発明の第5の実施の形態に係る無線通信システム408において、MME162Aは、無線基地局装置101Aからハンドオーバ先として無線基地局装置101B,101Cを示すハンドオーバ要求を受信し、ハンドオーバ要求の示す無線基地局装置101B,101Cごとに、無線基地局装置101Aと上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置161Aと、無線基地局装置101B,101Cと上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置161B,161Cとが異なるか否かを判断し、異なると判断したゲートウェイ装置161B,161Cへ通信経路作成要求を送信する。 As described above, in the wireless communication system 408 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the MME 162A receives the handover request indicating the wireless base station devices 101B and 101C as the handover destination from the wireless base station device 101A, and receives the handover request. For each of the wireless base station devices 101B and 101C shown in FIG. 1, the gateway device 161A connected between the wireless base station device 101A and the upper network, and the wireless base station devices 101B and 101C and the upper network are connected. It is determined whether or not the existing gateway devices 161B and 161C are different, and a communication path creation request is transmitted to the gateway devices 161B and 161C determined to be different.
 ある周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作の準備処理の完了後に無線端末装置202が移動することで、当該周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置202の電波状況が悪化する場合が考えられる。このような場合でも、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了していることから、当該他の周辺基地局へのハンドオーバ動作を短時間で行うことができるため、無線端末装置202と無線基地局装置101A,101B,101Cとの間の通信が途切れることを防ぐことができる。 It can be considered that the radio terminal device 202 related to the neighboring base station deteriorates due to the movement of the wireless terminal device 202 after the completion of the preparation process for the handover operation to a certain neighboring base station. Even in such a case, since the preparation process for the handover operation with another neighboring base station is completed, the handover operation to the other neighboring base station can be performed in a short time. It is possible to prevent communication between the device 202 and the radio base station devices 101A, 101B, and 101C from being interrupted.
 また、上記のように、周辺基地局に関する無線端末装置202の電波状況が悪化した場合であっても、他の周辺基地局との間のハンドオーバ動作の準備処理が完了しているため、ハンドオーバ動作の準備処理およびハンドオーバ動作の中止処理のための情報の送受信が繰り返されることを防ぎ、無線通信システムにおける負荷を軽減させることができる。 Further, as described above, even when the radio wave condition of the wireless terminal device 202 related to the neighboring base station deteriorates, the handover operation preparation processing with other neighboring base stations is completed, so the handover operation It is possible to prevent the transmission / reception of information for the preparation process and the handover operation stop process from being repeated, and to reduce the load on the wireless communication system.
 なお、本発明の第5の実施の形態では、ハンドオーバ動作においてMMEの切り替えが必要な場合と、ハンドオーバ動作においてS-GWの切り替えが必要な場合とを説明したが、本発明に係る無線通信システムは、ハンドオーバ動作においてMMEおよびS-GWの切り替えが必要な場合であっても対応することができる。 In the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the case where MME switching is required in the handover operation and the case where S-GW switching is required in the handover operation have been described. However, the radio communication system according to the present invention is described. Can cope with the case where switching between MME and S-GW is necessary in the handover operation.
 また、本発明の第5の実施の形態では、無線端末装置202の通信接続先である無線基地局装置101Aが、複数のハンドオーバ先の候補からハンドオーバ先を選択する場合について説明したが、無線端末装置202が無線基地局装置101Aから複数のハンドオーバ先の候補を示す情報を受信して、無線端末装置202が複数のハンドオーバ先の候補からハンドオーバ先を選択する構成であってもよい。 In the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the case where the radio base station apparatus 101A, which is the communication connection destination of the radio terminal apparatus 202, selects a handover destination from a plurality of handover destination candidates has been described. The apparatus 202 may receive information indicating a plurality of handover destination candidates from the radio base station apparatus 101A, and the radio terminal apparatus 202 may select a handover destination from the plurality of handover destination candidates.
 なお、本発明の第1の実施の形態~第5の実施の形態に係る各装置の構成要素および動作のうち、一部または全部を任意に組み合わせることも可能である。 It should be noted that some or all of the components and operations of each device according to the first to fifth embodiments of the present invention can be arbitrarily combined.
 上記実施の形態は、すべての点で例示であって制限的なものではないと考えられるべきである。本発明の範囲は、上記説明ではなく請求の範囲によって示され、請求の範囲と均等の意味および範囲内でのすべての変更が含まれることが意図される。 It should be considered that the above embodiment is illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.
 11 受信電力情報取得部(第1測定情報取得部)
 12 受信品質情報取得部(第2測定情報取得部)
 13 ハンドオーバ動作判断部
 14 条件設定部
 21 ハンドオーバ要求部
 22 ハンドオーバ指示部
 23 ハンドオーバ条件調整部
 24 ハンドオーバ情報取得部
 25 端末測定結果取得部
 31 アンテナ
 32 サーキュレータ
 33 受信部
 34 送信部
 35 信号処理部
 36 受信信号処理部
 37 選択部
 38 通信制御部
 91 アンテナ
 92 サーキュレータ
 93 無線受信部
 94 無線送信部
 95 信号処理部
 96 受信信号処理部
 97 送信信号処理部
 98 制御部
 101A,101B,101C 無線基地局装置
 161,161A,161B,161C S-GW(ゲートウェイ装置)
 162,162A,162B,162C MME(通信制御装置)
 163 P-GW
 202 無線端末装置
 301 コアネットワーク
 302 IP網(上位ネットワーク)
 401,402,403,404,405,406,407,408 無線通信システム
11 Received power information acquisition unit (first measurement information acquisition unit)
12 Reception quality information acquisition unit (second measurement information acquisition unit)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 13 Handover operation judgment part 14 Condition setting part 21 Handover request part 22 Handover instruction part 23 Handover condition adjustment part 24 Handover information acquisition part 25 Terminal measurement result acquisition part 31 Antenna 32 Circulator 33 Reception part 34 Transmission part 35 Signal processing part 36 Reception signal Processing unit 37 Selection unit 38 Communication control unit 91 Antenna 92 Circulator 93 Wireless reception unit 94 Wireless transmission unit 95 Signal processing unit 96 Reception signal processing unit 97 Transmission signal processing unit 98 Control unit 101A, 101B, 101C Radio base station apparatus 161, 161A , 161B, 161C S-GW (gateway device)
162, 162A, 162B, 162C MME (communication control device)
163 P-GW
202 Wireless terminal device 301 Core network 302 IP network (upper network)
401, 402, 403, 404, 405, 406, 407, 408 Wireless communication system

Claims (28)

  1.  無線端末装置がハンドオーバ動作を行なうことにより複数の無線基地局装置と通信可能な通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための無線基地局装置であって、
     無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報を取得するための受信電力情報取得部と、
     前記受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、前記無線端末装置における自己の無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得するための受信品質情報取得部と、
     前記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された前記受信品質情報に基づいて、前記無線端末装置による自己の無線基地局装置から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断するためのハンドオーバ動作判断部とを備える、無線基地局装置。
    In a communication system capable of communicating with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation, the radio terminal apparatus is a radio base station apparatus for transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from the radio terminal apparatus,
    A reception power information acquisition unit for acquiring reception power information indicating a measurement result of reception power of a radio signal from each radio base station device in a radio terminal device;
    A reception quality information acquisition unit for acquiring reception quality information that is updated at a shorter cycle than the reception power information and indicates reception quality of a radio signal from its own radio base station device in the radio terminal device;
    Based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit, to determine whether to perform a handover operation from the wireless base station device to another wireless base station device by the wireless terminal device A radio base station apparatus, comprising:
  2.  前記ハンドオーバ動作判断部は、前記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された前記受信品質情報および前記受信電力情報取得部によって取得された前記受信電力情報に基づいて、前記ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する、請求の範囲第1項に記載の無線基地局装置。 The handover operation determination unit determines whether to execute the handover operation based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit and the reception power information acquired by the reception power information acquisition unit. The radio base station apparatus according to claim 1, which is determined.
  3.  前記無線基地局装置は、さらに、
     前記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された前記受信品質情報に基づいて、前記受信電力情報の作成条件を変更するための条件設定部を備える、請求の範囲第2項に記載の無線基地局装置。
    The radio base station device further includes:
    The radio base station apparatus according to claim 2, further comprising: a condition setting unit for changing a reception power information creation condition based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit.
  4.  前記条件設定部は、前記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された前記受信品質情報から前記受信品質の劣化を検知すると、前記受信電力情報の更新周期を短くする、請求の範囲第3項に記載の無線基地局装置。 The said condition setting part shortens the update period of the said reception power information, if the deterioration of the said reception quality is detected from the said reception quality information acquired by the said reception quality information acquisition part, The Claim 3 of Claim 3 Wireless base station device.
  5.  前記受信電力情報は、所定の開始条件が満たされるとその作成が開始され、
     前記条件設定部は、前記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された前記受信品質情報から前記受信品質の劣化を検知すると、前記受信電力情報の作成開始が早まるように前記開始条件を設定する、請求の範囲第3項または第4項に記載の無線基地局装置。
    The reception power information starts to be created when a predetermined start condition is satisfied,
    The condition setting unit sets the start condition so that the start of creation of the reception power information is accelerated when the deterioration of the reception quality is detected from the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit. The radio base station apparatus according to the third or fourth range.
  6.  前記ハンドオーバ動作判断部は、前記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された前記受信品質情報が所定条件を満たす場合には、前記ハンドオーバ動作を実行すると判断し、前記無線端末装置による自己の無線基地局装置から所定の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を実行する、請求の範囲第1項に記載の無線基地局装置。 The handover operation determining unit determines that the handover operation is to be performed when the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquiring unit satisfies a predetermined condition, The radio base station apparatus according to claim 1, wherein a handover operation from a predetermined radio base station apparatus to a predetermined radio base station apparatus is executed.
  7.  前記ハンドオーバ動作判断部は、どの無線基地局装置への前記ハンドオーバ動作を実行するかを、前記受信電力情報取得部によって取得された前記受信電力情報に基づいて決定する、請求の範囲第6項に記載の無線基地局装置。 The range of claim 6, wherein the handover operation determining unit determines which radio base station apparatus the handover operation is to be executed based on the received power information acquired by the received power information acquiring unit. The radio base station apparatus described.
  8.  前記ハンドオーバ動作判断部は、所定条件を満たす場合に前記ハンドオーバ動作を実行すると判断し、前記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された前記受信品質情報に基づいて前記所定条件を設定する、請求の範囲第1項に記載の無線基地局装置。 The handover operation determination unit determines to execute the handover operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and sets the predetermined condition based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit. The radio base station apparatus according to item 1.
  9.  前記ハンドオーバ動作判断部は、前記受信電力情報取得部によって取得された前記受信電力情報が所定条件を満たす場合に前記ハンドオーバ動作を実行すると判断し、前記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された前記受信品質情報に基づいて前記所定条件を調整する、請求の範囲第8項に記載の無線基地局装置。 The handover operation determination unit determines to execute the handover operation when the reception power information acquired by the reception power information acquisition unit satisfies a predetermined condition, and the reception quality acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit The radio base station apparatus according to claim 8, wherein the predetermined condition is adjusted based on information.
  10.  前記ハンドオーバ動作判断部は、前記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された前記受信品質情報と、前記受信電力情報取得部によって取得された前記受信電力情報と、前記受信品質情報が更新されてから経過した時間および前記受信電力情報が更新されてから経過した時間の少なくとも一方とに基づいて、前記ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する、請求の範囲第1項から第9項のいずれか1項に記載の無線基地局装置。 The handover operation determination unit has passed since the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit, the reception power information acquired by the reception power information acquisition unit, and the reception quality information have been updated. 10. The device according to claim 1, wherein whether or not to execute the handover operation is determined based on at least one of a time and a time elapsed since the reception power information is updated. The radio base station apparatus described in 1.
  11.  前記ハンドオーバ動作判断部は、前記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された前記受信品質情報および前記受信電力情報取得部によって取得された前記受信電力情報に基づいて、前記ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断し、前記ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かの判断における前記受信品質情報の重みを、前記受信電力情報に基づいて調整する、請求の範囲第1項から第10項のいずれか1項に記載の無線基地局装置。 The handover operation determination unit determines whether to execute the handover operation based on the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit and the reception power information acquired by the reception power information acquisition unit. The range according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the weight of the reception quality information in the determination and whether to execute the handover operation is adjusted based on the reception power information. Wireless base station equipment.
  12.  前記ハンドオーバ動作判断部は、複数回分の前記受信品質情報に基づいて、前記ハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断する、請求の範囲第1項から第11項のいずれか1項に記載の無線基地局装置。 The radio according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the handover operation determination unit determines whether or not to execute the handover operation based on the reception quality information for a plurality of times. Base station device.
  13.  無線端末装置がハンドオーバ動作を行なうことにより複数の無線基地局装置と通信可能な通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信し、複数レイヤを有する通信プロトコルに従って動作する無線基地局装置であって、
     前記複数レイヤのうちの第1のレイヤに従い、無線端末装置における無線基地局装置からの無線信号の測定結果に基づく第1測定情報を取得するための第1測定情報取得部と、
     前記複数レイヤのうち、前記第1のレイヤよりも下位の第2のレイヤに従い、前記無線端末装置における無線基地局装置からの無線信号の測定結果に基づく第2測定情報を取得するための第2測定情報取得部と、
     前記第2測定情報取得部によって取得された前記第2測定情報に基づいて、前記無線端末装置による自己の無線基地局装置から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断するためのハンドオーバ動作判断部とを備える、無線基地局装置。
    In a communication system capable of communicating with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation, the radio terminal apparatus transmits / receives radio signals to / from the radio terminal apparatuses and operates according to a communication protocol having a plurality of layers Because
    A first measurement information acquisition unit for acquiring first measurement information based on a measurement result of a radio signal from a radio base station apparatus in a radio terminal apparatus according to a first layer of the plurality of layers;
    2nd for acquiring the 2nd measurement information based on the measurement result of the radio signal from the radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal unit according to the 2nd layer lower than the 1st layer among the plurality of layers A measurement information acquisition unit;
    Based on the second measurement information acquired by the second measurement information acquisition unit, a determination is made as to whether or not to perform a handover operation from the radio base station apparatus to another radio base station apparatus by the radio terminal apparatus A radio base station apparatus comprising: a handover operation determination unit for performing the operation.
  14.  前記第1のレイヤは、3GPP(Third Generation Partnership Project)で規定されたRRC(Radio Resource Control)レイヤであり、
     前記第2のレイヤは、3GPPで規定されたMAC(Media Access Control)レイヤおよびPHY(Physical)レイヤの少なくとも一方である、請求の範囲第13項に記載の無線基地局装置。
    The first layer is an RRC (Radio Resource Control) layer defined by 3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project),
    The radio base station apparatus according to claim 13, wherein the second layer is at least one of a MAC (Media Access Control) layer and a PHY (Physical) layer defined by 3GPP.
  15.  前記無線基地局装置は、さらに、
     自己の無線基地局装置から他の無線基地局装置への無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行なう要求を前記他の無線基地局装置に対して行なうためのハンドオーバ要求部と、
     前記要求に対する前記他の無線基地局装置からの応答を受けて、前記無線端末装置に対して自己の無線基地局装置から前記他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を行なう指示を与えるためのハンドオーバ指示部とを備え、
     前記ハンドオーバ指示部は、前記応答を受けて、自己の無線基地局装置および前記無線端末装置間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされていない場合には、前記無線端末装置に対する前記指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する、請求の範囲第1項から第14項のいずれか1項に記載の無線基地局装置。
    The radio base station device further includes:
    A handover request unit for making a request to perform a handover operation of a radio terminal device from its own radio base station device to another radio base station device, to the other radio base station device;
    In response to a response from the other radio base station apparatus to the request, a handover for giving an instruction to perform a handover operation from the radio base station apparatus to the other radio base station apparatus to the radio terminal apparatus An instruction unit,
    In response to the response, the handover instruction unit gives the instruction to the radio terminal device when a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality between the own radio base station device and the radio terminal device is not satisfied. The radio base station apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 14, wherein the radio base station apparatus cancels or puts on hold.
  16.  前記ハンドオーバ要求部は、前記要求を複数の前記他の無線基地局装置に対して行う、請求の範囲第15項に記載の無線基地局装置。 The radio base station apparatus according to claim 15, wherein the handover request unit makes the request to the plurality of other radio base station apparatuses.
  17.  前記ハンドオーバ指示部は、前記応答を受信して、前記応答に対応する前記他の無線基地局装置の中からハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択し、前記無線端末装置に対して前記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置への前記ハンドオーバ動作を行う指示を与える、請求の範囲第16項に記載の無線基地局装置。 The handover instruction unit receives the response, selects a handover destination radio base station device from the other radio base station devices corresponding to the response, and transmits the handover destination to the radio terminal device. The radio base station apparatus according to claim 16, which gives an instruction to perform a handover operation to the radio base station apparatus.
  18.  前記無線基地局装置は、さらに、
     前記無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、前記無線端末装置における自己の無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得するための受信品質情報取得部を備え、
     前記ハンドオーバ要求部は、前記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された前記受信品質情報から前記受信品質の劣化が検知された場合に、前記要求を複数の前記他の無線基地局装置に対して行うか否かを判断する、請求の範囲第16項または第17項に記載の無線基地局装置。
    The radio base station device further includes:
    Receiving a radio signal from its own radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus, updated at a shorter cycle than the received power information indicating the measurement result of the radio signal received power from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus A reception quality information acquisition unit for acquiring reception quality information indicating quality;
    Whether the handover request unit makes the request to a plurality of other radio base station devices when the reception quality deterioration is detected from the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit. The radio base station apparatus according to claim 16 or 17, which determines whether or not.
  19.  前記無線基地局装置は、さらに、
     前記無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、前記無線端末装置における自己の無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得するための受信品質情報取得部を備え、
     前記ハンドオーバ指示部は、前記応答を受信した後、前記受信品質情報取得部によって取得された前記受信品質情報から前記受信品質の劣化が検知された場合に、前記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する、請求の範囲第17項に記載の無線基地局装置。
    The radio base station device further includes:
    Receiving a radio signal from its own radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus, updated at a shorter cycle than the received power information indicating the measurement result of the radio signal received power from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus A reception quality information acquisition unit for acquiring reception quality information indicating quality;
    After the response is received, the handover instruction unit selects the handover destination radio base station device when the reception quality degradation is detected from the reception quality information acquired by the reception quality information acquisition unit The radio base station apparatus according to claim 17.
  20.  前記無線基地局装置は、さらに、
     前記受信電力情報を取得するための受信電力情報取得部を備え、
     前記ハンドオーバ指示部は、前記受信品質情報取得部によって前記受信品質情報が取得されるよりも前に前記受信電力情報取得部によって取得された前記受信電力情報のうち最新の受信電力情報に示される前記測定結果に基づいて前記ハンドオーバ先の無線基地局装置を選択する、請求の範囲第19項に記載の無線基地局装置。
    The radio base station device further includes:
    A reception power information acquisition unit for acquiring the reception power information;
    The handover instruction unit is indicated by the latest received power information among the received power information acquired by the received power information acquiring unit before the received quality information is acquired by the received quality information acquiring unit. 20. The radio base station apparatus according to claim 19, wherein the handover destination radio base station apparatus is selected based on a measurement result.
  21.  無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、
     1または複数の前記無線基地局装置を管理するための複数の通信制御装置とを備える通信システムであって、
     前記無線基地局装置は、自己から他の無線基地局装置への前記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を対応の通信制御装置へ送信し、
     前記対応の通信制御装置は、前記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の前記他の無線基地局装置が自己の管理対象でない場合には、前記他の無線基地局装置を管理する他の通信制御装置へ前記ハンドオーバ要求を送信し、
     前記他の通信制御装置は、受信した前記ハンドオーバ要求を前記他の無線基地局装置へ送信し、前記他の無線基地局装置から前記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると前記対応の通信制御装置へ前記応答を送信し、
     前記対応の通信制御装置は、前記他の通信制御装置から前記応答を受信して、前記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の前記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信し、
     前記無線基地局装置は、前記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、前記無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、前記無線端末装置における自己からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得し、取得した前記受信品質情報に基づいて、前記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、前記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、前記無線端末装置に対する前記ハンドオーバ動作を行なう指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する、通信システム。
    A plurality of wireless base station devices for transmitting and receiving wireless signals to and from wireless terminal devices;
    A communication system comprising a plurality of communication control devices for managing one or a plurality of the radio base station devices,
    The radio base station apparatus transmits a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus from itself to another radio base station apparatus to a corresponding communication control apparatus,
    The corresponding communication control device, when the other radio base station device to be handed over indicated by the handover request is not a management target of itself, to the other communication control device that manages the other radio base station device Send a handover request,
    The other communication control apparatus transmits the received handover request to the other radio base station apparatus, and receives a response to the handover request from the other radio base station apparatus, the response to the corresponding communication control apparatus Send
    The corresponding communication control apparatus receives the response from the other communication control apparatus, and transmits a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus that is the transmission source of the handover request,
    The radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction, and is updated at a cycle shorter than reception power information indicating a measurement result of radio signal reception power from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus, Whether reception quality information indicating the reception quality of the radio signal from itself in the terminal device is acquired, and whether a predetermined execution condition regarding communication quality with the wireless terminal device is satisfied based on the acquired reception quality information A communication system that determines whether or not to stop giving an instruction to perform the handover operation to the wireless terminal device when the execution condition is not satisfied.
  22.  無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、
     1または複数の前記無線基地局装置を管理するための通信制御装置と、
     1または複数の前記無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続され、前記無線基地局装置経由で前記無線端末装置から受信した通信データを前記上位ネットワークへ送信するとともに、前記上位ネットワークから受信した通信データを前記無線基地局装置経由で前記無線端末装置へ送信するための複数のゲートウェイ装置とを備える通信システムであって、
     前記無線基地局装置は、自己から他の無線基地局装置への前記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を前記通信制御装置へ送信し、
     前記通信制御装置は、前記無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、前記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の前記他の無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なる場合には、通信経路作成要求を前記他の無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されている前記ゲートウェイ装置へ送信し、
     前記ゲートウェイ装置は、前記通信経路作成要求を受信すると、前記上位ネットワークから送信される前記無線端末装置宛の通信データおよび前記無線端末装置から送信される前記上位ネットワークへの通信データを中継可能とする通信経路を作成し、前記通信経路作成要求に対する通信経路作成応答を前記通信制御装置へ送信し、
     前記通信制御装置は、前記通信経路作成応答を受信すると、前記他の無線基地局装置へ前記ハンドオーバ要求を送信し、前記他の無線基地局装置から前記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると、前記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の前記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信し、
     前記無線基地局装置は、前記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、前記無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、前記無線端末装置における自己からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得し、取得した前記受信品質情報に基づいて、前記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、前記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、前記無線端末装置に対する前記ハンドオーバ動作を行なう指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留する、通信システム。
    A plurality of wireless base station devices for transmitting and receiving wireless signals to and from wireless terminal devices;
    A communication control device for managing one or a plurality of the radio base station devices;
    Connected between one or a plurality of the radio base station apparatuses and the upper network, and transmits communication data received from the radio terminal apparatus via the radio base station apparatus to the upper network and received from the upper network A communication system comprising a plurality of gateway devices for transmitting communication data to the wireless terminal device via the wireless base station device,
    The radio base station apparatus transmits a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus from itself to another radio base station apparatus to the communication control apparatus,
    The communication control apparatus includes a gateway apparatus connected between the radio base station apparatus and the upper network, and the other radio base station apparatus at the handover destination indicated by the handover request and the upper network. When the connected gateway device is different, a communication path creation request is transmitted to the gateway device connected between the other radio base station device and the upper network,
    When the gateway device receives the communication path creation request, the gateway device can relay the communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device transmitted from the upper network and the communication data transmitted from the wireless terminal device to the upper network. Create a communication path, send a communication path creation response to the communication path creation request to the communication control device,
    When the communication control apparatus receives the communication path creation response, the communication control apparatus transmits the handover request to the other radio base station apparatus, and receives the response to the handover request from the other radio base station apparatus, the handover request A handover instruction to the wireless base station device of the transmission source of
    The radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction and is updated at a cycle shorter than reception power information indicating a measurement result of radio signal reception power from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus, Whether reception quality information indicating reception quality of a radio signal from itself in the terminal device is acquired, and whether a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality with the wireless terminal device is satisfied based on the acquired reception quality information A communication system that determines whether or not to stop giving an instruction to perform the handover operation to the wireless terminal device if the execution condition is not satisfied.
  23.  無線端末装置がハンドオーバ動作を行なうことにより複数の無線基地局装置と通信可能な通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための無線基地局装置における通信制御方法であって、
     無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報を取得するステップと、
     前記受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、前記無線端末装置における自己の無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得するステップと、
     取得した前記受信品質情報に基づいて、前記無線端末装置による自己の無線基地局装置から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断するステップとを含む、通信制御方法。
    A communication control method in a radio base station apparatus for transmitting and receiving radio signals to and from a radio terminal apparatus in a communication system capable of communicating with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation of the radio terminal apparatus,
    Obtaining reception power information indicating a measurement result of reception power of a radio signal from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus;
    Updating reception quality information indicating a reception quality of a radio signal from its own radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus, updated at a cycle shorter than the reception power information;
    Determining whether or not to perform a handover operation from the radio base station apparatus to another radio base station apparatus by the radio terminal apparatus based on the acquired reception quality information.
  24.  無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、
     1または複数の前記無線基地局装置を管理するための複数の通信制御装置とを備える通信システムにおける通信制御方法であって、
     前記無線基地局装置が、自己から他の無線基地局装置への前記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を対応の前記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、
     前記対応の通信制御装置が、前記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の前記他の無線基地局装置が自己の管理対象でない場合には、前記他の無線基地局装置を管理する他の通信制御装置へ前記ハンドオーバ要求を送信するステップと、
     前記他の通信制御装置が、受信した前記ハンドオーバ要求を前記他の無線基地局装置へ送信し、前記他の無線基地局装置から前記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると前記対応の通信制御装置へ前記応答を送信するステップと、
     前記対応の通信制御装置が、前記他の通信制御装置から前記応答を受信して、前記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の前記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信するステップと、
     前記無線基地局装置が、前記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、前記無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、前記無線端末装置における自己からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得するステップと、
     取得した前記受信品質情報に基づいて、前記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、前記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、前記無線端末装置に対する前記ハンドオーバ動作を行なうための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留するステップとを含む、通信制御方法。
    A plurality of wireless base station devices for transmitting and receiving wireless signals to and from wireless terminal devices;
    A communication control method in a communication system comprising a plurality of communication control devices for managing one or a plurality of the radio base station devices,
    The radio base station device transmitting a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from itself to another radio base station device to the corresponding communication control device;
    When the other radio base station apparatus that is the handover destination indicated by the handover request is not a management target of the corresponding communication control apparatus, the corresponding communication control apparatus is directed to another communication control apparatus that manages the other radio base station apparatus. Sending a handover request;
    When the other communication control apparatus transmits the received handover request to the other radio base station apparatus and receives a response to the handover request from the other radio base station apparatus, the response is sent to the corresponding communication control apparatus. A step of sending
    The corresponding communication control apparatus receiving the response from the other communication control apparatus and transmitting a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus that is the transmission source of the handover request;
    The radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction and is updated at a shorter cycle than reception power information indicating a measurement result of radio signal reception power from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus, Obtaining reception quality information indicating reception quality of a radio signal from itself in the terminal device;
    Based on the acquired reception quality information, it is determined whether or not a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality with the wireless terminal device is satisfied, and if the execution condition is not satisfied, the wireless A communication control method comprising: canceling or holding an instruction to perform the handover operation on the terminal device.
  25.  無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、
     1または複数の前記無線基地局装置を管理するための通信制御装置と、
     1または複数の前記無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続され、前記無線基地局装置経由で前記無線端末装置から受信した通信データを前記上位ネットワークへ送信するとともに、前記上位ネットワークから受信した通信データを前記無線基地局装置経由で前記無線端末装置へ送信するための複数のゲートウェイ装置とを備える通信システムにおける通信制御方法であって、
     前記無線基地局装置が、自己から他の無線基地局装置への前記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を前記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、
     前記通信制御装置が、前記無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、前記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の前記他の無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なる場合には、通信経路作成要求を前記他の無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されている前記ゲートウェイ装置へ送信するステップと、
     前記ゲートウェイ装置が、前記通信経路作成要求を受信すると、前記上位ネットワークから送信される前記無線端末装置宛の通信データおよび前記無線端末装置から送信される前記上位ネットワークへの通信データを中継可能とする通信経路を作成し、前記通信経路作成要求に対する通信経路作成応答を前記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、
     前記通信制御装置が、前記通信経路作成応答を受信すると、前記他の無線基地局装置へ前記ハンドオーバ要求を送信し、前記他の無線基地局装置から前記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると、前記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の前記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信するステップと、
     前記無線基地局装置が、前記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、前記無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、前記無線端末装置における自己からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得するステップと、
     取得した前記受信品質情報に基づいて、前記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、前記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、前記無線端末装置に対する前記ハンドオーバ動作を行なうための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留するステップとを含む、通信制御方法。
    A plurality of wireless base station devices for transmitting and receiving wireless signals to and from wireless terminal devices;
    A communication control device for managing one or a plurality of the radio base station devices;
    Connected between one or a plurality of the radio base station apparatuses and the upper network, and transmits communication data received from the radio terminal apparatus via the radio base station apparatus to the upper network and received from the upper network A communication control method in a communication system comprising a plurality of gateway devices for transmitting communication data to the wireless terminal device via the wireless base station device,
    The radio base station device transmitting a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from itself to another radio base station device to the communication control device;
    The communication control device is connected between the gateway device connected between the radio base station device and the upper network, and the other radio base station device of the handover destination indicated by the handover request and the upper network. If the connected gateway device is different, transmitting a communication path creation request to the gateway device connected between the other radio base station device and the upper network;
    When the gateway device receives the communication path creation request, the gateway device can relay the communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device transmitted from the upper network and the communication data transmitted from the wireless terminal device to the upper network. Creating a communication path and transmitting a communication path creation response to the communication path creation request to the communication control device;
    When the communication control device receives the communication path creation response, transmits the handover request to the other radio base station device, and receives the response to the handover request from the other radio base station device, the handover request Transmitting a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus of the transmission source of
    The radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction and is updated at a shorter cycle than reception power information indicating a measurement result of radio signal reception power from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus, Obtaining reception quality information indicating reception quality of a radio signal from itself in the terminal device;
    Based on the acquired reception quality information, it is determined whether or not a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality with the wireless terminal device is satisfied, and if the execution condition is not satisfied, the wireless A communication control method comprising: canceling or holding an instruction to perform the handover operation on the terminal device.
  26.  無線端末装置がハンドオーバ動作を行なうことにより複数の無線基地局装置と通信可能な通信システムにおいて、無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための無線基地局装置において用いられる通信制御プログラムであって、コンピュータに、
     無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報を取得するステップと、
     前記受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、前記無線端末装置における自己の無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得するステップと、
     取得した前記受信品質情報に基づいて、前記無線端末装置による自己の無線基地局装置から他の無線基地局装置へのハンドオーバ動作を実行するか否かを判断するステップとを実行させるための、通信制御プログラム。
    A communication control program used in a radio base station apparatus for transmitting / receiving a radio signal to / from a radio terminal apparatus in a communication system in which the radio terminal apparatus performs communication with a plurality of radio base station apparatuses by performing a handover operation. To the computer
    Obtaining reception power information indicating a measurement result of reception power of a radio signal from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus;
    Updating reception quality information indicating a reception quality of a radio signal from its own radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus, updated at a cycle shorter than the reception power information;
    Communication for causing the wireless terminal device to determine whether or not to perform a handover operation from its own wireless base station device to another wireless base station device based on the acquired reception quality information Control program.
  27.  無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、
     1または複数の前記無線基地局装置を管理するための複数の通信制御装置とを備える通信システムにおいて用いられる通信制御プログラムであって、
     コンピュータに、
     前記無線基地局装置が、自己から他の無線基地局装置への前記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を対応の前記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、
     前記対応の通信制御装置が、前記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の前記他の無線基地局装置が自己の管理対象でない場合には、前記他の無線基地局装置を管理する他の通信制御装置へ前記ハンドオーバ要求を送信するステップと、
     前記他の通信制御装置が、受信した前記ハンドオーバ要求を前記他の無線基地局装置へ送信し、前記他の無線基地局装置から前記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると前記対応の通信制御装置へ前記応答を送信するステップと、
     前記対応の通信制御装置が、前記他の通信制御装置から前記応答を受信して、前記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の前記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信するステップと、
     前記無線基地局装置が、前記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、前記無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、前記無線端末装置における自己からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得するステップと、
     取得した前記受信品質情報に基づいて、前記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、前記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、前記無線端末装置に対する前記ハンドオーバ動作を行なうための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留するステップとを実行させるための、通信制御プログラム。
    A plurality of wireless base station devices for transmitting and receiving wireless signals to and from wireless terminal devices;
    A communication control program used in a communication system including a plurality of communication control devices for managing one or a plurality of the radio base station devices,
    On the computer,
    The radio base station device transmitting a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from itself to another radio base station device to the corresponding communication control device;
    When the other radio base station apparatus that is the handover destination indicated by the handover request is not a management target of the corresponding communication control apparatus, the corresponding communication control apparatus is directed to another communication control apparatus that manages the other radio base station apparatus. Sending a handover request;
    When the other communication control apparatus transmits the received handover request to the other radio base station apparatus and receives a response to the handover request from the other radio base station apparatus, the response is sent to the corresponding communication control apparatus. A step of sending
    The corresponding communication control apparatus receiving the response from the other communication control apparatus and transmitting a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus that is the transmission source of the handover request;
    The radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction and is updated at a shorter cycle than reception power information indicating a measurement result of radio signal reception power from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus, Obtaining reception quality information indicating reception quality of a radio signal from itself in the terminal device;
    Based on the acquired reception quality information, it is determined whether or not a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality with the wireless terminal device is satisfied, and if the execution condition is not satisfied, the wireless A communication control program for executing a step of canceling or holding an instruction to perform a handover operation on a terminal device.
  28.  無線端末装置との間で無線信号を送受信するための複数の無線基地局装置と、
     1または複数の前記無線基地局装置を管理するための通信制御装置と、
     1または複数の前記無線基地局装置と上位ネットワークとの間に接続され、前記無線基地局装置経由で前記無線端末装置から受信した通信データを前記上位ネットワークへ送信するとともに、前記上位ネットワークから受信した通信データを前記無線基地局装置経由で前記無線端末装置へ送信するための複数のゲートウェイ装置とを備える通信システムにおいて用いられる通信制御プログラムであって、
     コンピュータに、
     前記無線基地局装置が、自己から他の無線基地局装置への前記無線端末装置のハンドオーバ動作を行うハンドオーバ要求を前記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、
     前記通信制御装置が、前記無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置と、前記ハンドオーバ要求の示すハンドオーバ先の前記他の無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されているゲートウェイ装置とが異なる場合には、通信経路作成要求を前記他の無線基地局装置と前記上位ネットワークとの間に接続されている前記ゲートウェイ装置へ送信するステップと、
     前記ゲートウェイ装置が、前記通信経路作成要求を受信すると、前記上位ネットワークから送信される前記無線端末装置宛の通信データおよび前記無線端末装置から送信される前記上位ネットワークへの通信データを中継可能とする通信経路を作成し、前記通信経路作成要求に対する通信経路作成応答を前記通信制御装置へ送信するステップと、
     前記通信制御装置が、前記通信経路作成応答を受信すると、前記他の無線基地局装置へ前記ハンドオーバ要求を送信し、前記他の無線基地局装置から前記ハンドオーバ要求に対する応答を受信すると、前記ハンドオーバ要求の送信元の前記無線基地局装置へハンドオーバ指示を送信するステップと、
     前記無線基地局装置が、前記ハンドオーバ指示を受信して、前記無線端末装置における各無線基地局装置からの無線信号の受信電力の測定結果を示す受信電力情報よりも短い周期で更新され、前記無線端末装置における自己からの無線信号の受信品質を示す受信品質情報を取得するステップと、
     取得した前記受信品質情報に基づいて、前記無線端末装置との間の通信品質に関する所定の実行条件が満たされているか否かを判断し、前記実行条件が満たされていない場合には、前記無線端末装置に対する前記ハンドオーバ動作を行なうための指示の付与を中止するかまたは保留するステップとを実行させるための、通信制御プログラム。
    A plurality of wireless base station devices for transmitting and receiving wireless signals to and from wireless terminal devices;
    A communication control device for managing one or a plurality of the radio base station devices;
    Connected between one or a plurality of the radio base station apparatuses and the upper network, and transmits communication data received from the radio terminal apparatus via the radio base station apparatus to the upper network and received from the upper network A communication control program used in a communication system including a plurality of gateway devices for transmitting communication data to the wireless terminal device via the wireless base station device,
    On the computer,
    The radio base station device transmitting a handover request for performing a handover operation of the radio terminal device from itself to another radio base station device to the communication control device;
    The communication control device is connected between the gateway device connected between the radio base station device and the upper network, and the other radio base station device of the handover destination indicated by the handover request and the upper network. If the connected gateway device is different, transmitting a communication path creation request to the gateway device connected between the other radio base station device and the upper network;
    When the gateway device receives the communication path creation request, the gateway device can relay the communication data addressed to the wireless terminal device transmitted from the upper network and the communication data transmitted from the wireless terminal device to the upper network. Creating a communication path and transmitting a communication path creation response to the communication path creation request to the communication control device;
    When the communication control device receives the communication path creation response, transmits the handover request to the other radio base station device, and receives the response to the handover request from the other radio base station device, the handover request Transmitting a handover instruction to the radio base station apparatus of the transmission source of
    The radio base station apparatus receives the handover instruction and is updated at a shorter cycle than reception power information indicating a measurement result of radio signal reception power from each radio base station apparatus in the radio terminal apparatus, Obtaining reception quality information indicating reception quality of a radio signal from itself in the terminal device;
    Based on the acquired reception quality information, it is determined whether or not a predetermined execution condition relating to communication quality with the wireless terminal device is satisfied, and if the execution condition is not satisfied, the wireless A communication control program for executing a step of canceling or holding an instruction to perform a handover operation on a terminal device.
PCT/JP2012/071715 2011-11-22 2012-08-28 Wireless base station, communication system, communication control method and communication control program WO2013077051A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (10)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2011-255530 2011-11-22
JP2011255531 2011-11-22
JP2011255530 2011-11-22
JP2011-255531 2011-11-22
JP2012000609 2012-01-05
JP2012-000609 2012-01-05
JP2012-092629 2012-04-16
JP2012092630A JP5263563B2 (en) 2011-11-22 2012-04-16 Radio base station apparatus, radio terminal apparatus, communication system, communication control method, and communication control program
JP2012092629A JP6111529B2 (en) 2011-11-22 2012-04-16 Radio base station apparatus, communication system, communication control method, and communication control program
JP2012-092630 2012-04-16

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2013077051A1 true WO2013077051A1 (en) 2013-05-30

Family

ID=48469511

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2012/071715 WO2013077051A1 (en) 2011-11-22 2012-08-28 Wireless base station, communication system, communication control method and communication control program
PCT/JP2012/071716 WO2013077052A1 (en) 2011-11-22 2012-08-28 Wireless base station, wireless terminal, communication system, communication control method and communication control program

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2012/071716 WO2013077052A1 (en) 2011-11-22 2012-08-28 Wireless base station, wireless terminal, communication system, communication control method and communication control program

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (2) WO2013077051A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2017532826A (en) * 2014-10-03 2017-11-02 インテル アイピー コーポレーション Establish packet data network connection during handover
CN107710806A (en) * 2015-07-10 2018-02-16 夏普株式会社 Terminal installation, the integrated circuit and communication means for being equipped on terminal installation
CN112566191A (en) * 2019-09-26 2021-03-26 中国移动通信集团安徽有限公司 Cell switching method, device, equipment and computer storage medium

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007116282A (en) * 2005-10-18 2007-05-10 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Portable terminal and communication method
JP2007221276A (en) * 2006-02-14 2007-08-30 Ntt Docomo Inc Mobile station, radio access network apparatus, and mobility control method
JP2008131587A (en) * 2006-11-24 2008-06-05 Ntt Docomo Inc Radio communication terminal and radio communication method
JP2009033444A (en) * 2007-07-26 2009-02-12 Toshiba Corp Mobile radio terminal

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP4057728B2 (en) * 1998-12-28 2008-03-05 株式会社日立コミュニケーションテクノロジー Base station controller, mobile communication system, and handoff method
JP4180236B2 (en) * 1999-12-28 2008-11-12 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ Handover control method and system
KR20060012099A (en) * 2004-08-02 2006-02-07 엘지전자 주식회사 Method of executing handover in a broadband wireless access system
JP2011004292A (en) * 2009-06-19 2011-01-06 Ntt Docomo Inc Radio communication system, radio control device, and handover control method

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007116282A (en) * 2005-10-18 2007-05-10 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Portable terminal and communication method
JP2007221276A (en) * 2006-02-14 2007-08-30 Ntt Docomo Inc Mobile station, radio access network apparatus, and mobility control method
JP2008131587A (en) * 2006-11-24 2008-06-05 Ntt Docomo Inc Radio communication terminal and radio communication method
JP2009033444A (en) * 2007-07-26 2009-02-12 Toshiba Corp Mobile radio terminal

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES: "Proposal for supporting Real Time services over HSDPA", 3GPP TSG-RAN1 MEETING #40BIS R1-050324, 4 April 2005 (2005-04-04) - 8 April 2005 (2005-04-08), BEIJING, CHINA, pages 3, XP050099974 *
MOTOROLA: "RSRP Measurement Accuracy", 3GPP TSG RAN4 #42BIS R4-070394, 2 April 2007 (2007-04-02) - 4 April 2007 (2007-04-04), SOPHIA ANTIPOLIS, FRANCE, XP050176886 *

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2017532826A (en) * 2014-10-03 2017-11-02 インテル アイピー コーポレーション Establish packet data network connection during handover
CN107710806A (en) * 2015-07-10 2018-02-16 夏普株式会社 Terminal installation, the integrated circuit and communication means for being equipped on terminal installation
EP3322215A4 (en) * 2015-07-10 2019-02-13 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Terminal device, integrated circuit mounted on terminal device, and communication method
CN112566191A (en) * 2019-09-26 2021-03-26 中国移动通信集团安徽有限公司 Cell switching method, device, equipment and computer storage medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2013077052A1 (en) 2013-05-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
Tayyab et al. A survey on handover management: From LTE to NR
Goyal et al. Handover optimization scheme for LTE-Advance networks based on AHP-TOPSIS and Q-learning
US9980188B2 (en) User mobility control for heterogeneous wireless networks
JP5757203B2 (en) Radio base station apparatus, communication control method, and communication control program
EP3520495B1 (en) Cellular telecommunications network
US20140064247A1 (en) Cell Size and Shape Estimation in Heterogeneous Networks
JP5922145B2 (en) Communication system, radio communication node, and communication control method
CN103891356A (en) Adapting a triggering threshold for cell re-selection measurements
EP3404961A1 (en) Method and device for handover of wireless communications in heterogeneous networks
JP6111529B2 (en) Radio base station apparatus, communication system, communication control method, and communication control program
WO2013077051A1 (en) Wireless base station, communication system, communication control method and communication control program
US9031560B2 (en) Condition reporting to enable possible reduction in radio network inefficiencies
JP2013110728A (en) Radio communication system, radio base station device, communication control method and communication control program
JP2013121087A (en) Radio base station device, radio terminal device, communication control method, and communication control program
JP5263563B2 (en) Radio base station apparatus, radio terminal apparatus, communication system, communication control method, and communication control program
WO2013084704A1 (en) Wireless base-station device, wireless terminal device, method for controlling communication, and communication-control program
JP2013201586A (en) Radio terminal device, radio base station devices, communication control device, management device, communication control method, and communication control program
WO2013141344A1 (en) Wireless terminal device, wireless base station device, communication control device, management device, communication control method, and communication control program
JP5842570B2 (en) Radio base station apparatus, communication control method, and communication control program
JP2013110727A (en) Radio communication system, radio terminal device, communication control method and communication control program
WO2023040719A1 (en) Cell reselection method and apparatus
KR20100137187A (en) Method for controlling handover in mobile internet system
KR20130027085A (en) Method and system for femtocell networking
JP2013187747A (en) Radio base station device, communication control method, and communication control program
JP2013201585A (en) Radio terminal device, radio base station devices, communication control device, management device, communication control method, and communication control program

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 12852390

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 12852390

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1